Actions

Work Header

Rating:
Archive Warning:
Fandom:
Relationship:
Characters:
Additional Tags:
Language:
English
Collections:
Dkn, Fics que me interesaron
Stats:
Published:
2022-05-23
Updated:
2024-08-26
Words:
113,513
Chapters:
87/?
Comments:
298
Kudos:
1,525
Bookmarks:
371
Hits:
61,241

What You Can’t See Coming

Summary:

Midoriya is 'diagnosed' as quirkless at four (and isn't it cruel that it's treated as a disease). From there, his life falls apart. His parents become abusive alcoholics and school isn't much better. He knows he's not the only person being abused and mistreated (an understatement) for their quirk or quirk status, he mingles with them daily. So he develops a plan. A plan to take over Japan and make it better. But to make sure it's executed perfectly he'll need some help and he'll need to leave. So he does. And wouldn't you know, along the way he finds just the help he needs.

Notes:

(See the end of the work for notes.)

Chapter 1: A Quirkless Disappointment, It Would Seem

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Midoriya Izuku was four the first time his mother hit him. They were in the car on the way home from his doctor's appointment. The doctor had found an extra toe joint and told them this meant he was quirkless. He didn’t understand why this was such a big deal, nor why the doctor had said it meant he couldn’t be a hero. All it meant was he couldn’t levitate things or breathe fire or do something that those two things could combine to be. 

 

He could still learn to fight, could still analyze, could still save people. He had tried to explain this to his mom as they left the doctor’s office but she had yelled at him to “Shut up!” with a tone of voice he had never heard and an expression he had never seen. He had slammed his mouth shut, his teeth crashed into each other painfully but he didn’t do anything about it, only stared ahead as they walked to their parking space.

 

As they drove home he tried to breach the topic again, this time a little more tentatively. His mother had pulled over to the side of the road and turned to him in her seat. For a split second, he thought she was going to agree with him but instead she had raised her hand and struck him across the face. He stayed frozen, his head turned to the side, for as long as it took for his mother to get back on the road. 

 

He had raised his left hand to touch the place where he had been struck hesitantly. It stung and made his eyes water to the point his eyes watered but he didn’t dare make any noise. He may have only been four (five in just over a month) but he could piece together what had gone wrong. His mother had only started acting all angry when the doctor had said he was quirkless and he had made it worse by talking about being a hero afterwards, and made it even worse when he tried to bring up the topic again.

 

For some reason, his mom thought being quirkless was wrong and had hurt him over it. He just had to hope his dad wasn’t the same.

 

Midoriya Izuku was four the first time his father used his quirk on him. When his mom had pulled the car into the parking lot of their apartment complex she had climbed out and slammed her door behind her before coming over to Izuku’s side. She had torn his door open and unbuckled his car seat before grabbing him ruffly by the arm. Izuku had opened his mouth to tell her she was hurting him but shut it a moment later. She had hit him when he talked earlier and he didn’t want to anger her any further.

 

When they got to their apartment she threw the door open and stormed in, dragging Izuku behind her. When the door slammed behind them she threw Izuku in front of her. He stumbled and almost fell but managed to right himself before he hit the floor. His dad opened his mouth, presumably to ask what was wrong, but before he could Inko interrupted him,

 

“It’s quirkless.”

 

Immediately the man’s expression darkened and his worried expression fell, replaced by anger. He grabbed Izuku by the arm, his grip tighter than Inko’s had been as he dragged the boy deeper into the living room. 

 

“We spend all that time and money on it only for it to be quirkless?!”

 

He threw Izuku forward, this time Izuku couldn’t catch himself and he fell into the glass table in the center of the room. He crashed into the glass and smashed it, falling with the shards to the floor. He gasped as his back, arms, and legs, were sliced open in what felt like a thousand different places by the small shards. He could swear he felt some of the pieces burrowing themselves into his flesh.

 

His fall only served to anger his mother and father more. Hisashi stalked forward and Wrenched Izuku up by his elbow, causing the boy to scream out in pain.

 

“You useless piece of shit! Do you know how expensive that table was?!”

 

Smoke licked out of the man’s nose and small sparks flew from his mouth. Izuku had spent enough time around his father, enough time analyzing his quirk to realize what was about to happen. He squeezed his eyes shut and turned his head away slightly a moment before flames streamed from his father’s mouth and burned his skin. 

 

He only knows he screamed because his father had let go of his elbow, sending him sprawling to the floor, and started kicking him while yelling at him for doing so.

 

He had been locked in his room soon after, in pain and likely to bleed out. The only reason he didn’t is because he knew the bare bones of first aid and had cut strips from an old shirt to messily wrap around the bleeding wounds. The ones that didn’t have glass in them, at least. He knew that the glass couldn’t stay in his body, so with shaking hands, he removed each piece. 

 

Izuku was four the first time small explosions popped against his skin. He had to stay home for a few days so the wounds would heal enough that he could wear his uniform on top without the fabric being stained with blood. He knew neither of his parents were happy about that, they didn’t want him in their home. 

 

The night after he got home from his doctor's appointment he heard them fighting over whether or not they should get rid of him. It was clear they both wanted him gone but his mother, surprisingly, had brought up an irrefutable point as to why they should keep him. Everyone would know he was quirkless soon and though they could just leave him on the side of the road or at an orphanage people would talk. Some would say that they were happy the couple was finally free from Izuku but others, including Mitsuki and Masaru, would ridicule them for getting rid of their child.

 

The next morning the two did some redecorating. They barged into Izuku’s room and took all of his hero merchandise, shoving the figures and bedspread into boxes and rolling the posters back into their tubes. They sold all of it for quite a bit of money and they made it a point to tell Izuku that none of it would be used to care for him every chance they got. 

 

When Izuku finally returned to school he thought it would be his safe haven. He thought that the teachers might see how he was suffering and take him away from Inko and Hisashi. When he got there the small flame of hope he had been cultivating went out. When he tried to tell the teachers about what his parents had done they said,

 

“Your mom and dad are much too respectable to do that. And even if they had no one would blame them. You’re quirkless, you’re a waste of their time and mine. Now shoo.”

 

Izuku had tried to play with Bakugou but as soon as he got close the boy started yelling at him,

 

“You lied to me! We can’t be a hero duo ‘cause you’re quirkless but you always said you would get a quirk you liar!”

Izuku tried to explain that it wasn’t his fault he was born quirkless, that they could still be a hero duo, but Bakugou was having none of it.

 

“No! You lied to me so we can’t be friends anymore!”

 

Bakugou had then run at Izuku, small fireworks going off in his palms as he reached Izuku. When he grabbed Izuku’s arm he had to hold back his scream as sparks that had seemed so harmless before ignited his skin.

 

When Bakugou finally left Izuku alone to run off with some of their other classmates the boy crumpled to the ground, staring at the small handprint burn on his arm.

Notes:

Welcome to the first chapter! Thank you TheGreatGodPam for the title!
We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/vSbSakz5

Chapter 2: Survival Guides Are Vital

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Presently, Izuku is nine years old. By now, he’s learned how to survive in the Midoriya house with minimal injury. His survival plan is as close to fool-proof as it can be with the few off days where one or both of his parents will get too angry or drunk and decide they're going to bypass their own rules to hurt him.

 

He has the entire survival guide written up in one of his notebooks. The book is filled with different notes and handwriting as he had started writing it when he was five. He’s had a solid plan laid out in the pages for three (close to four) years now. The finished guide/rule list is as follows:

 

 

  • Keep anything and everything important (school work, analysis journals, and money) under the loose floorboards under the bed.

 

 

 

  • Be conscious of everything. Always listen, always watch.

 

 

 

  • Never enter the master bedroom, even when they aren’t home. THEY. WILL. KNOW.

 

 

 

  • Spend as little time in the apartment as possible.

 

 

 

  • When entering or exiting the apartment use the bedroom window. The tree in front of it is perfect for climbing up and down.

 

 

 

  • Guard the Internet Cafe with your life. They can’t know you use it.

 

 

 

  • Phone, laptop, and backpack stay with you at all times. You can’t afford to leave them alone

 

 

 

  • Take food and water sparingly, build up a hoard both in your bag and in the loose floorboards. 

 

 

 

  • Dumpster dive as much as possible. And help those you find who need it, Having connections in the homeless and villain communities will help you.

 

 

 

  • Medical textbooks and websites are your best friends. You can’t go to a hospital for medical help (for multiple reasons) so you need to know how to do it yourself. Keep medical supplies in your bag at all times. (Volunteer at underground medical clinics as much as possible. This will both help you practice and gain you more popularity and connections)

 

 

 

  • Avoid Inko and Hisashi at any cost, especially on bad days/nights (you can tell if it’s a bad day/night if the smell of alcohol is stronger, if they are fighting loud enough for the neighbours to hear, and if they are yelling about you)

 



He also had a survival guide/list for school, though it was a little less fool-proof than the other.

 

 

  • Arrive as late as possible without missing the final bell and keep an eye out for people trying to trip you.

 

 

 

  • Just like at the apartment you have to be conscious of everything.

 

 

 

  • Windows on the second and third floor in the east hall are good for escapes along with every window on the ground floor but all others will end in serious injury or death.

 

 

 

  • Bakugou is easily riled and gets sloppy when angry. You can’t fight back against him without getting in trouble but riling him up enough to make him sloppy can make for an easier escape.

 

 

 

  • Don’t show any reaction when failed work is handed back even if you know you should have passed. Especially don’t react to the laughter or the teachers mocking words. They only want a reaction so they can get you in trouble.

 

 

 

  • Never mumble. Ever. The habit has already been broken, this step is just a precaution.

 

 

 

  • Never talk about being a hero. In fact, it’s best if you just don’t talk at all. And never, EVER, make eye contact with anyone. 

 

 

 

  • The rooftop and janitorial closets are all good places to eat lunch but there is a chance you will get locked in. Carry bobby pins and paperclips always. Maybe get professional lock-picking gear if ever possible. 

 

 

 

  • Just don’t bring any lunch with you, it’s a waste of time. It will get knocked out of your hand and onto the ground. If Inko is trying to be a ‘good parent’ to try and abate the neighbours and hands you a bento, first check for contaminants. before giving it to someone who needs it.

 

 

 

  • Keep running until you can’t hear them. Even then, keep going for a while. Take to the rooftops if you have to but you can NEVER. FIGHT. BACK.

 

 

It was with these rules that he avoided most major injuries though that doesn’t mean he didn’t get hurt. At least once a week Bakugou would catch him and give him a few second or third-degree burns. Inko and Hisashi would still hit him and throw him around. Hisashi would use his quirk on him and, in a similar fashion to Bakugou, leave second or third-degree burns (though with Hisashi third-degree are much more common). Sometimes Inko or Hisashi would throw empty bottles of beer or wine at him. He had quite many, many , scars but he knew that without his guides he would likely be dead so for them he was grateful.

 

--------

 

His tenth birthday was in a week and though it was something he would normally dread, this year he couldn’t wait. Every year, on his birthday, his ‘parents’ would always drag him out of his room  (which he kept locked using multiple locks he had accumulated over the years but he didn’t want to risk Hisashi burning down his door). They would yell at him, tell him how lucky he was they had kept him. That they could have just left him on the side of the road or killed him and no one would mind or care. That it was their fault they couldn’t get pregnant again because the difficult pregnancy had ruined Inko’s chance of doing so.

 

They always called him out just after dinner so they could both rub in his face that they had eaten and he hadn’t (to their knowledge) but also so they could send him to bed right after.

 

Not this year, though. No. This year he would be gone before they even started cooking dinner and there would be nothing they could do about it. He had his bag packed already, everything he needed carefully packed away to make maximum use of space. He had packed all his money, both warm and cool clothes, all the notebooks he could fit (used and empty), his lockpicking supplies, water, food, almost all his medical supplies, and a knife.

 

Over the course of the four (almost five) years since he had been diagnosed quirkless he had been training. He was incredibly flexible and had amazing situational awareness skills thanks to yoga, meditation and the need to survive, he had learned a handful of different martial arts and mixed them into his own fighting style. He had been doing parkour since he was five. He had studied pressure points and knew exactly how to immobilize an opponent. On top of all that he had been volunteering at underground clinics for as long as he could remember on top of studying medical textbooks and websites.

 

He was more than ready to leave. Now all that was left was to wait.

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry! I went to the Mandarin on Saturday for one of my friend's birthdays. I ate an oyster for the first time and I didn't hate it but I didn't like it either. Sunday I went shopping with my mom and brother, so nothing too exciting. And today is my birthday! I am officially one year older!

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/86HVfk3Y

Chapter 3: Finally Free

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku returned from school battered and bruised. As soon as he had climbed through the bedroom window he checked that all the locks on his door were in place. He let out a sigh of relief. All the locks were properly in place and no more damaged than they had been when he left that morning.

 

He quickly moved around his room. He dug what wasn’t packed of his medical supplies from the closet, tending to his newly acquired injuries as fast as he dared, not wanting to make any mistakes. Once everything was bandaged and disinfected properly he took off his gakuran and put on the outfit he had laid out on his bed earlier. 

 

He shoved his head into a black hoodie and tugged on a pair of exercise shorts. He double-checked that his backpack was fully packed with everything he would need and shoved his arms into the straps. He was ready.

 

He jumped through his still-open window, grabbing hold of the tree branch closest to him before he could hit the ground. Using his momentum he swung himself back and forth. When he had reached the height he wanted he let go of the branch and fell to the next one. This one was closest enough to the next branch that he could just jump down to it. He continued this pattern, going as fast as he could until he reached the bottom.

 

The last branch had a seven-foot drop to the ground. He used to hesitate for a moment before taking the drop but he was more than used to it by now. Had fallen from greater heights before. He dropped to the ground without hesitation, crouching in a landing before righting himself. 

 

He looked around at the surrounding buildings. He was free. Actually, truly free. No one would look for him, at least not for long. His parents would only instigate a search if Mitsuki told them to but the police and surrounding neighbours would never help so it’s not like it would be an issue. He never had to return to that apartment. He never had to return to school. He’d never see Bakugou, Inko, or Hisashi again.

 

A smile split his face, going from ear to ear. He broke out in a run, not following any particular path. 


He was free. 

 

And he was going to make the most of it.

 

--------

 

The sun was beginning to set and Izuku had yet to find a place to sleep. He didn’t want to sleep in an alley that night, the newscaster he had seen on a TV in a store window said it was going to rain. He knew he’d be sleeping in the rain at some point but he wanted his first night to be special. He didn’t want to be drenched and miserable on a night that was supposed to be happy.

 

After a while of wandering, he came across an abandoned warehouse lot. There were rows and rows of buildings, each in different states of disrepair. The area was roped off with a sign saying the entire area had been condemned but the date it was supposed to be destroyed had long passed. The company that was supposed to do it had likely got caught up in repairing collateral from hero fights and had completely forgotten about the lot. 

 

Just in case they came back he chose a building at the back of the lot so he’d have time to run if they started tearing them down. The building he chose was in good condition, only two holes in the roof that could be easily patched and only small patches of mold that could be easily dealt with as soon as he obtained supplies. The ground floor was a large open space with shelves lining a few of the walls and lying on the ground. There were boxes left scattered on the floor and in place on the standing shelves. There were stairs at the back that lead to an open second floor. Izuku was able to look out at the entire ground floor from anywhere on the second.

 

There were a few doors lining the back wall of the second floor. Ten total. Five of them were extra storage, each of them filled with boxes strewn across the floor. Two of them were bathrooms. Izuku turned on the faucets to discover that there was running water but it was a pale brown. Every few seconds the water would become clear but it would quickly be taken over by the brown again. He’d have to buy (or steal) some filters. The largest of the ten rooms was a breakroom. Round tables crowded the room and a counter lined with buckets for food, like a school cafeteria, lined the left wall. The buckets were, thankfully, empty. The next room was a change room. Lockers lined the walls, benches in front of them. On the back wall was a line of hooks, bright neon vests still hanging from some of them. The last room held a large desk, an office chair tucked into it. Old documents were organized in file cabinets and stacked on the desk. 

 

Izuku raided the lockers, finding a hoodie that was six sizes too big and pulled it on. He laid down in the office, using his bag as a pillow. He had plans to visit a few of the people he knew so they could teach him more about living on the streets but for now, he slept, relishing in the fact that he wasn’t falling asleep to the sound of fighting.

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I went downtown with my mom yesterday and got some second-hand books. Three total, each of them published at some point in the 1900s. You know they were published in the 1900s 1. Because the inside of the books say "first published in paperback (some year starting with 19) and 2. The Can price is under $20.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/vSbSakz5

Chapter 4: Getting To Work & Powerful Knees

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

When Izuku woke up the next morning he dug around in his backpack for a protein bar and a bottle of water. He ate the entirety of the bar and drank a quarter of the water before putting it back in the bag. He took off the hoodie he had dawned the night before and folded it so it would fit in the bag while still leaving some space. He put the garbage from the protein bar into the smallest pocket of the bag and swung the straps over his shoulders. He ran down the stairs and out the door into the light of the slowly rising sun. He ran as fast as he could to the gates of the lot before slowing down and walking calmly out onto the street. 


He made sure that he was staying vigilant and looking out for possible assailants without looking suspicious as he made his way further into the Red Light district. After around thirty minutes of walking the sun was fully risen and shining down on him and he had reached his destination. It was a medium-sized building, the walls were covered in dirt and graffiti and the roof looked seconds away from collapsing. Izuku knew it wouldn’t, though. The roof’s appearance was the work of an illusion quirk. The roof was insanely dirty, yes, but it would never cave in. The look was meant to help ward off police officers and heroes. 

 

Why? Because it was an illegal underground hospital. The place ran on volunteers and all the equipment was either stolen, donated, or makeshift. They treated anyone, villains, the quirkless, the homeless, and those with quirks society considered ‘unsavoury’. Anyone and everyone was welcome. That’s part of the reason Izuku loved it. They didn’t discriminate and welcomed help from anyone. 

 

He walked through the door and to the back of the building. Different people dressed in scrubs, hairnets, masks, and gloves rushed around the building, some waving or greeting Izuku. The boy returned the greetings as he walked. When he made it to the back he opened a door off in the corner, slightly hidden by the wall and some shelves. Inside the walls were lined by rusted lockers and the back wall was lined with shelves containing scrubs, hairnets, masks, and gloves. He unlocked the locker with the number ‘218’ and placed his backpack inside. He went to the back wall and found some scrubs in his size before putting on a pair of gloves, a hairnet, and a mask. Once everything was on properly he left the room and went out into the main area. 

 

The room was large, with beds lining the right wall and laid out in a grid pattern in the middle. The left and back walls were lined with shelves and cupboards containing everything from bandaids to needles to bottles of different medications in both liquid and pill forms. Someone with a blood-stained white coat came over to Izuku,

 

“Aren’t you supposed to be in school?”

“No, Mrs. Iko. I left.”

 

The woman’s eyes widened slightly but she regained her composure quickly. 

 

“Left left?”

 

Izuku nodded, causing the woman to sigh.

 

“Good. If you need anything, shelter, food, or supplies of any kind all you have to do is ask. Okay?”

Izuku nodded,

 

“Thank you Mrs.Iko.”

 

“Of course kid. Now get to work.”

 

Izuku nodded and maneuvered around Mrs.Iko. He started making his way to the bed of a girl that looked to be around eight years old with a broken arm.

 

--------

 

By the time Izuku left the building the sun was high in the sky and it was nearing the time he would normally try to eat lunch. He says try because most of the time the kids at school would destroy any food he brought to school or take any money he had for the cafeteria. He found a relatively clean alley to sit down in and took out the water bottle and another protein bar. This time he only ate around half of the bar and left the bottle half full. He threw the garbage from the bar he had had for breakfast into one of the dumpsters in the alley and gathered up his things. 

 

He started walking to the edge of the Red Light district, making his way out so he could find a place where he could get some filters for the taps that he could take from building to building. Rule number one of living on the streets: never stay in one place for too long.

 

He was nearing the edge of the district when a burly man with spines lining his back and arms jumped out of an alley in front of him. He held up his left arm so the spines were an inch away from Izuku’s face,

 

“Give me that bag kid. If you don’t I’ll tear you to shreds!”

Izuku stared at the man for a moment. He could tell that the fact he wasn’t even cowering in fear was bothering the man.

 

“Did you hear what I said, kid?! I wouldn’t be angering me if I were you, just hand over the-” 

 

While the man had been distracted Izuku had brought up his leg and kneed him in the crotch with as much force as he could muster. The man screamed, clutching his crotch and falling to the ground on his knees. Izuku took the opportunity to run past the man and around a nearby corner. He could hear the man bellowing in rage but he knew it would be a minute before he would be followed. Just in case, he ran into a nearby alley. Lining the right wall of the alley was a fire escape. The metal was so rusted it didn’t much resemble metal anymore but Izuku didn’t really care. He was light on his feet as he ran up the stairs, not making any noise. He had learned long ago that noise was dangerous and he had long known how to make none as he ran.

 

When he got to the highest platform he looked up to see the ledge of the roof of the building the fire escape belonged to. He jumped up and grabbed onto the ledge, pulling himself up. He stood on the roof and peered over the edge to see the man rounding the corner. He was limping slightly but his expression made it clear it would still be able to (and would try to) kill Izuku the moment he laid hands on the boy. He checked the straps of his bag to make sure they were tight and started running to the opposite end of the roof to the fire escape. 

 

When he made it to the edge he jumped the small gap to the next building and continued running. He could feel the wind whipping through his hair and clothes, could feel the adrenaline running through his veins. A smile dawned his face as he ran. 

 

He got down from the rooftops when he reached the edge of the district. He had been running across the buildings for about twenty minutes but it had felt like a second. His legs burned slightly but in a way Izuku had grown used to, a way he enjoyed. He was still smiling but it had become less wide, unlikely to catch attention. He walked down the street to a hundred yen store he knew would likely have filters he could attach to the taps and reusable water bottles. 

 

He walked through the automatic doors of the store and smiled at the clerk working the till. 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I didn't go to pride over the weekend but I did get lots of writing done meaning I have a few buffer chapters! My aunt dropped off a bunch of doll clothes for my mom and she gave me a pink Pusheen puff-ball keychain thing. It does not have a name but it is my new favourite thing.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/nuKST3A8

Chapter 5: One Last Indulgence

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

He slowly walked through the aisles of the hundred yen store, inspecting each one to find what he needed. The first item he found was the reusable water bottles. He found the biggest one they had that would still fit in his bag. He wandered for a little while longer before he found the filters. He grabbed one that advertised fitting every tap and made his way back to the front. He waited in the short line for his turn and placed the two items on the counter with a smile. He pulled out the small wallet containing his money and produced the required amount.

 

“Do you want a bag?”

 

Izuku shook his head,

 

“No thanks! They should both fit in here.”

He reached behind himself and patted his backpack. He places the money in the tray next to the till for the cashier to take. She takes it, counting it out before putting it in the register and handing him the water bottle and filter.

“Thank you!”

 

“You’re welcome, have a good day!”

 

“You too!”

 

Izuku stepped out of the line and out of the store. He paused against the wall and took his backpack off. He unzipped the top and shuffled a few things around so the two items would fit. He then opened his wallet again and counted the money he had left. He had ¥10,929.96left. Nodding to himself he tucked the wallet back into the bag and zipped it up. 

 

He started walking down the street to the edge of the Red Light district. When he got to the edge, he would climb onto a rooftop and try to find a new place to sleep.

 

As he walked, he came across a street vendor selling Katsudon for ¥150. Izuku’s stomach growled at the smell. He watched the vendor work for a moment, watched as people ate the food they had prepared greedily. Biting his lip, he decided he could spare the yen. It would be one last indulgence. He knew that this would be the only time he would be able to spare the yen for something special, what he had been told and what he had seen proved that.

 

The vendor smiled at him when he got up to the stand,

 

“One bowl of Katsudon please.”

 

“Would you like it spicy? It doesn’t cost any extra.”

Spicy? Izuku had yet to encounter a vendor or restaurant that served spicy Katsudon. Inko used to make it spicy, the way he liked it, before his diagnosis. After it, she only made it when the Bakugous came over.

 

“Yes, please.”

The vendor nodded and grabbed some of the items scattered around his stand. Within a few minutes, Izuku was holding a bowl of spicy Katsudon as he handed the vendor ¥150. He sat down on one of the few stools lining the stall and dug in. When he was finished he handed the ceramic bowl back to the vendor to be washed and re-used. The vendor smiled at him and wished him well. Izuku returned their words before continuing on his way.

 

When he reached the edge of the Red Light District he found the nearest fire escape and climbed up onto the roof. The sun was beginning to set, painting the sky in a beautiful gradient of orange, yellow, pink, and red. He stopped to watch it for a moment before setting off across the rooftops, heading towards one of the camps he frequented.

 

--------

 

After two hours of running, he finally made it to the camp. The camp consisted of a small clearing in the district, the result of a fight that occurred before Izuku was born. Some hero who was now retired had been fighting a villain in the area, the two had caused so much collateral that the city decided to just demolish the remains of the buildings, clear out the debris, and call it a day. No rebuilding had been done. The area was tucked behind and between other buildings that had been much less damaged and had received repairs though they had been done using some of the debris and the cheapest materials they could find.

 

The clearing was now filled with tents of all shapes, sizes, and colours. In the middle is one large white tent, like you would see at a carnival or festival. Inside the tent were fire pits, gas cookers, and anything else they could find to heat up food. It was also where most of the food for the camp was kept. There was a water dispenser with a jug of water attached at the top. Most of the time the jug was empty and old but sometimes someone would work up the nerve to steal one or two for a fresh supply. Most often, though, people just stole water bottles. Some kept them in a freezer bag in the large tent (called the ‘Big Center’ by those who moved in or visited frequently) while others kept them in their own tents.

 

Most people never stayed more than a week, and even that was a stretch, but Izuku always became friends with whoever was staying there and there was one person who had been there since Izuku had started visiting. He also knew from other visits and conversations that a few people who Izuku had become good friends with and kept in contact with were staying there currently.

 

He climbed down from the rooftop he was currently on, leaning against the wall at the bottom to catch his breath before weaving through a few alleys to get to the clearing. He counted five tents when he arrived, excluding the Big Center. Two were orange, one was camo, and three were different shades of blue. The camo one Izuku knew belonged to Nakashima. They had been living in the clearing for as long as Izuku had been visiting but they refused to tell anyone, even him, exactly how long. Though, there were times when their tent was missing. They, like all others, followed the rule of never staying in one place for too long. Even though they often came back within a week or two. They could never manage to stay away from the clearing for long.

 

The orange tent Izuku knew belonged to Mr.Mori. The man had been living at the camp for five days now and had been talking about leaving soon. He had recently stolen a bag that didn’t have a hole in it like the one he had arrived with so it was likely he would be gone before day seven. The blue tent that was the lightest shade of the three was one Izuku didn’t recognize, likely someone who had moved in yesterday since Izuku had visited the day before that without finding them. Because it was dark out and currently night, there was no one outside and no lights on. Izuku silently made his way to the Big Center. Nakashima always left a rolled-up sleeping bag in the tent for when Izuku spent the night, normally without warning.

 

He found the sleeping bag in its regular place in one of the drawers of a chest of drawers kept in the Big Center for extra storage. He crawled underneath one of the picnic tables that made a small line down the middle of the tent and sat up, his legs folded criss-cross underneath him. He untied the rope keeping the sleeping bag rolled up and watched as it unravelled, both ends sprawling out until one end was in Izuku’s lap and the other was just peeking out on the other side. He scooted back so he could pull the sleeping bag further under the table. Once he was done one the bag was spread out underneath the table, neither end poking out on the sides.

 

He takes off his bag and places it on the left of the sleeping bag. He unzips the top pocket and removes the oversized hoodie. He slips it on and climbs into the bag, zipping it up at the edge. He settles into bed, falling asleep near instantly in the familiar place.

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
Turns out the BBQ was at my aunt's instead of my grandparents. It's fine though since I still got to spend time with my baby cousins. It is officially my last full week of school! Very excited for the summer! I have a lot of angst prompts and ideas so you can probably expect a few of those this week. Also, this week's Apartment Keys update might be the last one if I decide to post the last few chapters all at once. Let me know if that's something you want to see or if you would prefer they come out over the course of a few weeks like normal!

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/Epqkdk9W

Chapter 6: Breakfast With Friends (And One Sorta-Enemy)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

The next morning, Izuku woke up with the sunrise. The tent was still dark but it was now light enough that he could clearly see the different cookers and the cupboards and shelves housing food. He unzipped the side of the sleeping bag and crawled out of it. He rolled it back up, tying the rope back around it so it wouldn’t come undone. He took off the oversized hoodie and stuffed it back into his bag. He took a deep breath but he caught the smell of something rotten. After thinking for a moment he realized it was him. He hadn’t showered in four days (though normally he went longer, so that wasn’t the main issue) what was the main issue is he had been running in, sleeping in, and eating in the same outfit for two days and two nights. 

 

He dug around in his bag for a moment before coming up with a full change of clothes. He crawled out from under the table and changed quickly, finishing in under a minute. He took a large zip-lock bag from his backpack and shoved the dirty clothes inside before putting it back into the backpack and zipping it up. He pulled the backpack and the sleeping bag from underneath the picnic table and put the bag back on. He put the sleeping bag back in place and went over to the Big Center’s fridge. He pulled out a carton of eggs and some bacon, setting both down on an old counter.

 

He grabbed two pans from a cupboard below a gas stove. He turned on two of the burners and placed one pan on each. He went back to the fridge and grabbed a container of butter. He put some butter into one of the pans to melt before putting the container back in the fridge. He starts moving the butter around in its own pan with a spatula. With the hand not melting the butter, he takes a bowl out of a cupboard attached to the counter. He cracks twelve of the eighteen eggs into the bowl. By the time he was done the butter had melted. He rests the spatula on the side of the pan and takes twelve pieces of bacon from the packaging and lays them out on the pan. He takes a plate from the same cupboard as the bowl and places another twelve on that. He picks up the bacon and the egg containers and puts them back in the fridge.

 

He takes salt, pepper, and dill. He puts equal amounts of each into the eggs before putting away the seasonings and taking out a whisk. He pours the egg mixture onto the buttered pan and picks up the spatula from the side. He uses it to flip the bacon before using it to stir the eggs. When the eggs are starting to join together he replaces the uncooked bacon on the plate with the cooked. When the eggs were nearly done he flips the bacon. He moves the cooked bacon into a stack on the plate and takes a piece of paper towel from the roll sitting on the counter, using it to sop up the grease left on the plate. He throws the paper towel into an industrial-sized trashcan in the corner of the Big Center.

 

He puts the eggs onto the now vacate side of the plate. By the time the eggs are arranged the bacon is done cooking. He puts the rest of the bacon onto the large plate. He finds a package of paper plates and some utensils, putting both next to the plate. He goes to the front, right, and left walls of the tent and pulls them open. He ties the sides to the poles of the tent using the rope attached to the poles. The now open walls give him almost a full view of the camp. The sun is now fully risen and people are starting to emerge from their tents. 

 

He watched Nakashima emerge first. He watched as they stretched before looking up at the Big Center. Their eyes widened when they saw Izuku. Izuku waved, a small smile on his face. Nakashima laughed as they came toward him.

 

“Hey, kiddo! How’re you doing today? How’s it feel to be ten?”

It was Izuku’s turn for his eyes to widen,

 

“I completely forgot!”

 

Nakashima laughed again, louder this time. 

 

“You forgot about your own birthday?! Geez, kid. What, you gonna forget mine or Mr.Mori’s next?”

 

Izuku shook his head vigorously,


“No, never! I just forgot because of everything that’s happened.”

“Whaddaya mean kid?”

 

“Well, I’ve been out for two days and two nights…”

 

Nakashima looked surprised for a moment before a smile broke out across their face,

 

“That’s great kid! You come here to get some more pointers?”

 

Izuku nodded, a smile stretching across his own face.

“Well, you came to the right place! We can get started on your lessons after breakfast, alright?”

 

Izuku nodded, following Nakashima into the Big Center. They paused when they entered, seeing the food Izuku had made.

 

“You made breakfast for everyone kid?”

 

Izuku nodded,

 

“I thought it would be a nice way to celebrate that I’m finally out. And also my birthday I guess but I only just remembered that I’m ten now.”

 

Nakashima smiled. It wasn’t as wide as some of their others but it was genuine.

 

“Thanks, kid, happy birthday and good job getting out of that house!”

 

Izuku blushed,

 

“Thank you, Nakashima!”

 

Nakashima stepped forward, taking one of the paper plates from the stack before taking their portion of both the bacon and the eggs. Izuku did the same and went to go sit at the picnic table, choosing a spot across from Nakashima. Mr.Mori was the next to emerge from his tent. He laid eyes on the open Big Center and Nakashima and Izuku eating breakfast immediately. He jogged over, ruffling Izuku’s hair before grabbing a plate.

 

“Happy late birthday kid! You come over to celebrate instead of going to school?”

Nakashima smiled mischievously as they glanced at Izuku before turning their attention to Mr.Mori.

 

“That’s the thing, Mori, he completely forgot his birthday had passed. But, he did get out of that awful house.”

 

Mr.Mori chuckled, a small smile dawning his face,

 

“How do you forget your own birthday kid? But good job getting out. You gonna spend a night or two at the camp?”

Izuku blushed, muttering a thank you. 

 

“But no, I don’t think I’ll stay here. I don’t wanna have to cut out visits or anything.”

Mr.Mori nodded. He sat down on the spot beside Nakashima and struck up a conversation with them. About what, Izuku didn’t know. He was too busy watching as someone emerged from the lightest of the blue tents.

 

They had spines lining their back and arms, and they stood in a way that indicated an injury in a very specific place.

 

Izuku was still staring at him when the man looked up. They made eye contact and Izuku watched as their face twisted first in confusion and then in anger.

 

“You damn brat! You come to finish the job?!”

 

Izuku’s eyes widened as the man came running for him.

 

“Eep! No, no! I-”

 

Nakashima cut him off,

 

“Takahashi calm down! He’s here because he normally visits two-three times a week and he recently left his house. What could he have possibly done to you to set you off like this?”

 

“That’s the brat I was telling you about! The one that kneed me in the dick!”

Mr.Mori looked like he was trying to hold back a laugh. Nakashima wasn’t trying at all.

 

“Makes sense! The kid has been training since he was five and he’s pretty damn good for his age. Maybe don’t try to pick a fight with him again.”

 

The man, Takahashi, huffed before grabbing a plate off the counter and taking his portion of the food. He sat down at an empty picnic table and ate in silence while Izuku, Mr.Mori, and Nakashima talked. Izuku ate slowly, waiting for the last two to emerge from their tents, excited to see the owners of the tents for the first time in just over two weeks.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
My dad is feeling a lot better so he should be fully recovered in the next few days! If you want to vote on which of three fics should take over the Wednesday update slot please do so today as I'll be picking the winner tomorrow. You can find the poll in either the Discord server in the 'news' channel or in the author's notes of the last chapter of Apartment Keys And How To Use Them (A Guide By Class 1-A).

We Have A Discord Server!
https://discord.gg/Epqkdk9W

Chapter 7: Wagon Rides And New Friends (Not In That Order)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Everyone was nearly finished eating when the last two emerged from their tents. The first of the two to leave her tent had deep green hair, grey skin, and a blindfold over her eyes. She came into the Big Center and grabbed a plate, piling it with her portion of the food and sitting down next to Izuku.  

 

“Good morning Zō! How’re you?”

 

“I’m good Izu! How’s it feel to be ten?”


“Good!-”

 

“The kid forgot he was ten!”

 

Izuku’s cheeks and ears turned red as he stared down at the table. Zō chuckled, ruffling his hair,

 

“Understandable kid. The only reason I even remember I’m twenty-three is because of the party you threw me this year.”

 

Izuku nodded, joining in on a conversation Nakashima, Mr.Mori, and Takahashi were having. A few minutes later, he heard the sound of a tent zipper coming undone and looked out towards the last remaining tent. Izuku smiled, calling out to the woman who had emerged,

 

“Aka! Come sit down with us, I made breakfast!”

 

The woman, Aka, looked up at Izuku, smiling.

 

“I’ll be right there little man!”

 

Aka’s teeth were sharp, like a shark, and her skin was the colour of blood. She had large, bull-like horns protruding from the sides of her head and her eyes were the colour of ice.  She was incredibly strong and had the muscles to show it. She had actually helped Izuku train and still did whenever she had the time. When she came into the Big Center she piled her plate with her share of the food, evidently, it was everything that was left since everyone else had already eaten or was currently eating.

 

“Have fun for your birthday kiddo?”

 

Izuku thought about it for a moment before nodding,

 

“Yeah, I guess so. I finally got to leave and Nakashima offered to teach me more about how to survive on the streets-”

 

Zō, Mr.Mori, Takashima, and Aka all froze,

 

“You mean you left left?”

 

Izuku nodded, a smile on his face,

 

“Yeah!”

 

Zō, Mr.Mori, and Aka all smiled with him.

 

“That’s great kid!”

 

“We can help out with your lessons too if you want.”

 

“Now we'll have more time for training! Be ready to feel some pain kid!”

 

Izuku’s smile widened,

 

“Thank you!”

 

Takashima rose from his seat and carried his plate over to the trashcan, shoving it down inside. Izuku watched the man leave, his gaze travelling to the trashcan. Trash was starting to poke out of the top, even with everything constantly being pushed down.

 

“I’ll take the trash out once everyone has thrown away their plates.”

 

“It’s fine kid, someone else can do it.”

 

Nakashima protested.

 

“Yeah, kid,”

 

Aka joined in.

 

“I can do it.”

 

Izuku shook his head,

 

“Really it’s fine! I can do it and I want to thank you all for everything you’ve done for me!”

 

Nakashima, Aka, Zō, and Mr.Mori all looked at Izuku in a way he was familiar with. Like they knew they wouldn’t be able to convince him otherwise. Instead, they all nodded and started eating a little faster so Izuku could leave and come back sooner.

 

Izuku stood and picked up his own plate, shoving it as deep inside the trashcan as he could. He wandered around the camp, petting a few of the stray cats that hung around before going back to the Big Center. He opened one of the larger cupboards and pulled out a small, folded-up wagon. It took a bit of force to unfold it but it rolled fine and would hold the trash bag. He wheeled the wagon over to the can and stopped it an inch away from the can. He pulls the strings on either side of the bag to make them bigger before tying them into two knots to ensure the bag stayed closed. 

 

He lifts the bag from the can and carefully lowers it into the wagon, making sure none of it is spilling out of the sides before checking that his bag was still secure on his shoulders and tightening the straps slightly. Once he’s satisfied he grabs the handle of the wagon and wheels it out of the tent and across the plot of land where the camp sits. Aka runs up to him, handing him a few candies,

 

“In case you’re out at lunch.”

 

Izuku nods and takes the candy, putting it into his pocket before thanking her and exiting the camp through the entrance alley. He comes out on a cracked and hole-filled sidewalk. Wheeling the wagon on the heavily damaged sidewalk was difficult but he knew it was still easier than carrying it all the way with his bare hands. Once he was around three blocks away from the camp he started looking for an alley with a dumpster that already had a few bags in it.

 

It takes him a while but he finally finds a viable dumpster in an alley five blocks from the camp. He wheels the wagon over to the dumpster, pushing it against the front. He opens the dumpster by pushing the lid up as hard as he can, making sure it’s not going to fall before picking up the trash bag from inside the wagon and throwing it into the dumpster. He dusts off his hands and takes hold of the wagon’s handle again, walking out of the alley. It’s much easier to wheel the wagon now that the bag isn’t in it.

 

As he walks he remembers the empty water jug in the Big Center and decides to see if he can find one outside of the Red Light district. He walked out of the Red Light district, avoiding hitting anyone with his wagon by swerving through crowds and occasionally walking on the road when it was an option.

 

Eventually, he came across a store that sold the water jugs he was looking for. When he started looking at prices he started to get worried. He only had ¥10,779.96 and the cheapest jug he could find was ¥2620.11. If he purchased one it would leave him with ¥8,159.85 and there was no way he would be able to steal one, not with his current skill set. After thinking about it for another moment he picked up the jug and set it in his wagon, wheeling it up to the till to pay.

 

--------

 

As he was walking out of the store with his newly acquired jug he looked up at the sky. Judging by the sun’s spot it would be lunchtime soon. He hadn’t realized he'd been out so long but the walks between distracts are pretty long. Shrugging, he decided to see if he could find somewhere to get lunch. After wandering for a while he came across a vendor selling sandwiches. Quite a lot of their stock was out in the open, ready to be taken. Izuku positioned himself to walk by the stand. He reached up from beside a woman buying a sandwich and grabbed one from the shelf, slipping it into his pocket. From the same pocket, he took out a piece of candy. He unwrapped it and popped it into his mouth as he walked away.

 

It was a trick he had learned from someone he had met when he was younger and that everyone who knew anything about stealing and pickpocketing knew to do. Whenever you take something from another person and put it in your pocket or bag it’s best to take something out of that same place. Whether it’s a candy, a piece of gum, or a tissue. It will make people around you think (whether consciously or unconsciously) that that’s what you had been rummaging around for instead of stashing away a stolen item. It could also help remove you from a person’s suspect list when they're running through where the item could've been lost or stolen and by who.

 

So, Izuku continued to suck on his candy while he walked away from the vendor, stolen sandwich tucked safely away in his pocket. Eventually, he decided he was far enough away to eat the sandwich safely. He took it out of his pocket and unwrapped the foil surrounding it. The sandwich was gone within a few minutes and he threw the garbage away in a nearby dumpster. He made sure he had a firm grasp on the handle of the wagon before once again continuing on his way.

 

He was past the halfway point between the two districts when he heard the sounds of someone running away from a large group. He ducked into an alley, watching from a hiding place behind a dumpster. A few moments later a boy around his age with purple hair rounded the corner, looking panicked. The boy ducked into the alley, hiding behind a dumpster on the other side of the alley to Izuku. Not a moment after the boy had hidden did another group of boys round the corner, obviously looking for the first. The group ran past the alley and Izuku held his breath, listening to make sure they were well past before emerging from his hiding spot. 

 

When he had stood he looked over and made eye contact with the other boy. Now that he had a chance to study the boy did he notice the minor cuts and bruises littering his face and arms. He assumed there were more covering the places on his arms and legs that his clothes covered. Izuku also couldn’t help but compare the boy’s hair to that of a troll with the way it stuck up in the air.

 

It was only then that he realized he had been staring at the boy for longer than was considered not weird.


“Ah, I’m so sorry for staring! Um, I’m Midoriya Izuku. You?”

The boy looked confused for a moment before he too stood.

 

“Shinsou Hitoshi.”

 

Izuku nodded,

 

“Nice to meet ya Shinsou!”

 

The boy, Shinsou, looked behind Izuku and raised a brow,

 

“You have a water jug. Why?”

 

Izuku had noticed that Shinsou’s voice sounded scratchy like it hadn’t been used in a while.

 

“Because I’m replacing the jug for the cooler at the camp. I have a med-kit there too if you want any help with your injuries?”

 

Shinsou’s eyes widened at Izuku’s proposal. He looked like he was thinking it over before nodding to himself.

 

“Alright. But I’m riding in the wagon.”

 

Izuku smiled, trying to hold back laughter.

 

“Okay! Climb on in!”

 

Shinsou’s eyes widened again.


“Wait what? I meant that as a joke!”

 

Izuku’s smile was starting to look more like a smirk.


“Too late, get in!”

 

Sighing, Shinsou climbed into the wagon, pressing his back up against the jug of water. Because of how long his legs were he had to pull them up against his chest. Once he was situated Izuku once again grabbed the handle of the wagon and started wheeling both Shinsou and the jug back to camp.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I know that I already updated today but I'm incredibly happy and want to share some of that joy with all of you! I graduated today! Everyone looked stunning and I had a lot of fun! We went to a diner for breakfast in the morning after the first bell before most people got picked up for appointments and such. I didn't have any appointments but I still went home early to make sure I would have enough time to get ready which ended up being a good idea because I started at 3:30 and never would have finished in time if I got home at my usual time of around 4:15. I ended up getting three awards?! I got one for something to do with Geography and that class as a whole even though I suck at Geography ✌️. I got to take tons of photos with my friends which I am incredibly happy with even though I am not at all photogenic. After the ceremony, they served drinks and cupcakes but the cupcakes sucked. Luckily that was the only bad thing about the evening!

If you haven't voted for the fic to take over the Wednesday update slot and would like to please do! I've been tallying the votes and there is currently a tie between option 1 and option 3. You can find the poll on either the discord or in the author's notes of the last chapter of Apartment Keys And How To Use Them (A Guide By Class 1-A).

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/xwQEA2KC

Chapter 8: A New Travel Buddy

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

By the time they were back at the camp, the sun was low in the sky, almost ready to set. Izuku wheeled the wagon through the winding alleyways until they reached the Big Center. He stopped the wagon near the middle of the large tent and helped Shinsou step out of it before walking over to the water dispenser and twisting off the old, empty jug. He set it beside the dispenser so he could take it out later and took the new jug from the wagon. He set it beside the water dispenser and removed the seel from the nozzle. Izuku picks up the jug and puts it in place on the water dispenser before nodding to himself, walking over to a cabinet near the back of the tent and rummaging through it. 

 

A moment later he emerges with a med-kit. He brings it over to Shinsou and instructs the boy to sit on one of the benches. Once he’s sitting Izuku set the kit down and flicks open the latches, removing a bottle of disinfectant and a package of cotton balls. He poured some of the disinfectant onto a cotton ball and began gently dabbing the wounds he could see. 

 

By the time he was done disinfecting the wounds Nakashima and Aka had both noticed what was happening and had started making their way to the tent. Izuku replaced the bottle of disinfectant in the case and took out a roll of bandages and a thing of medical tape. As he was wrapping the first scrape of many Nakashima and Aka entered the tent.

 

“What’s going on in here?”

They asked at the same time. 

 

Izuku looked up at them from where he was bandaging the scrapes and bruises on Shinsou’s legs,

 

“I replaced the water jug!”

 

Both simultaneously turned their heads to the water dispenser, taking a moment to look at the fresh jug before returning their attention to the two boys.


“That’s great kid, thank you. But we were originally asking about your friend.”

 

“Oh!”

 

Izuku put on a surprised expression like he hadn’t known they were asking about Shinsou in the first place and instead genuinely thought they were asking about the water jug.

 

“This is Shinsou, I met him in an alley and took him home in the wagon with the water jug.”

 

Nakashima and Aka nodded like this was a common occurrence (which it was, Izuku taking back random people is how the camp got quite a few of its residents). They both left Izuku alone to continue caring for Shinsou and instead both got some water from the dispenser before leaving. Supposedly to tell the others about both the new water jug and Shinsou.

 

By the time Izuku had finished bandaging Shinsou and had packed away the kit, everyone was gathered in or around the tent, cups of water in hand as they mulled about. Zō, Aka, and Nakashima were the closest to the tent while staying outside it. Mr.Mori sat on a bench on the inside of the tent far from the two boys and Takahashi was standing outside his tent, clutching his cup of water so tightly that, despite only being able to glance at it, Izuku was sure it would soon shatter in the man’s hand. 

 

Shinsou was obviously nervous. He was sitting stock still at the exception of his eyes, which were darting from person to person, never leaving one unwatched for too long. Eventually, Izuku had had enough of the boy’s constant nervousness and went off to talk to Nakashima. 

 

“Can you get everyone to leave and maybe go back to their tents?”

 

Nakashima nodded and, while Izuku was walking back into the tent, called everyone to attention.

 

“We have shit to do! Everyone go back to your tent and get ready to help with the chores!”

 

While there were a few groans, everyone obliged and went back to their own tents. Shinsou immediately appeared calmer once everyone was gone. Izuku moved around the kitchen part of the tent, grabbing a few packets and seasonings from the cupboards before taking out a small pot and ladle. 

 

“What are you doing?”

 

Izuku looked over his shoulder at Shinsou, smiling,


“Making you lunch! I already ate but you look hungry so-”

 

“I’m not hungry you don’t need to-”

 

Shinsou was cut off when his stomach decided to growl, catching him in a lie. Izuku smirked, turning back to what he was doing as blush crawled up Shinsou’s cheeks and over his ears. 

 

--------

 

After around ten minutes Izuku had a plate of instant ramen in front of Shinsou. He ate quickly, barely taking any time at all to eat the entire plate. When he was done, he insisted on helping Izuku with the dishes. There were a few, both from breakfast and lunch. Some of the pots and pans were from meals that Izuku had not been there for. The two both put on a pair of long rubber gloves and started to fill a tub with water that was stocked in a large oil drum. Izuku got a thing of soap out from one of the cupboards and made a mental note to tell someone they were going to need to steal some more as it was the last bottle. 

 

The two spent the rest of the afternoon scrubbing different pots, pans, and cutlery. Mr.Mori, Zō, Nakashima, and Aka all offered to help but the two turned them down each time. When they were done and had put everything away Nakashima came to see them in the tent. 

 

“Izuku, I want you to have these. I’ve had them stashed away for when you inevitably left that apartment.”

They held out two sleeping bags to Izuku. Both were a little ratty, with small holes and tears, but they were much better than not having a sleeping bag at all.

 

“Thank you! But why two? You said you got them for when I left the apartment so why get two?”

 

“You’re kidding me, right? Kid, there was no way you weren’t getting at least one little follower-friend either before or after you left.”

 

Izuku’s eyes widened and his face started slowly turning red. Shinsou only watched, not saying a thing even as his own face started to turn pink.

“B-but Shinsou hasn’t even said he wanted to come with me so-”

 

“Are ya going with him kid?”

 

Shinsou jumped slightly, surprised by the sudden attention, but his answer was quick,

 

“Yeah, I’ll go with him.”

 

Nakashima nodded, both sleeping bags still in their hands.

 

“Perfect! Now, each of you take a sleeping bag and settle down for the night and find a new place to sleep in the morning, alright? I’ll close up the tent.”

 

Izuku nodded quickly, thanking them profusely as he took his sleeping bag. Shinsou thanked them as well and the two turned away and crawled under one of the tables to set up their sleeping bags. Shinsou settled a few tables up from where Izuku chose to set up, struggling a bit with the sleeping bag before he could get it rolled out properly. Izuku made quick work of his, having done it so many times before. He took off his bag and settled it next to him, taking out the oversized hoodie and sliding it over his head. He settled quickly, waiting until Nakashima had finished with the tent before he closed his eyes, ready to sleep.

 

“Hey, Midoriya?”

Izuku opened his eyes and looked up, barely getting a glance at Shinsou’s sleeping bag in his periphery,

 

“Yeah?”

“Thanks.”

 

Izuku smiled, though he didn’t know if Shinsou could see him.

 

“You're welcome!”

 

The two fell asleep quickly after that, both were snoring lightly by the time the sun had set and the moon had started to rise.

 

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/xwQEA2KC

Chapter 9: Getting On The Move (Why Didn’t You Mention Your Plan For Taking Over The Government Earlier?!)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

When Izuku woke up in the morning he clambered out of the sleeping bag quickly. He rolled it up and shoved it into his backpack. He then took off the hoodie and shoved it in as well, struggling to zip up the bag once it was in. He wouldn’t be able to carry anything else unless he somehow got a hold of a bigger bag. He slipped on the backpack and crawled out from under his table. From what he could see of the light peeking through into the tent the sun was just beginning to rise. He had hoped they’d be able to leave before it started rising but it was too late now to dawdle on it.

 

He walked up the row of tables until he came up on Shinsou’s. He bent down and poked the other boy continuously until he started shifting.

 

“Wake up! We gotta get going, we’ll eat when we find a place to camp out.”

 

Shinsou sat up, rubbing the sleep out of his eyes. He glanced around for a moment, seemingly gathering his bearings before he climbed out of the sleeping bag and started rolling it up. When he emerged from beneath his table Izuku helped him set up the sleeping bag so he could drape it across his body using the rope. Once Shinsou was set Izuku undid the tie keeping the right-hand wall of the tent closed and parted the two pieces of fabric, inviting Shinsou to step through first.

 

Once both boys had exited the tent Izuku started leading Shinsou out to the alley, checking behind him every few seconds to make sure the boy was still with him as he turned down different passages. Eventually, they came out on the sidewalk. Izuku started picking up his pace slightly, not wanting to become a target for muggers. Shinsou picked up his pace a moment after Izuku, trying his best to keep up with the other.

 

They walked for hours, avoiding any noises they heard coming from alleys or from around corners. Eventually, when the sun is high in the sky, they came across a small alley devoid of people. On each side wall of the alley was a window with a large sill, both stretching out so far that there was only a small gap between them. The area they covered wasn’t big but it would be enough for the two boys to use for a night or two. 

 

Izuku and Shinsou cleared some trash from where they planned on setting up their sleeping bags. Once they were settled, both sitting on a patch of cold, hard ground, Izuku dug through his bag and pulled out two protein bars. He handed one to Shinsou and the two ate in silence. When they were done Izuku threw their wrappers into a dumpster stationed in the alley. The two then sat in silence, having nothing to do. 

 

After a while Izuku took out a bottle of water from his bag, he drank some before offering it to the other boy. Shinsou drank quickly, handing it back to Izuku once he was done. While they were sitting there Izuku took some time to look Shinsou over, studying him. 

 

“Why are you staring at me?”

Izuku jumped slightly, taking a moment to compose himself before a nervous smile stretched out across his face,

 

“Sorry! It’s a habit of mine I guess. Trying to analyze as much as I can about someone, guess their quirk, y’know?”

 

Shinsou nodded slowly,

 

“I guess. Like trying to get to know them.”

 

Izuku nodded,

 

“Yeah!”

 

“I do that sometimes too.”

 

Izuku’s smile became more happy and bright,

 

“Right! And, um, while we’re on the topic… what is your quirk?”

Izuku didn’t miss the way Shinsou tensed and how his eyes darted to the side,

 

“Well, what’s yours?”

 

It was Izuku’s turn to tense. He knew he shouldn’t have asked, quirks were normally a sore topic for those who he met, but he had gotten so excited! He wanted to get to know Shinsou had he had been theorizing about what his quirk could be since the other boy had climbed into his wagon.

 

“Oh! Um, I guess it’s fair that I answer too, huh? Okay,”

 

Izuku took a deep breath, steeling himself. He made eye contact with Shinsou, trying to make his expression cold and indifferent.

 

“I’m quirkless.”

 

Shinsou’s eyes widened and Izuku braced himself for the harsh words and violence that normally came with telling someone he was quirkless.

 

“My quirk is brainwashing. If someone answers a question while I have it activated then I can make them do things.”

 

Izuku’s eyes lit up,

 

“That’s amazing! Though, it sounds more like hypnosis. Brainwashing is supposed to be a time-consuming thing where you change someone's beliefs while hypnosis is where you can influence someone's actions temporarily. How many people can you use your quirk on at once? Is there a time limit or does something else get them out of it? Is there a limit to the number of things you can get someone to do? Does your hair stick up like that ‘cause it’s influenced by your quirk or is it because of gel? Are you willing to help me take over the government? I think you'd be a lot of help but you don't have to if you don't want to.”

 

“Wait, what was that last one?”

Shinsou was looking at him with a mixed expression. Izuku could see surprise, suspicion, and awe.

 

“Are you willing to help me take over the government? I’ve been planning on doing something about the quirk and quirkless discrimination in Japan but I know nothing would get done with just protests or becoming a hero. They would never let me get enough popularity to get anyone on my side let alone let me spread stuff about it. So I plan on taking over the Hero Commission and forcing them to listen. I’ve had a plan in the works for a while now. Wanna help?”

 

Shinsou was silent for a moment. Izuku watched him patiently, hoping more than he had in years that Shinsou would agree. 

 

Slowly Shinsou nodded,

 

“Yeah. Yeah, okay. But we’ll need more help.”

 

Izuku nodded,


“I know! That’s why the plan is in the works! Honestly, I don’t think I’ll be able to start on it for real until I’m at least fifteen but we can start preparing now, right?”

 

Shinsou nodded,

 

“Do you want me to answer your other questions about my quirk?”

Izuku nodded vigorously, digging around in his backpack for a notebook with blank pages and a pencil. The two spent the rest of the morning and all of the afternoon asking (Izuku) and answering (Shinsou) questions about Shinsou’s quirk. They also started putting together training regimes so Shinsou could catch up with Izuku but they wouldn’t start using them until at least the next day.

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I went to see Minions Rise Of Gru at the Drive-In yesterday! It was a good movie and the little things they show before it were good. I couldn't read any of the papers shown during the mini Looney-Toons episode shown before the movie and that's how we learned that I need a new glasses prescription :D.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/Z8S67mmu

Chapter 10: Hey, Your Dad’s Endeavor, Right? Wanna Run Around The District With Us?

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku and Hitoshi have been travelling together for a month now. They’ve been getting by, dumpster diving, stealing, stopping at camps, and buying what they can. Izuku, at this point, has exhausted his stash of money so now they scavenge for yen both from the ground and others’ pockets. They had been sleeping in alleys, abandoned buildings, and camps. Never staying in the same place for more than two nights. They volunteered at underground clinics whenever they could and had gotten Hitoshi his own bag and upgraded Izuku’s backpack to a duffel bag to match Hitoshi’s. They both carried food, water, a sleeping bag, at least two changes of clothes, travel toiletries, small med-kits, and notebooks and pencils (mainly for Izuku but Hitoshi used them occasionally as well). They had started using each others’ first names about a week into their friendship, neither wanting to associate with the people their last names tied them to.

 

Currently, they were walking down the street at noon. There were a few different heroes patrolling but neither stopped to talk to any of them. They were trying to find a vendor to steal from. Both had put on slight muscle but without food, they wouldn’t be able to maintain it. 

 

After a few more minutes of walking, they came across the perfect target. It was a sandwich vendor, parked along the edge of the road and pressed against the curb. Their sandwiches were wrapped in tinfoil and lined up in rows on the cart. There was a crowd of people surrounding them, packed together. The two boys glanced at each other, smiling, before moving into the crowd. 

 

They weaved through the press of people fluidly, both more than used to moving through crowds. Hitoshi hung back while Izuku slid forward, waiting for the right moment. He hadn’t been waiting for more than a moment when someone reached forward, making the perfect cover for Izuku to grab two sandwiches. As soon as he had them both in his grip he turned back to Hitoshi, ready to hand him a sandwich when he heard someone shout,

 

“Thief!”

 

An arm reached out, trying to grab Izuku, but he ran forward, handing one of the sandwiches to Hitoshi as he passed him. Hitoshi started running too, catching up to Izuku. Shouts of “Thief!” and, “Get them!” followed the two as they ran. They heard footsteps behind them but none of them followed very far. It wasn’t until they had turned a corner and were about to turn another when a different voice joined the fray,


“Stop, villains!”

 

Both boys immediately looked behind them, eyes widening when they saw who was pursuing them. 

 

Pro Hero Endeavor was chasing after them, fire flaring around him and a furious expression on his face. Both boys turned back to face forward, picking up speed. Hitoshi turned to look at Izuku for directions since the other knew the area and its back alleys better than him but Izuku looked just as panicked as he was, eyes darting this way and that. It was only then that Hitoshi took a moment to look around and noticed that there were no alleys. All the buildings were flesh together without any space between them. 

 

They turned a corner and came across a large crowd, all gathered around stalls stationed outside different shops to try and entice customers inside. Izuku and Hitoshi tried to hide in the crowd but they kept separating when they noticed the two being chased by Endeavor and they were slowly being torn from each other, pushed in different directions. Panicked, Izuku reached out for Hitoshi’s hand, fumbling due to the distance before finally grabbing it. Both held tightly to the other as they ran, trying to escape the flaming hero.

 

They could hear his footsteps getting closer as they ran. They tried to push their legs to go faster but it was no use, they were going as fast as they could. They turned a corner but didn’t get very far before Izuku felt someone grab his arm and pull him into a thin alley he hadn’t noticed. He was still holding tightly to Hitoshi’s hand, causing the other boy to stumble into the alley with him. Izuku was about to lash out when the person let go of him, allowing both Izuku and Hitoshi to turn and see them.

 

When the two turned they were met with a boy their age with split red-and-white hair and a scar covering his left eye. Before any of them could say anything Endeavor came barreling around the corner, storming past their alley and down the street. Once they were sure Endeavor had passed Izuku spoke,

 

“You’re his youngest, right? Todoroki Shouto?”

The boy nodded,

 

“Yes, that’s correct. I’m sorry about him, I can tell you his patrol route for the week if you want help staying away from him.”

 

Izuku shook his head,

 

“No, that’s okay. We’re only in this area for today. I’m Izuku by the way!”

 

Hitoshi raised the hand still gripped in Izuku’s, lifting the Izuku’s with it.

 

“And I’m Hitoshi.”

 

Todoroki’s expression became confused and his head tilted to the side slightly,

 

“You don’t go by your last names?”

Both boys shook their heads,

 

“No, we don’t wanna be associated with the people they tie us to.” Izuku clarified.

 

Todoroki’s eyes widened,


“You can do that?”

Hitoshi nodded,

 

“Yeah, of course.”

“Oh. Call me Shouto then, please.”

 

Both nodded. They stood in the alley for a moment before Shouto spoke,

 

“Do you want to leave the alley so you can both eat your sandwiches?”

Both boys jumped and Izuku’s eyes widened,

 

“I completely forgot about those! We can sit out on the curb.”

 

The three left the alley in a single file line to make sure they would all fit. Once they were out the three sat on the curb together, Shouto in the middle with Izuku and Hitoshi on either side. While Izuku and Hitoshi ate their sandwiches the three made small talk. When they were done Izuku threw out their garbage in a nearby trashcan and sat back down in his spot.

 

“Hey, Shouto?”

The aforementioned boy turned his head so he was looking at Izuku,

 

“Yes?”

“Why are you out on your own? Shouldn’t you be following Endeavor?”

 

Shouto nodded,

 

“Yes, I’m supposed to be joining him on patrol so he can ‘model what a hero should look like’ but I left him a while ago and he has yet to notice.”

“Oh. Why would you want to leave him though? Don’t you want to learn about being a hero?”

Shouto shook his head,

 

“No, not from him at least. He wants me to be a hero so I can surpass All Might so he likes to take me out with him but I don’t want to be a hero like him. He’s much too aggressive when he apprehends people and he causes so much collateral damage that his agency has an entire team for taking calls from insurance companies and negotiating the prices. I’d much rather not become a hero at all rather than be the one he wants me to be.”

 

Izuku and Hitoshi both nodded but, while Hitoshi looked more sympathetic, Izuku looked like he was thinking about something important.

 

“Wanna hang out with us for the day? We can’t promise it’ll be much but you’ll be able to stay away from Endeavor for a while.”

Both Hitoshi and Shouto looked surprised at Izuku’s offer but Hitoshi gathered himself faster,

 

“That’s a good idea actually. Whadaya say?”

 

Shouto was quiet for a few moments before nodding,

 

“Yeah, alright. Where to first? He should be coming back around the corner soon.”

 

As soon as he said it they heard heavy footsteps getting closer, easily recognizable as Endeavor’s. The three shot up from their sitting positions. Izuku grabbed Shouto’s left hand and Hitoshi took his right, pulling them down the street in a run. The three ran from street to street, quickly leaving Endeavor behind. All three had smiles on their face as they made their way through the district.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
My family went out on a lake with some of my dad's friends. The lake goes through an area covered by trees and comes out in relatively open water dotted with islands. They stopped at an island and hung out for the day while I stayed home because it was 29 degrees out and like hell am I putting myself through that. Instead, I got some writing done, tried to make sure one of the dogs didn't eat things he wasn't supposed to (he did end up decimating a thing of paw wipes but that's better than what he did to the couch), and reading a few chapters of the book I"m working on. I had fun and they all came back sunburnt despite packing sunscreen.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 11: Splashing In Streams Is Good Team Bonding

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku had pulled the other two all the way down to the park. Instead of going on the equipment, where any of them could be recognized, especially Shouto, they ran around in the woods. They jumped over roots, climbed trees, and explored until they came upon a stream. The water didn’t look very deep, it would likely only go up to their stomachs.

 

“Y’know,”

 

Izuku said.

 

“It’s been quite a while since me and Hitoshi had a bath. Wanna go in the stream with us Shouto?”

 

Shouto stared at the stream for a moment before shrugging,

 

“Sure.”

 

The three took off their shirts and toed off their shoes before wading into the water. Izuku and Hitoshi shivered when the cold water hit their skin but Shouto didn’t. In fact, the temperature of the water didn’t seem to affect him. Hitoshi looked over at Shouto when he noticed he wasn’t reacting to the water,

 

“Hey, Shouto?”

 

“Hm?”

 

“Why aren’t you cold? The water’s freezing!”

 

“My quirk makes me more resistant to cold.”

 

He replied, shrugging his shoulders. 

 

Izuku’s eyes lit up and he ran as fast as he could towards Shouto, splashing water as he went.

 

“What exactly is your quirk? How does it work? What are the drawbacks?”

 

Shouto’s eyes widened but he gathered his composure quickly,

 

“My quirk is called Half-Cold Half-Hot. I can create ice with my right side and fire with my left but I don’t use the fire. If I use my ice too much I get covered in frost and risk frostbite.”

 

Izuku’s hands started twitching, almost like he was trying to write in mid-air. It didn’t last long, though, as he squeezed them into fists. His eyes dimmed like he was trying to control his excitement. He slowed his talking speed but continued to ask his questions, staring Shouto down as if waiting for a reaction beyond answers.

 

“Do you know how it works, exactly? Like, do you create the fire and ice yourself or do you use the particles in the air? Can’t you prevent the frost by heating yourself up? Following that, why don’t you use your fire?”

 

Izuku’s eyes widened when the last question left his mouth and his hands came up to cover his mouth.

 

“I’m so sorry! That’s probably super personal and I shouldn’t be asking. I just started spewing questions, I wasn’t thinking-”

 

“No, it’s okay.”

 

Shouto cut him off. He had a look in his eyes that Izuku couldn’t place and he lowered his hands, averting his eyes to the water as blush slowly rose up his face.

 

“I don’t know whether or not I create it or it’s something to do with particles. I could prevent the frost but I don’t use my fire because of my father. He’s been abusing me for years under the guise of training ‘cause he wants me to surpass All Might and become the number one hero since he can’t. He’s been neglecting my other two siblings and he hurt my mom so bad she had a mental break and poured boiling water on my face after mistaking me for my father. He locked her away in a mental hospital and I haven’t been able to visit.”

 

Both Izuku and Hitoshi’s eyes were wide with surprise. Izuku gathered himself quickly and the look he had had earlier, before asking Shouto to run around with them, reappeared. Hitoshi saw his expression and sighed.

 

“Just get it over with.”

 

Izuku made eye contact with Shouto, a determined look in his eyes.

 

“Join us. You could help a ton with the plan! We would need to get you your own duffel and sleeping bags but I’m sure Nakashima could help with that and supplies would probably become a bigger issue but I’m sure we could figure it out! Plus you might be able to help us understand more about how heroics actually works so we can refine the plan. We would also need to dye your hair, now that I think about it. It’s a very defining feature. Ah! Sorry, I was rambling. Join us?”

 

Shouto’s eyes were wide with surprise but a small smile tugged at his lips,

 

“Explain what the plan is first?”

 

Izuku nodded,

 

“Right! So, basically, once we’re older and have more resources, influence, standing, and help we plan on taking over the government. Or, at least, tearing it down so a new system can rise. Both me and Hitoshi have faced quirkism due to how the current system runs, and, let’s be honest, it’s not good. The way Heroes are portrayed and the way the Hero Commission runs makes it clear it’s all for popularity, money, power, and control. Murder might get involved, it might not, I honestly don’t know enough to know for sure. You in?”



Shouto’s smile widened,

 

“Absolutely.”

 

Izuku beamed and wrapped his arms around Shouto in a hug. The other boy’s eyes widened but he returned it quickly, albeit hesitantly. Hitoshi chuckled as he made his way over to the two, making it to them when Izuku pulled away. 

 

“Welcome to the team.”

 

Hitoshi held out his hand for Shouto to shake and, after a moment, he did. Izuku smiled as he stooped down in the water and, when Shouto and Hitoshi looked at him, he flung his arms into the air, splashing them both and soaking them with water. The two stood still for a second, stunned before Hitoshi stooped down too.

 

“You’re gonna pay for that!”

 

Izuku laughed as he tried, and failed, to get away from Hitoshi before he got splashed. Shouto chuckled as he joined in, splashing both Izuku and Hitoshi. The three splashed around in the stream for hours, getting more than soaked. When they were tired, and the sun was starting to set, they waded out of the stream and back onto shore. They put on their shoes and shirts before starting to make their way through the trees, following the same path they had taken to the stream. 

 

“Hey, Izuku?”

Izuku raised his head and turned his attention to Shouto.


“Yeah?”

“I was just wondering why you’re out here. You don’t have to tell me, of course.”

 

Hitoshi nodded,

 

“Yeah, actually, now that I think about it I don’t know either.”

 

Izuku huffed.

 

“Will, I don’t know why you’re out here either Hitoshi.”

 

The boy shrugged,

 

“Then we’ll take turns. You go first.”

 

“Yeah, yeah. My parents became abusive alcoholics after we found out I was quirkless. I wasn’t being fed enough and I was near constantly injured. School wasn’t any better since I was bullied by the teachers and the students so I decided to leave and test my chances on the streets. Your turn.”

 

“Alright. Since my quirk was perceived as villainess my parents didn’t want me so they shipped me off to an orphanage. The staff members treated me like I was lesser and urged the other kids to do the same. I was ridiculed, beaten, locked in closets. School was pretty much the same and I was running from bullies when you found me. I thought going with you would be a good escape.”

 

Izuku nodded,


“Makes sense.”

 

They had made it to the tree line. Izuku poked his head out and looked left and right, looking for people. When he didn’t see anyone he led the others out of the woods. They were quiet until Izuku started talking.

 

“Y’know, I wonder if we could stay in a clearing somewhere in the forest for a few nights. No one really strays from the path and we’d be able to find some berries and mushrooms. Plus, the trees would provide good cover from the rain.”

 

Hitoshi nodded along and Shouto listened intently. 

 

“That’s a good idea. We can pack up in the morning and get Shouto some stuff before looking for a good place in the woods.”

 

Hitoshi agreed. Shouto nodded and they continued walking, changing the topic to how they were going to integrate Shouto into the casual training Izuku and Hitoshi had been doing for the last few weeks.

 

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 12: Planning A Break In

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

When they made it back to the alley Hitoshi and Izuku were crashing in the sun was beginning to set. Izuku and Hitoshi changed into dry clothes and Hitoshi let Shouto borrow some from his stash considering they were the closest in size. They settled into their sleeping bags. Since Izuku’s was the biggest he and Shouto were sharing. It was a little awkward but Izuku had experienced worse. 

 

“I could steal some money from my dad’s wallet if we need it.”

 

Izuku jumped, startled by the sound of Shouto’s voice.

 

“Seriously?”

That time it was Hitoshi, who had sat up in his sleeping bag. Shouto and Izuku sat up too. 

 

“Yes. It wouldn’t be hard.”

 

Izuku’s expression contorted as he thought over what Shouto was suggesting.

 

“But we can’t risk you going back. What if he never lets you out again?”

 

Shouto shrugs,

 

“We could just break in. I know how to bypass all of the security measures he has installed.”

 

Both Izuku’s and Hitoshi’s faces lit up in a mix of mischief and anticipation.

 

“Alright. We can plan more in the morning, though. We have a lot to do tomorrow so getting some sleep would be good.”

 

Hitoshi and Shouto nodded, agreeing with Izuku’s statement.

 

“Sounds good. Wake up early?”

 

Hitoshi asked. Izuku nodded and the three settled back into their sleeping bags. Shouto and Izuku turned so they were facing away from each other. Izuku tried his best to calm the excitement and anxiety that filled him when he thought about everything they had to do the next day. After a while, when he knew Shouto had fallen asleep and assumed Hitoshi had too, Izuku finally fell asleep. 




When Izuku woke up the sun hadn’t risen. He yawned and stretched as he sat up in his sleeping bag. When he looked to his right he saw Shouto starting to wake up as well. He climbed out of the sleeping bag and picked up his bag. While he was unzipping it and starting to dig out rations for the morning Shouto sat up, stretching his arms. Both Hitoshi and Shouto climbed out of their sleeping bags as Izuku was producing the rations from his bag. The three ate their rations quickly and started packing up their camp as the sun started to rise.

 

Once everything was packed away they left the alley.

 

“So, should we set up camp in the forest first or do something else?”

 

Hitoshi asked. Izuku hummed.

 

“I think we should set up the camp first. It’ll be easier to break into Endeavor’s house without our bags.”

 

Hitoshi and Shouto nodded in agreement. They were silent as they walked the rest of the way to the park. When they reached the forest they started wandering around. They walked to what they assumed was the center of the woods before they started looking for a place to set up. They started looking separately while staying within each others’ line of sight.

 

After an hour or two of searching, Hitoshi called out.

 

“Hey! I think I found a good place!”

 

Izuku and Shouto ran over to see what Hitoshi had found. Hidden by a thick ring of trees was a nice, grassy clearing. The area was small and there were a few different coloured wildflowers scattered in the grass. Izuku smiled,

 

“It’s perfect!” 

 

Shouto nodded, 

 

“We should set up quickly.”

 

Izuku and Hitoshi nodded in agreement and they filed into the clearing. They needed to go single-file so they could fit through the gaps in the trees. There wasn’t much sun, the wildflowers only grew where small beams of light streamed through. They set up their sleeping bags in a neat row, leaving a place in the middle where Shouto’s would go. Once they had everything set up Hitoshi and Izuku sat down in front of Shouto on the grass. Izuku had one of his notebooks out, ready to scribble down everything Shouto said. He already had a map of the outside of the house drawn across two pages and another two set aside for a map of the inside. Before he started explaining each of the security measures Endeavor had in place Shouto helped Izuku fill out the map of the inside as best as he could. 

 

Once the map was done Shouto settled back into his sitting position, leaning forward slightly so he could see the map. Currently, the notebook was flipped to the map of the house’s exterior. Shouto pointed at different points of the house as he spoke. 

 

“There are cameras here, here, here, and here.”

 

Izuku nodded, drawing squares where Shouto pointed.


“There’s a blind spot here but if we take that route the only entrance will be one of the windows, which are locked from the inside and have alarms attached to them.”

 

Izuku nodded, adding more details to the map. 

 

“The only things with control of the system are Endeavor’s phone, his laptop, his desk computer, and an emergency panel in the training room.”

 

Izuku nodded, making notes on a different page. Hitoshi raised a brow,

 

“If the only ways to access the system are either always with Endeavor or inside the building we need to get into, how are we going to get inside?”

 

Izuku nodded slowly, the eraser side of his pencil in his mouth. Shouto pointed to the roof of the building,

 

“Simple. There’s nothing on the roof, no alarms, no cameras, no motion sensors. There are only cameras on the inside of the house but we can access the training room from the roof.” 

 

Izuku nodded, adding more notes. Hitoshi watched him as he wrote, reading from beside him.

 

“Alright. But how are we going to get on the roof in the first place?”

 

Shouto pointed to a tree beside the house.


“Well, if you know how to climb trees it should be rather easy.”

 

Hitoshi nodded,

 

“Okay. So we ready to go?”

 

Izuku shook his head,

 

“We still need to make sure there’s no one home when we go.”

 

“That won’t be a problem.”

 

Shouto said.


“Both Fuyumi and Natsuo are in school and all of Endeavor’s shifts start in the afternoon and end late evening. We’d be fine to go now.”

 

Izuku nodded,

 

“Alright, then we’ll leave now. Lead us there?”

Izuku looked up at Shouto,

 

“Of course.”

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 13: Breaking And Entering Is Surprisingly Easy

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku, Hitoshi, and Shouto walked down to the train station, getting off at a station a few blocks away from the Todoroki estate. They weaved through crowds as they walked down the street, careful to stay together. When they reached the sidewalk in front of the house they snuck around the fence to the back of the house. Izuku cupped his hands, allowing Hitoshi to step into them, using them to boost himself over the fence. When Hitoshi had dropped to the other side of the fence Shouto did the same, being careful not to fall on Hitoshi. 


Izuku took a few steps back and ran forward at the fence, jumping so he could grab the top and pull himself over. When he fell he landed in a crouch. Shouto waved the other two over to follow him to the tree a few yards away. They stuck close to the fence in order to avoid the few cameras lining the outside of the house, making it to the tree quickly. Shouto climbed up first, showing the other two the branches to use to make it to the top. Izuku followed behind with Hitoshi behind him. Shouto jumped the short distance from the last branch to the roof, waving the other two to do the same. Izuku was able to do it without any issue, keeping his balance. Hitoshi hesitated on the branch for a moment before jumping. He stumbled, nearly falling off the roof, but Izuku and Shouto both grabbed one of his arms, stabilizing him before they continued. 

 

Shouto led them to the left edge of the roof, right above a balcony that ran along the wall. The three jumped down onto the balcony, landing as best as they could. Shouto led them down to a door in the corner, opening it carefully. He held it open so the other two could enter first before following after them, closing the door behind him carefully. 

 

Izuku and Hitoshi stood to the side while Shouto made his way to a panel in the wall. It was camouflaged with the wallpaper, the only sign it was there being a faint outline that would be easy to miss. 


Shouto opened the panel, revealing a number keypad attached to a small screen. He put in the code and the panel beeped, a light in the bottom left corner turning green. Shouto closed the panel and turned back to the other two, a mischievous smile on his face.

 

“The cameras should be off now.”

 

Smiles spread across Izuku and Hitoshi’s faces as the three left the room through a different door. They exited into an inner hall of the house. Before they split up to grab what they could and stuff it into their bags Izuku made sure he had the attention of the other two.


“Alright, grab what you can but make sure not to take anything noticeable and keep things neat. We want to keep the chances of Endeavor noticing someone was here to be as low as possible.”

 

Shouto and Hitoshi both nodded and the three split up. Each starting with different sections of the house. Izuku went forward to the house’s entry and front rooms, Hitoshi went to the left towards the house’s offices and miscellaneous rooms, and Shouto went to the right towards the bedrooms and the entrance to the basement. 

 

--------

 

Izuku hadn’t found much. Everything of value would be noticed if it was missing and things that were more out of sight and clearly not as cared about weren’t things of any value. He had managed to nab some cutlery though. They didn’t have much and it would be good to have. He’d also taken some non-perishables and things that didn’t need to be refrigerated that weren’t open.

 

After he had scoured every room for things he could steal, only finding a watch tucked away in a drawer, he went back to the training room with his bag of food and cutlery to wait for the others.

 

--------

 

Hitoshi had found quite a few valuable things, a watch, some yen that had been thrown in a drawer, a pair of expensive blue-tooth headphones, an old phone tucked away in a junk drawer, and a credit card in the same drawer. The card was most likely cancelled and wouldn’t work but, with what little Hitoshi knew about Endeavor, he thought there was a small chance the card worked. 

 

He had been looking for a while and, since these were the only things he found to take, he went back to the training room to wait for the others.

 

--------

 

Shouto had found a few things in the bedrooms, some earrings, a necklace, and an old video game console that had been collecting dust in Natsuo’s closet for years. He felt a little bad taking his siblings’ things but he didn’t think they’d mind. But if they did it wasn’t like he was ever going to see them again. Hell, it wasn’t like he ever saw them anyway.

 

He still felt bad, though.

 

He hadn’t spent much time in the basement. The only things down there were the washer, dryer, and a closet where they kept their cleaning supplies. Though, he did take an unused box of latex gloves from the cleaning closet. They would have to move back to an alley at some point, there were bound to be things they didn’t want to touch with their bare hands.

 

Having exhausted all the places he could think to look Shouto went back up to the training room to wait for the others. 

 

--------

 

Izuku hadn’t been waiting more than five minutes when Hitoshi came back, Shouto only a couple of minutes behind him. They climbed out of the open window and back out onto the balcony. Shouto made a small platform out of ice to lift them up so they could climb back onto the roof. He leaned over the edge, hovering his hand just above the ice block. Hitoshi and Izuku stood nearby to make sure he didn’t fall while he melted the ice as much as he could before they left. 

 

They jumped back to the tree, taking turns jumping from the roof and grabbing the nearest branch to use to climb the limbs of the tree to the ground. Once all three of them were on the ground they followed the same path they took before, quickly making their way back to the street. Once they were on the sidewalk they split up, deciding that it was a little suspicious for them to be walking around with their bags half-full coming from the Todoroki estate. Before they split, Izuku gave his bag to Hitoshi to take back to the woods. Siting that he was going to go grab a few things for Shouto. Hitoshi agreed and him and Shouto started heading back to the woods while Izuku left for the nearest store carrying something they needed.

Notes:

obligatory author diary entry!
I'm going to work with my mom today so I'll be at the library from 1-5. I'll also be going camping next week/this week. We leave Sunday and I'll be brought back and exchanged for my mom on Wednesday so everyone else can come back Friday. I'm hoping nothing goes wrong like it has the past few times I've been camping but we'll be there with a few other family members so it should go fine.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 14: Hair Dye And Makeup

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku met the other two back in their clearing a few hours later, his arms laden with things and his pockets full. Hitoshi stepped forward to relieve his arms, Izuku smiling in thanks as he made his way over to his sleeping bag, collapsing onto it. Hitoshi found the new sleeping bag in the small pile of things and unrolled it, laying it out in the empty spot between his and Izuku’s bags. 

 

From where it was lying Izuku took out the things in his pockets. He pulled out two bottles of black hair dye, an application brush, and a pair of rubber gloves you would normally use for cleaning. Hitoshi took the things from beside him and put them in the new bag that had been in the pile with the sleeping bag. Also in the pile was a change of clothes and a hoodie that was a few sizes too big for any of them. Hitoshi put the hair-dye supplies, the clothes, and the hoodie into the new bag before handing it over to Shouto. The other boy took it, holding it close as he sat down on his sleeping bag. Hitoshi followed suit, sitting down on his as well.

 

The three sat (and lay) in silence for a while, listening to the rustle of the tree leaves in the wind. They had been sitting like that for a while before Izuku sat up, stretching. The sun was low in the sky, so much so that they could no longer see it due to the canopy of the trees. 

 

“Alright,”

Izuku said.

“We won’t have as much daylight here as we used to because of the trees. We should eat dinner and get ready for bed now so we won’t have to in the dark.”

 

Hitoshi and Shouto nodded in agreement. Hitoshi dug through his bag for rations, which he handed out. They ate quickly and quietly, tucking any garbage into their respective bags before pulling out their hoodies and taking off their shoes. By the time they were each tucked inside their sleeping bags, the lighting in the clearing had significantly darkened despite the relatively light sky and the fact that it was likely still early to mid-evening.

 

They each fell asleep in time, though Hitoshi was the last to do so. Eventually, all three of them were asleep, eyes closed and breaths even.



Hitoshi was the first to wake up that morning. The sky was light but the clearing was still dark, only small rays of growing sun seeping in. He rubbed his eyes, trying to wake himself up more. It took his eyes a few moments to adjust to the lighting but when they did he busied himself with getting ready for the day while he waited for the others to wake up.

 

--------

 

Shouto was the next to wake, stretching as he sat up in his bag. He rubbed his eyes, looking around to see Hitoshi zipping up his duffel bag. He climbed out of his sleeping bag, starting to pull off his hoodie when he saw Izuku starting to stir.

 

--------

 

Izuku rubbed his eyes before he had even sat up, trying to rub away the sleep. When he did sit up it was to see Hitoshi already ready and Shouto in the process of getting ready for the day. The clearing was still dark, though it was getting lighter by the minute. Izuku climbed out of his sleeping bag, stretching as he did so. He unzipped his duffel bag, pulled off his hoodie, and stuffed it inside. He pulled out the morning’s rations and the three ate in silence. When they were done, and the garbage was put away and they sat down in a circle in the grass below their sleeping bags.

 

“Alright,”

 

Hitoshi started,

 

“What are today’s plans?”

Izuku shrugged,

 

“Nothing too crazy. One of us takes Shouto down to the gym so we can use the bathroom to dye his hair. And the other steals some concealer or something close enough to his shade that we can use it to cover his scar. Then we have some time to kill.”

 

Both Hitoshi and Shouto nodded. Hitoshi volunteered to steal the makeup, which left Izuku to take Shouto to the gym. They each grabbed their duffel bags and, due to a last-minute idea of Shouto’s, rolled up their sleeping bags and tucked them into hollows in nearby trees. 

 

When they reached the treeline of the forest they split up. Hitoshi left for the right, where the nearest ¥100 store was, while Izuku and Shouto went left, heading for the nearby gym. 

 

--------


When Izuku and Shouto reached the gym they walked through the sliding glass doors with purpose, smiling at the woman at the front desk. She smiled back at them, turning back to the work she was doing on her computer. Izuku was familiar with this gym, it was where he had met up with a few of his companions over the years, training and whatnot. There hadn’t been many trips, seeing as the companions with money for a gym membership were mainly low-level villains, but he had made friends with the staff enough for them to let him roam as he pleased as long as he didn’t bother any patrons. He didn’t use the gym often, though, preferring to work out through parkour and sparring with others. He also didn’t want to risk running into his father, who jumped from gym to gym occasionally after the new year. 

 

Izuku led Shouto down to the bathrooms, holding the door open for him and locking it once he had stepped inside. The bathroom had stalls lining the side wall, sinks lining the wall adjacent to them. Above the sinks was a large mirror running across the length of the wall. Soap dispensers lined the wall at intervals below the mirror and between the sinks. 

 

Izuku put his bag down beside the first sink, waving his hand to indicate that Shouto should do the same. He did, sliding his bag down beside Izuku’s. 

 

“Get out the hair dye and the supplies, please.”

 

Shouto nodded, crouching down to do just that while Izuku moved a few sinks down, turning on the tap and putting his hand in the running water to test the temperature. Satisfied he turned off the tap and instead walked over to a door set into the far wall, hidden behind a small, pillar-like portion of the wall. He opened it, pulling out a stool and setting it in front of the sink. 

 

Shouto walked over, carrying the box dye, a small plastic bowl, the gloves, and the application brush. Izuku indicated the sink to the right of the one he had chosen and Shouto dumped the items inside of it. He then sat down on the stool in front of the sink as Izuku walked up to the other one, pulling on the gloves and opening the box.

 

--------

 

It hadn’t taken very long for Hitoshi to reach the Hundred Yen store. He pushed the door open, returning the smile of the cashier as he made his way to the cosmetics aisle. He looked over the concealers and foundations, trying to find one that matched Shouto’s tone. He grabbed two of each, tucking them away in his bag as discreetly as possible. He pulled his phone out of his bag, opening some random app and scrolling through it as he made his way through the aisles. 

 

When he had made it back to the entrance the cashier stopped him briefly,

 

“Didn’t find what you were looking for?”

 

Hitoshi shook his head and the cashier smiled,

 

“Alright. Come again.”

 

She bowed and Hitoshi did the same, walking through the door and down the street. He took a few wrong turns before taking the correct path back to the park.

 

--------

 

It had taken a few hours but eventually, Izuku had finished dying Shouto’s hair. It was damp with water but the colour had stopped bleeding and now it was entirely black, with no signs of red or white. When Shouto saw himself in the mirror, he smiled, though it was small. Izuku met his eyes in the mirror, smiling back as he started packing away their things. He threw away the gloves, empty box of dye, the bowl, and the brush in a trash can tucked in a corner. He picked up the stool, stashed it back in the closet, and picked up his and Shouto’s bags, handing the other boy his. 

 

They slung their bags over their shoulders, double-checking they had everything as Izuku unlocked the door and lead Shouto back to the front so they could leave through the front doors. The secretary smiled at them as they left, something the two of them returned as they pushed the doors open and walked out onto the street.

 

--------

 

Hitoshi had been waiting in the clearing for around an hour when the other two finally came into view in the trees. Shouto’s hair had dried slightly since they left the gym and he kept pulling strands down so he could see them. Izuku and Shouto weaved through trees into the clearing, placing their bags at the foot of their sleeping bags before sitting down on them.

 

“So, how’d it go?”

Izuku asked Hitoshi. He shrugged,

 

“Alright. I got two different shades of concealer and two different shades of foundation. Wanna try ‘em?”

The last part of his sentence was directed at Shouto, who nodded, turning his body to face Hitoshi. Hitoshi reached for his bag, pulling out four different bottles. Izuku stood, sitting down in the grass at the head of Hitoshi’s sleeping bag. Hitoshi opened the first bottle, one labelled ‘concealer’ when he swore,

 

“I forgot to grab a sponge.”

 

Izuku stood again, going back to his sleeping bag and unzipping his bag. He pulled out a pair of rolled-up socks,

 

“Will this work?”

Hitoshi shrugged,

 

“Good enough.”

 

He reached out a hand, taking the bundle when Izuku was close enough. He squeezed some of the concealer onto the socks, dabbing it onto Shouto’s face. He deemed it too dark and grabbed another bottle, repeating the process. 

 

In the end, they decided that one of the bottles of foundation was close enough and they put the other three away in Izuku’s bag, who said he knew someone who would happily take the extra bottles. Hitoshi was about to hand the socks back to Izuku when he remembered they were now covered in makeup and instead tucked them away in Shouto’s bag with the bottle of foundation.

 

The sun was high in the sky now, indicating it was around noon. They still had a lot of time on their hands, time they decided to use to work out. 

 

Shouto and Hitoshi worked on the ground, doing the basics like sit-ups, jumping jacks, and burpees. Izuku joined them for stretching before going for the trees, climbing and swinging from branch to branch. 

 

--------

 

A few hours later, when the sun had started dipping behind the treeline of their clearing, they gathered in their sleeping bags, sweaty and tired.

 

“We should go down to the creek to wash off the sweat.”

 

Shouto suggested. The other two were quick to agree and the three spent their remaining hours before nightfall washing in the creek, though they were too tired to play much.

 

When they made it back to their clearing they ate quickly, tucking into their sleeping bags as the sunlight died, replaced by the dull light of the moon. They said goodnight to each other, falling asleep faster than they had the night before.

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry.
Guess who had the worst panic attack they've ever had and was brought home from camping literally the day after they arrived! It's me. I got barely any sleep, maybe an hour to two, three at most. I am now filled with guilt as the entire reason I went was to watch my cousins, which I can no longer do, and I was supposed to be exchanged with my mom on Wednesday but now that can't happen as it's a six-hour commute total. Anyway, the update schedule for the week will be the same as always.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 15: Hide-And-Seek And Peeled Leaves

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku was the first to wake this time. The moon was still in the sky, dipping so it was just touching the horizon. He didn’t rush as he got ready. Changing clothes, readying the morning rations, and looking over the notebook containing their training regimens. 

 

Shouto awoke while Izuku was getting out his notebook. The two exchanged quite good mornings, trying not to wake Hitoshi. Shouto got ready quickly, sitting down beside Izuku to read over the notebook with him.

 

Hitoshi woke up just as Izuku was closing and putting away the notebook. The sun had just risen, barely above the horizon. Hitoshi changed quickly and sat down with the other two so they could eat together. When they finished their breakfast they packed away their garbage, like always.

 

Once all of them had finished eating they grabbed their duffel bags and sat in a circle, finally ready to count up everything they had managed to steal from the Todoroki estate. Izuku showed the other two the cutlery and food, not bothering to take out the cutlery but dividing the food so they all had even rations.

 

Izuku was excited when he saw what Hitoshi had nabbed. The yen was immediately distributed evenly between the three and the headphones and phone were put off to the side, starting a pile they called ‘Things We Can Sell’. The credit card was discarded at first but when Shouto saw it he picked it up.

 

“Why are you discarding this?”

 

Hitoshi shrugged,

 

“I found it in a drawer filled with junk. It’s probably been cancelled, right?”

Shouto shook his head,

 

“No. Endeavor doesn’t pay much attention to his spending. He has people in his agency for that but they don’t pay much attention either. We may be able to get a cheap apartment and some groceries every once in a while if we’re careful.”

 

Izuku’s eyes widened,

 

“Seriously?! How rich is Endeavor?”

 

Shouto shrugs,

 

“I believe he has his own island somewhere.”

 

Hitoshi has joined Izuku in staring at Shouto in disbelief. Shouto ignores them and puts the card into one of the pockets on Izuku’s bag. Izuku gathered himself a moment later and started distributing the pile of things they could sell evenly between their three bags.


“We should go down to the Market tonight to sell all of this stuff. Until then, we have time to kill.”

 

The three were silent as they tried to come up with something to do.

 

“Wanna play hide-and-seek in the trees?”

Hitoshi asked. Izuku and Shouto were quick to agree and the three quickly packed up camp, tucking their things away in various tree hollows. They wandered a little deeper into the woods until they found a large tree with darker bark than the others surrounding it. The tree was covered in various claw marks, ranging in size and shape which caused it to stand out even more. They decided that the tree would both be where the seeker counted and where the hiders went when they were found. 

 

Hitoshi was picked to be the first seeker through a game of rock paper scissors and he leaned his head against the tree, cushioning it with his arms and squeezing his eyes shut. As soon as Hitoshi started counting Izuku and Shouto ran off in different directions, Shouto weaving through the trees and Izuku climbing them. Hitoshi counted to thirty before lifting his head from the tree. He looked up to see if he could see either of the two in the trees nearby but, of course, he couldn’t. Instead, he picked a direction, taking off as fast as he could while trying to make sure he didn’t trip over any roots.

 

--------

 

Izuku had found a big tree with low branches to climb up. He had made it pretty high, deciding to stop near the middle of the tree. The branch he was on was particularly thick and he sat down on it carefully, swinging his legs back and forth. He got bored quickly and plucked a leaf from one of the branches above him. Carefully, he started pulling off pieces of the leaf, trying to leave the vein-like piece intact. 

 

--------

 

Shouto had been planning on finding a tree to climb, but, instead, he found a deep hole tucked in the large gap between two roots. Peering inside he decided to find out if he could fit. He lowered his feet into the hole and pushed himself inside slowly. In what felt like no time at all he was curled up in the hole, pushed up against one of the side walls to try and avoid being spotted. To keep himself busy he picked up a twig that was laying in front of him and started drawing in the dirt. 

 

--------

 

Hitoshi had been searching for a few minutes now and had yet to find anyone. He was about to backtrack and take a different path when something fell on his arm. It took him a moment to realize what it was, a small piece of leaf. Looking up he could just barely make Izuku sitting on one of the branches of the tree in front of Hitoshi, looking down at something in his hand. Izuku dropped something down and it landed on Hitoshi’s face, just above his eye.

 

“Izuku!”

He called. The other boy jumped, just barely keeping himself from falling by grabbing onto the trunk of the tree. When he looked down at Hitoshi he smiled sheepishly. 


“You found me!”

 

Hitoshi raised a brow,

 

“You dropped leaf on me!”

 

Izuku’s cheeks turned pink,

 

“Sorry!”

 

Hitoshi rolled his eyes,

 

“Come down! I’m tired of yelling and you have to go back to the tree!”

 

Izuku nodded, scrambling down the tree faster than Hitoshi would have been able to. When he got to the bottom Hitoshi saw a pristinely peeled leaf in his hand.


“Why did you peel a leaf?”

Izuku shrugged,

 

“Why not?”

Hitoshi had been planning on asking Izuku if he had any hints as to where Shouto was when the boy took off in the direction Hitoshi had come from. Sighing, Hitoshi followed him, though at a much slower pace. When he made it back to the main tree Izuku was sitting against it, his original peeled leaf beside him and one he was now working on in his hand. Wordlessly, Izuku pointed in one of the directions Hitoshi hadn’t picked. Nodding, Hitoshi started running in that direction, assuming that Izuku was pointing him in the direction Shouto had taken. 

 

He didn’t notice the sly smirk on Izuku’s face as he lowered his hand. 

 

--------

 

Hitoshi was starting to think Izuku had lied to him. He had been searching in the direction he had indicated for around ten minutes now and hadn’t found anything. He had looked up all the trees and even stooped down to look in what he hoped were abandoned dens but he hadn’t even found a hint that Shouto had been there. 

 

When Hitoshi made it back to the main tree he glared at Izuku, who was now working on his third leaf. Izuku looked up and smiled like nothing had happened before turning back to his leaf. Hitoshi rolled his eyes but he had a small smile on his face.

 

--------

 

Hitoshi finally found Shouto drawing in a hole seven minutes later. He poked his head into the hole, startling Shouto, causing him to drop his stick.

 

“Found you.”

 

Shouto nodded, slowly uncurling from his spot against the wall. Hitoshi backed away from the hole to give the other room to climb out. 

 

“Have you found Izuku yet?”

Shouto asked. Hitoshi nodded,

 

“Yeah, he’s back at the tree peeling leaves.”

 

Shouto tilted his head,

 

“Peeling leaves?”

Hitoshi smirked,

 

“You’ll see.”

 

--------

 

When they made it back to the tree Izuku’s pile of peeled leaves had grown by two. He looked up when they returned, smiling in greeting. Shouto sat down in front of him,

 

“Hitoshi said you’re peeling leaves?”

Izuku nodded,

 

“Yeah! See?”

 

He picked up the newest of the peeled leaves.


“I carefully pick off all the leaf parts until only the vein bits remain. Wanna try?”

Shouto nodded and grabbed a leaf from a nearby tree. He sat down on the left side of the tree, leaning against it as he started to peel his leaf. Sighing, Hitoshi grabbed his own leaf and sat on the right side of the tree.

 

--------

 

They ended up peeling leaves until it was time for them to start heading back so they could get ready to head out. All three of them had a large pile of peeled leaves though Izuku’s was the tallest. They brought their collections back to the clearing and tucked them away in tree hollows before making sure they were ready to leave for the Market.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry.
I've been having braided apple turnovers from Costco for breakfast the past few days and I couldn't be happier. Does anyone else peel leaves? I do it a lot when I'm bored outside but I can never get the vein piece to stay intact.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 16: The Illegal Market Is A Surprisingly Long Walk Away

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

The sun was setting as they walked. They each had their duffel bags slung across their chests, occasionally banging against them. The Market was a far walk from the park as it took place deep within the Red Light district. By the time they had made it to one of the few entrances, the moon had risen and their feet hurt. 

 

There was no one in front of the door they were nearing. The door had no locks nor did it have one of those sliding windows you often saw in movies. There was a stain a few feet in front of the door though and Izuku signalled for the other two to stop before crossing it. A few moments after they stopped, Shouto and Hitoshi both giving Izuku confused looks, a figure dropped down from the roof of the building. 

 

He landed in front of the three smoothly, staring at them for a second after righting himself. His frame was lean and his clothes were dark but he had positioned himself so that no light hit him, hiding the rest of his appearance in shadows.

 

“Hey there Izuku, you and your friends there got stuff to sell?”

Izuku nodded,

 

“Yup. Let us in please?”

 

The three could feel the smirk on the man’s face,

 

“You got the password?”

 

Izuku sighed,

 

“We both know there isn’t a password.”

 

Hitoshi could just make out the man shrugging,

 

“There is tonight.”

 

“Oh, how could I forget.”

 

Both Hitoshi and Shouto could hear the sarcasm in Izuku’s voice.

 

“The password is, ‘let us in or I’m going to give the police all the information I have on all of your secrets and crimes.’”

 

“Jeez, little dude, head on in.”

 

The man stepped to the side, opening the door for them. Izuku led the other two into the building, thanking the man before stepping inside. Hitoshi and Shouto followed his example and the door closed behind them. 

 

“Were you really going to do all that if he didn’t let us enter?”

 

Shouto asked,

 

“No, but him doing the whole password thing is part of our routine at this point and I try my best to surprise him each time.”

 

Shouto and Hitoshi nodded and took a moment to look around the building they had entered. Honestly, it wasn’t much. It certainly didn’t look like a market. There were no other people and no stalls. The room they were in likely wouldn’t be big enough to hold more than a small pop-up shop. There was a door on the wall across from them and one to the right but nothing else of note.

 

Izuku walked towards the door in front of them and gripped the knob with both hands. Instead of turning it, he pulled, seeming to struggle for a moment before the door slowly swung open. As soon as the door was fully open Izuku kicked down a door-stop attached to it and let it go. Behind the door was what looked like an old cage elevator.

 

Hitoshi and Shouto rushed to Izuku’s side and the boy pulled open the door of the elevator.

 

“Step on inside! I swear it’s safe.”

 

Hesitantly, Hitoshi stepped into the elevator, Shouto coming in behind him. The two made a conscious effort to stay away from what looked like a lever . Izuku came in behind the two, pulling the door closed behind him. He stepped right up to what Hitoshi had thought was a lever and started turning it counterclockwise. The elevator shuttered before it slowly started lowering.

 

The elevator shook occasionally, scaring Hitoshi and Shouto enough that they sidled up to Izuku, though both made sure they weren’t touching the boy in case they jostled him, and, in turn, the mechanism lowering the elevator. Eventually, the elevator shuddered to a stop and they felt it land on a hard surface. Izuku reached forward and around Hitoshi to reach the handle of the elevator door. He pushed it to the side harshly, causing it to bang against the wall and bounce back slightly.

 

Izuku gestured for the other two to exit before he did. They stepped out into a crowd, there were people everywhere, standing at stalls, walking down the aisles, standing on boxes waving newspapers in their hands. It was loud too, so much so that neither of them could make out any particular words or voices.

Izuku stepped out behind them, closing the door to the elevator. He pressed a button on the wall next to it and the elevator shot upwards. Izuku had a smile on his face as he looked out at the sea of people,

“A few rules for while you’re here.”


He said. Immediately, Hitoshi and Shouto turned their attention from the bustling people to Izuku,

 

“No one pays more than one hundred five thousand for a piece of jewelry and even that’s a bit of a stretch. If they offer you any more the money’s fake. Haggling is encouraged but if someone has a red sign on their stall it means all their prices are set, no negotiation. Alternatively, if they have a green sign then none of their items even have starting prices and they're more than willing to talk pricing. Keep an eye on your surroundings, pick-pockets are common. Most importantly, the use of quirks is strictly banned . Got it?”

Hitoshi and Shouto nodded,

 

“Good! Let’s go.”

 

Izuku weaved his way into the crowd, Shouto and Hitoshi following closely behind him. Izuku soon stopped at a stall lined with different necklaces, rings, bracelets, and earrings. He dug around in his duffel bag for a moment and pulled up the jewellery Shouto managed to nab. The woman manning the stall leaned forward and gingerly took the pieces from Izuku.

 

“Hmmmmm. Quite the collection you boys have got here. Who’d you get it from?”

 

She raised a brow and looked down at Izuku who was smiling up at her,


“You don’t want to know. Plausible deniability and all that.”

 

The woman shrugged,

 

“Fair enough.”

 

She set the pieces down on her counter,


“I can offer you 422,398 yen.”

 

Izuku nodded, 

 

“Deal.”

 

The woman reached below her stall and pulled up a metal box. She cracked it open and started counting out a stack of bills. When she was done, she handed the stack to Izuku. He counted it again and looked closely at a few of the bills. Eventually, he unzipped his bag and shoved the stack inside,

 

“Thank you.”

 

The woman nodded and Izuku started walking away, rejoining the crowd. Shouto and Hitoshi followed behind him, staying close. They stopped at another stall lined with a few old game consoles and game cartridges. Izuku gestured for Shouto to unzip his bag. He did so and took out the old console he had taken from his brother. He handed it to the person manning the stall who took it carefully. 

 

“It looks like it’s in good condition, aside from the dust, of course. I don’t know if it works and I don’t care to open it up right now soooo… I can offer you 10,500 yen.”

 

Izuku shrugged,

 

“Good enough.”

 

They reached below their desk and pulled out a metal box like the one the woman before had. They took out both a ten-thousand and a five-hundred- yen bill and handed them to Izuku. He looked both of them over before tucking them into his bag with the other bills,

 

“Thanks.”

 

The person nodded and Izuku started leading Hitoshi and Shouto back the way they had come. They joined a short line of people waiting for use of an elevator though, soon, they were in the machine and rising up to the ground floor. They walked home in silence, all three too tired to talk. 

 

When they finally got back to the clearing they just managed to eat and roll out their sleeping bags before they were asleep, the moon low in the sky.

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry.
Nothing too exciting this week, just my school orientation.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 17: A New Apartment

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku is the first one awake in the morning. He goes through the normal routine, changing and preparing rations. He waits until the other two are awake, finished eating, and Shouto had covered his scar in the foundation before gathering them in a circle on the grass.

 

“We need to find an apartment.”

 

Hitoshi and Shouto nodded in agreement. An apartment would be useful, even if it was cheap. They wouldn’t need to hide their things in tree hollows and running water would be nice. Plus, clouds were gathering in the sky for the first time in weeks. They were dark and thick, promising rain. 

 

“I’ll go out looking with Hitoshi. Shouto, you go out to grab some cleaning supplies. The nearby hundred-yen store should have some good bleach and such for cheap. I have a feeling we’ll need it.”

 

Shouto nodded and they split up the resources they would need for the day. Izuku and Hitoshi took Endeavor’s credit card and 200,000 yen. Shouto took the remaining 232,898 yen. He certainly wouldn’t be spending all of it on supplies but they didn’t want to leave any of it behind in the clearing. They didn’t plan on coming back. Each of them had their duffel bags packed with all of their belongings. 

 

They trekked through the trees, trying to stay in the thicker areas in case it started raining. They didn’t want to be soaked just yet. When they exited the tree line the clouds were thicker than before, covering the sun. The air was damp and the wind blew harshly. The park was empty and silent, adding to the ambience. They split when they stepped onto the sidewalk, Shouto heading in the direction of the store and Izuku and Hitoshi making their way into the Red Light district. 

 

--------

 

Shouto didn’t have any trouble finding the store. The sign was big and bold, reading “Hundred Yen” in clear kanji. He had a bit of trouble finding the cleaning supplies aisle but once he figured out that there were signs telling you what was in each aisle he found it quickly. The next problem was all the options. There were lots of different brands as well as different cleaners for different surfaces. One said it was specifically for wood while another said it was “all-purpose”, whatever that meant. 

 

Luckily, he had grabbed a basket at the front. He grabbed two different glass cleaners, a wood cleaner, an “all-purpose” cleaner, a bathroom cleaner, two things of bleach, and a disinfectant. At the end of the aisle, he found a full set of cleaning brushes as well as a large container of sponges. He grabbed both, throwing them on top of his large collection of bottles and jugs. He also grabbed a box of masks. If they were going to be dealing with mold like Izuku thought they would be useful.

 

He accidentally wandered into another aisle of the store when he was trying to make his way to the checkout and found a wood carving kit. He thought it sounded interesting and like something that the others might like too. He grabbed a kit and proceeded to finally find the checkout. Being careful not to drop anything as he made his way over.

 

The cashier gave Shouto a few odd looks as she scanned and bagged his purchases but she didn’t say anything. His total came out to ¥1,200 which he paid happily, taking his bags before walking out through the sliding doors. He made his way back to the train station. Izuku and Hitoshi had agreed to meet him there when they found and paid for an apartment. 

 

--------

 

Izuku and Hitoshi wandered for a while, occasionally glancing up at the sky before they found a place with a vacancy. It was run down and crumbling slightly, one of the windows was boarded up from the outside, and the knob on the front door was a little rusty. It was an apartment building so it was tall with a fenced-in roof but, even from the ground, Izuku and Hitoshi could see holes in the chain links.

 

They knocked on the front door, as instructed by the sign hanging next to it. After a moment, a sleazy-looking man in a grease-stained white button-down opened the door.


“What do you brats want?”

Izuku smiled kindly and Hitoshi just stared blankly at the man. He decided then that he’d let Izuku do the talking.

 

“We’re here regarding the vacancy, sir.”

 

The man raised a thick brow. Hitoshi couldn’t help but notice that he was balding. The cheap toupe he was wearing didn’t do anything to hide it. He also had a feeling that it was homemade.

 

“Oh, yeah? And why would two kids want an apartment? Can ya even pay for it?”

 

Izuku smiled,

 

“Actually there’s three of us, sir. And I assure you we can pay.”

 

The man scoffed. 

 

“And how am I supposed to believe that? You’re, what, ten?”

 

Izuku unzipped his duffel bag and pulled out Endeavor’s card,

 

“Do you accept card?”

The man turned away, walking further into the building. Izuku took the moment to see what he could of the foyer while Hitoshi kept his eyes on the man. The carpet on the floor was torn and stained in places, there was a front desk, though no one was manning it. There were no elevators, only a staircase off to the left. There was a plant in the corner but it was wilted and dying, if not already dead.

 

After a moment the man came back with an old, dusty card machine in hand. 


“Plug it in here. I’ll charge ya an insurance fee, for now, just to see if ya can do it.”

 

Izuku inserted the card into the machine after making sure the man wasn’t charging them too much. After a moment, the machine beeped, telling him the transaction had gone to remove his card. He did so and the man pulled the machine back, looking at it. He sighed, looking annoyed.

 

“Fine. I’d rather not have kids as tenants but so long as you pay. Get inside and close the door behind you.”

 

He stepped into the building, heading for the front desk. Izuku and Hitoshi followed, Hitoshi closing the door as asked. They followed the man to the desk, stopping a few feet away from it. He rummaged around in one of the desk’s drawers for a moment before coming up with a key that had a fob attached to it. He handed the key to Izuku,

 

“Here. Room’s on the third floor. I live there,”

 

He pointed to a door in the top-left corner,

 

“Don’t bother me unless it’s to pay rent or the building is on fire. If someone dies and you find them in their room don’t call the cops, I’ll deal with it when I get the time.”

 

Izuku nodded though Hitoshi looked a little scared.

 

“Thank you, sir.”

 

The man ignored him, instead going into the room he had indicated as being his. Izuku shrugged,

 

“Alright, let’s go grab Shouto and then we can get to work.”

 

Hitoshi nodded and followed Izuku out of the building. 

 

--------

 

The rain finally started to fall as the three were walking back to the apartment building. They ended up running the last few blocks, though they still ended up soaked in the process. When they entered the building they trudged up the stairs to their floor, matching the number of one of the doors to the one on their fob. When they got inside they were immediately hit with the stench of nicotine. The walls were yellow, likely due to excessive smoking, and Izuku could see mold in at least one corner.

 

Shouto pulled the box of masks he had purchased. Izuku reached over, opening it and grabbing one for himself. Hitoshi reached over him for one and Shouto took one too. Izuku sighed,

 

“Let’s get to work.”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
My first day of school is tomorrow! As the school year progresses and more work starts to pile up chapter updates, for all of my fics, may slow or come late but I'll try my best to stay on schedule.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 18: Three Buff Men Help Them Carry A Fridge

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

It took them an entire week to clean the apartment to the point where they weren’t worried about being poisoned by their surroundings. There had been mold in almost every crevice and they had had to drag all the furniture out to the curb, including the fridge and oven. The items they couldn’t get down the stairs were pushed out the window into the alley behind the building. 

 

They hadn’t slept in the apartment while they worked, too afraid of accidentally inhaling anything. Instead, they had slept in the reception area. The man who owned the place seemed a little annoyed but didn’t tell them to stop. The other residents of the building just smiled at them and nodded in understanding. They had likely had to do the same things they were doing if the building’s condition was anything to go off of. 

 

By the time the apartment was clean enough to be safe to live in all three boys were hungry, tired, and smelled like cleaning supplies. All three had slight bags under their eyes, though Hitoshi’s were worse than the other two’s. That night, they ate their evening rations in silence before grabbing their sleeping bags from their duffel bags and laying them out in what used to be the living room. They climbed inside simultaneously, burrowing inside the bags. Just before they fell asleep they muttered quiet goodnights to each other, moonlight shining on them through the windows.

 

--------

 

In the morning, Izuku woke up to sunlight beaming down on his face. They had had to get rid of the curtains while they were cleaning the apartment due to the fact that they didn’t have the means to rid them of all the nicotine, leaving the windows uncovered. Groaning, he rolled onto his side, rubbing his eyes. Eventually, he sat up in his bag, stretching as he yawned. On either side of him, both Shouto and Hitoshi stirred, rubbing at their eyes as they sat up too. 

 

Izuku climbed out of his bag, grabbing rations and handing them out. When all three were done eating they gathered in a circle on the floor,

 

“We need furniture.”

 

Hitoshi immediately said. Izuku and Shouto nodded in agreement. 

 

“A fridge would be good to get first. We’d be able to keep fruits and vegetables fresh. 



Shouto suggested. Izuku was writing in his notebook while Hitoshi nodded along.

 

“And maybe a phone or TV or something. We should keep track of the news.”

 

The two continued to throw around suggestions while Izuku wrote in his notebook. When they were done, Izuku had comprised a list of all the suggestions in order of most to least important. Acquiring the fridge was at the top of the list so they decided that that was going to be the first thing they did that day. 

 

“We should check Dagobah beach first.”

 

Izuku said.

 

“It’s in the Musutafu district. It’s a beach covered in trash so we might be able to find a fridge that we can salvage. Maybe some other appliances too.”

 

“But how would we get it back?”

Shouto asked. Izuku shrugged,

 

“I know a few people with strength-enhancement quirks. They might be able to help.”

 

“Sounds like a plan.”

 

Hitoshi agrees. Shouto shrugs and they grab their duffel bags from where they left them in the corner of the room. They decide to leave their sleeping bags set up on the floor and climb down the stairs to the building’s ground floor. 

 

They smile at the two women in the lobby as they leave, making their way through the Red Light District to one of the underground gyms. Izuku said that the three he knew all like to work out there so it should be the first place they check. It took them a while to get there but, when they did, all three of the men were there. As soon as the three boys climbed down the stairs into the gym the men looked up from their workouts, their faces lighting up when they see Izuku.

 

“Little man! How ya been?”

 

“Did’ya get into any fights?”

“Did’ya win any fights?”

 

Izuku shook his head, making his way over to the men,

 

“No, no new fights.”

 

One of the men placed his weight back in the rack, reaching over and ruffling Izuku’s hair.


“Too bad. So, what brings you and your pals here then?”

The other two nod, returning their weights to the rack as well. Izuku smiled up at the three,

 

“We managed to get our own apartment but we had to get rid of all the furniture due to mold. We were going to try and find a fridge in Dagobah but we have no way of getting it back. I was wondering if you’d be willing to carry it for us? If we manage to find one, of course.”

 

The three men nod,

 

“Of course little man! We’d be more than willing to help. Lead the way!”

Izuku’s smile brightens, becoming blinding,

 

“Great! Let’s go.”

He turns, leading the group out of the gym. Shouto and Hitoshi walk a step behind him at his sides while the three men walk a few paces behind them, careful not to tread on their heels.

 

It doesn’t take them very long to get to the beach. When they reach one of the entrances, Shouto and Hitoshi can’t help but stare. Izuku had said the beach was covered in trash but they hadn’t thought it would be like this. There was barely any visible sand, all of it covered in various types of trash. There were piles of garbage meters high, teetering in the wind. Izuku led the six others onto the beach, the others following wearily behind him. He tells them to keep their eyes out for a fridge as they walk and not to touch any of the piles if they can manage it.

 

“They’re prone to falling.”

 

He warns. Shouto and Hitoshi exchange weary glances as they follow behind Izuku. The three men don’t seem to have any issues, their heads swivelling as they look for fridges. 

 

--------

 

It took them about two hours to find a fridge that actually looked like it might work. They searched it for mold but only found patches of rust, which was promising. The three men lifted the fridge between them, settling it on their shoulders. When they emerged back onto the streets, they got a few odd looks from civilians, though they dwindled as they got closer to the Red Light District. By the time they made it back to the building it was time for lunch. The men carried the fridge up the stairs, following the three boys. When they made it to the apartment the men set the fridge down in front of the socket the old one had taken up.

 

“Thank you so much!”

Izuku exclaimed, 

 

The three men nodded, each taking a turn to ruffle Izuku’s hair,

 

“No problem little man!”

 

“Good luck in your new apartment!”

“Bring your friends by the gym sometime! Maybe we can show the three of you some moves.”

 

Izuku nodded,

 

“I will!”

 

The three men nodded, heading out the door and down the stairs. Izuku, Hitoshi, and Shouto stood in the living room quietly for a few minutes after the door closed. They had completed their main goal for the day and no longer knew what to do.


“Wanna go to the park?”

Hitoshi asked.

 

“Yeah, sure.”

 

“Why not.”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!

I stayed home while the rest of my family went to a pool party yesterday. They went to Niagra Falls to meet up with one of my mom's old friends who was throwing the party. I chose not to go because, while I might have met these people when I was younger, I have next to no memories of them and I'd rather not go swimming with them. Plus, someone needed to be there to let the dogs out so they didn't ruin the floors or tear apart any shoes. I used the time to finish this chapter but I was also incredibly tired when I finally got it done so let's hope it's not terrible.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 19: A Bird And His Shadow

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

The walk to the park was, of course, a little longer than normal. They did their best to avoid the alleys so they wouldn’t get mugged which made their trip even longer. They each had their duffel bags, though they had left most of their funds in the apartment. They each had ¥1,080 and Shouto had Endeavor’s card, though they didn’t plan on using it. 


As they neared the park they heard shouting and started picking up their pace until they were running. When the three rounded the corner they saw four kids surrounding another with a bird head. The four kids were kicking the other, shouting insults as they did. Izuku ran towards them, Hitoshi and Shouto following close behind. 

 

“Hey! What do you think you're doing?!”

 

The four kids whirled around to face Izuku though the one they had been kicking stayed curled up in the sand, arms wrapped around his head. One of the kids stepped forward. He was a little bigger than the others and, based on the way he moved and talked, was the leader.

 

“We’re just showing the pathetic villain his place.”

 

He spat the word “villain” glaring at the kid on the ground as he did. The kid flinched, somehow curling up into a tighter ball. The leader turned his attention back to Izuku, a smirk on his face,

 

“We’re going to be heroes, y’know. We can’t let a villain run around unchecked.”

 

Izuku glared,

 

“Oh, yeah? And what makes him a villain?”

The kid scoffed,

 

“His quirk, of course. It’s something only a villain would have. It’s some kind of sentient shadow but he can’t even control it! When it first manifested he nearly destroyed in own house! Nearly killed one of his neighbours, too.”

 

Izuku stepped forward,

 

“And that makes him a villain?”

“Did you not hear anything I just said? Yeah, it does.”

 

The kid didn’t have time to say anything else before Izuku was punching him square in the face. There was a satisfying crack as his nose broke and blood started pouring down his face.

 

“What the fuck!”

 

He raised his arm, obviously trying to get a hit in on Izuku but he moved too fast. Izuku swept the kid’s feet out from under him, sending him sprawling to the ground. The kid’s three lackeys ran at Izuku, trying to tackle him, but Shouto blocked them with a wall of ice. When the three kids rounded the wall Hitoshi and Shouto kept them away from Izuku.

 

When the kid tried to get up Izuku kicked him firmly in the head. He continued to kick at the kid until he finally gave up,

 

“Fine, fine! You win! We’ll go.”


Izuku smiled, cold and sharp. He let the kid get up and call for his friends, who, upon seeing the condition he was in, fled with him. Once the four were far enough away Izuku stepped up to the kid they had been bothering, offering his hand. After a minute he looked up at Izuku and, after studying him, took his hand. Izuku pulled him up, stepping back to let him brush himself off. 

 

“Why did you help me?”

His feathers were full of sand and it was obvious he had been crying.

 

“Because you looked like you needed help.”

 

He seemed taken aback by Izuku’s answer but, after a minute of thinking, nodded,

 

“I’m Fumikage.”

Izuku smiled, kind this time.

 

“Izuku.”

 

Shouto and Hitoshi introduced themselves as well, Hitoshi trying his best to imitate Izuku’s smile while Shouto continued to stare at him blankly.

 

“Well, thank you. For helping me.”

 

Izuku nodded, though he took on a look of concern,

 

“Does that happen often?”

 

The boy nodded,

 

“I’ve found it’s difficult to come here and avoid it.”

 

Izuku nodded as he looked around the park, eyes lingering on the surrounding benches before moving on.


“Where are your parents?”

 

Fumikage shrugged,

 

“They don’t often accompany me. Where are yours?”

 

Izuku shrugged,

 

“Probably drunk in the apartment.”

 

“Trying to make a child that doesn’t have a ‘villain's quirk’ now I’m gone.”

 

“Father is likely yelling and fighting with my sister in the house. Mom would still be in the hospital.”

 

Fumikage looked a little taken aback by their answers but he schooled his expression quickly.

 

“I see. And you three have found companionship with each other?”

Izuku nodded fervently,

 

“Yup! You can join us if you like. We plan on growing our group and tweaking our plans until, eventually, we can take over the government and do our best to prevent kids like us from being treated the way we are.”

 

Fumikage just stared at Izuku, eyes wide. Before the boy could answer himself a little shadow bird emerged from his chest.

 

“You promise you won’t be mean to me or Fumi?”

Izuku nodded,

 

“Promise.”

 

The shadow looked behind Izuku to Shouto and Hitoshi, clearly waiting for them to answer. Fumikage was staring at the shadow with a scared look on his face but he didn’t say anything. After a moment, both Shouto and Hitoshi promised to. The shadow nodded, a smile stretching across its face. It started doing spins in the air next to Fumikage,

 

“Can we please go with them Fumi? They’re all so nice!”

Fumikage sighed, a soft smile on his face,

 

“I suppose. It’s not like mother and father would miss us much.”

 

Izuku’s smile was a near mirror image of the shadow’s,

 

“Perfect! C’mon, we’ll show you where we’re staying!”

 

Izuku took off at a run in the direction of both the Red Light district and their apartment. Hitoshi and Shouto followed him without hesitation, smiling. They waved for Fumikage to follow them and, after a moment, he complied, Dark Shadow trailing behind him.

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 20: Hanging Out In An Empty Apartment

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

When Izuku, Hitoshi, Shouto, and Fumikage finally made it back to the apartment building all three had bright smiles on their faces. The landlord was sitting out in the lobby talking with two other tenants when the four entered and he looked up at them briefly. He did a double take when he saw Fumikage,

 

“Are ya taking on a new roommate?”

 

Izuku nodded,

 

“Yes, sir. I hope it won’t be a problem?”

 

Izuku’s expression was one of pure innocence. Like he couldn’t possibly fathom how it could be an issue. The man looked conflicted for a moment before he sighed, schooling his expression into one that was stern and mean. 


“No, it’s not a problem. This time . Just…try not to make this a common thing.”

 

Izuku nodded,

 

“Of course! Thank you so much, sir!”

 

Izuku waved for the other three to follow him as he made his way over to the stairs. They heard the conversation between the landlord and the other tenants pick back up as they climbed the stairs. Eventually, they made it to their apartment. Izuku unlocked the door and held it open for the other three, locking it again once they were all inside. Shouto and Hitoshi sat down on their sleeping bags and, while Shouto took out the carving kit he had purchased, Hitoshi looked up at Izuku, eyebrow raised,

 

“So, are we not going to talk about the way you manipulated our landlord into letting us take on Fumikage?”

 

Izuku shrugged, sitting down on his sleeping bag, Fumikage beside him,

 

“He probably wouldn’t have let him stay if I didn’t, and it’s not like I made him hide some grand secret or bury a body or something. Plus, playing the cute, innocent, kind child card enough could help us. If we get him to genuinely like us we’ll be able to get away with more and maybe see if we can use any contacts he might have in the underground with minimal fees.”

 

Hitoshi sighed, flopping back onto his sleeping bag,

 

“The amount of thinking and planning you do scares me sometimes.”

 

Izuku chuckled, 

 

“Why thank you!”

 

Shouto had been reading over the instructions from the kit while the two were talking and was now starting to actually carve into the wood block he was holding. The shavings fell down onto his sleeping bag but he didn’t seem to mind. 

 

“We’ll need to get a vacuum or broom if you’re going to take that up as a hobby.”

 

Hitoshi said when he noticed what Shouto was doing. The other boy nodded absently, not really paying attention to what was being said. It was silent for a few moments until Dark Shadow peeked out of Fumikage’s chest, moving so they were positioned next to his head. 


“Do you have nightlights?”

 

“What for?”

 

Izuku asked, he was making eye contact with the shadow, head tilted. Fumikage started trying to push Dark Shadow away,

 

“It’s nothing-”

 

Dark Shadow darted forward, completely avoiding Fumikage’s attempts at keeping them away.

 

“If it gets too dark I become a sort of monster thing that Fumikage can’t control.”

 

Fumikage shrunk in on himself, keeping his gaze off the other three boys. Shouto was paying a little more attention to the conversation at this point, the knife now hovering above the wood block. Hitoshi was looking over at Izuku and Fumikage from his place on the ground and Izuku was sitting up straight, eyeing both Fumikage and Dark Shadow. The longer the silence stretched the smaller Fumikage seemed to be making himself until, finally, Hitoshi sighed. 


“Just ask your questions Izuku.”

 

Immediately it was like a dam had burst. Questions about Dark Shadow and Fumikage started spilling from Izuku’s mouth. The only other part of him that moved was his eyes, darting back and forth between the two. His hands were folded neatly in his lap and his back had just enough of a slouch to be relaxed without looking bad. 

 

Fumikage’s eyes were wide as he stared at Izuku, his expression a mix of awe and surprise. His posture was becoming less tight as he relaxed, leaning in to try and better hear what Izuku was saying so he could decipher his questions. Dark Shadow had appeared next to Fumikage’s head again, also listening to everything Izuku was saying. 

 

Hitoshi sighed again, rolling over so he had access to Izuku's bag. He unzipped it and took out the notebook Izuku was currently working on as well as one of his pencils. Hitoshi paused, not wanting to get up to hand Izuku the items while also not being able to reach him on the ground. Shouto put down his knife and block, taking the book and pencil from him. Hitoshi sent him a thankful look while Shouto flipped the book to a blank page and handed it and the pencil to Izuku. Immediately his hand was moving across the page, writing down his questions while leaving enough room for answers. He even left a gap where he wanted to put a sketch of Fumikage and Dark Shadow. 

 

When Izuku’s torrent of questions finally stopped he took a deep breath, looking at both Fumikage and Dark Shadow expectantly. Fumikage took a moment to gather his thoughts before answering his questions as best he could. Dark Shadow made their own input whenever possible, though even with their combined efforts there were still questions that went unanswered. This didn’t seem to put Izuku off, however. In fact, it seemed to make him more determined to find answers. When the two had answered all the questions they could Izuku folded over his notebook, scribbling furiously. The other three boys watched him for a few minutes, eventually going back to what they had been doing before. Shouto picked up his carving things, Hitoshi went back to staring at the ceiling, and Fumikage struck up a conversation with Dark Shadow.

 

They sat like this for a while, Hitoshi occasionally glancing over at Shouto to see how his carving was going. The pile of wood shavings had grown substantially when Hitoshi propped himself up on his elbows,

 

“Hey, I was thinking, we should convert the bedroom into an analysis room for Izuku. It’s not like we’re going to get much use out of it, our sleeping bags are already set up out here.”

 

Shouto nodded,

 

“That sounds like a good idea. I’m sure we could find more furniture to freshen up at that beach.”

 

Fumikage and Dark Shadow nodded too,

 

“Yes, despite the short amount of time I have known him I believe giving him a peaceful place to work would be best.”

 

Izuku didn’t look up from where he was writing in his book, supposedly completely tuned out to the conversation going on around him. 

 

Hitoshi lay back down on his sleeping bag, resting his head on his arms,

 

“It’s settled, then. We can ask those big dudes for help again tomorrow and go down to the beach. I think a desk and chair would be best to start. Maybe a bookshelf too.”

 

The other two nodded in agreement and the three went back to what they had been doing. Though, eventually, Fumikage and Dark Shadow ran out of things to talk about. To keep themselves occupied they started watching as Shouto carved his figure, watching as the shavings pile slowly grew. Hitoshi managed to fall asleep soon after, listening to the sound of knife on wood and pencil on paper.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry.
I went down to the farmer's market with my mom on Saturday and, since we were downtown, we also went to the library. The library was hosting its own Comicon while we were there but we were there for a single purpose and that was to get me an Agatha Christie murder mystery. I now have a detective's string board and am trying to solve the murder before the characters do.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 21: Grocery Shopping Is Much Easier Then We Thought

Chapter Text

Izuku shook Hitoshi awake a few hours later, backing away when the boy finally rose and started stretching. Shouto and Fumikage were waiting by the door, Shouto with his duffel bag slung across his body. Izuku was holding Hitoshi’s out to him and had his own slung across his shoulder as well. Though, the actual bag part sat next to him as he knelt next to Hitoshi’s sleeping bag. 


“C’mon Hitoshi, get up!”

 

Hitoshi rubbed at his eyes, taking the bag from Izuku’s outstretched hand when he was done.

 

“What?”

 

He asked. Izuku stood, holding out his hand to the still sitting boy. He took it without hesitating, allowing Izuku to hall him to his feet. Once the purple-haired boy was standing Izuku answered his question,


“We need to go out and get some stuff for Fumikage. Though, now that I think about it we should get some extra sleeping and duffel bags. With how things have been going it’s likely we’ll pick up at least a few more people.”

 

Hitoshi nodded groggily, following Izuku to the door slowly. Once the four were all together Fumikage opened the door, holding it open for the other three before stepping out himself. Izuku locked the door behind them and they started off down the stairs to the foyer and out the front doors. 

 

The walk down to their first stop wasn’t to long since the shop was near the outskirts of the Musutafu district. The store sold all manners of camping supplies, displaying their best items in the front. These items also happened to be the most expensive so, instead, the group travelled to the back. Hitoshi stared at the sleeping bags longingly while Fumikage picked out one that was a simple black and Shouto picked up a few of the cheapest ones. From there they went a few aisles down to the duffel bags, where, once again, Fumikage chose a cheap black one. Izuku picked out a few in different colours, keeping to the few cheap brands. 

 

Once they had everything they needed they made their way to the registers, waiting in the shortest line they could find. When they got up to pay the cashier kept side eyeing them and roving her eyes over them as if she was looking for something. Eventually, she finsihed ringing up their items and told Shouto the total as he was at the front of the group.Shouto pulled out a few bills from his bag, carefully laying them out on the tray in front of the cashier. She picked the bills up slowly, making a point to look them over before finally accepting them. She handed them their bagged products and told them to have a good day as they left, heading off to their next stop. 

 

The next store they stopped at was a simple grocery store. It was small and the aisles weren’t very big but the prices were cheap so it would have to do. When they entered they stopped off to the side to talk.

 

“Alright,”

 

Izuku started,

 

“We can split up in here. Each of us can go down a different aisle, grabbing what we like. We don’t need bottled water since I have tap filters and we can grab a filtered water jug while we’re here. When we’re done we can meet up by the registers. Sound good?”

 

Everyone nodded in agreement and Izuku let go of Hitoshi’s hand. The purple-haired boy immediately left for the caffeine aisle, leaving the other three quickly. Izuku goes down the meat aisle, Shouto goes down the noodle/soup aisle, and Fumikage darts towards the baby aisle. 

 

--------

 

Izuku looks over the meat selection carefully, picking out a steak, chicken breast, chicken thigh, and a nice looking fish. He puts them each into one of the flimsy plastic bags provided and grabs a cooler bag from a nearby shelf to put them inside after they’ve paid. 

 

--------

 

Hitoshi looks over the caffeine selections carefully, comparing ingredients and prices between different brands. In the end, he selects a big can of an off-brand coffee. It’s cheap and strong enough that it should last him a while. He yawns as he leaves the aisle, immediately laying eyes on the conveniently placed mug shelf. He thinks it over for a moment before grabbing a cat mug off the shelf, holding it by the handle and tucking the coffee under his arm. 

 

--------

 

Shouto stands in front of the instant noodle shelf, deliberating which brand to buy. He has a basket hanging from his elbow, something the others hadn’t grabbed before running off. After another moment of deliberation he grabs a few packets of the cheapest brand, turning so he can choose a broth and possibly a few more types of noodles.

 

--------

 

Fumikage doesn’t want to linger in the baby aisle, quickly finding the nightlights surrounded by diapers and toys. The selection isn’t big, consisting of a cresent-moon, star, princess, dinosaur, and bear. He can’t decide which one to pick, feeling like he doesn’t want it to be to babyish. He wishes they carried the kind that was just a glowing box but, alas, they did not. He was just about to turn around and pray he could find a lamp or something when Dark Shadow darted out of his chest, popping up in his face,

 

“Can we please get the star one Fumi? I think it looks so cool!”

Fumikage sighed,

 

“Seriously?”

 

Dark Shadow nodded vehemently,

 

“Yeah! It matches our ashetic perfectly.”

 

Fumikage thought for a moment before nodding slowly and taking a small box containing the moon shaped light off the shelf.


“Fine. But if they ask about our decision you’re the one doing the explaining.”

 

Dark Shadow nodded quickly,


“Okay!”

 

They darted back into Fumikage’s chest, obviously content with the decision they had made. Fumikage sighed one last time, swiftly left the aisle, rushing for the registers and hoping he both wasn’t the first or the last to arrive.

 

--------

 

Fumikage ended up being second-to-last to arrive. Izuku and Hitoshi were both already there, Izuku balancing a stack of bagged meat in one hand with a cooler bag hanging from the other and Hitoshi with a mug and can of coffee grains. The three waited silently the few minutes it took Shouto to show up. He had a basket hanging from his right arm, a few packs of ramen and soba noodles joined by a carton of broth. Shouto led the group over to the shortest line, putting his stuff up when it was their turn. This cashier didn’t seem to mind that four boys were grabbing what could barely be considered groceries on their own, patiently telling them their total and allowing Shouto to pay with the credit card. She helped Izuku put the meat in the cooler bag and helped the other three bag their goods as well. She turned to ring up the next costumer when they were done, smiling when the four boys thanked her before leaving the store.

Chapter 22: Of Course We Didn’t Break Anything. Why Would You Think That?

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

The trip back to the apartments was uneventful, the most exciting thing being Hitoshi tripping and nearly face-planting before Izuku caught him. The four smiled at the old couple standing in the foyer when they entered, the two clearly waiting to talk to the landlord. They climbed the stairs slowly, careful not to drop any of their bags before reaching their floor. When they got to their door Izuku set down the cooler bag by his feet, digging around in his duffel bag for the apartment key. He found it quickly, shoving it into the lock and turning it, waiting for the click of the lock before turning the doorknob and swinging the door open.


Izuku picked up the cooler bag and entered the apartment first, holding the door open for the other three before removing his key from the lock and pushing the door closed, locking it again and setting the door chain in place.

 

The four make their way into the kitchen, setting their bags down on the counters. They quickly get started putting the groceries away, though it doesn’t take very long. When their done Fumikage removes his nightlight from the package and plugs it into the socket closest to his sleeping bag. He steps back, eyes switching from the sleeping bag to the light and back until he steps forward, pulling the sleeping bag a few centimetres closer to the nightlight. He nods to himself before sitting down on the sleeping bag. The other three follow suit, sitting down in a wonky circle on their own bags. They sit in silence for a minute before Shouto pipes up,

 

“So, do any of us actually know how to cook?”

 

Izuku is the only one to nod. Fumikage shakes his head and Hitoshi just stares at the ground. Though, when he sees Izuku nod, his head is quick to snap back up,

“Wait. How do you know how to cook Izuku?”

The boy shrugs,

“I had to fend for myself. Plus, on days when they weren’t trying to be condescending, my parents would make me cook for them.”

 

It was silent for a few moments, the other three absorbing the information given to them. Hitoshi is the one to break the silence after glancing out the window.

 

“Well, if we’re going to cook something with the ingredients we bought we’d better do it now. If we want to get to bed before the sun sets, that is.”

 

Izuku, after also looking out the window, nods vehemently and rises from his place on his sleeping bag, hurrying into the kitchen to get started. It doesn’t take long for him to get started, chopping up the fish on the cutting board while the rice cooker preps itself. The other three boys, having nothing better to do, turn so they can watch as Izuku cooks. As they watched the three boys just became more captivated. The way Izuku moved around the kitchen fascinated them. He moved smoothly like he knew where everything was at all times. He had glanced back at them a few times, smiling when he caught their eye, but that never seemed to interrupt his flow. He had cut the fish into perfectly sized pieces, knowing just when to take them out of the pan. To them, it looked like something magical.

 

When Izuku was finally done he laid out their plates, picking up his own before telling them they could grab theirs. Once all four were once again seated on their sleeping bags facing each other they dug into their food. It didn’t take very long for Shouto to compliment the food and, after him, the other two piped up as well. Izuku flushed, avoiding eye contact as the compliments continued to flow. When the three were finally done he looked up at them, eyes glossy and a smile on his face,

 

“Thank you so much!”

 

The three nodded and dug back into their food, occasionally complimenting it again. When the four were finished eating Fumikage stated that he would be the one to do the dishes since Izuku had cooked and Dark Shadow could help him where needed. The other three agreed and started getting settled in the sleeping bags. Will, Hitoshi did. Shouto pulled out his carving kit and Izuku took out his analysis notebook, writing furiously on one of the pages. 

 

--------

 

Fumikage didn’t take long to finish the dishes. Dark Shadow helped him both in washing and drying them as much as they could as they didn’t have a drying rack yet. When they finished Fumikage dried his hands on a towel, yawning. When he got to his sleeping bag Shouto was still staring at his carving intently and Izuku was still writing in his book. When he had settled in his sleeping bag, the zipper done up nearly all the way. He reached a hand above his head and flicked on the nightlight, burrowing deeper into the bag once the light shone. It didn’t take long for him to fall asleep, Hitoshi just a few minutes behind him.





Fumikage was the first to wake up that morning, stretching as he sat up in his sleeping bag.  The zipper undid a little on its own when he sat up but he had to pull it down himself to climb out. He saw Izuku stir, watching as the other boy woke up too. Izuku climbed out of his sleeping back after stretching his arms up above his head, smiling when he saw Fumikage. He dug around in his duffel bag, pulling out two rations worth of food and handing one over to Fumikage. He nodded in thanks before digging in with Izuku, throwing out his garbage in the trashcan by the front door when he was done.

 

Shouto was the next awake, yawning as he stretched. He took his rations from his own duffel bag, eating quickly before throwing out the wrapper to his breakfast bar. Hitoshi wakes up a few minutes later, yawning and rubbing at his eyes before blindly reaching over for the zipper of his sleeping bag. It takes him a moment to find it but when he does, he yanks it down and rolls off his sleeping bag. He lands face down next to Izuku, who gently pats him on the back.


“Are you okay, Hitoshi?”

He only gets a groan in response. Silently, Shouto gets up and starts digging around in Hitoshi’s duffel bag. After a minute he comes up with a breakfast bar and a bottle of water, both of which he places in front of Hitoshi’s head. The boy raises it carefully, staring at the offerings for a moment before picking his arms up off his sides and grabbing them. The bar doesn’t last long, nor does the water bottle. When he’s done he finally gets up off the ground and throws out his trash. They don’t have a recycling bin yet so the plastic water bottle joins a slowly growing pile next to the trashcan. 

 

The sun starts peeking in through the blinds so Fumikage turns off his nightlight and opens the blinds. There’s a creaking noise as the blinds gather at the top of the windowsill, causing the four boys to stare at them. Once the blinds are gathered at the top the noise gets slightly louder and Fumikage lets go of the string, his hands up in a placating gesture as he backs away. He’s nearly at the sleeping bags when the blinds reach their breaking point and clatter to the floor. The four boys stare at the pile of plastic for a few moments before Izuku clears his throat,

 

“Wanna go find a new set of blinds from Dagobah before Mr.Landlord realizes we broke something?”

The other three boys nod vehemently, rushing to grab their duffel bags before rushing out the door.

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 23: Hey, We’ll Take Care Of You

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

They walked calmly down the stairs, smiling at the person they passed on their way down. When they got into the library their landlord was sitting behind the front desk, legs kicked up and a cigarette in his hand. The four boys smiled at him, Dark Shadow even popped their head out to smile, which startled the man, though he just smiled back. They made it out the door without incident, luckily and, once they were out of view of the building’s windows they started sprinting down to Dagobah beach. 

 

They only lasted a few blocks before they had to slow down. Izuku was in the lead, followed by Shouto, then Hitoshi, and Fumikage a few steps behind them. The first three slowed down so they would be back with Fumikage. They didn’t talk as they walked, falling into a companionable silence, their steps syncing together.

 

--------

 

They’re in the Musutafu district, still quite a ways away from the beach, when they start to hear loud noises coming from further down one of the roads. The four share a glance and, even though it would take them farther from their destination, they rush off in the direction of the noise. 

 

When they arrive it’s to a crowd of people behind some hastily put-up police tape. There are a few officers standing at the front of the crowd, trying to keep them in check while Death Arms fights a villain with what appears to be a bull mutation quirk. The villain is carrying a few purses, running down the street. As the four boys make their way to the front of the crowd they see Death Arms catch up with the villain, grabbing him by the arm and pulling him closer. Death Arms changes his grip so he’s holding the villain by both arms, causing the purses to fall to the ground.

 

 He then starts spinning, the villain going higher and higher. The four boys stare as the villain goes higher and higher, spinning faster and faster along with the hero. Finally, Death Arms winks at the crowd, causing a few girls to squeal and gasp, and lets go of the villain. He goes flying towards a nearby house and they watch as a little girl around their age runs out, calling back behind her, likely for her parents. They watch as the villain crashes into the house, tearing a hole in the wall as he lands inside. It’s still for a moment, a cloud of dust stirring and spreading around the girl still standing in front of her house. Then, the dust now starting to clear, the girl looks up at something in the now slightly exposed foundation of her house. 

 

Izuku can just make out her eyes widening before she starts running, once again trying to call for her parents. This time, Izuku can hear two voices calling back. He sees two figures start to step forward, hidden behind the villain but before they come properly into view, the house shook and some of the shingles fell off the roof. The girl stopped running, turning to watch as her house crumbled, falling in on itself. The crowd was cheering, seemingly having not noticed the girl and her screams. As she ran back to her house, desperately calling for her parents, the crowd fawned over Death Arms.

 

The girl arrives back at the debris quickly and she starts tearing at it, calling out all the while. Izuku signals for the others to stay put as he slinks off, ducking under the police tape while the police are busy with the crowd. He runs up to the girl and the rubble, kneeling down next to her. She looks up at him, tears falling down her face and dust covering her hands.

 

“Pl-please! You have to help me get them out.”

 

Izuku nods, leaning over so he can help her move pieces of rubble. He watches as she touches a few of the bigger pieces and they start to float, allowing her to move them easily before they fall back to the ground a few meters away. Izuku keeps his analysis at bay, instead moving the pieces that he could. After a couple of minutes Shouto, Hitoshi, and Fumikage join them despite the fact that Izuku had told them to stay with the crowd. As they move more and more pieces they start to find spots of blood marring the stone. The girl starts to get more frantic and, despite her green face, starts touching more and more, shoving at the debris to get it to move. 

 

Izuku stands next to her, the other three at his side as they move pieces. Somehow, they still hadn’t been noticed by the police, Death Arms, or the crowd, all of them too focused on each other. Finally, they come across an arm sticking out of the pile. It’s covered in hair and obviously belongs to the villain Death Arms had been fighting. The five kids stop and stare at the arm, taken aback by the fact that it’s there and, even more frightening, unmoving. After a moment Izuku comes back to himself. 

 

“Those two figures who had come up behind him. They were your parents, right?”

 

His words seem to bring the girl back to herself as she starts, her eyes watering as she nods slowly. 

 

“I’m sorry.”

 

Izuku says, opening his arms as she falls into them. He holds her tight, supporting her weight as she sobs into her shoulder. The other three boys surround them, though they keep a few feet away from the two so they don’t overwhelm the girl. Finally, a police officer looks over and notices them. Shouto makes eye contact with him from his place next to Izuku and the officer jogs over to them.

 

“Hey, you kids shouldn’t be over here! What are you doing?”

It’s then that he seems to really take in his surroundings, his eyes darting from the pile of rubble they had created to what had once been a house, the arm sticking out in the space they had cleared. He sighed,

 

“Alright. Well, you don’t all look related so I’m assuming you four are her friends?”

 

Izuku nods, not saying anything as he starts to rub soothing circles on the girl’s back.


“Alright. Are her parents buried there?”

 

He gestures to the debris and, this time, Hitoshi is the one who nods. He chooses not to bring up the officer’s bluntness. 

 

“Okay. I’ll call social services to come get her.”

 

Hitoshi’s eyes widen as the officer turns, taking up his radio and taking a few steps away from the kids. Hitoshi runs up to Izuku,

“We can’t let them take her.”

 

Izuku nods, looking down at the girl in his arms. Her sobs had calmed, now replaced by hiccups. He tapped her a few times on the shoulder, only stopping when she looked up at him,


“Hey, do you wanna come with us?”

 

His question must shock her. Her eyes get a little wide and she tilts her head to the side,

 

“What?”

“Do you want to come with us? We have an apartment and some extra sleeping bags you can pick from. It’s not in the best area but I think it might be a little better than going to an orphanage.”

 

The girl nods,


“R-right. Okay, I-I’ll go with you.”

 

Izuku nods, a kind smile on his face. He takes her by the hand and, with her still leaning heavily on him, starts to lead her back the way they had come. Shouto and Hitoshi walk next to Izuku while Fumikage walks next to the girl, Dark Shadow draping themselves across her shoulder like a scarf. 

 

When the officer turns around to check on the kids all he sees is rubble.

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 24: Finally Getting Those New Blinds

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

When they get back to the building the foyer is empty, allowing them to climb up to their apartment in peace. Izuku unlocks the door quickly, walking over to the closet in the center of the hall leading to the bathroom and bedroom. He pulls out one of the extra sleeping bags and rolls it out at the end of the line next to Hitoshi’s. The girl climbs inside, burrowing down and turning away from the four boys. They stare at her for a moment before Izuku walks down the hall to the bedroom, a place they hadn’t entered since their cleaning day.

The room was completely empty, devoid of any furniture or decorations, everything having been thrown out due to mold. Izuku held the door open for the other three, gently closing it behind them. They settled down on the floor in a circle, facing each other. Sun rays streamed in from the only window in the room. 

 

“I would like to be the first to point out that we don’t even know her name.”

 

Hitoshi says, breaking the silence that had descended over them.

 

“Could this classify as kidnapping?”

 

Shouto asks. Izuku shakes his head.


“No, I don’t think so. We’re all the same age plus, if taking her in counts as kidnapping, then so does what happened with you.”

 

Shouto seems to process this answer before accepting it with a nod. Fumikage raised his hand, waiting until he had everyone’s attention to speak,

 

“I know we were able to get some groceries for us but will that be enough now that she’s staying here as well? Following that, will we continue to have enough funds to purchase food if our population continues to grow? I have a feeling that she will not be the last child we take in.”

 

The other three nodded slowly. 

 

“We could likely spend up to ¥21,650 in groceries before Endeavor becomes suspicious. But only if it covered just under a month’s worth.”

 

Izuku nodded slowly,

 

“We can work with that for now but if we become too many we’d have to figure out something else.”

 

Their meeting soon concluded after that, the three heading back out to the living room. The girl was sound asleep. 

 

“Since she’s asleep three of us should head out to Dagobah and get some new blinds while one of us stays here.”

 

Hitoshi raised his hand immediately,

 

“I volunteer to stay!”

 

The other three stared at him for a moment before he shrugged,

 

“What? I’m tired.”

 

Izuku shrugs,

 

“Alright.”

 

He turns around and grabs his duffel bag, slinging it across his body as he walks to the door. Shouto and Fumikage follow him, grabbing their own bags. The three file out the door, Izuku closing and locking it behind them. Hitoshi listens as their footsteps fade down the hall, waiting until he can no longer hear them before he clambers into his sleeping bag, not bothering to zip it up. 

 

He yawns, turning so as little sunlight beams down on him as possible. 

 

--------

 

Izuku leads the group through the winding streets to Dagobah. They do their best to steer clear of the wreckage from the earlier attack, taking a longer route than they normally would. When they finally reach the beach they spread out among the trash, each picking a different pile to start with. It takes them a couple of hours to find a good set of blinds and, by the time they’re done, all three of them smell like a dump.

 

Fumikage and Dark Shadow carry the blinds back to the apartment building since they can stretch them out between them and Dark Shadow has proven to be incredibly strong. When they get back to the building the landlord is in the foyer, much to Izuku’s dismay. He wrinkles his nose as the three (four, counting Dark Shadow), enter the building.

 

“Why the hell do you kids smell like you just took a trip to the dump?”

 

He asks. 

 

“Because we did.”

 

Shouto states. The man’s face contorts in disgust,

 

“Is that where you got those blinds? The fuck do you need them for.”

 

“So we can replace the ones we broke!”

 

Dark Shadow happily states. Seemingly proud of the fact that the group is fixing the issue on their own. The man stands from his seat, his expression turning from disgust to anger,


“You broke your goddamn blinds?! I knew it was going to be a mistake letting a bunch of fucking kids live here. You’ve been residents for, what, a week? And you already broke something! Plus, I don’t remember saying the crow kid could stay here.”

 

Izuku steps forward to say something when a woman steps into the room, having just come down from the staircase. Izuku recognizes her as one of the older residents he’s seen in the foyer. 

 

“What’s going on, Sukēto?”

 

She asks. The man whirls on her, throwing his arms up in the air,


“These damn kids haven’t even been living here a month and already broke something!”

 

She sighs, walking over to the kids. She glances at the blinds Fumikage and Dark Shadow still hold.


“Did they break their blinds?”

She asks. The man nods and opens his mouth to speak but she cuts him off. 

 

“Then what’s the problem? They already have new ones.”

 

“Yeah, that came from a dump!”

 

He retorts. The woman raises a brow,

 

“So did the old ones.”

 

The man’s face becomes red, whether with embarrassment, anger, or a mix of both Izuku can’t quite tell.

 

“I-well-”

 

The man starts sputtering, looking for something else to say,


“Just let them go up to their apartment so they can put them up and shower, Sukēto. It’s really not a big deal. Go on, kids.”

 

She turns to them as she says the last part, nodding over to the stairs. The four walk past her, each thanking them as they go. As they enter the staircase she leaves the building, waving at the landlord whose last name they now know is “Sukēto”.

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 25: Introductions At Last

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

When Izuku, Shouto, and Fumikage entered the apartment they tried their best to be quiet. Both the girl and Hitoshi were asleep in their sleeping bags, turned away from the sun streaming in through the still-uncovered window. Fumikage and Dark Shadow carried the blinds into the bathroom while Izuku and Shouto grabbed the leftover cleaning supplies. The blinds had come from the dump, after all. They needed to be cleaned before they could go up on the windows. 

 

It didn’t take too long to get the blinds clean. Dark Shadow helped them get at some of the tighter spaces, threading between the plastic pieces and the string holding them together. When the blinds were to Izuku’s satisfaction Dark Shadow once again picked them up, carrying them out to the window. Fumikage and Dark Shadow kept the blinds up while Izuku and Shouto attached them to the window. When they were done they closed the blinds and made sure all their supplies were away. 


The sun had finished setting by the time the blinds were in place so they ate their dinner quickly, changing and ensuring all the windows were closed with the blinds drawn before climbing into their sleeping bags. Fumikage turned on his nightlight,

 

“Goodnight.”


He whispered. Izuku and Shouto replied in kind, snuggled up in their own sleeping bags. Quickly, the room was filled with only the sounds of light breathing and, occasionally, Dark Shadow hitting something while they tried to entertain themselves in the night.



Izuku was the first one awake in the morning, dividing up the morning rations before getting changed for the day. It was as he was digging through his duffel bag, pulling out his last clean shirt, that he realized they would need to do some laundry.

 

Shouto and Hitoshi were the next awake so, after they were done eating, Izuku brought his problem up to them. 


“Does our building have a laundry room?”

 

Hitoshi asked. Izuku shrugged,

 

“I don’t know. Sukēto didn’t mention one when we moved in but there also isn’t a laundromat close by.”

 

Shouto hummed, rising from where he was sitting.

“I’ll go ask him, then.”

 

Izuku watched the boy close the door as he left the apartment,


“So, what do you think the likely hood of Mr.Landlord being awake right now is?”


Hitoshi asked. Izuku didn’t bother looking away from the door before answering,

 

“Based on what we know about him? Very small.”

 

Hitoshi hummed,

“Think we should follow him?”

 

Izuku sighed, getting up from where he was sitting and making his way over to the door,

 

“Yeah.”

 

Hitoshi nodded, scribbling out a quick note in case one of the other two woke up while they were gone before following Izuku out of the apartment. Shouto was already halfway down the stairs by the time the two left so they had to run to catch up. They finally caught up to him just in front of the doors out of the staircase and to the lobby. They took a look around the lobby for a few minutes, trying to see if there were any other doors or passages that could lead to a laundry area. When they found none, Shouto knocked on Mr.Sukēto’s door. 

 

They had to knock a few times before the man finally answered the door, staring down at them with a look of barely restrained anger.


“What the fuck do you want?”

 

Shouto took the initiative, taking a small step forward to ensure Mr.Sukēto’s attention was on him.

“We were wondering if there was anywhere to do our laundry here.”

 

He asked, his voice level. Mr.Sukēto sighed and pinched the bridge of his nose. When his fingers came away he had left red marks on either side of his nose ridge. 

 

“You came down here and knocked on my door at…”

 

He looked down at the watch on his wrist. Izuku wondered if he slept with it or if part of the reason he had taken so long was that he had to put it on.

 

“Seven in the morning. Just to ask if there was somewhere to do your laundry?”

 

His entire face was starting to redden, causing him to look a little like a tomato. Shouto nodded,

 

“Yes, sir.”

 

Shouto replied. Mr.Sukēto was glaring down at them now, 

 

“Of course, there fucking isn’t! What, you think I’m made of fucking money?! If you wanna do laundry you either gotta find some other place to do it or suck it up and use your bathtub like the other residents. Who, by the way, don’t knock on my door before noon!”

 

With that the door was slammed in their face, causing the three boys to flinch back, though Shouto’s was a bit more subtle than the others. 


Izuku sighed,

 

“We should go back up to the apartment and grab our bags. We need to buy detergent and a bath plug.”

 

The other two nodded and followed Izuku up the stairs back to the apartment. When they got there they found Fumikage, Dark Shadow, and the girl talking as they ate breakfast. The three looked up from their conversation when the others entered the room, saying good morning before returning to their conversation. Izuku, Shouto, and Hitoshi all grabbed their duffel bags from where they sat near their sleeping bags, catching the attention of Dark Shadow.

 

“Where are you three going?”


They asked. Izuku smiled,

 

“We need to buy laundry detergent and a bath plug. There aren’t any washing machines so we’ll need to use the bathtub to hand wash the clothes.”

 

The girl piped up from where she was sitting,

 

“You should get some elbow-length rubber gloves and a sponge or washboard or something too.”

 

Izuku nodded,

 

“Right. You should come, too. We should get you some clothes and food to keep in your duffel bag.”


The girl immediately started to panic,

 

“Oh, no! It’s fine, you don’t need to spend all that on me!-”

 

Izuku raised her hand to cut her off,

 

“I promise I won’t get you anything that’s not a necessity. Plus, who said we were going to buy all of it?”

 

His smile turned slightly sharp and mischievous while the girl stared at him in shock. Fumikage stood from where he was sitting in front of her and grabbed his own bag. 

 

“I hope you don’t mind but I would like to come as well. I’d rather not be left here alone.”


Hitoshi nodded and, after sparing a glance at the girl, speed walked over to the hall closed and pulled out one of the extra duffel bags. It was dusty pink in colour and the girl took it gratefully. She followed Hitoshi back to the small group now waiting by the door, copying what they had all done and slinging her bag across her body. It was as the group was walking out of the building and out onto the street that Hitoshi glanced over at her and finally realized something,

 

“Hey!”

 

He called, causing everyone to jump. Izuku stopped and, as he was at the front of the group, everyone else stopped as well. 


“What’s up, Hitoshi?”

 

He asked. Hitoshi pointed over to the girl,

 

“I just realized we don’t know her name.”

 

He said. The girl blushed, 

 

“Oh, right, sorry. I’m Ochako.”

 

Hitoshi nodded,


“I’m Hitoshi.”

 

“Izuku.”

 

“Shouto.”

 

“Fumikage.”

 

Dark Shadow popped out of Fumikage’s chest, doing jazz hands.

 

“And I’m Dark Shadow!”

 

Ochako smiled a small, happy smile,

 

“It’s nice to meet all of you!”

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
This year, for Halloween, my mom is dressing up as Cruella Devil and the rest of us (me, my dad, and my brother) are going to be dalmatians. I'm not really looking forward to going up to strangers' houses and asking them for candy but at least I'll be getting free candy.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 26: Committing Petty Theft (And Stopping Another)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku, Hitoshi, Shouto, Fumikage, and Ochako walked silently out of the Red Light District to a hundred-yen store near the edge of the Musutafu district. Izuku took Ochako in with him while Hitoshi took the other two to another store nearby. A group of five kids walking into one store would be a little suspicious, after all. 

 

Izuku smiled at the cashier stationed near the door, leading Ochako to the cleaning section. The girl was clearly nervous so he did his best to quietly reassure her. He made sure to keep track of all the cameras in the store, which was easy since there weren’t many. The place was in the more run-down part of the district, after all. 

 

Ochako carried a plastic shopping basket between them and, when they got to the aisle, she helped him pick out the best of the cheap soaps. She picked up two of the same brand, putting them next to each other in the basket. When Izuku went to reach for something labelled as a detergent she stopped him,


“The soaps I have can be used for dishes, clothes, and cleaning up spills.”

 

She explained. Izuku nodded, instead reaching up for a few pairs of elbow-length gloves. He had made sure they were standing in a camera blind spot so he took two pairs off the hook, putting one into the basket and, as discreetly as possible, tucking the other into his duffel bag. When he withdrew his hand he was holding a notebook. He flipped it open to a random page and acted as if he was checking a list before tucking it away, and zipping up the bag. Ochako looked at him with a scared expression as he dragged her down a different aisle. 

 

“Do you think they sell washboards here?”

 

He asked. She shook her head,

 

“No, stores don’t really sell those anymore. We can make our own pretty easily, though.”

 

Izuku nodded,

 

“Alright. Can you pick out the things we’ll need?”

 

She nodded, picking out a few items from different aisles. When they were in places Izuku knew the cameras couldn’t see them he tucked things into his duffel bag but most of the things still ended up in the basket. When they got up to the check out their basket contained two bottles of Dusk soap, one pair of elbow-length rubber gloves, one cheese grate, two metal buckets, two thick wood dowels, and a small plastic easel. On top of their purchases, Izuku had two dowels, a metal bucket, a can of beans, and five sponges in his bag.

 

Checking out was easy, Izuku talking to the cashier as she rang up their purchases. He paid with Endeavor’s credit card, waving as he and Ochako carried a bag each out of the store. As soon as they were far enough away Ochako turned her head so she could whisper to Izuku. 

 

“I can’t believe we just stole from that store!”

She exclaimed. Izuku shrugged,

 

“It can be a little nerve-wracking but you’ll get used to it, more or less.”

 

He reassured. He leads them down to the center of the street, sitting down on a bench to wait for the others. He kicks his legs as he surveys the crowd, looking around for the three they had split off from. It’s as he’s watching that he sees a man running down the street, a purse clutched to his chest. A moment later he hears a woman scream, pointing in the direction the man had run in. 


“Stop, thief! Someone help!”

After another quick look Izuku sees that there aren’t any pros in the area. He jumps off the bench, telling Ochako to stay and watch their things as he runs off into the crowd. He can just barely see the man over the heads of other people and he’s about to catch up when a boy around his age jumps out of the crowd in front of the man. The man stops, looking for a way to get around the boy when he makes a grab for the purse. The man sneers,

 

“Quit trying to be a hero and let me through!”

 

He whisper-shouts. The boy stands his ground and Izuku sees his skin change, certain areas becoming sharp while others just seem to harden. The man chuckles, he goes to bat the boy out of the way but he only sways. The man snaps his hand back, cradling it to his chest with the purse. Izuku is behind the man now and he makes eye contact with the boy from around the man. The boy takes a few steps back and Izuku kicks at the back of the man’s knees, sending him buckling to the ground. 

 

The boy snatches the purse from his grip and starts running back through the crowd toward the woman who was still calling for help. Izuku hears the sound of police sirens getting closer as he runs the same way as the boy, trying to get away from the man before he decides to retaliate. When he gets back he sees the boy’s hair being ruffled by the woman as she stares down at him, clearly thankful. When the boy sees Izuku emerge from the crowd he points toward him and the woman looks over, smiling when she lays eyes on Izuku.

 

“Come over here, hun. I’d like to talk to you.”

 

She says kindly. Izuku makes his way over, glancing over at Ochako to make sure she’s still on the bench before stopping in front of the woman.


“Thank you very much for getting my purse back for me.”


She says. Izuku smiles, rubbing the back of his neck,

 

“It wasn’t a problem at all, miss.”

 

She smiles as she starts rummaging through her purse.


“Oh, nonsense. You and your friend were a big help. Here.”

 

She says, holding out a five-thousand yen bill.

 

“A small token of my thanks.”

Izuku takes it, slipping it into his duffel bag before bowing.

 

“Thank you very much, ma’am. I hope the rest of your day goes well.”

 

The woman bows too, though not as deeply as Izuku had.

 

“I hope so too! Goodbye!”

 

She walks away, her purse clutched tightly in her grip. Izuku turns to the boy, who was still standing next to him. He had a five-thousand yen bill clutched in his hand.

 

“Thanks for your help man! I don’t think I could have gotten her purse back without it.”

 

Izuku smiles,

 

“Of course! I’m Izuku, you?”

 

“I’m Eijirou!”

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 27: Hand Washing Clothes Is Harder Than We Thought

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku waves to Eijirou as he and Ochako leave the main square, having spotted the other three on the other end. The group talked all the way back to the apartment, the main topic of interest being Izuku’s encounter with the minor villain. Ochako apologized for not doing anything to help but Izuku waved her off, telling her she had nothing to apologize for. 

 

When they get back to the apartment everything is unpacked quickly. Ochako is the one to take apart all the items she had Izuku got, putting the pieces back together to form a DIY washboard. 

 

“So can you just make, like, anything?”

 

Hitoshi asks once she’s done. Ochako shrugs,

 

“It depends but yeah, mostly.”

 

Hitoshi nods, staring at the washboard. Izuku picks it up, carrying it along with the gloves and soap.

“Anyone wanna help with the laundry?”

 

Ochako was the only one to volunteer, the other three staying silent. Izuku rolls his eyes teasingly, 

 

“We’ll come up with a chore rota later. For now, just bring your dirty clothes into the bathroom. Oh, and bring one of the tap filters too.”

 

Before following Izuku into the bathroom Ochako helps carry laundry and the filter into the bathroom. Once they have everything she turns on Shouto, Hitoshi, and Tokoyami. Grabbing them before they can leave.


“Go and find some string and tape or something. We’ll need to set up a clothesline outside the windows so the clothes dry.”

 

The three boys nod, closing the door behind them as they leave. She sighs, pulling on one of the pairs of gloves before kneeling next to Izuku. He finishes twisting the filter onto the tap quickly, turning on the warm water. He lets the water run for a moment before plugging the tub and pouring some of the soap into the water. Ochako lowers the washboard into the tub, stirring the water so the bubbles form faster. Once the water is covering the legs of the washboard the two set to work, taking turns scrubbing clothes on the washboard and rinsing them off in the water. 

 

Izuku puts all the washes clothes in a pile on a towel next to him, watching as it slowly grows. By the time they were done, lunchtime had passed and they were both hungry. Their arms hurt to the point of being near numb. Izuku groaned as he stood for the first time in hours, nearly falling as his knees nearly gave out. His legs quickly took on the feeling of pins and needles as he stepped out of the bathroom, calling for the other three to hang the soaking clothes out to dry. Shouto helps Ochako stand and stabilize before taking up an armful of clothes, turning his head to the side so he can see. 

 

Izuku and Ochako rest on their sleeping bags and watch as Shouto, Hitoshi, Tokoyami, and Dark Shadow hang the clothes out on their makeshift clothesline. Each piece of clothing is pinned up in increasingly creative ways, ranging from regular pins to paper clips to pieces of plastic and even binding rings from an old notebook they had found left in the apartment. 

 

Hitoshi doles out the dinner rations, complaining the whole time about the wet spot on his shirt from carrying the sopping clothes. Izuku smiles and promises that, since the clothes likely wouldn’t be dry by morning, they’d go shopping for more. Shoto snorts,

 

“You mean steal.”

 

Izuku playfully smacks him on the arm, though he doesn’t deny the accusation. Shoto does the dishes while Izuku pulls out one of his extra notebooks, gathering the others around him.

“Alright, since chores have become a bit of an issue I think we need to come up with a rotation.”

 

He states. The others agree as he starts scribbling, drawing out a table for the rest of the month. 


“Since Ochako and I already did the laundry this week someone else will have to do it next week. Any volunteers?”

 

Tokoyami hesitantly raises his hand,

 

“As it is a two-person job I believe myself and Dark Shadow will be the best fit.”

 

Izuku nods, putting them down for laundry despite Dark Shadow’s complaints. From there it’s easy to assign each of them different chores, including cleaning the apartment, doing the dishes, and grocery shopping. By the time they were done Shouto had finished with the dishes and had joined them in their circle. Izuku tears out the pages he had used, taping them up on an empty wall. 


“We should get a corkboard.”

 

Hitoshi states. Izuku nods,


“Probably, but this will do for now.”

 

Hitoshi hums, stretching his arms above his head as he yawns. He sets off a chain reaction, starting with Shouto and ending with Izuku. All of them silently agree that it’s time for bed, turning off all the lights and snuggling up in their sleeping bags. Dark Shadow turns on the night light, saving Tokoyami the effort. Goodnights are muttered before they all drift off to sleep, the apartment filling with the sound of soft snoring.

 

--------

 

Izuku is the first to wake up the next morning, taking his time to organize their morning rations. He’s walking past the sleeping bags to grab something from his duffel bag, which he had left near the bathroom the day before when he sees Ochako curled up in a ball. She has tear tracks running down her cheeks and her expression is clearly pained. Izuku kneels down next to her, gently shaking her shoulder until she wakes. Her eyes open slowly and, upon seeing Izuku kneeling in front of her, she sits up, rubbing at her cheeks. 

 

“Are you okay?”

He asks, an expression of concern on his face as he watches Ochako stand. 

 

“I’m fine!”

 

She replies, avoiding eye contact. Izuku gets up from the floor, holding out his arms in a silent offer. Ochako immediately throws herself into Izuku, crying into his shoulder like she had just a few days ago. Izuku holds her tightly, watching over her shoulder as the other three wake up. They take one glance at Izuku and Ochako before stopping, settling back into their bags so they don’t disturb her. 

 

It takes a few minutes for Ochako’s sobs to turn to hiccups but, when they do, Izuku slowly untangles himself. He picks up her morning rations, handing them to her quietly. She settles down on her sleeping bag, opening the wrapper of a protein bar. Hitoshi takes this as his cue to get up, grabbing his own breakfast before sitting back down. Shouto and Tokoyami quickly follow, Izuku being the last to settle back on his sleeping bag with his food. 

 

They eat in silence, throwing out their garbage when they’re done. Hitoshi wanders into the kitchen, brewing a pot of coffee for the morning. He gives some to Izuku and Shouto, Tokoyami and Ochako declining when it’s offered to them. Shouto takes up his carving once again, this time sitting a few feet away from the sleeping bags to make cleanup easier.

 

Morning sun drifts in from the open blinds and Izuku opens the window to adjust the clothesline to make sure the clothes are in the light. No one talks, all of them content to simply sit in comfortable silence. 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
It's started snowing where I am and I don't know how to feel about it. I've also started playing Cult Of The Lamb and am on day 66 with a maxed-out cult and have yet to beat the second mini-boss in the Anura area.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 28: Playing Heroes At The Park

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

The morning is relatively uneventful, the most exciting thing being Hitoshi nearly spilling his coffee while he’s pouring it. By the time afternoon has rolled around all five of them are lying, bored, on top of their sleeping bags. 


“Wanna go to the park?”

 

Hitoshi asks. The other four shrug, rising slowly and grabbing their duffel bags from where they left them. Hitoshi helps Shouto apply the foundation to his scar before they leave, and Izuku locks the apartment door behind them. They walk silently down the stairs and out the front door, falling into a single-file line so they don’t take up to much room on the sidewalk. The trek to the park is long and it takes them a while to get there but, when they finally arrive, Izuku is excited to see Eijirou playing on the equipment. Eijirou sees them approaching from the top of the monkey bars. He jumps down, using his quirk to soften the blow before running over.


“Hey, Izuku! I didn’t think I’d see you again after yesterday, do you live nearby?”

 

Izuku shakes his head,


“No, we live pretty far away, actually. We just came here 'cause it’s the only one we know how to get to.”

 

Eijirou tilts his head, looking past Izuku at the others grouped behind him.

“‘We’? Do you all live together?”

 

Shouto nods, surveying the area. Eijirou looks at him, obviously expecting him to elaborate but, when he doesn’t, Fumikage picks up the slack.

 

“We do, yes. From my understanding, though, the apartment we currently share is a new edition.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Yeah, actually we got it the day you moved in.”

 

Izuku says, turning to face Fumikage. The other boy nods and Eijirou looks at them with surprise,

“What about your parents?”

 

Ochako looks away, her eyes watering. Hitoshi doesn’t reply and Shouto doesn’t look like he heard the question. Fumikage and Izuku just shrug. Eijirou nods as if these were all acceptable answers before gesturing over at the play structures.

 

“Wanna play heroes with me? I’m Crimson Riot.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Sure.”

 

The other four nod as well, following Eijirou as he leads them over to the largest structure, complete with two slides and a set of monkey bars. The six climb up onto the largest play structure, gathering to decide their roles. Shouto volunteers to be the villain for the first round, which then makes assigning heroes a little easier. Hitoshi decides on being Eraserhead, an underground hero that he says used to patrol one of his old areas. Ochako says she wants to be Thirteen, Fumikage calls Hawks, and since Izuku can’t decide on a hero Hitoshi assigns him All Might.

 

They split off into different groups, Shouto runs off so he can "plot his evil schemes".

 

While Izuku and Eijirou start making their way across the monkey bars. Fumikage and Ochako start making their way over to one of the smaller structures and Hitoshi climbs down to hide underneath the large one, stating he needs to stay in the shadows. 

“Hey, Eijirou?”

 

Izuku asks, turning to face the other boy from his spot on the monkey bars, they were in the process of getting across them, both now hanging in the air. Izuku had been looking over the park and hadn’t seen any other kids. It had confused him until he realized it was a school day and, technically, all of them were supposed to be in class. He knew why the others weren’t, but he didn’t know why Eijirou wasn’t. 


“Yeah, Izuku?”

 

“Why are you are the park on a school day?”

 

Eijirou shrugs, swinging back and forth slowly.


“My mom had to work an early shift this morning and didn’t have the time to drive me in. Why aren’t you in school today?”

 

“I don’t go anymore, it’s a waste of time.”

 

With that, Izuku turns back around, swinging a few times to build up momentum before reaching for the next bar. Eijirou follows after him, trying to catch up. Izuku lands on the next platform before Eijirou, only to see Shouto, who had agreed to be the villain for their first round, rush around the corner. Izuku yelped, turning to see that Eijirou was still a few bars behind. He urged the other boy to hurry while watching Shouto approach. He had seen the two boys and was now picking up speed, kicking up sand as he ran. 

 

Eijirou finally landed on the platform and Izuku grabbed his hand, not wasting any time in pulling him in the opposite direction. Izuku saw Hitoshi and Ochako on the top of one of the play structures and he waved to get their attention, 


“We’re being chased!”

 

He called out. Ochako finally saw them, a look of surprise overtaking her face as she started climbing down. Hitoshi ran out from underneath the structure, rushing toward the group.

 

“I’m here to provide backup!”

 

He called. Shouto stalled, realizing he was now outnumbered. He tried to retreat but he had been moving too fast. So, instead of getting away, he kicked up a bunch of sand before landing on his back. He started laughing, staring up at three standing over him. They started laughing, too, Izuku’s grip on Eijirou’s hand loosening as he doubled over. Ochako finally reached them, trying to hide her laughter behind her hands. Izuku could even hear Fumikage chuckling from where the top of the smaller structure. 

 

Finally, when their laughter had died down, Izuku held out his hand to help Shouto up. The other boy took it, rising to his feet slowly. Suddenly, a massive shadow fell over the group. Izuku looked up at the sky, frowning when he saw large clouds starting to gather. 


“We should probably head home. It looks like it’s going to rain soon.”

He says. The others look up as well, humming in agreement. Izuku looks over at Eijirou, who seems more worried than the others. 

 

“Do you wanna come with us?”

He asks. Eijirou looks over, startled,

“Really?”

 

Izuku nods,

“Yeah, why not?”

 

Eijirou smiles,


“Thanks, man!”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I have a bad cough and have also somewhat lost my voice so I get to stay home from school today. I'm hoping I'll be able to go in tomorrow, though, since I have a science test that I don't want to miss.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 29: Card Games

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku leads the group as they run back the way they came to the apartment, trying to beat the rain. They make it back to the building just as the rain starts to fall. They stumble into the lobby, Ochako banging into Eijirou as they stumble. Mr.Sukēto watches them from his place at the front desk. He has his feet propped up in front of him, shoes kicked off by the desk. Izuku watches as the man mouths numbers, counting the group. 

 

“There are six of you but I only remember selling that apartment to three brat kids. Explain.”

 

Izuku puts on his best puppy eyes, stepping forward to separate himself from the group. The others exchange a glance before doing the same, staring up at the landlord as they peek around each other.

 

“But sir, there was nothing in our contract that said we couldn’t have friends over!”

 

The man glared at them as he took his feet off the desk and stood. 

 

“These better just be friends your having over. If I find out there are six fucking kids staying in my building I’ll have you all kicked to the curb, understood?”

 

Izuku smiles,

 

“Understood, sir!”

 

The man nods as he rips open the door to his apartment, slamming it behind him. The kids stand there for a moment before Izuku shrugs, waving everyone towards the stairs. They walk up to the apartment in silence, patiently waiting for Izuku to unlock it as they listen to the rain hitting the walls outside. When they’re finally inside the apartment they gather in the center of the room on the sleeping bags. 

 

“So…does anyone want to play Go Fish?”

 

Eijirou asks, pulling a deck of cards out of his pocket. Everyone else just stares at him as he takes the plastic off the box.

 

“Why do you have a deck of cards?”

 

Hitoshi asks. Eijirou shrugs,

 

“You never know when you’ll need a deck. Are you playing?”

 

Hitoshi sighs, shifting so he’s comfortable. 


“Yeah, sure.”

 

The others quickly join in, arranging themselves in a circle as Eijirou passes out cards. Since there are so many of them everyone only gets five cards instead of seven. Eijirou places the remaining cards in a stack in the center of the circle. 

 

“Who’s going first?”

 

Ochako asks. When no one says anything she sighs, turning to Izuku.

 

“Do you have any tens?”

 

She asks. He shakes his head,

 

“Go fish.”

 

She reaches over, taking a card from the center deck. The game continues from there, and Izuku asks Shouto next. The game goes on for ten minutes, by which point the center deck had been completely used up. All of them count up their sets of cards, Shouto counting for significantly longer than any of the others.

“24.”

 

He finally says, stacking his cards. Hitoshi takes a deep breath as he stares and Shouto’s stack of matches.

 

“How the fuck did you get so many pairs?”

 

He asks. Shouto shrugs, refusing to elaborate. Hitoshi narrows his eyes before sighing, his shoulders falling as he gives up. 

 

“Is there something else we could play?”

 

He asks. 

 

“Poker?”

 

Ochako suggests. Everyone’s attention immediately goes to her,

 

“How do you know how to play that?”

 

Eijirou asks. She smiles as she gathers up the cards, shuffling them in her hands.

 

“I had to help my family earn money somehow. I can teach you how to play if you want, we don’t even have to bet anything for the first few rounds.”

 

Hitoshi nods,

 

“Sure, why not.”

 

Ochako grins,

 

“Perfect. I’ll be the dealer for the first few rounds.”

 

She set the deck down in the center of the circle, discarding the top card before handing out two cards to each of them. 

 

“Alright, Izuku are you ready to write down all the different hands?”

 

Izuku nods, already ready with his pen over an empty page in his notebook. 

 

“A royal flush is a ten, Jack, Queen, King, and Ace of the same suit, a straight flush is five consecutive cards of the same suit, four of a kind is four cards of the same rank and one card of any rank, a full house is three cards of one rank with two matching cards of another rank, a flush is any five cards of the same suit, a straight is five cards of consecutive rank from more than one suit, a three of a kind is three cards of the same rank with two unmatched cards, a two pair is two cards of one rank with two cards of another rank and one unmatched card, a pair is two cards of the same rank with three unmatched cards, and a high card is when no cards match at all and it’s useless.” 

 

She turns to Izuku, who had stopped writing in his book.

“Did you get all that?”

 

She asks. He nods, proudly holding up the pages he had filled with the definitions of each hand.

 

“Perfect, we can have it in the middle so everyone can look at it. Everyone ready to play?”

 

Most of them look at least marginally confused but they agree anyway, picking up the two cards they had been given. Ochako places three cards down face up in front of the deck and the game starts.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I was sick all of last week with a head cold and an upset stomach but I finally feel better and am going back to school. I missed an entire week and a science test on Tuesday so I'm going to have quite a bit of work to catch up on :).

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 30: How Long Has It Been Since We Last Showered?

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Hitoshi, Shouto, and Fumikage all sit back to watch Izuku, Ochako, and Eijirou look each other over. They’d been playing poker for around two hours at that point, the rain long gone, and it had become apparent that the three were the better poker players in the group. They’d even been able to put away Izuku’s list of rules. There was a small pile of yen in the middle of the three, though the total was barely ¥4,992. 

 

Finally, Izuku made his call, leading the other two to quickly make theirs. They each revealed their cards and Eijirou cheered when he realized he had the best hand. He scooped up his winnings, dumping them into the duffel bag that he had been given from the closet. Izuku groaned as he leaned back on his hands. He turned his head to look out the window, narrowing his eyes at the sun as it was preparing to set. 

 

“It’s later than I thought. Are you okay with staying the night, Eijirou?”

 

He asked. The other boy hummed, studying the sky.

 

“Yeah, I think so. It’s not a problem, right?”

 

Izuku shook his head as he rose, wandering into the kitchen.


“No, it’s not a problem.”

 

Eijirou nodded and helped Ochako gather the cards and put them back in the box. Once everything was cleaned up Eijirou, Ochako, Shouto, Hitoshi, Fumikage, and Dark Shadow all gathered to play clapping games. They broke off into one group of three and one of two, starting up games of Concentration. 

 

Izuku finished in the kitchen around a half hour later, calling for the others to get their plates. Once they all had their plate they gathered back around the sleeping bags, eating silently. They finished quickly and Fumikage and Dark Shadow collected the dishes so they could wash them. 

 

Izuku got a sleeping bag out of the hall closet and set it up beside Shouto’s on the left end of the lineup. Eijirou thanked him and sat down on top of it. The others all gathered around him and the clapping games resumed, this time with Izuku taking the place of Fumikage. They played for around twenty minutes, by which point Fumikage and Dark Shadow were done with the dishes. Izuku pulled the clothesline back in from outside and sighed as he saw that they were still sopping wet from the rain. 

 

“So much for hanging them out to dry…”

 

He muttered. He pushed the clothes back outside when he realized they were dripping on the floor. Shouto grabbed a towel from the bathroom and cleaned up the drips. 

 

Ochako looked over at them from her spot in front of Hitoshi.

 

“We probably should have brought those in earlier, you all stink.”

 

Hitoshi sticks his tongue out at her as he tries to sneakily smell his armpits. He ends up gagging.

 

“Do we even have any shampoo or anything?”

 

Shouto asks as he tugs at his greasy hair. It hadn’t been too noticeable due to the black dye, but it had become more apparent as of late. Ochako shrugs,

 

“We have the dish soap. That’ll work well enough.”

 

Hitoshi nods and gets up from his spot on the floor, jogging into the kitchen to grab the soap from under the sink. Once he’s grabbed it he runs off into the bathroom. The door closes behind him but, after a minute, he pokes his head out.

 

“Do we have any towels?”

 

He asks. Izuku shrugs and looks through the hall closet. 

 

“Ummm…yup!”

 

Izuku cheers as he pulls a bath towel out of the closet. It’s a little dusty but there’s no mould or holes so he hands it off to Hitoshi. 


“Thanks.”

 

He says as he ducks back into the bathroom. A moment later, the sound of water hitting porcelain filled the apartment. They also heard a small yelp and Hitoshi’s voice over the sound of the water,

 

“Just so you know, we don’t get hot water!”

 

Izuku shudders as he settles onto his sleeping bag. Fumikage sits down beside him,

 

“We could boil some water if we so wished.”

 

He said. Izuku shook his head,

 

“We don’t have a kettle yet.”

 

Fumikage hummed and they went back to sitting in silence, the only sound being Ochako and Eijirou playing a game of Concentration.

 

Hitoshi finished his shower twenty minutes later. He came out wearing a hoodie he had found at the bottom of his duffel bag. It didn’t smell very good but it was something. Izuku went in after him, Shouto went in after him, and Fumikage went in after him. Shouto’s hair maintained its dyed colour, something they hadn’t quite expected since the dye had been pretty cheap. 

 

Now that they were all clean they gathered into their sleeping bags. 

 

“We should really get some new clothes tomorrow.”

 

Hitoshi says. 

 

“We don’t have quite enough.”

 

Izuku hums in agreement.


“I think we have enough for that. It would be good to get some more food, too.”

 

Eijirou turns in his bag so he can join the conversation.

 

“Speaking of tomorrow, I don’t think I’ll be able to go to school then either. I left my backpack at home and there’s no way I’ll be getting back in time.”

 

Izuku shrugs.

 

“You can stay here if you want. You won’t have to worry about school and you’ll be able to have a powerful position in the government after we take it over.”

 

Eijirou’s eyes narrow,

 

“You guys plan on taking over the government?”

 

Izuku nods enthusiastically, propping himself up on his elbows.

 

“Yeah! The Hero Commission actually encourages things like quirk discrimination and tries their best to keep poor people in areas like the Red Light district so that they have a plentiful supply of villains for their limelight heroes to fight. I’m also pretty sure they’re hiding a lot of things that are incredibly illegal. I’ve been trying to learn how to hack so I can access their records.”

 

Eijirou smiles,

 

“Sounds manly! Yeah, I’ll join you.”

 

Izuku smiles and nods,

 

“Great!”

 

Hitoshi turns to glare at the two from his sleeping bag,

 

“Perfect, a new member. Now can you both please go to sleep? You’re being incredibly loud.”

 

Izuku winces,

“Sorry, Hitoshi.”

 

Hitoshi grumbles as he turns back around. Izuku and Eijirou both settle back into their sleeping bags. Izuku turns towards the light of Fumikage’s night light, falling asleep with a small smile on his face.

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 31: Omelettes

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku is woken by the sun shining through the blinds in the morning. He rubs his eyes as he sits up. He glances to his side, eyes landing on Eijirou’s empty sleeping bag. Panic momentarily overtakes him and he unzips his bag as quickly as he can. His head whips from side to side as he searches for the other boy. He calms down near immediately when he spots the boy in the kitchen, standing in front of the oven. Izuku sighs and wanders into the kitchen.

 

“Good morning, Eijirou!”

 

He exclaims. Eijirou turns from where he’s working over the oven. 

 

“Good morning, Izuku!”

 

Izuku looks over Eijirou’s shoulder to see what he’s doing. There’s a large pan on the stove filled with eggs and what Izuku assumes is ham.

 

“Where’d you get the ingredients for an omelet?”

 

Izuku asks. Eijirou shrugs,

 

“There were some eggs in the fridge but I didn’t think they would be enough so I asked your neighbour to the left for some. She asked what I was making and when I told her she gave me some ham, too. She said the ham was going to expire soon and she couldn’t think of anything else to use it for. Before she closed the door, though, I think she muttered “Those kids just keep multiplying”?”

 

Izuku chuckles as he grabs a cup from the cupboard and fills it with water from the sink. He watches as Hitoshi wakes and decides to start up the coffee machine for him. 


“Thanks.”

 

Hitoshi mumbles as he stumbles into the kitchen, stopping in front of the coffee machine so he can watch as the pot fills. Shouto and Fumikage walk into the kitchen side by side, both getting cups of water from the sink. Ochako comes in next, smiling in lew of a good morning. 

 

“Can I have some of the coffee when it's done, Hitoshi?”

 

She asks. The other boy nods but doesn’t look away from the now half-filled pot. Eijirou turns off the oven and grabs a stack of plates from one of the cupboards.


“Breakfast is ready if you want some.”

 

He says. Everyone gets into a line so that the oven doesn’t become crowded and, within a few minutes, each of them has a glob of eggs and ham on their plates. Before Hitoshi starts eating he pours himself, Ochako, and Izuku coffee. The other two thank him before taking long sips from their mugs. 

 

“Do we have anything to do today?”

Fumikage asks. Everyone else, minus Eijirou, is quick to answer,

 

“Clothes shopping.”

 

Fumikage nods, finishing off the last of his omelet. Once everyone’s done there’s a small pile of dishes by the sink. 


“Everyone grab your duffel bag.”

 

Izuku instructs,

 

“I’ll divide the yen we have in cash so we can split up and get done faster.”

 

Eijirou nods, though he looks a little nervous.

 

“Um, Izuku?”

He asks. The other boy turns to him, urging him on with a smile. 


“Do you think I’ll be able to return to school at some point? Or to my apartment, at least? My mom will probably be worried by now.”

 

Izuku nods slowly,

 

“Once the shopping is done I can go with you to your building if you want.”

 

Eijirou smiles,

 

“Yeah!”

He hurries off into the living room to grab the bag Izuku had grabbed him the night before and Izuku follows after, watching as the others gather by the door. Once he has his bag he checks on the clothes that were still drying outside. Some of them were still a little damp so he looks up, trying to discern if it was going to rain that day. The sky is a bright blue and he can’t see any clouds so he decides to leave the clothes where they are, hoping they’ll be dry by the time they’re back. 

 

The group arranges themselves into a single file line and starts making their way out of the building. Izuku is at the front of the line and Ochako makes up the rear. The foyer is empty when they get to the bottom of the staircase. They continue to walk in a line as they get outside, sticking to the right side of the sidewalk. As they walk they pass quite a few other people on the street. Two of which were a mother with her son. The two had stared at the group as they passed, the son with a look of awe and the mother a look of fear and pity. 

 

When they finally reached their destination, a small row of clothing stores. Izuku stops just before the first store, turning to face the group. 

 

“Alright. We should split up into the different shops so we don’t cause too much suspicion from the workers. If you’re confident you can try to steal an article or two but since everyone has twenty thousand yen it shouldn’t be too big a problem.”

 

Everyone else nods and agrees before splitting off into even groups. Since there are three stores they split into pairs. Hitoshi with Fumikage, Shouto with Izuku, and Eijirou with Ochako. Hitoshi and Fumikage head into the store that focuses more on hoodies and comfortable clothes, Shouto and Izuku head into the more general clothing store, and Eijirou goes with Ochako into the more sporty store that also has a small dress section. 

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 32: New (Old) Friend

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Hitoshi picks up a black hoodie with a cat’s face just barely showing on the chest. Fumikage nods and Hitoshi folds it into the basket. Fumikage shows him a purple hoodie with black text reading “Shadows Live Inside Me” Hitoshi hides his laugh behind his hand and nods, smiling when he sees Dark Shadow peeking out of Fumikage’s shirt, making sure the two don’t pick anything they don’t approve of. They’re also hiding laughter behind their claw. 

 

Now that both of them had four hoodies in their basket, along with four sets of sweat pants. And, much to their dismay, a pair of leggings and a t-shirt each since Izuku had insisted they have at least something that wasn’t baggy, they were ready to check out. 

 

The cashier was a tired-looking teen with heavy bags under their eyes. They barely blinked when the two kids came up to the counter, merely ringing through their clothes and packing them away in a bag.


“Your total is twenty thousand yen. How well you be paying?”

 

“Cash, please.”

 

Hitoshi says. Both he had Fumikage take ten-thousand yen from their wads of twenty thousand and put it on the tray beside the register. The cashier stares at the small pile of cash for a moment before picking it up and counting it quickly before sorting the bills into the register. They hand Fumikage the bag of clothes as the register dings, processing their purchase.


“Thank you for shopping with us. Have a good day.”

 

“Thanks, you too.”

 

The two kids say in unison, bowing briefly before leaving the store. They sit down on a bench in the center of the square and lean back, the bag of clothes between them.

 

“How long do you think the others will take?”


Hitoshi asks. Fumikage shrugs,

 

“Who am I to predict the timeframe in which our companions arrive?”

 

“So you don’t know?”


Fumikage shakes his head and Hitoshi sighs, closing his eyes.


“Wake me up when they get here.”

 

Fumikage hums to let Hitoshi know he heard him as he watches the people around them.

 

--------

 

Shouto just throws a few simple and cheap shirts, pants, and shorts into his basket. Izuku is a little more methodical with his choices, grabbing a few shirts and pants in darker colours and others in lighter ones. By the time both of them were done they each had four shirts, two pairs of pants, two pairs of shorts, and a pack of socks. 

 

When they get to the checkout the cashier looks at them a little skeptically, looking around the store before turning to the two, a fake smile on her face.

 

“And where are your parents, kiddos?”

 

Izuku plasters on his most innocent smile, though Shouto can see the glimmer of mischief in his eyes.

 

“Dead, ma’am.”

 

The woman’s eyes widen and her smile falls when Shouto nods along,


“Yes, they died in a car crash a year or so ago. Tragic, really.”

 

The woman coughs into her hand, beginning to ring their items through.

“I’m so sorry! Is there not anyone looking after you?”

 

She glances around the store again, but the only other person in there is a tired-looking woman with a baby in a carrier on her chest. She has a distinctive mutation, similar to Aka’s, and her baby looks quite similar. Izuku shakes his head, drawing the woman’s attention back to him,


“Oh, no. Our parents drove all their family members away since they were constantly drunk and had no respect for any of them. As far as we know, we have no surviving family members.”

 

The woman is getting visibly uncomfortable, something that both boys delight in. She finally starts bagging their items, now looking at the register for the price. 

 

“Your total is twenty-two-thousand-six-hundred. How do you two plan on paying?”

 

She asks. It's clear in her voice that she expects the two to panic and complain about not having enough. Instead, both pull out their twenty-thousand yen bills. They both place eleven-thousand-three-hundred in the tray by the register. The woman’s eyes widen marginally and she starts picking through the pile, inspecting each bill thoroughly as she looks for forgeries. At this point, the mother had joined them in line and was clearly getting impatient.


“For fucks sake, if you haven’t found a fake yet just count it up and put it away!”

 

She says, bouncing her fussing baby. The cashier looks sheepish as she finally sorts the bills into the register and hands Izuku their bags. 

 

“Right, here you are. Have a good day.”

 

Izuku and Shouto both thank her as they bow, leaving with smirks on their faces. They quickly spot Hitoshi and Fumikage on their bench and start making their way over. As they get closer Fumikage gently shakes Hitoshi on the shoulder, stirring the boy to open one of his eyes. He waves when they’re close enough. 

 

“Hey. D’ya know when Eijirou and Ochako will be back?”

 

Izuku shakes his head, placing their bags under the bench and sitting down on the ground beside them. Hitoshi hums and leans back into the bench. They fall into a comfortable silence as they wait for their last members.

 

--------

 

Ochako holds up a nice, simple pink dress to show Eijirou. The boy nods enthusiastically. 


“I think that’d look great on you, Ochako! What do you think about this?”

 

He holds up a simple black long-sleeve since Izuku had insisted they each have something practical to wear in case they went out on a “mission”.

 

Ochako nods and they both add their choices to their baskets. They both had three shirts, three pairs of pants, socks, and a pair of shorts. The only addition being Ochako’s dress. As they’re walking up to the register, talking about the clothes they had picked, they heard someone squeal shortly before a pink girl who looked to be around their age barreled into Eijirou, nearly knocking him over. 

 

“Eijirou! I haven’t seen you in a few days, where have you been?”

 

She asks, finally pulling away from the boy she had been squeezing. Eijirou smiles sheepishly, 


“Sorry, Mina, my mom’s been too busy to drive me to school.”

 

The girl, Mina, frowns. It’s an expression Ochako recognizes, one someone wears when they want to help another, but don’t know how. Or, when they’ve become used to something but still don’t really like it.

 

“I’m sure my parents could drive you.”

 

She offers. 

 

“It really wouldn’t be a problem.”

 

Eijirou shakes his head,

 

“No, really it's okay. It's a good thing! I made some new friends at the park. This is Ochako,”

 

He says, gesturing behind him and the girl. Mina leans to the side so she can she behind Eijirou, breaking out into a wide grin when she sees the other girl. 

 

“Hi! It's nice to meet you, I’m Mina!”

 

She proclaims. Ochako smiles back, though hers is a little more subdued.

 

“It's nice to meet you too! I’m Ochako.”

 

Mina nods to herself before turning back to Eijirou,

 

“You said ‘friends’ plural. Who are the others?”

 

“Oh! Well, there’s Izuku, who I met first, then Hitoshi, Shouto, and Fumikage.”

 

Mina nods along as Eijirou talks, obviously committing all the names to memory.

 

“Do you think I can meet all of them? My parents are just down the street at a nearby restaurant, I’m sure they won’t mind.”

 

Eijirou nods enthusiastically,

 

“Yeah! Just let us pay for this stuff first.”

 

Mina nods and follows behind the two as they head to the checkout. The cashier doesn’t give them any problems, merely scanning their items and sorting away their twenty-thousand-six hundred yen into the register before sending them on their way. They find the others on the bench quickly. As they approach Hitoshi opens his eyes and Izuku looks down from the sky.

 

“Hey!”

 

Eijirou calls out.


“I found one of my friends from school. Everyone this is-”

 

“Hi! I’m Mina!”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
We thought our old dog, Roxy, was dying Saturday. She was barfing up blood and it was starting to look like going to the bathroom hurt her. She wasn't eating (which is entirely unlike her), she wasn't as energetic as usual and she nearly refused to go upstairs. My dad took her to the vet and the vet said that she just had a bladder infection. They gave her an anti-nausea shot and a vaccine with two weeks' worth of antibiotics before giving my dad some medication for her and sending them on their way. She's doing much better now and is eating the wet food we got her fine.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 33: Moving Out Of Your Mother’s House (Even Though You’re Only Ten)

Chapter Text

Izuku smiles, jumping up from his place on the ground.

“Hi, Mina! I’m Izuku!”

 

Shouto raises his hand,

 

“Shouto.”

 

Before Fumikage gets a chance to speak Dark Shadow floats up, coming to a stop above his head.

 

“I’m Dark Shadow and this is Fumikage!”

 

Hitoshi settles back against the bench,


“I’m Hitoshi.”

 

Mina smiles, waving enthusiastically.

 

“It’s nice to meet you all!”

 

“It’s nice to meet you, too.”

 

Izuku replies, still the only other one standing. 


“Actually, we were going to go see my mom now, if you wanted to come along, Mina.”

 

The girl nods, her expression becoming a little more serious.

“Yeah, sure. My parents are expecting me home in around an hour and a half so that should be enough time.”

 

Hitoshi sighs, grabbing his bag as he slides off the bench. 


“More walking, then?”

 

Eijirou shrugs,

 

“We don’t live that far away. Maybe about a ten to fifteen-minute walk?”

 

Fumikage and Shouto grab their bags as well. Shouto hands Izuku his and the group sets off further into the city, Eijirou and Mina in the lead.

 

--------

 

They arrive at a small house twelve minutes later. Eijirou looks over the driveway and, upon seeing a small black car parked on the cement, walks up to the front door. He lifts the doormat and removes a key from underneath, sliding it into the lock and turning it until it clicks. The door starts to open on its own and he gives it a small push, leading his friends inside. 

 

“Mom!?”

 

He calls, closing the door once everyone’ is inside. 

 

“I’m home!”

 

He slides off his shoes and exchanges them for the slippers waiting by the door. He grabs some extra pairs from a nearby closet and hands them out to the others. Once they’re all ready he starts taking them further into the house, calling for his mother every few minutes. Finally, a tired-looking woman with black hair and grey eyes comes down a set of stairs. 

 

“Eijirou? What do you need dear? I thought you were in your room.”

 

“No, mom. I only just got home.”

 

She glances over at a clock sitting on the TV stand. 

 

“You mean from school? But it's only two!”

 

“Yeah, mom. On a Sunday. I mean I just got home from the park.”

 

She smiles, wandering off into the kitchen.

“Well, that's nice, dear. Is that where you met your friends? They seem nice.”


She starts up the coffee machine and Hitoshi stares at it longingly. Eijirou is clearly starting to become exasperated so Izuku steps in.


“Actually, ma’am, Eijirou went to the park yesterday. He came back to our house with us when it became clear it was going to rain. He just got home from that today.”

 

The woman pauses. 

 

“Oh. Well, I’d better thank your parents for taking care of him, then. But, I’m sorry, did you just say that all you kids live together?”

 

Shouto nods,


“Yes, ma’am.”

 

She blinks, finally turning to face them all with a mug of coffee gripped tightly in her hands.

“You must have a pretty big house, then. I could never imagine having so many kids.”

 

“No, we live in an apartment. In the Red Light district.”

 

Shouto says, clearly seeing nothing wrong with the statement. Everyone else stares at the boy.


“I see…”

 

She glances at the clock again. 

 

“Um, are your parents home? Maybe I can call them now to thank them for looking after Eijirou.”

 

“We live alone.”

 

Hitoshi face-palms and Ochako sighs, patting Shouto on the shoulder. The woman looks incredibly uncomfortable. Finally, she sees the bags they’re all carrying.


“Did you go on a shopping spree? Sounds fun, what did you guys get.”

 

“Clothes.”

 

They all say in unison.


“The rain soaked the items we had drying on the line and we’ve been wearing the same garments for a few days now.”

 

Fumikage explains. The woman’s smile becomes tight. 

 

“That’s…great?”

 

Eijirou sighs, 

 

“I’m just going to go make sure my school uniform is clean, okay, mum?”

 

The woman smiles, nodding,

 

“Of course dear. I’ll keep your friends entertained while you’re gone.”

 

Once Eijirou had disappeared up the stairs she takes an anxious sip of her coffee.

“So…are you kids in school?”

 

The only one to nod is Mina. 

 

“Oh, Mina, dear, I didn’t recognize you! How are you doing?”

 

Mina smiles,

 

“Fine, Ms.Kirishima. How are you?”

 

The woman waves away the question,

 

“Oh, you know, the same as always. Work has been running me dry and I feel like I barely spend any time at home anymore!”

 

Mina takes a deep breath and stands up a little straighter.

 

“Actually, that’s something I’ve been meaning to talk to you about. You work so much that you barely even spend any time with Eijirou! I mean, he’s been gone for over twenty-four hours and you didn’t even notice! He had no way to get to school yesterday, which is the fourth day in a row now not including today, and he tried to explain what had happened but you didn’t listen until he spelt it out to you!”

 

Ms.Kirishima’s expression becomes angry as she looks down at Mina,


“You don’t understand. I’m a single parent! I have to work hard to keep this roof over our heads and food in the fridge! So Eijirou misses a day or two, it’s not like he’s falling behind-”

 

“But he is!”

 

Mina interrupts, throwing her hands out,

 

“He gets almost every assignment in late because he misses weeks' worth of school and doesn’t even know about them until the last minute! He’s only barely passing, and that's because I get him what I can. And you’re the one who insists on him going to a school that you have to pay extra for that’s so far you have to drive him instead of sending him to one of the cheaper schools nearby that he can walk to!”

 

“Because I want him to have a good education!”

 

“He won’t get it if you don’t drive him! Even worse, he called me barely a week ago saying he’d almost set fire to the kitchen and asking me to come over to help cook! For himself and you because you couldn’t even be bothered to order something for your son who can barely reach the stove, let alone the cabinets!”

 

Ms.Kirishima doesn’t get a chance to reply because Eijirou finally comes down the stairs, backpack slung over his shoulder and shopping bag gripped tightly at his side, looking slightly bulkier than it had before.

 

“Oh, Eijirou! Where are you going, dear?”

 

“I’m going to stay with Izuku for a bit, I think.”

 

Her eyes widen and she blinks, 

 

“What?”

 

“I heard the argument you and Mina were having and…and I think I want to stay with them for a bit. Sure, I won’t be able to get to school every day but, honestly, I don’t care. I can just take an online course.”

 

“But, dear, you know that school is expensive. I pay for it because I want you to get a good education and make nice friends.”

 

“I barely go half the time and Mina is my only friend there, mom.”

 

“I-well-how do you expect to live with a group of kids no older than you? Surely they’ll be evicted at some point, and then what will you do?”

 

Izuku takes a step forward,

 

“Actually, ma’am, we always get our rent in on time and our landlord is already more than used to new people moving in with us. I did just start with me, Hitoshi, and Shouto after all. Also, Eijirou has already made friends with some of the other tenants and they wouldn’t let our landlord evict us if he tried.”

 

“Well, I’m your mother, dear. You can’t just abandon me.”

 

Eijirou turns away, making his way to the front door.

 

“This is the first time I’ve seen you in a month.”

 

She stands speechless in the kitchen as the group put their shoes back on, leaving the slippers in a neat row in front of the mat. Izuku opens the door for everyone, closing it without glancing back at the woman standing in her kitchen. He jogs a few paces to catch up to the group and hugs Eijirou to his side as they walk, not caring for the tears that occasionally land on his shoulder.

Chapter 34: Missing Posters Aren’t A Good Look

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

When the group returns to the apartment they pile onto the sleeping bags. Izuku starts up the coffee machine while everyone else gathers around Eijirou, trying to console him.

 

He pours out five mugs of coffee. He leaves Hitoshi’s black, adds a spoonful of sugar and a splash of cream to his own, puts two splashes of cream in Fumikage’s, drowns Shouto’s in sugar and cream, and puts two sugar and one cream in Eijirou’s. 

 

Izuku grabs Hitoshi's and Fumikage’s, carrying them out to the living room. The two boys thank him and he goes back to the kitchen to grab Shouto and Eijirou’s. Eijirou thanks him, taking the mug gently. Finally, he joins the group with his own mug. Eijirou leans into his side and the seven huddle together like that for a few hours. Only dispersing when Izuku insists on starting dinner.

 

--------

 

Izuku woke up that morning hot. It doesn’t take him long to figure out why, however, as he’s near the centre of a giant cuddle pile. He worms his way out, trying his best not to wake anyone. He yawns as he makes his way into the kitchen. He grabs the loaf of bread and loads the toaster to capacity. He grabs a large plate from the cupboard to collect the toast.

 

He starts the coffee machine, standing by it as it fills the pot. It’s only about a quarter full when the toast pops. He grabs the pieces and places them on the large plate before loading up the toaster again. He repeats the process until he has a decent amount of toast in a pile and a mug of coffee in hand. 

 

Hitoshi wanders in next. He grabs a plate from the cupboard and takes three pieces of toast, coating them with peanut butter before pouring himself a mug of coffee. He stands next to Izuku, slowly making his way through his breakfast. 

 

Shouto and Fumikage come in next, both grabbing three pieces as well. They pour themselves mugs of coffee and Fumikage starts up the machine again since the pot is nearly empty.

 

Mina and Ochako come in a few minutes later. Ochako pours herself some coffee but Mina ignores the pot, only grabbing herself some toast. 

 

Eijirou is the last one to enter the kitchen. Izuku hands him a plate and he gets himself some toast with peanut butter and honey. He gets himself some coffee and joins the group by the counter so he can eat. It’s when Mina is just finishing her breakfast when her eyes widen and she swears under her breath. 


“I was supposed to be home hours ago!”


She groans, chugging the last of her coffee. Izuku winces,

 

“Sorry, Mina. We can take you home now if you like?”

 

She shakes her head,

 

“I can wait until everyone’s ready. Do you want me to pull the clothesline in?”

 

Izuku nods,


“That would be great, thanks.”

 

She puts her dishes in the sink and goes back into the living room. She slides the window open and grabs the line, pulling it in. She puts the clothes into a neat pile on the floor to be sorted through later. Izuku finishes his breakfast quickly and adds his dishes to the slowly growing pile in the sink.

 

“I’m gonna get changed before taking Mina home. Anyone else wanna come with?”

 

Ochako and Eijirou both raise their hands. Izuku nods and the three head into the living room. Izuku rifles through the pile of clothes to find his and heads off to the bathroom. Ochako grabs her new dress from her shopping bag and goes into the spare room to change and Eijirou grabs a set of clothes from his bag, waiting patiently for a room to open up.

Ochako is out and ready before Izuku so Eijirou changes in the spare room. Once the three of them are ready they grab their duffel bags and Izuku waves Mina over from where she was talking to Hitoshi.

 

“You ready?” 

 

He asks. She nods and the four leave the apartment, waving to those staying behind. The building is empty as they make their way out, Izuku in the lead. They walk all the way back to the shopping center they had met Mina in to make it easier for her to lead them back to her house. 

 

When they reach the bench that the group had claimed the day before Mina takes over, leading them further into the city. The walk is a little longer than Izuku had thought it would be. Including the time it took them to get to the stores they walk for just over an hour. 

 

Mina’s house is a little bigger than Eijirou’s and she leads them up to her porch, which holds all of them with room to spare. She takes a deep breath before knocking on the door. They wait a few moments and, when it doesn’t open, she knocks again. 

 

No one comes to the door. Mina shrugs,

 

“They must be at work. They take the train since we don’t own cars.”

 

“You don’t have a key?”

 

Ochako asks. Mina shakes her head,


“No, they don’t think I’m old enough to have one of my own and they refuse to hide one out here in case a stranger finds it or an animal takes it.”

 

Eijirou hums, shrugging. 


“So, we just head back to the apartment, then?”

 

Mina nods, already making her way down the stairs. 

 

“Yeah, I guess. Sorry I made you walk all this way for nothing.”

 

Izuku shakes his head, following Mina down the steps. 

 

“Nothing to apologize for, Mina. You didn’t know they wouldn’t be here.”

 

They form themselves into a line, Izuku at the front this time, as they walk down the sidewalk. They’re passing a set of TVs in a store window when the news comes on, catching Ochako’s attention.


“Hey, look, Endeavor’s youngest son is missing!”

 

Izuku spins around, eyes widening when he sees a picture of Shouto, obviously without the dyed hair or makeup, on the TV screens. He turns back around and quickens his pace. The others rush to catch up and Ochako grabs his arm.

 

“Izuku? What’s wrong?”

 

“We have to tell Shouto. We need to come up with an alias for him until this blows over. They have to stop reporting on it at some time, right? He has to be presumed dead at some point…”

 

He mutters the last bits under his breath, subconsciously shaking Ochako off. Eijirou, Mina, and Ochako share a worried look as they try to keep up with Izuku. 

 

“What are you talking about?”

 

Mina asks, trying to stay at the boy’s side. He waves her off, 

 

“Later, when we get back.”

 

Izuku doesn’t seem to get tired the entire walk back, though the others end up panting behind him as they near the building. He throws the doors open, ignoring the residents in the lobby. The other three wave, doing their best to apologize for Izuku’s behaviour. 

 

When he reaches the door to the apartment he wrenches it open, thankful he hadn’t locked it when they left. Fumikage, Hitoshi, and Shouto look up when the door opens. Izuku makes direct eye contact with Shouto,

 

“He finally reported you missing.”

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 35: Grocery Shopping Is Boring (But It’s Still Something To Do)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Shouto’s eyes widen as he stares at Izuku,

 

“What?”

 

“Endeavor finally reported you missing. Your face is all over the News.”

 

Shouto’s breath hitches and Izuku finally actually enters the apartment, kneeling in front of the boy. 

 

“What do we do?”

 

Shouto asks. Izuku shrugs, 

 

“Your hair is a completely different colour now and so long as we cover up your scar in public it should be fine. Though it might still be good to limit the time you spend outside.”

 

Shouto nods slowly,


“Right. If he has people searching for me now it’s likely that heroes will be much more vigilant on their patrols and areas closer to the house may become more heavily patrolled. Possibly the poorer areas too, since they likely assumed me kidnapped.”

 

Hitoshi groans,

 

“You mean we might have to deal with limelights near the building? They’ll definitely become suspicious if they see us wandering around.”

 

The others agree as they gather in the middle of the room, moving to form a circle so that they can see each other.


“So there isn’t much for us to do, then. We just have to make sure that we only leave the apartment when it’s necessary.”

 

Ochako says. The others nod along,

 

“I’m sorry for causing problems.”

 

Shouto apologizes. Izuku waves it away,

 

“It’s not your fault. Plus, this means you’ll get more time to work on your figure, maybe even complete it.”

 

Shouto glances over at the half-finished fox figurine in the corner. He nods in agreement with Izuku. Izuku pulls out his notebook,

 

“Alright. With that settled, I think we should take inventory of our food and figure out when we’ll need to go grocery shopping next.”

 

The others nod and Izuku stands, going to the kitchen and opening the first set of cupboards so he can look through them. Hitoshi and Shouto both get up and help Izuku take stock while the others entertain themselves with clapping games. It takes just over an hour for the three boys to finish taking stock. When they’re done Izuku has three pages worth of recorded stock and had reorganized the entire kitchen. 

 

“If we keep going the way we are we should be okay for just over a week more before we have to go grocery shopping again.”

 

Izuku announces. The others nod and Izuku, Hitoshi, and Shouto join in the games. The group entertains themselves until the sun sets, at which point they eat dinner and get ready for bed. 

 

“Goodnight,”

 

Izuku says. The others’ voices blend together as they reply. Izuku turns out the apartment’s lights and Fumikage turns on his nightlight. The apartment slowly fills with the sounds of soft snoring and ruffling sheets. 




The next week isn’t very exciting. They entertain themselves with clapping games, tic-tac-toe, borrowing books from their neighbours, doing brief work on their plans and, in Shouto’s case, finishing his fox figurine. When their food finally depletes to the point that they need to go shopping, they’re all incredibly bored and looking for entertainment wherever they can find it. When Izuku announces that they need to go grocery shopping, the others fall over each other to volunteer. Mina even goes as far as to kneel down in front of him, clasping his hands in hers. 

 

“Please, please, please let me go! I can’t handle another minute stuck here with nothing to do!”

Hitoshi rolls his eyes,

 

“You’re not the only one who's bored Mina.”

 

She glares at him from over her shoulder before turning back to Izuku,


“Please!”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Alright, alright. But we should have someone else come, too.”

 

Fumikage raises his hand and Dark Shadow joins him, 

 

“You could bring us.”

 

Dark Shadow nods vehemently,

 

“Yeah, then you’d have two sets of hands for the price of one!”

 

Izuku nods, taking his hands from Mina’s when he realizes she’s still holding them. 

 

“Okay, now that that’s settled does anyone have anything they want me to add to the shopping list?”

 

Shouto raises his hand,

 

“If you can, could you pick me up some more wood?”

 

Izuku nods, writing in his notebook that had appeared out of nowhere.

 

“Anything else? I already have coffee written down, Hitoshi.”

 

He tacks on the last part when he sees the boy raise his hand. 

 

“Um, do you think you could pick up some schoolwork books for me?”

 

Eijirou asks. 

 

“I don’t think I’ll be going back anytime soon.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“That’s a great idea! We can pick some up for everyone.”

 

The only person who doesn’t groan in protest is Shouto, but izuku chooses to ignore their complaints.

 

“All right, we should get going now if we want to avoid most of the foot traffic.”

 

Mina and Fumikage nod in agreement and they each grab their duffel bags. They wave to the others as they leave, though Mina looks like she’s rubbing it in their faces at least a little bit.

 

As they walk they see more heroes than normal, heroes who are spending less time with civilians than they usually do. Izuku smiles and waves at one of them and the hero narrows his eyes, though he thankfully doesn’t do anything else. 

 

--------

 

They reach the grocery store a little faster than the last time they had gone. They stop in front of one of the large windows and Izuku rips the shopping list into three sections. He gives both Mina and Fumikage their own section and leads them into the store. Izuku smiles at the cashiers stationed near the door as they each grab a shopping cart and split off into different sections of the store. 

 

--------

 

Izuku finds all of his items easily, lettuce, carrots, cucumbers, oranges, bell peppers, and apples. He also grabs celery, though it hadn’t been on the list, and chocolate chips. 

 

--------

 

Fumikage has a little trouble locating the bread section but, once he had, he managed to get everything on his part of the list. White bread, cinnamon raisin bread, bagels, and muffins. He has an easier time finding peanut butter, honey, jam, and coffee. 

 

--------

 

Mina finds the dairy section easily and makes quick work of her list. Butter, cream cheese, normal cheese, milk, chocolate milk, and even a few Lunchables. She picks up a few of each of them before going to the meat sections, where she meets up with Fumikage to get salami, ground beef, chicken wings, and chicken breast. She takes a small detour on her way to the cashier to the seasonings, where she picks out a few they didn’t have at the apartment and some they were low on.

 

--------

 

Izuku meets back up with the other two at the cash register, where they slowly load all of their groceries onto the counter. The cashier gives them an increasingly concerned and suspicious look as their pile slowly grows. When she finally finishes ringing them up she asks how they want to pay. 

 

“Credit, please.”

 

Izuku says as he takes out Endeavor’s card. The cashier raises a brow as she turns the card scanner to face him and he swipes it. She looks surprised when it accepts and leans over the counter.

 

“I know that's not your card, kid. Are you sure you didn’t get more groceries than your parents asked you to?”

 

Izuku keeps a straight face as he looks the cashier in the eye,

 

“There are seven of us at home, ma’am. Including me.”

 

She blinks at him in surprise before clearing her throat. 

 

“Sorry, have a good day.”

 

“You too.”

 

The three kids chorus as they load their groceries back into their carts. When they reach the cart turn in they start to take up the bags. Izuku takes two, Mina takes three, Fumikage grabs two and Dark Shadow takes up the rest. 

 

“I can go pick up the school books if you guys are okay heading back together.”


Izuku suggests. 


“I don’t have any perishables in my bags.”

 

The other two nod,

 

“Sounds good.”

 

Mina agrees. Izuku waves to the two as they leave the store, Mina and Fumokage heading back to the apartment while Izuku heads further into the plaza. 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry.
Today was my first day back in school after winter break and it went pretty well. The classes were easy though I was a little more tired than usual since I just got back on my school sleep schedule.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 36: School Work Is Also Something To Do

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

It doesn't take him long to find the store he’s looking for. They sell all manners of school supplies, from backpacks to notebooks and, what Izuku’s there for, workbooks. He smiles up at the cashier sitting behind the register, a middle-aged woman who owns the store with her husband. She smiles back at him before going back to flipping through a catalogue. 

 

Izuku makes his way to the back of the store where there’s a large table displaying workbooks for different years and subjects. He picks a stack of workbooks for their year that are a mix of different subjects, making them rather thick, and does his best to balance them as he makes his way back to the checkout. The woman quickly notices his struggle and rushes over to help him. She takes some of the books and carries them back to the register. With his hands now mostly free, Izuku grabs a box of pencils and one of pens on the way back. 

 

The woman puts the books down on the counter and watches as Izuku adds the things he had grabbed.


“Why do you need so many of the same book, dear?”

 

She asks, leaning to the side a bit so she can fully see Izuku. The boy shrugs,

 

“There’s one for everyone.”

 

“What do you mean, everyone?”

“I mean my friends.”

 

She clicks her tongue,


“Now why would you need to buy books for your friends? Shouldn’t their parents be doing that?”

Izuku shakes his head as he takes out Endeavor’s credit card, getting ready to pay for the items.

 

“No, the seven of us all live together now. Actually, I should probably grab a few more. With our track record, I don’t think the number will stay seven very long.”

 

The woman looks at him in surprise as he ambles back over to the workbooks, grabbing a few more before coming back again. She shakes her head in endearment as Izuku adds the books to the pile. She grabs five of the books as well as the pencils and pens and tucks them into a bag without scanning them.

 

“I can’t in good conscience let you pay for all of this.”

 

She says, 

 

“Especially if it’s just all of you on your own.”

 

Izuku shakes his head,


“Really Mrs.Tetsutetsu it’s not a problem!”

She waves him away as she starts scanning the rest of his items. 

 

“I don’t want to hear it. Just let me do something nice for you, dear. I insist.”

 

Izuku huffs but relents. Paying for the items that Mrs.Tetsutetsu had scanned quickly. She hands him his bags and he takes a moment to arrange them with the others in a way that won’t topple him over.

“I hope you have a good day, dear.”

 

She says as he turns to leave.


“You too, ma’am!”

 

He calls over his shoulder, taking a moment to figure out how to open the door before he’s back out on the street, making his way home.

 

--------

 

When Izuku arrives back at the apartment nearly two hours he has to knock on the door in order to get inside. Shouto opens it slowly before registering that it's Izuku waiting on the other side. He insists on taking a few of the bags into the apartment before letting Izuku in. Fumikage, Dark Shadow, and Ochako start putting the groceries he had had away while Eijirou and Hitoshi work on finding a spot for the workbooks. 

 

Izuku sits on his sleeping bag near immediately, flopping onto his back when he decides that he no longer wants to be upright. Hitoshi appears over him, tilting his head to the side,

 

“You walked pretty fucking far, right? Do you want me to get you some water?”

 

Izuku nods and Hitoshi disappears from his view. He can hear the water turn on at the sink in the kitchen and he listens as it runs for a while before being turned off. Hitoshi appears above him again and hands him a cup, which he has to sit up to drink from. 

 

“Thanks.”

 

Izuku says. Hitoshi nods and wanders over to where Eijirou put the school supplies. He selects one of the workbooks before grabbing a pencil and finding a corner to work in. 

 

“Thanks for getting the books, Izuku.”

 

Eijirou says, coming to sit in front of the boy with a workbook in hand. Izuku nods, 

 

“You welcome. It’s something to do now that we can’t really leave the apartment.”

 

He watches as the others flock to the workbooks, something he’s sure they wouldn’t be doing under other circumstances. Eijirou nods and sets to work on his, though he seems to be having some difficulty writing with it balanced on his lap. 

 

“Hey, Dark Shadow?”

 

Izuku asks, twisting his head so he can see both the shadow and Fumiakge, who has chosen a far corner to work in like Hitoshi. The two both lift their heads from where they were reading over questions in the book. 

 

“Yes, Izuku?”

 

“Do you have a limit to how much you can lift?”

The bird shrugs,


“Not really. Just how much I can fit in my hands. Why?”

 

“I was thinking that we should get a table and chairs or something.”

 

The shadow nods,

 

“But how would we get everything here? It would take days to do it on our own!”

 

Dark Shadow counters. Fumikage nods in agreement but Izuku only shrugs. 


“I know a few people who would be willing to help. They got the fridge here for us, after all.”

 

Dark Shadow thinks it over for a moment before finally agreeing but Fumiakge pipes up. 

 

“Can we wait for tomorrow? I do not think going out again today would be beneficial. Both because of the heroes and due to the fact that we spent most of today walking.”

 

Izuku nods,

“Tomorrow, then.”

 

He gets up from where he was sitting and grabs a workbook and pencil for himself before settling back into his spot. He sets his water down next to him as he works. Occasionally looking up or moving so he can help when one of the others gets stuck. 

 

By the time they were ready to eat dinner all of them were tired and hungry, ready to eat before settling into bed. Shouto helps Izuku in the kitchen and the others wait patiently for them to finish. They all eat quickly and silently before stacking their dishes in the sink for Fumikage and Dark Shadow to wash. They all change into their most comfortable clothing for bed since Eijirou is the only one who has actual pyjamas. They wait for Fumikage and Dark Shadow to finish before they turn off the lights and burrow into their sleeping bags. 



Izuku is once again the first one to wake up in the morning. He makes breakfast for himself and jumps up to sit on the counter. He watches as everyone wakes up from his perch in the kitchen and helps them get things from the cupboards above him. Once everyone had eaten Fumikage offers to head out with Izuku so they can both talk to the men in the gym and find a table set. Izuku agrees and the two grab their duffel bags. They’re about to leave when Ochako runs over, bag already strung across her body.

 

“Can I come, too? I can use my quirk to lighten the load.”

 

Izuku thinks it over for a moment before nodding,

 

“Alright.”

 

Ochako beams as she follows the two out of the apartment. Izuku waves to the others before closing the door behind him, following Ochako and Fumikage as they make their way down the hall.

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 37: New (Invisible) Friend

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku smiles as they enter the gym, avoiding the overly sticky parts of the floor as he makes his way down the stairs. Ochako and Fumikage copy what he does, walking in a single-file line behind him. Three of the men, all at nearby machines, look up when the kids enter. 

 

“Hey, Izuku!”

 

They call. Izuku waves, 

 

“Hey, guys!”

 

The three men climb off their machines, locking them in place. 

 

“You here to work out or do you have a job for us?”

 

One of them asks, an amused smile on his face. 

 

“We’re here with a job, but I’d be more than happy to join you after!”

 

The man chuckles and ruffles Izuku’s hair with one hand while he uses the other to signal to the others. They get to work putting away the weights they had been using while Izuku keeps talking with the man in front of him.

 

“We need your help getting a table and maybe a few chairs from the dump.”

 

The man nods. The other two reappear behind him, finished putting the weights away. 

 

“Lead the way!”

 

The one to the left says. Izuku nods and squeezes past his friends, leading the way back up the stairs and onto the street. The journey to the dump is filled with odd stares from onlookers and stories from the men that contain dad jokes. When they finally reach the trash-ridden beach Izuku leads the group between the stinking piles. 

 

They have to search for a few hours before they find a table and some chairs in good enough shape. They’re dirty and smelly, but Izuku reassures them that the cleaning supplies they have at home should be sufficient and they set off back for the apartment. 

 

--------

 

They’re halfway there when Izuku sees a set of floating clothes at the edge of the crowd. They’re shaking, twisting and turning as if trying to look in every direction at once. Izuku jogs ahead of the others and stops in front of the clothes.

 

“Hello?”

 

Izuku says. The clothes straighten out, facing him.

 

“Do you know which way block four is?”

 

The clothes, now revealed to be a girl, asks. Izuku nods,

 

“Yeah, but it’s pretty far away.”

 

The girl sobs, folding into herself and sliding down the wall of the building she was in front of. Izuku twists his head over his shoulder and waves for the others to continue on as he settles next to her. He waits until her tears stop falling to talk to her.

 

“Why are you trying to get to block four?”

 

Izuku asks. The girl sniffs,

 

“It’s where my house is.”

 

Izuku titlsts his head, 

 

“You don’t know the address?”

 

He’s pretty sure the girl shakes her head, but he’s not totally sure. 

 

“No. We just moved and I haven’t memorized the address yet. I was meant to find my school but on the way, I ran into a group of boys and they beat me up and destroyed my things. They said that since I was new I had to be ‘initiated’. I ran away once they let me up and now I don’t know where I am and-”

 

Izuku raises a hand, cutting her off before she starts rambling.

 

“Why don’t you come back home with me? You can eat lunch with us and I can help you find your house after.”

 

Her sleeve moves as if she’s rubbing her face and she gets up slowly.

 

“Okay.”

 

Izuku rises with her and holds out his hand. She takes it and he leads her through the crowd, helping her weave through the people. 

 

--------

 

When they reach the apartment building Mr.Sukēto is sitting behind his desk in the lobby. When he sees Izuku holding hands with the girl he jumps up from his seat. 

 

“No, absolutely not! You are not going to harbour another child. There are too many of you already.”

 

Izuku tilts his head,

 

“I’m sorry Mr.Sukēto, have we been causing you trouble?”

 

The man’s face goes red and his eyes bulge.

“Trouble!? Of course, you’ve been causing trouble! Just a few minutes ago three men carried gross, smelly furniture up to your apartment! I’m tired of you bringing literal trash in here and expecting everything to be fine. I’m sick and tired of dealing with you kids!”

 

Izuku is trying to find something to say when the same old woman who had defended him last time comes out of the staircase.

 

“Are you yelling at the kids again? And for something so stupid too. Everyone in this damned building has furniture and even clothing they got from a dump. You sleep on a couch you got from someone’s dumpster years ago.”

 

She keeps going, seeming to find an endless fountain of things to lecture Mr.Sukēto about. Izuku squeezes the girl’s hand tight and pulls her around the two and up the stairs to the apartment.

 

When Izuku opens the door it's to find the table and chairs haphazardly left off to the side ad the three men leading the others in an at-home workout. They all seem pretty focused, but they look up when Izuku enters.

 

“Hey everyone! This is…uh…”

 

He looks at the girl as he realizes he never asked for her name.

 

“Oh! I’m Hagakure Tooru. You can call me Tooru!”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I have the first part of my science exams today so please wish me luck!

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 38: Your Quirk Isn’t What You Think

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku and Tooru are quick to join the others in their workout, following along with the men until all eight kids are tired and sitting on the floor, breathing heavily. The men move the table and chairs into the bottom left corner of the apartment before leaving, waving as they go. The kids wave back until the door closes, blocking off their sight of the adults. 

 

They stay on the ground for a while. Izuku is the first to get up so he can make lunch, leaving the others on the floor. 

 

He makes up a few sandwiches, each one a little different according to everyone’s preferences. Once he’s done he hands them out, forcing those lying down to sit up so they can take their plate. 

 

Some of them gather at the table to eat while others stay on the floor, too tired to move. 

 

Once everyone’s done and the dishes are piled by the sink Fumikage gets up from the table and begins filling the sink with water. Izuku watches everyone for a moment before looking back at Tooru, 

 

“Are you ready to find your house?”

Izuku asks her. 

 

“No, I don’t think I’ll be able to walk that far right now.”

 

She says. Izuku nods, 

 

“Okay. We can get you set up to stay the night later, then.”

 

He’s pretty sure she nods and he jumps down from his chair, grabbing his notebook and a pencil from his duffel bag before sitting back down next to Tooru. He flips his notebook to a new page and turns to her,

 

“Would it be alright if I took some notes on your quirk?”

 

He asks her, head tilted to the side. 

 

“Oh, yeah, sure.”

 

She says, sounding a little apprehensive. Izuku smiles,


“Thanks! What can you tell me about it?”

 

She shrugs,

 

“Not much, really. It’s a mutation quirk that most people in my family have. If I focus I can contort the light around me and set off a flash like a camera, but that blinds the people around me so…”

 

She trails off and Izuku nods, writing down what she had said. He keeps writing, his eyebrows furrowing as his lips tick downward ever so slightly. A soft gasp sounds from the floor, though Izuku doesn’t seem to notice. 

 

“That’s his thinking face.”

 

Hitoshi says, glancing between Tooru and Izuku.

 

“Get ready to have your entire worldview tipped upside down.”

 

Shouto nods from his spot beside Hitoshi and Fumikage voices his agreement from the kitchen. Eijirou, Ochako, and Mina all nod along too.

 

“What do you mean?”

Tooru asks. 

 

“It means he’s going to first prove to you that he’s the smartest person on the fucking planet, making you trust him just that little bit more-”

 

“Though we’re pretty sure he doesn’t realize what he’s doing.”

 

Shouto butts in. Hitoshi nods before continuing,

 

“Right. And then he’s going to reveal to you that he plans on tearing down the government and taking over Japan and then he’s going to ask you to help him.”

 

“And you won’t be able to turn him down.”

 

Shouto adds. Mina looks at Hitoshi in surprise,

 

“I’m sorry, his fucking what?!”

Hitoshi looks at the girl, tilting his head to the side slightly,


“Did he never tell you? He plans on tearing down the HPSC and rebuilding it into something better. He only has the bare bones of a plan right now, though. He’s waiting until he has a better idea of who's on his side and such before he really delves into it.”

 

Mina lets out a sigh, flopping down onto her back. 

 

“You know what, that tracks.”

 

Tooru can only look at the group in surprise. She’s about to ask something else when Izuku finally finishes writing, lifting his head from his book and looking back at her. 

 

“I think your quirk was miss labelled. If you’re able to manipulate the light around you, specifically getting it to pass through you and emit a flash, then I think your quirk is light manipulation, not an invisibility mutation. Which would be impossible anyway since the entire reason you are invisible is the base way in which your quirk warps the light around you and no one could be invisible without light manipulation being a part of their quirk in some way since the base way light reflects off the human body is what makes us visible in the first place.”

 

Tooru is silent for a moment, barely noticing the way the others are staring at her and Izuku. 

 

“Does-”

She takes a deep breath,

 

“Does that mean that if I figure out how to manipulate the light in the right way I’ll be visible?”

 

She asks, her voice wavering. Izuku nods, 

 

“Yup!”

Suddenly, Tooru has her arms around him, her face buried in his shoulder. He hugs her back. 

 

“Thank you.”

 

She whispers. Izuku doesn’t exactly know why he’s being thanked but he goes along with it.

 

“You’re welcome.”

 

He starts gently rubbing circles into her back as she cries.

 

After a few minutes, Tooru pulls back, sniffling and rubbing her nose. 

 

“I can help you practice if you’d like.”

Izuku offers. 

 

“Yes, please.”

 

Izuku nods and turns back to his book. 

 

“I think it would be a good opportunity to get everyone to start training their quirks. We can go down to the park every other day or so and practice in the clearing.”

 

Hitoshi hums, 

 

“It’s kinda far away, though. Couldn’t we go somewhere closer? Plus, the heroes are still wandering around.”

 

Izuku nods, 

 

“Right…we probably shouldn’t leave the building for the next few days anyway. I think the building has a basement, there’s a door at the bottom of the stairwell that seems to lead to another staircase. We could ask Mr.Sukēto about it.”

 

The others nod and Fumikage finally joins them back in the living room. 


“I believe that is a good plan. Training with Dark Shadow would be a good way to let them get some energy out.”

 

“And I could practice changing the PH of my acid!”

 

Mina exclaims. 


“It would be good to up the limits of my quirk.”

 

Ochako offers. The others nod in agreement and Izuku closes his book. 

 

“It’s settled, then. I’ll talk to Mr.Sukēto about it tomorrow.”

 

He hops down from his chair and grabs his workbook, setting himself up at the table. The others follow suit and Ochako grabs one of the extra books for Tooru. They spend the rest of the afternoon working on their pages, some getting a little further than others. 

 

When dinner time rolls around Izuku passes out some of the pre-packaged food and they eat together at the table, playing around with their food and telling each other stories. 

 

Fumikage and Dark Shadow once again do the dishes while Mina wipes down the table and Izuku helps Tooru pick out a sleeping bag. She lays it down next to Mina’s, who also lets her borrow some clothes. 

 

Izuku turns off the lights before climbing into his sleeping bag. Fumikage flicks on the nightlight, illuminating their small circle of sleeping bags. 

 

“Goodnight.”

 

Izuku says. A chorus of “Goodnights” fill the room for a moment before everyone goes quiet, each of them eventually falling asleep to the sound of a blasting TV in the apartment below them. 

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 39: Basement Access

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

When everyone had finished eating their breakfast they set up at the table with their workbooks to pass the time. When the sun is high enough in the sky Izuku packs up his stuff and hops off his chair. 

 

“I’m gonna go talk to Mr.Sukēto about using the basement.”

 

He announces as she slips his shoes on. The others nod, though they aren’t really paying attention. He slips out the door, closing it gently so as not to bother anyone else in their hall. His footsteps are soft on the stairs as he makes his way down to the foyer. He steps through the staircase doors just as Mr.Sukēto is leaving his apartment. The two make eye contact and Mr.Sukēto sighs before stomping toward the front desk. 

 

“What do you want, kid?”

 

Izuku smiles sweetly as he meets the man at the desk. 

 

“I was wondering if we could have access to the basement.”

 

The man gives the boy a suspicious look as he settles into his chair.

 

“Why the fuck would you kids want access to the basement?”

 

“We want to practice with our quirks.”

 

Mr.Sukēto snorts,

 

“Why would I let you do that? You’d probably use the support beams as targets and bring this whole building to the ground.”

 

Izuku shakes his head,

“I promise you, sir, we won’t destroy your building. We can bring in our own targets.”

 

Mr.Sukēto still doesn’t look convinced,


“Plus, it’ll keep us out of your hair since we won’t be going in and out of the building as often.”

 

Mr.Sukēto hums as he reaches beneath the desk and opens one of the drawers. He pulls out a key and dangles it in front of Izuku’s face, keeping it just out of reach, 

 

“Fine. But, I’ll be adding nine-thousand-seven-hundred yen to your rent in exchange.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Deal.”

 

Mr.Sukēto hands over the key and Izuku bows,

 

“Thank you, sir.”

 

He says before going back to the staircase. He waits until he’s out of sight of the lobby to start running up the stairs, a large smile on his face. When he reaches the apartment he throws the door open, careful not to let it hit the wall, as he holds up the key triumphantly. The others look up from their workbooks when he enters, large smiles splitting their faces when they see the key. 

 

“Is everyone in clothes they’re okay with sweating in?”

 

Izuku asks. Everyone nods as they start rushing around to put their books away. They each grab a water bottle from the fridge, some pre-packaged and others poured from the pitcher in the fridge. They line up at the door, Izuku at the head, before slipping out into the hall. Since Eijirou is the last in line he flicks the lights off and closes the door behind them. 

 

 They stay in their line all the way down the stairs and up to the door at the bottom of the staircase. Izuku slides the key into the lock and turns it until it clicks. The door swings inward, taking the key with it as it reveals a dark, rickety-looking wooden staircase. Izuku doesn’t pause as he feels along the wall beside the door, searching for a light switch. He does find one, but when he flicks it on the overhead light merely flickers dimly. It still lights the staircase enough to see to the bottom, however. 

 

Izuku leads the group down the stairs after taking the key out of the door, stepping carefully. Some of them are more hesitant than others but they’re all on the stairs eventually. Eijirou closes the door behind them after a moment of hesitation.

 

When they reach the bottom of the staircase they once again have to go in search of a light switch. They find it a few feet away from the staircase and are happy to find that these lights work much better than the one illuminating the stairs. 

 

The floors, walls, and ceiling are all solid grey cement, wires line the ceiling and the far right wall and lead into a fuse box in the right corner of the left wall. The right wall contains all of the piping and systems of the building, including a heating system that looks like it could be older than Mr.Sukēto. Other than the workings of the building, the basement is empty.

 

“What do we do now?”

 

Shouto asks. Izuku shrugs,


“Whatever we want, I guess. Tooru could start working on gaining a finer control of her quirk, Ochako, you can start working on your limit, Eijirou can work on toughening his hardening, something you can help him with,”

 

He points to Shouto, 

 

“Using your ice. You can also set up an ice platform that Mina can use to practice her PH, Fumikage can work on flight-”

 

Fumikage raises his hand and Izuku stops, nodding to urge him to speak, 


“My apologies, Izuku, but I am unable to fly.”

 

Izuku tilts his head,

 

“But Dark Shadow can. Couldn’t they lift you up?”

 

Fumikage’s eyes widen as he stares down at Dark Shadow, who’s floating at his side. 

 

“I suppose that could be plausible.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“And Hitoshi can use me to practice his hold and to test the limits of what can be asked.”

 

Hitoshi looks over at Izuku in surprise and Mina tilts her head in confusion,


“But don’t you want to practice with your quirk?”

 

Mina asks. 

 

“Did I never tell you?”

 

Izuku asks,

 

“I’m quirkless.”


Mina blinks before shrugging.


“Oh. Okay.”

 

And she wanders over to Shouto to wait for her ice pile. Izuku watches her for a moment before turning to Hitoshi,


“Ready?”

 

Hitoshi nods slowly, an apprehensive expression on his face,


“Sure.”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I was supposed to go to Boston Pizza on Saturday for my great-grandmother's birthday but she wasn't feeling up to it so, instead, we went over to my grandma's apartment, where she was staying, and ordered in. It was nice, but I couldn't eat much of the pizza since it was greasy and even a small amount of grease can make me feel like I'm going to be sick.
We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 40: You Mean We Can Leave?!

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

They had been spending most of their time the last two weeks in the basement. They took their workbooks down to work on during breaks and Shouto had started carving a penguin now that he had finished his fox. There was a steadily growing pile of wood shavings in one of the corners of the basement and Izuku had put a small vacuum on the shopping list so they didn’t get in trouble for making a mess should Mr.Sukēto ever decide to venture down to the basement to check on it. 

 

They had enough food left for only one meal when Izuku finally decided that they could venture out of the building again. Everyone was gathered in the apartment waiting to head down to the basement when Izuku asked for their attention.


“Who wants to go grocery shopping today?”

 

He asks, duffel bag already slung across his body. Immediately everyone’s hands shoot up into the air. Izuku points to Hitoshi, Eijirou, and Ochako. Immediately all three jump up and scramble to change their clothes and grab their duffel bags. Shouto watches for a moment before returning to his penguin.

 

“When are the heroes going to leave?”

 

Mina asks, legs against the wall as she lies on her back. Izuku shrugs,

 

“I don’t know. They might already be gone since it’s been two weeks. We’ll see when we leave.”

 

Mina huffs, clicking her toes as she moves her attention to the ceiling instead of Izuku. Hitoshi, Ochako, and Eijirou gather in front of Izuku, ready to go. Izuku turns toward the door, key in hand. He holds it open and waves to those staying behind before closing it behind him. He locks the door and follows after the others, who had already started down the stairs in their eagerness to get outside. Mr.Sukēto wasn’t anywhere to be found in the lobby since it wasn’t quite time for him to be out yet. Though lately, he had been coming out a little more often. 

 

The four slip out the door and maneuver themselves into a single-file line so they take up as little sidewalk as possible. Izuku is at the front and he occasionally glances back to make sure everyone was still following and hadn’t wandered off. When they reach the stores Izuku turns to them.

 

“Alright, who wants to look for what?”

 

Hitoshi raises his hand and before he can even say anything Izuku hands him part of the list for the pantry. He nods and wanders into the store. Eijirou volunteers for the other half and Ochako takes the produce, leaving Izuku to the dairy section. They each take a basket from the stack by the door and head off for their sections, their half of the grocery list gripped tightly in their hand. 

 

--------

 

Izuku stands by the cash registers as he waits for the others to gather with their parts of the list. He doesn’t have to wait long as all three only take about a total of five minutes to show. When it’s their turn they pile their groceries onto the conveyor belt and watch as the same cashier they had last time rings up their items. She avoids eye contact with them, much to Ochako, Eijirou, and Hitoshi’s confusion. Izuku merely smiles sweetly as he pulls Endevor’s card from his bag. 

 

The cashier hands him the card reader and he swipes the card, relishing in the little “accepted” on the screen. They each take four bags, except for Ochako, who uses her quirk on a few of them so she can carry six. Two of the bags she takes have the dairy products since Izuku is once again staying behind so he can pick up extra products. 

 

He waves to the others as they head back to the apartment. He waits until they turn to face the way they’re going before trying to find a store that sells vacuums.

 

He eventually finds a small utility store with small vacuums in the window. He slips inside, smiling at the cashier by the doors as he wanders over to the shelf containing the vacuums shown in the window. He has to carry the box in both arms, straining to see over the top as he makes his way over to the cash. The man standing behind the register takes pity on him and takes the box from him to scan it. 


“How do you plan on transporting this home, kid?”

 

He asks as Izuku once again swipes Endeavor’s card. The boy stares at the box, the realization that he has to somehow walk it back to the apartment only just dawning on him.

 

“Tell you what, kid. I’ll hold this here while you go across the street to the toy store.”

 

He nods in the direction of one of the stores across the street,

 

“They sell little plastic wagons for dirt-cheap.”

 

Izuku nods, smiling up at the man,

“Thank you, sir.”

 

He nods in return, 

 

“Sure thing, kid.”

 

Izuku leaves the store, looking both ways to check for cars before crossing the street. The lady manning the front looks to be in her thirties and she smiles at Izuku as he enters. 


“Hi! What are you in for today?”

 

She asks. Izuku smiles, 

 

“A wagon, please.”

 

She nods as she glances around, likely looking for an adult. When it’s apparent that Izuku doesn’t have one with him, she rounds the counter and crouches down to his level,


“Where’s your parents, kid?”

 

Izuku shakes his head as he makes the conscious decision not to cook up a horrifying story as he had done to the other cashier. 

 

“They’re at home.”

 

He explains.


“I was meant to be picking up a vacuum but I can’t see over the box and we live kinda far away.”

 

The woman tilts her head to the side, 

 

“Why aren’t they with you?”

 

Izuku shrugs, 


“I’ve been running errands on my own for a while, ma’am. I’m ten now.”

 

He puffs up his chest like he’s seen other kids do in the past. He was pretty sure that when he said “a while” the woman thought he meant maybe a year at most but he had been buying things and ‘running errands’ since he was five. Four if you counted pick-pocketing but he was pretty sure the woman didn’t. 

 

“And you’re sure they’d be okay with you spending their money on a wagon?”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“They gave me a budget of twelve thousand yen and the vacuum is only four-thousand-nine-hundred.”

 

He had seen the sign for the wagons in the window, which were being sold for the low price of five-thousand-three-hundred yen and had come up with the lie on the spot. The man across the street had been right, they sold their wagons for pretty cheap. He could only hope that it didn’t completely fall apart on the way home. 

 

The woman finally accepts his answer and rises to her feet. 

 

“Alright. Go grab your wagon, I’ll wait for you here.”

 

Izuku nods and ventures off into the store. He doesn’t have to go far as the wagons are front-and-center. He grabs one that’s already built since it’s only a little more expensive than one in a box and he doesn’t have time to build it himself. 

 

When he returns to the register the woman scans the tag hanging from the handle and lets him swipe the card. When the purchase goes through she leans down to talk to him again,


“Have a good day, hun! I hope your mother likes her vacuum.”

 

Izuku nods, smiling up at her brightly, 


“You too, ma’am! Thank you!”

 

As soon as he’s out of the store he lets his smile dampen. He was starting to get tired of well-meaning cashiers asking him about his parents. When he finally gets back to the utilities store the cashier loads the vacuum into the wagon for him.

“Have a good day!”

 

He calls. Izuku returns the sentiment before finally leaving the store with his vacuum.

 

As he walks, he finds that the vacuum is actually really useful. It’s holding up better than he thought it would and he makes it back to the apartment building with an intact wagon and a small smile on his face. As soon as he enters the apartment lobby, however, he encounters a new problem. The building doesn’t have a working elevator and he lives on the third floor. 

 

Izuku sighs as he looks back at his wagon and vacuum. He pulls the wagon into the staircase and pushes it into a corner, doing his best to hide the bright red plastic before running up the stairs to the apartment. When he finally opens the door it’s to find Ochako laying on her sleeping bag, her arms laying on her stomach, while the others chant above her. When they see Izuku standing in the doorway they stop and turn to stare at him.

 

“We were attempting to heal the ailment of her stomach.”

 

Fumikage explains. Dark Shadow, who was floating beside the boy, nods solemnly. Izuku decides to move past the ominous chanting and turns to face Fumikage,

 

“I need you and Dark Shadow’s help getting a vacuum and a wagon up the stairs.”

 

Fumikage nods,


“It would be our pleasure to aid you.”

 

The boy says as he makes his way over to Izuku, breaking the circle that had gathered around Ochako’s sleeping bag. Izuku leads the two back down the stairs and shows them the red plastic wagon with the box sitting inside. Fumikage nods and Dark Shadow picks up both items, one in each claw. When they get back to the apartment Izuku holds the door open, allowing Fumikage and Dark Shadow to put the two things down in one of the far corners. The circle had since disbanded, each now sitting at the table with their workbooks, sans Ochako who was still lying on her sleeping bag.

 

Hitoshi looks up as Izuku closes the door. 

 

“How was the hero situation?”

He asks. Izuku tilts his head as he thinks, 


“Only a few, and they were just in by the stores. I think they’ve moved out of our area.”

 

“Does that mean we can finally leave the apartment?”

 

Mina asks, hope filling her tone. Izuku hums before nodding,


“Sure, I guess.”

 

The girl throws her arms up as she cheers,

 

“Finally!”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
When we got to the arcade on Saturday it was packed so we drove around for a bit before heading home. We ended up playing a few rounds of a card game before going to bed.
We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 41: House Fires And New Friends

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Fumikage and Dark Shadow are one of the first to take advantage of their freedom. They’re out for a walk in the better part of town, having been lost in his thoughts and, in Dark Shadow’s case, looking at the large houses. Fumikage is startled out of his stupor, however, when the scent of smoke hits his nose. He looks around to see smoke rising a block or so away. He starts jogging in the direction of the fire, startling Dark Shadow.

 

The sight of flashing lights, blazing flames, and a large crowd meets his eyes as he turns the corner. One of the large houses is encased in flames, sparks reaching for the otherwise blue sky. A group of rich-looking snobs, obviously from the neighbouring houses, watches as firemen attempt to extinguish the flames, whispering amongst themselves. Joining the fire trucks parked outside the house is a singular police vehicle. Fumikage can see a burly-looking man sitting in the back while the officers stand in front of the group of civilians, clearly trying to convince themselves they’re being useful crowd control despite the fact that the people are nowhere near the house or the flames. 


As he gets closer, Fumikage starts to pick up on a few of the words the snobs are saying over the yelling firemen and crackling flames.

 

“I heard it was the brat's fault.”

 

One says,

 

“Really?”

 

Replies another.


“I thought the brute who broke in knocked over a candle or something.”

 

“Where is the child, anyway?”

 

Another cuts in. Fumikage starts looking around, trying to find the child they were talking about, hopefully with their parents. Suddenly, loud gasps sound in the crowd. Fumikage looks up to see two firemen, their uniforms scorched, dragging out two badly burned bodies. He can’t help but stare at the melted, warped face of one and the blackened form of the other. His attention is snapped away from the victims and over to the small outcropping of trees by the house when he hears a loud sob. Hiding behind one of the trees is a terrified-looking boy, with blonde hair messed and sooty on his head. He has a few scorch marks on his pyjamas and there’s soot marking his face. 

 

Fumikage slips through the crowd over to the boy. No one pays him any mind, not even the officers, as everyone’s attention is still captured by the victims. Who, Fumikage assumes, are the boy’s parents. 

 

Fumikage is only a few feet away when the boy looks over at him. His gaze looks distant as tears run down his cheeks. He looks both like he’s trying to be somewhere else and like he knows he can’t leave. 

 

“Hello.”

 

Fumikage greets. The boy merely sniffles, clearly trying to hold back sobs. Fumikage holds out his arms to offer a hug, something he had seen Izuku do to comfort some of the others before. The boy looks at him warily but, one last glance over at the mutilated bodies of his parents sends him cascading into Fumikage’s chest. The boy wraps his arms around the other as he cries, doing his best to comfort him despite never having been in such a position before. He starts rubbing slow circles into his back, glancing around them every so often to ensure no one had noticed them.

 

“Oh, my! The poor Aoyamas…”

 

He hears one of the adults say. 


“Yes, taken too soon. I really hope what they say about the child starting the fire is untrue. The guilt of killing his parents would be such a burden for him to carry.”

 

“Yes, but, really, wouldn’t he deserve it? The child is ten, he should know how to control that quirk of his at this point.”

 

Fumikage can tell that the boy can hear their words by the way his sobs intensify. Fumikage takes one last look at the crowd before guiding him further into the trees, hiding them behind one with a larger trunk. They sit there for a few hours. Fumikage watches as the crowd eventually wander away, as the fire dwindles until it dies, and as the officers drive off with the man in the back seat. They’re soon replaced, however, as a set of police cars drives up to the front of the house a little while later. They come out with rolls of caution tape and start searching the house. Fumikage holds his breath as he watches them, praying they don’t find them in the trees. 

 

He knew there was a reason Hitoshi had protested Ochako going into foster care. He didn’t quite know what it was, but he did know that if he didn’t want the girl to go into it then it wouldn’t be good for this boy, either. 

 

The boy seems to pick up on his fear and peeks over his shoulder at the officers roaming his property. His sobs had faded to sniffles and hiccups, and the tears had started to dry tracks onto his cheeks. Fumikage pulls back slightly, making eye contact with the boy. 

 

“We can’t let them find you.”

 

He sniffs, tilting his head to the side.


“W-why not? They’re meant to help, right?”

 

His voice teeters off, sounding more unsure at the look on Fumikage’s face.


“No. Should they discover you I fear we will both be taken away. We must slip past them and make an escape.”

 

The other boy nods slowly.

 

“O-okay. Suivez-moi, we can go through the Suzukis’ backyard.”

 

Fumikage nods, following the boy as they go further into the trees. Fumikage hadn’t thought there were this many and, just as he was thinking there was somehow a small forest in this boy’s backyard, they emerged into a pristine backyard.

“We use trees as fences.”

The boy explains, looking over his shoulder at Fumikage. He continues to guide them through different backyards, though all of them feel the same, the only difference between them being the colours used to decorate. Eventually, they reach a backyard blocked off from its neighbour using an actual fence instead of a wall of trees. 

 

“We can slip through here.”

 

The boy says, guiding Fumikage down a path leading to the front of the house.


“We’re a few blocks away now.”

 

The boy says. 


“Um, you said we had to get away but you never said where we were going?”

 

He says, tilting his stops, turning to look at Fumikage. The bird-headed boy nods,

 

“We shall go back to my apartment. I’m sure the others would take immense joy in meeting you.”

 

“Others?”

 

He asks. Fumikage nods,


“Yes, there are eight of us total.”

 

The boy nods, though he looks surprised.


“Oh! Um, I just realized I never introduced myself, I’m Yuuga.”

 

He says. Fumikage nods,


“You may call me Fumikage.”


“And I’m Dark Shadow!”

 

Dark Shadow pops out for the first time in the last few hours, smiling as they introduce themselves. Yuuga clears his throat,


“Alright. Um, how far away is your apartment?”

 

He asks. Fumikage looks around. 

 

“Quite far. We live in the Red Light district.”

 

Yuuga pales slightly,

“Why? It’s filled with villains and there aren’t any heroes patrolling.”

 

Fumikage shrugs,

“It’s quite affordable, and we’ve yet to have any issues with the other residents.”

 

Yuuga nods,


“I suppose there are eight of you.”

 

He nods,

 

“Alright, I’ll go with you.”

 

Fumikage nods. He starts leading the boy in the right direction. After a few minutes, he feels Yuuga’s hand slip into his. 

 

--------

 

While passing by a street pole, Fumikage pales. Taped to the metal was a missing child poster, Mina’s smiling face dead center. 

 

--------

 

When they finally reach the building Yuuga looks exhausted, his eyes keep drooping and he’s leaning into Fumikage for support. The other boy leads him up the stairs carefully. When they reach the apartment door Fumikage opens it to find the others all talking with each other frantically. They look up when he enters, eyes widening. 

 

“Apologies for returning so late.”

 

Fumikage says, 

 

“I made a friend.”

 

Yuuga rubs his eyes as he surveys the others. 


“Bonjour. I’m Yuuga.”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
My parents bought me a mannequin head so I could practice for my hairstyling class. We watched the movie "Where The Crawdads Sing" as well and it was okay. It was a bit confusing at times since they left out context given in the book, though.
We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 42: Maybe We Should Talk To Them

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku grabs a nice light blue sleeping bag from the hall closet. He lays it out next to Fumikage’s and watches as Yuuga settles into the bag. He falls asleep quickly. Once he’s sure the other boy is asleep Fumikage turns to the others, who are starting to spread out.


“I’m afraid I have some bad news.”

 

He says. He immediately catches the attention of the others, those that had drifted away stumbling back. 


“What’s up?”

 

Eijirou asks, looking up at him with a concerned expression.


“I’m afraid that Mina’s parents have noticed her disappearance and are spreading missing child posters throughout the city.”

 

Silence falls over the group as they look at Mina, waiting for her reaction. It doesn’t take long before she’s swearing under her breath and falling onto her back.

 

“I knew I was forgetting about something.

 

Tooru raises her hand, indicated by her sleeve.

 

“Um, do you know if mine are looking for me?”

 

Fumikage shakes his head,

 

“I did not encounter any indication.”

 

Izuku hums, 

 

“That makes sense. It’s likely that the police are trying to prevent your parents from filing a missing persons report considering your quirk. Which also might be why it took so long for Mina to have posters put up.”

 

“But what are we supposed to do?”

 

Ochako asks,


“Should we just walk Mina back home?”

 

Mina shakes her head,


“I don’t think so. My parents will keep me grounded for months, and I want to be involved in every step of this whole taking over the government thing.”

 

Izuku nods,


“We could go with you.”

 

Mina clicks her tongue,

 

“I don’t know…they might call the cops or something.”

 

“What could the police do?”

 

Tooru asks. Hitoshi looks over at her,

 

“You mean other than dragging us off to orphanages or shoving us back in with our parents?”

 

Shouto nods,

 

“Yes, I would rather not be forced to return to Endeavor.”

 

Izuku shakes his head,

 

“We don’t all have to go. I think that would be a bit much for Mina’s parents, anyway. Those of us without much to risk can go and the others will stay back.”

 

“But you’re still gonna go.”

 

Hitoshi states, sending Izuku a glare. Izuku shrugs.


“It’s fifty-fifty as to whether or not my parents take me back. I’m sure I could escape again from either, it might just take a little longer.”

 

Hitoshi huffs, 

 

“You have no sense of self-preservation.”

 

Izuku shrugs,


“If I did would I be attempting to build a small army in order to take over the government?”

 

“He has a point.”

 

Ochako says. 

 

Hitoshi huffs,

 

“Fine. Who else is going?”

 

“I’ll go.”

 

Eijirou says. 

 

“Her parents know me, so I might be able to help a bit.”

 

Tooru raises her hand,

 

“I’ll go too.”

 

“I can attend as well.”

 

Fumikage states. Mina shakes her head,


“We should probably go, like, now. And you’re the only one Yuuga will recognize when he wakes up.”

 

Fumikage nods,


“Understandable. I will stay behind, then.”

 

“So just the four of us, then?”

 

Izuku asks. The other three nod,

 

“I think it’s a good number.”

 

Mina says. Izuku nods, grabbing his duffel bag from the corner.

 

“We should get going.”

 

The others nod and grab their bags, following Izuku out the door. Fumikage watches as the door shuts behind them. He waits for the lock to click into place before sitting down on his sleeping bag. He glances over at Yuuga, who’s still sleeping soundly, before looking back at the few others who had stayed behind.

 

“What do we do now?”

 

He asks. Hitoshi shrugs.


“I’m going to take a nap.”

 

He says, crawling into his sleeping bag. Fumikage hums, 

 

“Would you mind helping me with my workbook?”

 

Fumikage asks Shouto, turning his attention to him. Shouto nods, rising from his place on the floor. Fumikage stands too, grabbing his workbook from the shelf and taking up a seat at the table. Shouto grabs his book as well, climbing into the seat next to Fumikage. Ochako joins them, aiding them with their work and occasionally asking for help with her own. 

 

They’d been working for around an hour when Yuuga finally stirred in his bag. The others looked up from their workbooks, all watching as he sat up and started rubbing his eyes. When he saw them all staring at him he stared back, 

 

“Um, hello.”

 

Fumikage hops down from his chair.

 

“Hello. How are you feeling?”

 

Yuuga looks down,


“Is there somewhere I can wash up?”

 

He asks, instead of answering Fumikage’s question. Fumikage nods, pointing down the hall.

 

“Yes, the bathroom is there. You can find towels in the hall closet.”

 

Yuuga nods, standing slowly. He scurries over to the closet, grabbing a towel before slipping into the bathroom. 

 

“We don’t have hot water!”

 

Ochako calls.

“That’s fine!”

 

The boy calls back. The water starts a moment later and Ochako waits a moment before turning to Fumikage,

 

“So, how’d you find him?”

 

She asks. Fumikage shakes his head,


“I don’t believe I should be the one to tell you.”

 

Ochako nods,

 

“Alright. Are we going to wait for Izuku to get back before we tell him that we plan on taking over the government?”

 

She asks. Fumikage nods,

 

“I do believe that would be best. He is the better of us at selling the idea, as of yet.”

 

Ochako nods.

 

“Can you help me with this question?”

 

She says, pointing to a long equation involving fractions. Fumikage nods, hopping back into his seat and looking over the question with her.

 

--------

 

Izuku follows Mina up the steps of her front porch, Tooru and Eijirou following behind him. When Mina gets to the door she takes a deep breath before raising her fist to knock. The sound of her knuckles hitting the wood resounds among them. After a moment, they hear the door creak as it’s pulled open. On the other side stands a tall, tired-looking man. His skin is pale pink and his hair is bubblegum pink. His eyes are puffy and red around ice-blue irises.

 

“Mina?”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
My little brother is sick and I've been avoiding him more than usual in an attempt to make sure I don't get sick, too. We're starting new units in a few of my classes and I don't want to fall behind.
We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 43: New Arrangement

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Mina smiles up at the man nervously, 

 

“Hey, dad!”

The man’s eyes widen and well with tears as he wraps his arms around the girl, lifting her up into the air. She yelps, but quickly hugs him back. A woman appears behind them. She has dark skin, tightly curled hair, small horns sticking out of her head, and yellow eyes with black sclera, just like Mina’s.


“What’s going on?”

 

She asks, looking from her husband to the kids on her porch. The man settles Mina onto his hip and turns to face the woman. Her eyes widen and she crashes into both of them, wrapping her arms around her daughter. Izuku, now the front of the group, watches as the family reunites, waiting patiently for them to finish. 

 

Finally, the woman pulls out of the hug, looking down at the kids still gathered on her porch. 

 

“Are you the ones who found our daughter?”

 

She asks, disbelief clouding her voice. Mina shrugs, wiggling around until her father reluctantly puts her down.

 

“Yes and no.”

 

She answers for them.

 

“I’ve been staying with them the last few weeks.”

 

Both of the adults' eyes widen as they start glancing down the street, obviously looking for adults.


“What do you mean you’ve been staying with them? I didn’t know Eijirou’s mother had other children.”

 

She says, looking expectantly at said boy. He shakes his head,

 

“No, ma’am. I don’t live with her anymore.”

 

Mina’s mother hums, clearly overwhelmed.


“The four of us have been living in the same apartment with four others, newly nine.”

 

The man seems to choke on air while the woman just stares.

 

“And where are your parents?”

 

She asks, not-so-subtly pulling her daughter further into the house. 

 

“We don’t have those.”

 

Izuku says. Tooru raises her hand,

 

“Will, I do. We’re going to see them later since I never told them I left.”

 

The man nods, slowly pulling his phone out of his pocket,

 

“Do you need me to call anyone for you?”

 

Izuku shakes his head,

 

“Oh, no. We’re fine. I think you’ll find that Mina is perfectly healthy and well-fed.”

 

“I also have more control over my acid!”

Mina cries, holding her hand out in front of her.

“I can make a PH so strong it melts ice and creates little holes in concrete!”

 

She brags. Her father’s face pales,

 

“How’d you learn to do that?”

 

Mina points to Izuku, who’s smiling sweetly behind her.

 

“Izuku can do really good quirk analysis. Plus he plans on taking over the government when he’s older and I wanna help him.”

 

Mina’s mother pulls her daughter behind her.

 

“Why would you want to do that?”

 

Her father asks. Mina huffs as her mother tries to hide her.

 

“The HPSC perpetuates quirk discrimination, especially in poorer areas, to ensure that there are always villains for their heroes to fight. Not to mention the fact that they have dealings in the villain underground and, I’m sure, much more dire secrets hidden in their records.”

 

Izuku says, doing his best to explain in as few words as possible and avoid rambling.


“They also cover up heroes’ crimes to make sure they’re still viewed as gods by the public.”

 

Eijirou adds,

 

“The whole viewing heroes as gods thing is a problem itself, too.”

 

Tooru says, bouncing on her feet clearly proud of her contribution to the conversation. Mina’s father nods slowly, though judging by the expression on his face Izuku can tell he doesn’t fully believe them. Mina jumps out from behind her mother, easily avoiding her reaching hand.

 

“I want to help them.”

 

She declares, standing in front of Izuku.

 

“They want to help people, and Izuku has a plan on how to do it.”

 

“Really?”

 

The man asks in the tone of voice adults often use when they’re not interested in something a kid is saying but don’t want to say it. Izuku nods,

 

“I have to learn how to hack first, and I want to get our group bigger, too, but I think it’s pretty good.”

 

The man hums, his phone seemingly forgotten in his hand. 

 

“And you think a group of ten-year-olds can take over the government?”

 

He asks. Izuku’s nose scurnches,


“No, of course not! We still have a few years of training, studying, and information gathering to go. Not to mention creating a network, though I’ve already started on that one. I think we’ll be ready by the time we’re sixteen, maybe eighteen if we fall behind.”

 

Mina had been nodding along the entire time, when, suddenly, her mother seems to think of something.

 

“Where have you been getting the money for food and rent?”

 

She asks. Izuku shrugs,


“We have access to one of our richer member’s sperm donor’s debit cards. Plus we have some leftover money from some sales.”


The woman nods, 

 

“Right. Why exactly did you decide to join these people, dear?”

 

She asks, crouching down so she’s at eye level with her daughter.


“Because they helped Eijirou! And I think his plan is pretty cohesive, even though it can’t be done yet ‘cause we don’t have a full army.”

 

Izuku can tell that they aren’t convincing her parents of anything. They clearly think that their explanations are merely the product of a child’s imagination, maybe a game or something. Though, obviously, a bit of an odd one. Izuku sighs, 

 

“Mina, are you going to stay here for a bit or would you like to come back to the apartment? We should probably check in with Tooru’s parents today, too. And I want to be back to talk to Yuuga before bed. I still have to make sure he’s okay with joining us.”

 

Mina hums, nodding, before glancing back at her parents. 

 

“I think I’ll stay here for a bit.”

 

Izuku nods, 

 

“I’ll come back in a few days.”

 

Mina’s mother shakes her head vehemently,

 

“What? No. Mina, you’re staying here. And we’ll have to call the police to make sure your friends get somewhere safe.”

 

Izuku stiffens,

 

“I mean you no respect, ma’am, but currently we’re as safe as we can be.”

 

The woman huffs, 

 

“You just admitted that you’re living in an apartment without any adults!”

 

Izuku shakes his head,

 

“There aren’t any adults in the apartment with us but others live in the building. We have to be renting from someone.”

 

She throws her arms up.

 

“That just makes it worse! Who would rent to a bunch of kids? And, Eijirou I know your mother maybe isn’t home a lot but she’s trying her best-”

 

Eijirou scowls, 

 

“I was gone for a week and she didn’t even notice.”

 

The woman stutters,

 

“Well, then, I’m sure we’ll be able to find you a nice foster family. Or you could stay here for a few days-”

 

Tooru interrupts the woman, 

 

“I’m sure you’re trying to be nice, but I’m pretty sure Hitoshi escaped from a bad foster home, based on how he’s insisted none of us end up in the system, so I don’t think that’s a good idea.”

 

Mina nods, her expression becoming clearly agitated,

 

“I understand that you want me to be safe, but this is safe. Safer than being a hero, at least.”

 

Her dad crouches down, too.

 

“Fine. But we don’t want you staying away from home, anymore. You can help your friends from here.”

 

“But we walked for hours to get here! I can’t walk that far every day!”

 

Her mom tilts her head to the side,

 

“Hours? Where is this apartment, exactly?”

 

Eijirou rubs at the back of his neck,

 

“The Red Light district.”

 

Both adults tense, 

 

“A group of kids are living alone in the Red Light district?”

 

Her mom asks. Izuku nods,

 

“Our landlord has been nice enough to let us use the basement for quirk training. And we haven’t had any issues with villains.”

 

Her dad clears his throat,

 

“I can drive you there and back so long as you don’t stay the night, alright?”

 

Mina huffs and looks back at Izuku. The boy nods and she looks back at her parents.

 

“Fine. But I want to go back this weekend.”

 

Her dad nods, a relieved look on his face as he stands.

 

“Deal.”

 

Her mother doesn’t look overly happy about the deal, but sighs and stands. Mina waves as she follows her parents inside. 

 

“I’ll see you guys later!”

 

She calls. Izuku nods and the three of them wave as she’s led back inside by her parents. When the door closes Izuku turns around, waving for the others to go down the stairs.

 

“We should make our way to Tooru's house, now.”

 

He says. They nod, making their way back to the street, Tooru leading them. 

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I have a doctor's appointment tomorrow to finally get the vaccines I've been missing, which means no school for me.

Chapter 44: Abandonment

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

The walk to Tooru’s house is short compared to the length they're used to. Izuku walks beside the girl, talking to her about different attacks and defences she could develop with her quirk. He stops, however, when he sees a simple sign stabbed into the grass of the front lawn. Tooru stops beside him.

 

“What’s wrong?”

 

Eijirou asks.

 

“They’re gone,”

 

Tooru mutters, slowly walking toward the sign. It waves in the wind, its metal hinges creaking. A large red “Sold” sticker covers the face of a beaming woman with stars in her hair. Izuku looks up at the door to the building. A large combination lock hangs from the knob. One of the ones used by real estate agents to both lock up the house and hold the keys. That’s not the only thing different about the house, though. On the side of the wall, faded from rain and people trying to wash it away, were the words “Villain Family” written in red spray paint.

 

“Why would they write something like that?”

 

Eijirou asks. Tooru looks up from the sign and over at the words stained onto the house. She sniffs, bringing her sleeve up to rub her nose.

 

“The kids at school always called me a villain ‘cause of a quirk. They called my parents villains, too, since their quirks are the same as mine. They said that we committed crimes as a family and we got away with it because we’re invisible. That must be why they moved away. The kids at school, and the adults too, probably thought I ran off to join a villain group or something.”

 

“So you think they were run out of town,”

 

Izuku says, staring at the drawn curtains over the front windows of the house. Tooru’s sniffles become sobs as she stares at the real estate sign in the lawn of her house. 

 

“They left me…”

 

She gets out between cries. Izuku leans into her side, wrapping his arm around her. She lays her head down on his shoulder, enveloping him in her arms as she soaks his shirt. Eijirou comes up to her other side, hugging both her and Izuku. 

 

They stand there for longer than they care to keep track of. Over time, Tooru’s sobs turn into hiccups, which turn into sniffles. She slowly pulls herself away from the other two, taking one last look at her house before turning away, facing back the way they had come.

 

“Let’s-let’s just go. Okay?”

 

Izuku nods, Eijirou copying the gesture a moment behind him. Tooru leads them away confidently. She doesn’t look back once as they walk away. Izuku does, though, He looks back at the empty driveway, the painted words, and the sold sign in the front yard. 

 

He can’t help but wonder what had driven the Hagakures to leave. Had it been the others, as Tooru had said? If it was, did they think she was dead? Is that why they felt comfortable leaving? Or did they think she was alive, and they just couldn’t take the criticism anymore?

 

Or had they simply been waiting for a chance to leave?

 

The walk back to the apartment feels shorter than usual. Tooru stays in the lead the entire way back, though Izuku has to nudge her in the right direction a few times. She doesn’t make a single sound as they walk. 

 

When they finally make it back to the apartment, Tooru streams past the others, locking herself in the unused room down the hall.

 

“What happened?”

 

Shouto asks.

 

“Where’s Mina?”

 

Fumikage adds. Izuku stiffens,

 

“Mina’s parents have arranged a sort of custody agreement. Her dad will drive her back on the weekend, but she won’t be staying here anymore.”

 

Ocahko huffs,

 

“Really? I mean I guess I understand, but-”

 

Hitoshi huffs,

 

“There’s nothing we can do about it now. What happened to Tooru?”

 

“Her parents left her. They sold their house and left.”

Eijirou says, his voice laced with bitterness and resentment. Hitoshi scowls as his hands fist in the fabric of his sleeping bag. Izuku huffs, shutting the front door behind him and locking it with a soft click before stepping further into the apartment. He makes eye contact with Yuuga, who had been partially hiding behind Fumikage the entire time and smiles softly. 

 

“Sorry. There’s a lot going on right now. I’m Izuku. Welcome to the group.”

 

Yuuga smiles back, 

 

“Thank you.”

 

“Have they explained everything yet?”

 

Izuku asks, a slight tilt to his head. Yuuga blinks,

 

“Is there much to explain?”

 

Izuku huffs, 

 

“So no, then.”

 

Ochako shrugs,

 

“We thought you’d explain it best.”


Izuku sighs. 


“You’d better sit down, then.”

 

He says, gesturing to the boy’s sleeping bag. He looks confused but complies. Izuku settles on the ground across from him while the others sit around them. 

 

“The entire goal of our growing group is to, eventually, take over the current government and reshape it as we see fit. Currently, all they do is make sure that the poorer areas receive little to no help from heroes or police. This ensures that the people in those areas become desperate just for the things they need to survive. So they take drastic measures.”

 

“Like bank robbing and shoplifting.”

 

Hitoshi says, leaning back on his hands. Izuku nods,

 

“Exactly. They’ve also set up our society in such a way that those with desirable quirks have better lives and job opportunities, specifically ones suited for their quirks. Which also, coincidentally, means that only those with undesirable or “villainous” quirks live in the impoverished areas.”

 

“So they suffer to create more villains for the heroes to fight?”

 

Yuuga asks. Izuku nods. 

 

“But why?”

 

“To keep them in power.”

 

Yuuga’s expression becomes contemplative,

 

“So you’re working to fix it?”

 

He asks, hand drifting down to his stomach. Izuku nods. Yuuga smiles,

 

“Then I am more than willing to help you.”

 

Izuku beams. 

 

“Then welcome to the group, Yuuga.”

 

“I’m happy to be here.”

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 45: Improvement

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

All eight of them are waiting in the lobby, four gathered at each of the windows facing the street. Mr.Sukēto watches them from behind his desk, but he doesn’t say anything. Shouto has a small block of wood in his hand and a trash can below him as he carves away, slowly shaping a penguin. The carving had become a habit, so Izuku had started picking up wood whenever he found it and bringing it back, forming a pile in the unused room of the apartment.

 

Finally, Izuku spots a car rounding onto their street. They all watch intently as it pulls to a stop in front of the doors and Mina hops out, her dad close behind her. The man looks nervous as he follows his daughter to the doors. Mina smiles when she sees them all in the windows and picks up her pace, forcing her dad to do the same. She throws the doors open with a flourish and Tooru runs over, wrapping her in a hug. The others follow quickly, creating a ball of children in the middle of the foyer. 


Mr.Ashido looks uncomfortable as he closes the doors behind him.

 

“Did I miss anything important?”

 

Mina asks, pulling out of the group hug. Tooru hums,

 

“My parents abandoned me. Sold the house and everything.”

 

Mr.Ashido’s eyes widen as he stares down at the invisible girl. Mina simply huffs, crossing her arms.

 

“Their loss. Has your quirk control improved?”

 

The topic change wasn’t very hidden, but Tooru lights up all the same. After a moment, she manages to get about half of her face to flicker into existence. It doesn’t last long before disappearing again, but Mina beams all the same, 

 

“That’s so cool! You’re so pretty, Tooru!”

 

Mina exclaims, Tooru thanks her with just as much enthusiasm before Izuku buts in.

 

“We should head down to the basement. Will you be joining us, Mr.Ashido?”

 

He looks up at the man in question, a tilt to his head.

 

“The basement is where you train your quirks, right?”

 

The man asks. Izuku nods and the man gets a determined look on his face.

 

“Then yes. I don’t think it’s safe for you kids to be training on your own.”

 

Izuku nods, making his way to the front of the group as they arrange themselves in a single file line. Mr.Ashido brings up the rear as he follows them into the stairwell. Izuku pulls open the door to the basement and Eijirou, who’s standing behind him, takes it as Izuku makes his way down. They pass the door back as they go down until it gets to Mr.Ashido, who eases it closed behind him.

 

When they finally reach the cement flooring of the basement Izuku starts pointing them toward different areas, giving each of them instructions and occasionally glancing down at his notebook. Mr.Ashido watches as Shouto creates a thick pillar of ice in Mina’s area before heading over to his own, where he creates a small ball of flames in his left hand.

 

Mina holds her hands out in front of her, palms up, and creates two small piles of acid before pressing them against the ice. It melts quickly, two holes becoming one as the acid spreads. She manages to stop it just as the back of the pillar melts away. Without looking up, Shouto creates a new pillar just to the left of the old one. 

 

Yuuga joins Hitoshi in his area, far from the others, and happily answers his question. Mr.Ashido watches in horror as the boy’s face falls blank.

 

“What’s he doing?”

 

He asks Izuku, panic lacing his tone. Izuku glances over in the direction the man is pointing before shrugging.

 

“It’s not safe for Yuuga to practice his quirk without a specific piece of support equipment, which we don’t have access to, so he’s helping Hitoshi. They’re practicing Hitoshi’s endurance, today.”

 

“And what exactly is Hitoshi’s quirk?”

 

Mr.Ashido asks. Izuku hums,

 

“Officially it’s brainwashing but really it’s hypnosis. It’ll be useful so long as we can keep its activation requirements a secret for long enough. But shouldn’t you be asking about your daughter’s training? I assumed you might want to work on it at home. Especially since, right now, she’s working on her PH control.”

 

The man looks down at him in surprise,


“Why would I want her destroying my furniture.”

 

Izuku looks up at him, an exasperated expression on his face.

 

“She’s not just practicing the destructive uses, watch. Shouto, can you melt the ice, please?”

 

The boy nods, putting out the flame in his hand and shaking it off as he walks over. He lays his hand on the ice as it turns red and the pillar melts to the ground, creating a large puddle. Mina grabs a rag from a small pile in the corner and sops it up, putting it to the side. She looks down at her hands in concentration and more acid bubbles up in her palms. She aims them at the ground before her and steps on, clumsily skating along the floor. 

 

“She can create such a high PH that the acid is as undestructive as possible. Skating on it will become easier as she practices and with support shoes, but, like Yuuga’s, we don’t have access to those quite yet.”

 

“What’s the point of her switching between the two? Shouldn’t she focus on just one?”

 

Izuku makes a so-so motion with his hand.

 

“Originally, I had her practicing either low or high PHs on different days and then, one or two days a week, she’d work on switching between the two. But you’ve only agreed to take her here on the weekends, and she’s gotten pretty good at both, so having her practice the switch is best right now.”

 

“How do you know all of this?”

 

The man asks. Izuku beams, 

 

“I’ve been analyzing quirks since I was four. Also, Mina likes to research different acids and their properties.”

 

Mr.Ashido blinks in surprise,

 

“I didn’t know she did that.”

 

Izuku shrugs, jotting something down in his notebook before looking up.

 

“Are you okay Hitoshi?”

 

He calls, causing the other boy to startle before shrugging.

 

“I’m starting to develop a headache.”

 

Izuku nods, 

 

“I think you should call it there, then. We want to build the tolerance slowly.”

 

Hitoshi nods and turns around as Yuuga blinks, taking a moment to look around before following the other boy as they join Izuku. 

 

“I think that was about a minute more than last time, and you’re getting really good at deactivating your quirk on your own.”

 

A small smile pulls at Hitoshi’s lips,

 

“Thanks. How’s everyone else coming along?”

 

He asks as he surveys the room. Izuku hums,

 

“Pretty well, Tooru’s managed to hold her hand longer than last time,”

 

He gestures over to said girl, who has her hand held out in front of her, fully visible.

 

“And Shouto is developing a finer control over his fire.”

 

He gestures over to the boy, who has three candle-like flames over his fingers. 

 

“Fumikage and Dark Shadow are taking to flight really well, too.”

 

The four look over at the two, who are flying around the basement, well out of the way of everyone’s quirks. Occasionally, Fumikage will say something to Dark Shadow and their path will change. Ochako floats up in front of them abruptly and Dark Shadow stops just before crashing into her. She looks sheepish but accepts their help getting back to the ground.

 

“Ochako is developing a higher tolerance for using her quirk on herself, but she could use some work on her spacial awareness.”

 

The girl thanks Fumikage and Dark Shadow, watching them until they’re on the other side of the basement before attempting to use her quirk on herself again. 

 

“And, finally, Eijirou is progressing nicely with his quirk. His skin is able to take a little more than it could before, though the harder it is the more energy takes to hold. He can hold his base hardness for much longer now, too.”

 

Mr.Ashido hums,

 

“And you kids have gotten these skills just by practicing on your own?”

 

He asks. Izuku nods, a proud smile on his face.


“Yup!”

Mr.Ashido smiles down at him,

 

“Then you must have an amazing intelligence quirk. Or maybe something that enhances your charisma, to have accomplished all of this on your own at your age.”

 

Izuku’s smile tightens as he nods,

 

“Thank you, sir.”

 

He doesn’t mention that he’s quirkless. He didn’t know how the man behind him would react and he didn’t want to risk losing Mina just because her father thought he was contagious or weak. He watches as his friends continue to train, occasionally calling out ideas or reprimands. Ochako is the next to join their slowly growing group by the stairs when Izuku calls her over, concerned by her slightly green complexion.

 

They stay down there for around another hour before Izuku finally calls them over to head back upstairs. This time, Mr.Ashido leads them. When they reach the stairwell the man waves Mina over.

 

“This was nice but I think we should get going. I’ll bring her back tomorrow, and maybe talk to her mom about setting up somewhere for her to practise her quirk in the backyard.”

 

He says, smiling down at both Izuku and Mina. Mina beams, thanking him. Izuku does the same, though his smile is much more subdued. The two Ashidos wave as they leave the building, the other eight kids waving back. Hitoshi sighs once they're gone, pressing a hand to his head.

 

“I’m gonna go out for some Tylenol. The headache is getting worse.”

 

Izuku tilts his head, a worried expression taking over his features.

 

“Are you sure? I can get it for you.”

 

Hitoshi shakes his head,


“No, it’s fine. Some fresh air should help, too.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Alright. Just hurry back, okay?”

 

Hitoshi nods, following the quickly fading sounds of Mr.Ashido’s car out of the building. Izuku watches him go for a moment before gesturing for the others to start heading up the stairs back to the apartment.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I'm going back to school today, which means that I get to continue working on two big projects from two of my classes.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 46: Frog :P

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Hitoshi hums to himself as he walks, keeping his hands in his pockets both to make sure the money doesn’t fall out and to give his hands something to do. He doesn’t see many people as he walks, and those that he does ignore him. He ignores them in turn. He tries to keep his eyes trained on the more shadowed areas in the street in an attempt to keep the harsh sunlight from worsening his headache. 

It takes him around an hour of walking to reach a drugstore. The cashier doesn’t look up as he walks in so Hitoshi pays him no mind, beelining for the Tylenol. He grabs a bottle of the kid stuff and, after a moment of thought, goes into the back where a few cheap cans of cat food sit on the shelf. He grabs a few cans, stacking them precariously in his grip and carefully walks back toward the cash. 

The cashier looks up as he nears, closing their book and grabbing the bottle of Tylenol Hitoshi puts in the belt. They scan through his meagre collection and glance up at the total,

“Two-thousand-one-hundred yen, please.”

The cashier says, voice tired. Hitoshi nods, digging out the cash in his pocket and placing the amount in the tray by the register. The cashier takes it, glancing down at the notes before sorting them out into the tray of the register. They hand Hitoshi his bag of goods, leaning over the counter so he can reach it.

“Thank you for coming. Have a nice day.”

The cashier says, giving a half-hearted wave. Hitoshi bows shallowly,

“Thank you, you too.”

He pushes the door open as he leaves the store, glancing over his shoulder to see the cashier picking back up their book. 

--------

Hitoshi decides to take a shortcut through the back alleys instead of sticking to the street. He ends up emerging on a street he had never really been on before, a rundown school building sat further down the street and he could hear shrieking and yelling. At first, he thinks it’s just other kids playing but, as he gets closer, he starts to hear distinct words, like “Stop!” and “Leave me alone!”

He picks up his pace, bag banging against his hip. When he reaches the gate of the school he peers inside to see a group of kids surrounding a girl, mocking her. He glares, stalking onto the grounds.

“Hey!”

He calls. The kids look over their shoulders at him and the one he assumes is the leader scoffs,

“What are you doing here? You aren’t a student.”

The girl scoffs. Hitoshi rolls his eyes, 

“I’m Hitoshi. Who are you?”

His voice becomes heavier as he laces it with his quirk. The girl shifts, trying to look intimidating. It doesn’t work.

“I’m Yuki-”

Her sentence is cut off by Hitoshi taking hold of the string that had been extended to him. Her face fell and her eyes clouded to a milky white. A few of her goons looked at her with concerned expressions. 

“Go back to class.”

Hitoshi instructs. The girl doesn’t hesitate as she walks away, her back to them as she makes her way to the school building. The kids she leaves behind look at him with fear in their eyes.

“What did you do?!”

One of them asks. Hitoshi shrugs, a smile stretching across his face.

“Care to find out?”

The other kids don’t hesitate before running off, a few of them screaming for the teachers. The girl they had been antagonizing is still lying on the ground, staring up at him. Hitoshi tries to make his expression comforting as he offers her a hand. She hesitates for a moment before taking it. 

She has deep green hair tied in a ponytail. He can tell that the design had once been a little more complicated but had likely fallen out at some point. She was lanky, with eyes that matched her hair. Her tongue poked out of the corner of her mouth slightly and Hitoshi could just see a small nub of a tail sticking out from behind her.

“Thank you. Ribbit.”

She says. Hitoshi smiles,

“No problem. That happen often?”


He asks. She nods.

“Every day.”

Hitoshi hums, 

“It happened to me, too.”

She tilted her head,

“How’d you get them to stop?”

Hitoshi shrugs, 

“I didn’t. I ran away and joined a group of other people our age in the Red Light district. We can do the running away part right now if you like.”

Her eyes narrow, 

“Are you trying to kidnap me? I don’t even know your name.”

Hitsohi shrugs,

“Fair point. In Hitoshi.”

She nods,

“You can call me Tsu.”

Hitoshi’s eyes are abruptly drawn to stains of red blooming on Tsu’s knees and sleeves. 

“I can help you deal with those. It’ll be around a forty-minute walk, though. The first aid kit is in the apartment.”

Tsu hums,

“It is a fifty-fifty chance as to whether the school nurse helps me…alright. I’ll go with you. Ribbit.”

Hitoshi nods, turning around and waving for her to follow him. She barely hesitates before doing so and quickly falls into step beside him. After they’d been walking for a few minutes Hitoshi digs the bottle of Tylenol from the bag and pops off the lid. He swallows two of the pills inside dry before offering the bottle to Tsu.

“Want any?”


He asks. She shakes her head and he screws the cap back on before dumping the bottle back into the bag. He starts rubbing at his head, trying to do one of the massages Izuku had taught him, but it was difficult to do it on himself.

“Are you alright, ribbit?”

Tsu asks. Hitoshi makes a so-so motion with his free hand.

“I overused my quirk a bit today and that can cause headaches.”

Tsu looks guilty,

“I’m sorry. You shouldn’t have protected me like that if it hurt you. Ribbit.”

Hitoshi waves off her apology. 

“It’s not your fault. Plus, I’m training to help people. What kind of hero would I be if I left you to suffer just because it would cause a small headache?”

Tsu hums and looks off into the distance, clearly thinking. She looks a bit like Izuku does when he thinks, Hitoshi notes, as he starts looking for a few of the landmarks he had memorized.

--------

They get back to the apartment in one piece, though the stains on Tsu’s clothes had gotten worse along with Hitoshi’s headache. He eases the door open, tossing the plastic bag from the drugstore at a waiting Izuku before crashing onto his sleeping bag. After a moment, he raises the arm not draped over his eyes to point at Tsu. 

“Help her, please. She’s new.”

Izuku huffs, handing the bag off to Dark Shadow to put in the kitchen as he walks over to the girl. 

“Hi!”

He greets,

“I’m Izuku.”

“Hello.”

She says, closing the door behind her.

“I’m Tsu.”

Shouto comes back into the room from the bathroom, where he had wandered, medkit clutched in his hands. He hands it off to Izuku, who leads Tsu to the table in the corner and gestures for her to sit on one of the chairs. She complies, rolling up her sleeves and sliding her socks down to reveal a few nasty scrapes and purpling bruises. He disinfects and dresses them quickly, packing up the medkit and handing it off to Shouto when the boy appears next to him.

When they get back to the living room, the blinds are closed and the lights are off, the only exception being Fumikage’s nightlight. Hitoshi is missing from the circle of kids, and so is his sleeping bag. The others, who are all scattered across the room, look up when Tsu enters. 

“Hello.”

She greets, a small nervous tone to her voice. The others all greet her back, keeping their voices low. Yuuga is the first to introduce himself, setting off a chain as everyone else follows suit. By the time they’re all done, Tsu is standing in the middle of a circle of six other kids, all waiting for her name.

“I’m Tsu. Ribbit.”

She says. They all bow at once, 

“Nice to meet you, Tsu.”

“Are you going to be staying with us?”

Tooru asks, excited at the prospect of having another girl living with them. Tsu tilts her head,

“Hitoshi said that this was a group. Is there any particular reason you’ve all come together? Or is it a coincidence?”

“Oh, can I tell her?”

Ochako asks,

“I think I have the hang of it now.”

The others nod, including Izuku, and she smiles.

“Okay, so! Basically, all of us were found in times of need. Times when there wasn’t really anyone listening to us or when we were in the middle of a life-changing event. So far, all of our events have had to do with heroes or the society that created them, or both. For each of us, these events, along with others in our lives, planted small seeds of doubt about the hero society we live in. Whether we were conscious of it or not. Then, when Izuku found us, he told us that his goal is to take over the government. He wants to change it for the better, to help make sure that no one is ever beaten down by the system again because of their quirk, or lack of one. He wants to make sure that the heroes given the responsibility of protecting us don’t abuse the power given to them. These goals became ours, too, and now we train together in the hopes of eventually overthrowing the government and taking it for ourselves.”

Tsu blinks at her. The first to speak is Izuku, smiling as he pats Ochako on the back.

“That was really good!”

He praises. Ochako grins, 

“Thanks. So, whaddaya say, Tsu?”

The girl hums,

“I don’t want my siblings to have to face what I do at school every day. Yes, I’ll join you.”

Tooru grins, making sure everyone can see it.

“Great! Will you be living here, or should we arrange a schedule with your parents like we did for Mina?”

Tsu tilts her head in thought,

“I think it would be best if I went back and forth. This place actually isn’t a very far walk from my house.”

Tooru nods,

“You should probably go back for tonight, at least. They’ll probably think Hitoshi kidnapped you.”

Tsu nods, 

“I shouldn’t have to leave for a while. School doesn’t end for another few hours. Ribbit.”

At that, Izuku whips out a notebook, pencil already in his hand and pointed above a blank page.

“In that case, mind if I ask a few questions about your quirk?”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
This past week I've had to track what I eat and the calories in it for a project in my Food and Nutrition class. They painted it as a thing just for fun that we'd compare to the Canadian food guide at the end but it still made me feel bad about myself, which is wonderful. Thankfully it's done now, I just have to add my stuff from the weekend onto my chart when I get to school.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 47: Heroes Are Stalkers

Chapter Text

Izuku and Tsu talk for a few hours about her quirk and quickly work out a training regimen for her to follow. When it comes time for her to leave, Izuku grabs his duffel bag and escorts her out of the apartment. The others watch them leave, waving to their new friend. When the door clicks shut behind the two they watch for another moment before splitting off to do their own things. A few gather at the table with their workbooks, some gather in circles to play games, and Shouto slinks off to his corner with his wooden block and knife. 

 

It takes around another hour for Izuku to get back, a smile on his face.

 

“Her parents are really nice, and her brother is so cute!”

 

“She has a brother?”

 

Ochako asks, looking up from her workbook. Izuku nods,

 

“Yeah! We met up with him at the entrance to the school gates. He was confused about why Tsu hadn’t been in school, but he accepted her answer easily.”

 

‘“You told him the truth?”

 

Hitoshi asks. Izuku nods,

 

“Tsu did. She said she doesn’t want to make a habit of lying to him. She didn’t tell him about our plans, though.”

 

Hitoshi nods, satisfied, and looks back down at the math page he was working on. Izuku grabs his workbook from the shelf and joins the table. 

 

--------

 

Later that night, Hitoshi wakes up panicking. He hadn’t had nightmares in a long while, not since joining Izuku, so he wasn’t prepared to wake up gasping for breath, his back soaked in sweat. He hadn’t been that stressed, that he knew of. He’d been comfortable, happy. But he just had to have a nightmare. Maybe it was because of the excitement of two new members so close together.

 

 He takes a few minutes to try to get control of his breathing but it doesn’t do much for him. He stands slowly, making his way to the front door. Fresh air normally helped him calm down. 

 

He slips on his shoes and is about to turn the knob of the door when he hears rustling and a voice behind him.


“Hitoshi? Are you okay?”

Izuku whispers. Hitoshi takes a deep breath and looks over his shoulder.

 

“I just need fresh air.”

 

He says. Izuku hums, 

 

“Mind if I come with you?”

 

Having company would probably be nice, Hitoshi thinks. Plus, if Izuku was with him, he was less likely to get lost. He nods and Izuku clambers out of his sleeping bag. He grabs his duffel bag from where it sits at the head of his sleeping bag and drapes it across his body before joining Hitoshi at the door. He puts on his shoes and follows the other boy out into the hall. 

 

They walk slowly down the stairs and out to the street. Hitoshi can feel his lungs start taking in more air immediately. He takes a few deep breaths just outside the building. Izuku waits beside him for him to be ready and they keep walking once he gets better control over his breathing. As they walk Hitoshi lets the cool wind wash over him. 

 

“Do you want to talk about it?”

 

Izuku asks. Hitoshi looks over at the other boy in surprise. He had almost forgotten the other boy had joined him.

 

“I just had a nightmare.”

 

He explains.

 

“I haven’t had any in a while, so it hit me harder than they used to.”

 

Izuku nods.

“It was a recurring one. I’m stuck in a closet, and people are banging outside. Some are screaming my name, others are calling me ‘freak’ and ‘villain’. I don’t know how but I know that most of them are armed with knives and bats. Their voices become more distorted as time goes on until their words are barely audible. Then smoke starts to seep through the cracks and smoke starts invading my lungs. I know that I don’t have much choice, I can either suffocate to death in the closet or be beaten to death. So I open the closet door and a bat swings at me, covered in spikes, and then I wake up.”

 

Hitoshi says. He’s fiddling with the hem of his shirt as Izuku looks at him, though Hitoshi can’t see his expression in the dark.


“I’m sorry.”

 

Izuku says. Hitoshi shrugs,

 

“It’s-”

 

He cuts himself off when he feels the hairs on the back of his neck stand up. Izuku seems to feel it, too, as he stiffens and starts staring at the rooftops and alleyways surrounding them. 

 

“We’re being watched.”

 

Hitoshi mutters, joining Izuku in his search for their stalker. Their eyes land on a nearby rooftop where a flash of yellow sits atop a shadow slightly darker than the ones around it. Hitoshi takes Izuku’s hand. 

 

“Run?”

 

He asks, moving his lips as little as possible. He can feel sweat beading on the back of his neck and soaking into his shirt. 

 

“Run.”

 

Izuku agrees. The two whirl around and beat their legs against the pavement.

 

“This way.”


Izuku instructs, pulling at Hitoshi’s hand. As they head down a back alley, Hitoshi looks behind them. His breath catches in his throat when he sees the man chasing him. He squeaks as a piece of fabric whips out, forcing him to jump into Izuku’s side. The other boy stumbles, pulling Hitoshi down with him. They land in a heap in front of a dumpster. Hitoshi groans, pushing himself up. The man blocked the way they had come in and, while they could continue running in the direction they had been heading in they wouldn’t get very far before being caught again. Hitoshi backs up against the dumpster, Izuku joining him. 

 

“What do you want?”

 

Izuku asks, his expression steeled. The man raises his hand and pushes the yellow goggles he was wearing off his face.

 

“Why are you outside alone?”

 

Hitoshi blinks,

 

“That’s it? You chased us down just to ask why we were outside?”

The man scowls,

 

“You’re kids. You shouldn’t be outside at night. Especially in this district.”

 

Izuku shrugs,

 

“We live in this district, sir. We know our way around.”

 

“Where are your parents?”

 

The man asks, not giving up. Izuku huffs,

 

“Drunk in Musutafu.”


“Trying for a kid with a heroic quirk.”

 

Hitoshi says. The man blinks at them. Izuku takes Hitoshi’s hand, squeezing it reassuringly and stepping forward in an attempt to slip past the man.

 

“If you don’t mind, we should be getting home.”

 

The man steps in front of them.

 

“I’ll walk you.”

 

“Not necessary.”

 

Izuku insists. Hitoshi watches their back and forth, taking deep breaths. He was still a little haunted by the nightmare and he couldn’t help but think that they were in trouble because of him. He had been trying to leave the apartment, and just because fresh air made it a little bit easier to calm down. He probably could have dealt with being in the apartment, even if at the time the air had been stifling and had felt like smoke invading his lungs. 

 

“Hitoshi?”

 

Izuku asks, looking at him with concern. 

 

“Hm?”

 

Hitoshi replies, taking deep breaths. 

 

“Are you alright?”

 

Hitoshi nods,

 

“I’m fine.”

 

“Just let me take you home.”

 

The man, still standing in front of them, says. Izuku’s head whips back around to look at him.

 

“Why should we trust you?”

 

The man huffs and reaches into a back pocket. He takes out his wallet and removes a plastic card from it. He hands it to Izuku, who squints at it in the dark. Hitoshi looks at it over his shoulder and his eyes widen when he reads the hero name printed at the top.

 

“You’re Eraserhead?”

 

He asks, looking up at the hero. He nods. Izuku hums, handing the card back.

 

“A hero licence means nothing. You could still try to kidnap and torture us.”

 

Hitoshi hums, tilting his head in thought. 

 

“I guess he could. But why would he?”

 

Izuku shrugs,

 

“Any decent underground hero can recognize the signs of a quirkless person.”

 

He kicks out his foot to show off his shoes to prove his point,

 

“And you basically already told him that your quirk has been called villainous. That’s enough for a lot of people.”

 

Hitoshi nods, looking up at the hero suspiciously. The man looks down at them with a surprised expression, but he stifles it quickly.

 

“I promise I’m not going to hurt you. I just want to get you back home safely.”

 

Izuku looks up at him, then over at the path they had been trying to take, then at the path the man was blocking, and then back at him. 

 

“Fine. But you’re walking beside us.”


The man nods and steps out of their way. The two boys walk out of the alley, Eraserhead alongside them. The walk feels longer than it is, mainly because of the tense awkwardness in the air. Izuku keeps staring at Eraserhead suspiciously and Hitoshi just feels tired, leaning into Izuku for support as he tries to keep his eyes open.

 

When they reach the apartment Izuku stops in front of the doors, turning to face Eraserhead. Hitoshi yawns. 

 

“You can leave now. You walked us home.”

 

Izuku says. 

 

“If you don’t live with your parents, who’s taking care of you?”

 

The hero asks. Izuku sighs,

 

“Please just leave. You did your job, right?”

Eraserhead shakes his head,


“You said your parents weren’t even in this district, and no responsible adult would let the kids in their care wander around at night.”

 

Suddenly, the door behind them opens and Yuuga pokes his head out,

 

Mes amis? Why aren’t you in bed?”

 

Izuku huffs,

 

“Sorry, Yuuga. We went out for a walk and Eraserhead decided he needed to walk us back.”

 

The blonde tilts his head, looking back and forth between the two boys and the man standing in front of them, 

 

“Eraserhead? Is that his hero name?”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Yeah. He keeps insisting we tell him who’s taking care of us.”

 

“You mean which adults live here?”

 

Yuuga asks. Izuku nods. Yuuga huffs, looking up at the hero,

 

“I don’t see how that matters, monsieur. Though, I must ask why you went out for a walk so late.”

 

Hitoshi raises his hand at his side,

 

“I had a nightmare and wanted fresh air.”

Then, looking back at Eraserhead,

 

“Can we go inside, please? I’m tired.”

 

As if to prove his point, his jaw cracks with a yawn. Eraserhead sighs, waving them away,

 

“Fine. But this doesn’t mean our conversation is over.”

 

Hitoshi hums and tugs Izuku toward the building doors. Yuuga holds one open for them, taking one last glance at Eraserhead before letting it swing closed. Eraserhead stands at the doors until he can no longer see the three boys through the small window. He slips away into the shadows, trying to figure out if the adults they lived with were just asleep, negligent, or nonexistent.

Chapter 48: Visitation Meetings

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

“He seriously followed you home? That’s creepy.”

 

Ochako says from her spot at the table, picking at her breakfast. The others nod in agreement. Izuku hums, shoving a bite of toast into his mouth.


“It wasn’t like we could stop him. He’s a seasoned pro. I just hope he doesn’t hang around too much.”

 

Shouto nods at this, raising his hand up to the roots of his hair, which had just grown in enough for his original hair colour to be noticeable. Hitoshi glares down at his food,


“I just hope he isn’t someone who thinks the foster system is a godsend. If he ends up reporting us then we’ll all be separated.”

 

Everyone falls silent at that. Some of them knew that should they be put in the system they may turn out okay, others knew they’d be sent back to their shitty parents, and a select few were pretty sure they’d die before they aged out. 

 

“So, a curfew?”

 

Eijirou asks, looking around the table. Izuku sighs,

 

“Yeah. We’ll have to go back to minimal shopping trips, and we can’t go out too late, either. Eraserhead is an underground hero, so he patrols at night.”

 

Fumikage nods,


“He has my tentative respect as a fellow member of the night.”

 

Tooru grumbles, 

 

“If he tries to hurt us I’ll blind him. Can’t do anything if he can’t see.”

 

A small smile tugs at Izuku’s lips as he shakes his head,

 

“We should try to avoid violence. He’s a pro hero, after all.”

 

“We’re gonna have to tell Mina,”

 

Shouto says. Izuku nods,

 

“Her next visit is in just a couple of days, so we don’t have to wait that long. Though we should try to keep her dad out of it. I don’t want him knowing we caught the attention of a pro.”

 

The others nod and a few hop down from their chairs, plates in hand. A small pile of dishes grows next to the sink until everyone is done, at which point Fumikage and Dark Shadow take up their positions at the sink. 

 

A few of them gravitate to their workbooks while others form a small group and head down to the basement. Izuku stays in the apartment to work on his math since those heading down to the basement already know what they’re going to work on and don’t need any pointers. He wipes down the table to clear it of crumbs before settling down with his workbook. Ochako, Yuuga, and Hitoshi all gravitate toward the table, too, settling into chairs around Izuku. 

 

--------

 

The day passes quickly, groups switching between training in the basement, working in their books, and playing games around the apartment keeps everyone occupied throughout the day. By the time they’re ready to eat dinner and go to bed each of them is eager to climb into their sleeping bag. 

 

Izuku is about to turn out the lights for the day when Fumikage, who had been looking up at the night sky through the window, points at one of the rooftops a few buildings away.

 

“Does anyone else see the abnormal shadow?”

 

He asks. Dark Shadow nods and they all gather around the window to see what he’s looking at. When Izuku sees the shape he sighs and twists the blinds closed.

 

“He’s spying on us. He’s probably already noticed that there aren’t any adults living with us.”

 

Yuuga looks worried as he stares at the closed blinds,

 

“Do you think he’ll report us?”

The boy asks. Izuku shrugs,

 

“It’s sorta fifty-fifty. He’s an underground pro, so he could know about how corrupt the foster system is. Or he could think it’s better for us than living here. We’re just gonna have to wait and see.”

 

Ochako groans, flopping back onto her sleeping bag,

 

“I hope he doesn’t do anything. All that training would be for nothing, and we probably wouldn’t ever see each other again.”

 

Hitoshi hums, nodding,

 

“I would rather be run over by a car than be shoved into another over-filled group home.”

 

Izuku nods as he flicks on the night light.

 

“We’ll just have to do our best to convince him that we’re fine on our own. Everyone ready for bed?”

 

Murmured yeses and hums fill the room and Izuku walks over to the light switch, flicking off the overhead light. 



The following night is the same, one of them spots Eraserhead on the neighbouring rooftop as they’re getting ready for bed and Izuku closes the blinds before turning off the lights. 

 

When they wake up that morning, some more rested than others, they take turns getting dressed in either the bathroom or the extra room. Breakfast is quick and then Izuku opens the blinds. He scours the rooftops for any sign of the underground hero, but, when he doesn’t find any, he decides to keep the blinds open and gathers everyone together so they can meet Mina at the front doors.

 

When Mr.Ashido’s car pulls up in front of the building and Mina steps out they all step out of the way of the doors. The girl comes barrelling in, arms outstretched for a hug. They’re all happy to oblige and they stand in a small circle in the lobby for a minute until Izuku pulls away. 

 

“Let’s get down to the basement. I have a few things I want to talk to you about.”

 

He whispers the last part to Mina, hoping her father couldn’t hear. The girl nods and they all line up in front of the entrance to the stairwell. Mr.Ashido once again brings up the rear of the line, easing the door closed behind the group. They all split off into their usual teams once they reach the bottom of the stairs. Izuku and Mr.Ashido hang back by the stairs for a while until Izuku eases away toward Mina. Mr.Ashido stays back but watches the two. 

 

“Hey, Mina.”

 

Izuku says once he’s close enough to her. Mina looks up and shakes out her hands as she looks at Izuku,

 

“Hey! You said you wanted to talk to me about something?”

 

She says, keeping her voice low. Izuku nods, 

 

“A couple of days ago an underground pro, Eraserhead followed Hitoshi and me home after we went out for a night walk. He kept asking which adults we lived with and he’s been watching the apartment from nearby roofs.”

 

Mina hums, keeping a smile on her face to keep her dad from being suspicious,

 

“Do you think he’s going to report us?”

 

She asks, worry lacing her tone. Izuku shrugs,

 

“I don’t know. It’s pretty fifty-fifty either way.”

 

Mina sighs, pooling acid in her palms. 


“I’ll try to keep an eye out for anyone when I leave. Do you think he saw me arrive?”

 

Izuku cracks his knuckles,

 

“I don’t think so, but he could have. We’re going to have to keep comings and goings from the apartment to a minimum again, aside from your visits, of course, I don’t think we can really afford to cut those down. And maybe if he sees an adult coming over every so often he’ll leave us alone.”


Mina nods, 

 

“Alright.”

 

Izuku nods back and turns away from her, smiling at Mr.Ashido as he nears the man. 

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I went to my aunt's house for Easter dinner. My little cousins were adorable in their matching outfits and my uncle is probably the only one in my family who knows how to cook meat so that it's not dry has the Sahara.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 49: Friends Found In Alley Ways (Quirk Overuse Is A Big Problem)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Mina’s visit feels shorter than the last one, but Izuku knows that that’s just because he spends most of their time in the basement trying to think of plans for anything Eraserhead could choose to do. They were running low on a few essentials and would need to make a grocery run soon. Would the hero arrest whoever they sent out? Or would he follow them to the store and back, trying to learn their routine for some bigger plan? No one in the hero community should know about their plans to take over, as they were still in development, which led Izuku to believe that the man wouldn’t arrest any of them, but he could still find out about Shouto and-

 

Izuku swears under his breath. Mr.Ashido looks down at him from where he’s standing by the doors, waiting for his daughter to finish saying goodbye to the others. 

 

“What’s wrong?”

 

He asks. Izuku shakes his head,

 

“Sorry, I just realized we have to go shopping a little sooner than I thought we would.”

 

Mr.Ashido hums and takes Mina’s hand as she runs up to him. 


“Bye, Izuku!”

 

She calls, waving over her shoulder as her dad leads her out o the building. Izuku waves back until she’s driving away.

 

“Shouto needs hair dye.”

 

Izuku says, addressing the others who had started forming a line so they could head back upstairs. They nod, looking around at each other, silently trying to decide who should go. Shouto can’t, his roots were getting pretty bad and he had been wearing a hat throughout Mr.Ashdio’s visit. 

 

“I can go.”

 

Eijirou says, stepping forward. 


“I can go with you.”

 

Ochako pipes up, moving to stand next to him. Eijirou shakes his head.


“If Eraserhead really is waiting to pluck us up off the streets then it’s best if only one of us goes. To minimize casualties.”

 

Izuku nods reluctantly,

 

“Eijirou is right. Here,”

 

He pulls a few hundred yen coins out of his pocket and hands them to Eijirou. 


“Be careful.”

 

He says. Eijirou nods, taking the money and tucking it away in his pocket.

 

“I’ll be back soon!”

 

He calls, waving as he leaves. 

 

--------

 

Eijirou looks around him as he makes his way down the street. There aren’t many people out, and he only passes one or two on his way to the hundred-yen store. When he finally opens the door the cashier looks up from their book and smiles at him. Eijirou smiles back before finding his way to the cosmetics to grab a bottle of Shouto’s concealer since he was probably running low on that, too. 

 

The hair dye aisle is right next to the cosmetics so it doesn’t take him long to find the dye. It takes him a while to find the right shade, and he has to mentally compare the colours to what he remembers of Shouto’s hair. He grabs some bleach, too, so they can properly dye the red half of his hair. 

 

The cashier rings him up quickly and sends him on his way once everything was stuffed inside a bag. Eijirou waves to them as he leaves and pushes open the door. As he walks he makes sure to keep an eye on his surroundings. Because of this, he sees a flash of yellow in one of the alleys. He pauses outside of it, peering inside. When he hears someone groan from behind one of the dumpsters he takes a cautious step forward. 

 

He peers inside, trying to see who’s there. When he spots a figure about his size, shoved against the side of the dumpster, he quickens his pace. He finds a boy with blonde hair and a shock of black on the side. His eyes are vacant and he has a slight dribble of drool dripping from the corner of his mouth. Eijirou crouches down in front of the boy and feels the back of his head, feeling for blood. When he takes his hand back, however, there’s no blood to be found. 

 

Worried, Eijirou takes the boy by the hand, slowly helping him stand. He follows easily, only adding to Eijirou’s concern. The other boy leans on him, occasionally holding up his free hand in a thumbs-up. 

 

The walk back to the apartment is longer than usual because Eijirou walks slowly to make it easier for the other boy. When he finally opens the door to the apartment Izuku is the first in front of them, guiding the new blonde to Izuku’s sleeping bag. He sits down and Izuku immediately starts checking him over the same way Eijirou had. When he doesn’t find any injuries he balances on the balls of his feet, looking at the shot of black in the boy’s hair.

 

“I think he has an electricity quirk, and overused it. We just have to wait for his body to replenish the electricity it needs. In the meantime…”

 

He takes the bag from Eijirou and holds the boxes of hair dye and bleach out to Hitoshi and Shouto,

 

“Think you can handle this?”

 

Hitoshi nods and the two boys slip into the bathroom with a plastic bowl. Izuku eases the blonde boy into a laying position before settling on the ground next to him, He takes out his notebook and flips it open to a fresh page. He glances at the new boy occasionally while he writes. The others take up spots at the table with their workbooks. They look over at the new boy sometimes, making sure he’s still okay. 

 

By the time Shouto and Hitoshi emerge from the bathroom, the new boy seemed to have fallen asleep. Shouto and Hitoshi both join the others at the table but Izuku stays on the floor. After a moment, Eijirou joins him with his workbook. They write side-by-side and take turns checking on the new boy.

 

It takes a while for him to wake up. By the time he starts to stir dinner is ready and they’re all gathered at the table. Izuku and Eijirou are the firsts to jump down from their chairs, rushing over to the boy. When the others stand, too, Izuku waves for them to hang back. The blonde sits up slowly and Izuku crouches in front of him.

 

“How are you feeling?”

 

He asks, voice gentle. The other boy takes a moment to gather himself before answering.

“I’m fine. I short out a lot.”

 

He shrugs. Izuku blinks at him,


“You mean that’s a common thing?”

 

Izuku asks. The blonde nods,

 

“Yeah. It happens when I overuse my quirk. Which is pretty easy to do…”

 

He shrugs again and Izuku sighs, 

 

“How?”

 

The other boy looks at him in confusion,

 

“What?”

 

“How do you overuse your quirk? How do you train it?”

 

“I use it at full power, most of the time. Sometimes I let it out in shorter bursts. The electricity, I mean. I have an electric quirk. Mom says that’s the best way to do it. It’s how she trained her quirk, and ours are pretty similar.”

 

Izuku takes a deep breath,

 

“No. Just, no. That is the absolute wrong way to do it. If you’re trying to build tolerance you should do it in small increments, like a muscle.”

 

The boy shrugs again,

 

“Yeah…that sounds more right. Thanks for taking me away from the alley.”

 

He directs the last part to Eijirou. The boy nods,

 

“Of course, dude. I couldn’t leave you there.”

 

The boy shrugs, 

 

“Just, no one’s ever really cared before.”

 

Eijirou looks at him in disbelief while most of the others simply nod. Izuku holds his hand out to the boy.


“You can stay here, with us, if you like. We’ve all been training our quirks in the basement of the building and I’m more than willing to help you do the same.”

 

The blonde nods slowly,


“That sounds nice, actually.”

 

Izuku smiles,


“I’m Izuku.”

 

The blonde smiles back,

 

“You can call me Denki.”

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I should hopefully be starting therapy for my anxiety sometime this year so long as my dad can get our insurance to cover it. I've been accepted into one of my Library's programs for earning volunteer hours but I have to get it approved by the principal.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 50: Quirks Are Muscles And Our Muscles Need Work

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

The next day, Denki takes the spot directly behind Izuku in the line down to the basement. Instead of standing against the wall, like usual, Izuku joins Denki in one of the corners, a notebook held out in front of him. He waits until everyone is working on their own before flipping through his notes to what he already has on Denki. 

 

“Alright, firstly, how many watts can you let off without short-circuiting?”

 

Izuku asks, pencil poised over an empty page of Denki’s section. The other boy hums, leaning over Izuku’s shoulder to see what he’s writing. 

 

“I think around a hundred thousand? That’s the last number mom mentioned, at least.”

 

Izuku nods, jotting it down. 


“How much control do you have over the direction it goes in?”

 

Denki cringes,

“None.”

 

Izuku nods, writing that down too. 

 

“Can you tell me anything about what it feels like when you short-circuit?”

 

“It’s like I’m surrounded by fog. I can’t really do much other than give a thumbs up, which took me a long time to learn how to do. When I finally get back to normal the time I spent short-circuited feels like a dream and I have a minor headache.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“To me, it sounds like your body creates a lot more electricity than the average body. However, when you use up the extra electricity your quirk starts taking from the necessary stores. Like your nervous system, and brain. Which is very dangerous. Short-circuiting often, or a short-circuit caused by emitting way more watts than normal, could kill you.”

 

Denki pales as he reads over Izuku’s notes again. The other boy had been writing throughout their entire conversation and already had an entire page of notes.

 

“So how do I make sure I don’t die because of my quirk?”

 

Denki asks, looking up at Izuku nervously. The other boy flips his notebook shut,

 

“As I said before, we take it slow. We treat your quirk like a muscle. Do you wanna work on your control over its direction or on your short-circuiting first?”

 

Denki takes a moment to think, looking up at the ceiling and those around them as he thinks. 


“Control. I don’t want to hurt anyone while working on my short-circuiting.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Alright. We should start by setting up an area for your to practice in before we really get started.”

 

Denki nods, rolling back on his heels, 

 

“And how are we going to do that?”

 

Izuku hums,

 

“Tarps. I’ve seen a few at Dagobah Beach, so as long as they’re nylon we can use them to set up an area for you to train that won’t spread the electricity through the basement.”

 

Denki nods,

 

“Okay. But isn’t Dagobah the trash beach?”

 

Izuku nods with a grin,

 

“Yup! But, honestly, a lot of the stuff is still useful and in good condition. Our table, chairs, and fridge are all from there.”

 

Denki blinks, 

 

“Seriously?”


Izuku nods. Denki hums,

“So you got all that stuff for free? That's so cool.”

 

Izuku chuckles

 

“We’re just taking what we can for now. Once we have a more concrete plan, and maybe a bigger group, I plan on having us clean off the beach as training.”

 

“Wait, what plan?”

 

Denki asks, looking at Izuku with an expression of curiosity.

 

“Right, you haven’t been told yet. We’ve been working on a way to take over the government since they encourage discrimination and the abandonment of places like the Red Light district by heroes to keep a steady supply of villains. I’m also about ninety percent sure that they have made dealings with villains and done a lot of horrible things to stay in power.”

 

Denki blinks,

 

“That’s a lot to take in…uh…what kind of things do you think they’ve done?”

 

He asks. Izuku leans forward, 

 

“Like I already mentioned, I think they make deals with villains that hold a lot of power in the villain underground to gain information and keep some of their highest-ranking heroes in the spotlight. I also think that they discourage patrols in the poorer districts, despite the fact that they’re the most riddled with crime so that they can keep a steady flow of villains to their spotlight heroes. I’ve also heard little rumours that they once bought a lot of kids with powerful quirks from their parents and then the kids were never seen again.”

 

Denki blinks,

 

“Fuck…”

 

Izuku nods as he rights himself. He lets Denki have a few moments to think while he jots down a few more things he had thought of in the boy’s notes. 

 

“I’ll join you.”


Denki says, causing Izuku to look up from his notebook. Izuku smiles,

 

“It’s nice to have you.”

 

Denki smiles back,

 

“So, when can we go get some tarps?”

 

He asks. Izuku shrugs,

 

“We should probably wait until we go grocery shopping since we’re trying to limit the time we spend away from the apartment.”

 

Denki tilts his head,


“Why?”

 

Izuku sighs, 

 

“An underground hero, Eraserhead, followed me and Hitoshi back one night and he’s been watching us since then. We’ve only really seen him at night, but we’re pretty sure he watches us during the day, too. It’s fifty-fifty as to whether he screws us over and I’m trying to keep him from gathering information.”

 

Denki nods,


“That’s pretty creepy, but alright. What can I do in the meantime?”

 

Izuku grins,

 

“Work on your actual muscles! We haven’t started training outside of our quirks yet, but I want to start that soon and the fact that both you and Yuuga can’t train with your quirks yet is the perfect excuse to start.”

 

Denki nods, a matching grin on his face. Izuku stands, waving for Denki to do the same. They spend the rest of the afternoon standing on the wall as Izuku works on workout plans for everyone while also calling out little suggestions as they train their quirks. Once they’re done, everyone has the beginnings of a workout plan in Izuku’s notebooks and they’re all ready to relax in their sleeping bags, the sun shining on them through the windows. 

 

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 51: Company Building Starts A The Dump. (Did I Say Dump? I Meant Beach)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku shows off his physical training plans the day after he makes them, much to the delight of the others. Their training for the rest of that week is given to physical. They borrow weights from one of the other tenants and tape off a few corners of the basement. A running track is hashed out, and five boxes are lined out as well. One for weight lifting, and the other four for anything else, such as push-ups, crunches, and stretching. 

 

They’d form a line as they ran around the track and would complete their push-ups in unison to make it easier to keep track of. When it finally comes time for them to go shopping, despite the fact that they had taken a break the day before, no one quite feels up to joining Izuku on the trip. 

 

“I can’t get all of the groceries home myself.”

 

Izuku complains, crossing his arms as he looks at the others. Denki groans as he sits up, propping himself up on his elbows.

 

“Fine, I’ll go with.”

 

Izuku smiles. He grabs a duffel bag from the hall closet and throws it to Denki. The boy catches it, standing as he drapes it over his torso. 

 

“Have fun.”

 

Hitoshi calls, waving from his place on top of his sleeping bag. 

 

“Try to stick to your plans today.”

 

Izuku says, looking over his shoulder as he opens the apartment door. The others groan, but a few of them start to stand as Izuku and Denki slip out of the apartment. 

 

When they get down to the lobby Mr.Sukēto is sitting behind his desk. When he sees them coming down the stairs he takes his feet off his desk. 


“I haven’t seen you lot in a while.”

 

Izuku shrugs,

 

“We just haven’t had to shopping lately.”

 

Mr.Sukēto hums.

 

“So, how many of you are there now?”

 

He asks. Izuku tilts his head for a moment as the thinks,

 

“Eleven total, but nine in the apartment.”

 

Mr.Sukēto looks a little surprised but he waves them off, 


“If too many more move in I’m going to up your rent.”

 

Izuku nods,

“I understand, sir. We’ll be back later.”

 

Just as they’re about to leave Tsu appears at the doors of the building. Izuku opens one of them for her, and she slips inside.


“How’d you remember your way here?”

He asks. Tsu shrugs,


“I have a good sense of direction. Where are you going?”

 

“We have to do some shopping. The others are heading down to the basement to work on some physical training. Here,”

 

He reaches into his duffel bag, pulling out his notebook. He rips out the plan he had written for her and hands it to her. She reads it over before nodding to herself,

“Thank you.”

 

Izuku also rips out Mina’s page, handing it to her as well. 

 

“Mina should be here soon too. Can you give this to her?”

 

Tsu nods, taking the paper and tucking it into her pocket. Denki looks behind her, through the glass doors and out at the street.

 

“How were you able to slip away?”

 

Denki asks. Tsu shrugs,

 

“My school was shut down today due to damage from someone else's quirk but my parents still had to work and my siblings’ schools are still open.”

 

Denki nods. He looks behind him to see the others heading down to the basement in their line.


“You should head down to the basement.”

 

Denki says, gesturing behind him to the others. Tsu nods, slipping past them,

 

“Thanks, Izuku.”

 

She says. Izuku nods, 


“No problem!”

They watch her as she opens the door to the stairwell, joining the end of the line to the basement. They wait until she disappears down the stairs, the door closing behind her, and both finally leave the building, heading in the direction of the stores. 

 

--------

 

They leave the store, arms laden with shopping bags, and start the long journey back to the apartment. 

 

“We have got to figure out an easier way of getting this stuff back to the apartment.”

Denki complains. Izuku nods, 

 

“Especially if we’re going to be getting more recruits.”

 

Denki looks over at him,

 

“If we get more recruits they’re the ones who will be carrying everything.”

 

Izuku huffs,


“I would have gotten Fumikage to come along so we could get some extra help but they’ve both been working really hard lately.”

 

Denki hums, looking forward again. 

 

“When we drop these back off at the apartment are we gonna head back out to Dagobah?”

Izuku nods,

 

“Of course. You deserve to be able to practice your quirk, too. Plus, I wanna see if there will be anything else we can repurpose.”

 

Denki nods, 


“We should get Fumikage to come alone when we go to the beach. I don’t think we can carry any tarps back on our own.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Maybe. I just hope that he’s up for it when we get back.”

--------

 

When they get back to the apartment, everyone else is already back up. Dark Shadow takes a few of the bags and puts them down on the counter. Mina, Eijirou, and Tsu start putting them away while Izuku and Denki sit down for a small break.

“Hey, Fumikage?”


Izuku says, looking over at the other boy. He hums, Dark Shadow hovers beside him,

 

“Yes, Izuku?”

 

“Do you think you're up to coming with us to the beach? We could use some help with the tarps.”

 

Fumikage nods,


“I believe that’s possible. Though we need a bit of a break first.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Of course! Just let me know when you’re ready.”

 

Fumikage nods, lying back on his sleeping bag. Eijirou, Tsu, and Mina come back from the kitchen, settling onto their sleeping bags too. 

 

“I believe we’re ready to go now.”

 

Fumikage says a few minutes later, propping himself up on his elbows. Izuku and Denki both sit up, grabbing their duffel bags from beside them. Fumikage grabs his as well. Dark Shadow ducks out of the way as Fumikage slips it on over his torso. The three head to the door, waving to the others. 

 

When they reach the lobby Mr.Sukēto is gone. His chair is pushed back from the front desk and there are smudge marks where his feet had been. 

 

“What do you think he does when he’s not at his desk?”

 

Denki asks as they leave the building. Izuku shrugs. Dark Shadow drapes themself over Denki’s shoulders,


“Maybe he goes to his apartment to work on his toupe.”

 

They joke. Izuku snorts and Denki chuckles,

 

“It looks like he made it with a mix of things he found in his house.”

 

Denki says. Izuku nods,

 

“Do you think he used anything from a dumpster?”

 

Izuku asks, glancing at the dumpster in the alley by the building. Denki huffs,

 

“Probably. I don’t think he’d be willing to spend anything on a wig cap or whatever you use for toupes.”

 

Fumikage nods,

 

“I believe I’ve seen feathers mixed in as well.”

 

Izuku shivers,

 

“I hope he just found those on the ground.”

 

--------

 

When they reach Dagobah, a few of the piles are bigger than last time. They hug their duffel bags close as they wander through the piles, careful not to hit any of the piles in fear of them falling over. It takes a few minutes of wandering but, eventually, they find a tarp that looks to be in pretty okay condition and that doesn’t seem to be an integral part of its pile.

 

They each grab one end, careful to avoid any rusted metal around or under the tarp. They pull it out of the pile gently, shaking off dirt and debris so it’s a little cleaner as they step toward and around each other to fold it. Once it’s folded into a nice square, Dark Shadow balances it on their claw.

 

They walk around for a while until they have a nice pile of tarps, all in slightly different conditions. As they’re making their way back the way they had come, ready to go back to the apartment, they hear something clatter a few piles away. They share curious glances before turning slightly, diverting their route to see what had caused the noise. When they turn the corner they see a girl about their age with bubble-gum pink dreadlocks, large goggles over her eyes, a bulky bag hanging at her side, and thick gloves going up to her elbows. When she sees them, she spins around, grinning wildly,

 

“Hey there! I’m Hatsume Mei, future founder of Hatsume Industries!”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary!
I'm babysitting for a woman on my block tonight. She wants to try a new yoga class so I'll be watching her kids so about an hour, hour and a half. They're really sweet, as far as I can tell, so I'm excited.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 52: Business Agreement

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku smiles,

 

“I’m Izuku, future president of the Hero Public Safety Commission. These are my friends, Denki and Fumikage.”

 

Izuku gestures to each respectively and they raise their hands in greeting. Mei tilts her head,

 

“Why would you want to be in charge of something that already exists? The work is already done for you.”

Izuku shakes his head,

 

“Because we’re going to build a new one from the ground up.”

 

Mei nods, accepting the answer as it is.

 

“Alright, then. Say, are you looking for any support equipment? I’m sure something like overthrowing the government would take some tech.”

 

The smile on her face widens as she leans toward Izuku.

 

“Yes, actually. A few of our members could use some customized equipment, and some weaponry would be useful.”

 

Mei beams,

“Perfect!”

 

Izuku gestures back to the sidewalk,


“We can walk back to the apartment so you can talk to the ones who need special equipment. We can discuss pay on the way.”

 

Mei hops up to him as she shakes her head, She starts walking back through the trash piles, forcing the others to follow her.

 

“No need! So long as you keep my signature on display while using them, having the people overthrowing and taking control of the government will be useful for my business. Working in tandem with the government will get be access to better resources, too.”

 

Izuku tilts his head,

 

“Are you sure you don’t want any money?”

 

Hatumse shakes her head,

“Nope! Though, I’ll probably need help getting my hands on materials in the future.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“So, just to clarify, so long as we make sure your logo is on display, supply you with necessary materials, and promise to keep working with you in the future, you’ll supply us with equipment?”

 

Mei nods as she fiddles with something in her hands. 

 

“Yup!”

Izuku bows,

 

“Thank you.”

 

Mei waves him off, still not looking up from whatever was in her hands.

 

“No need to thank me. The way I see it, it’s mutually beneficial.”

 

Izuku nods. They walk in silence for a while, Mei usually a few steps ahead of them. Though she’ll stop to wait at turns or road crossings to wait for them since she doesn’t know where she’s going. About halfway to the apartment, Izuku turns to Mei,

 

“Are your parents okay with you going down to Dagobah?”

Mei shrugs,

 

“I don’t think they really know. I told them, once, but they were both working at their computers as usual, so I don’t really think they heard me. They don’t pay much attention to me, but that’s okay! They let me use the shed in the backyard as a lab and they get me all the materials I need.”

 

Izuku hums. He watches her eyes as the pupils dilate and constrict.

 

“Does your quirk have something to do with your eye?”

He asks. Mei nods,


“Mhm. It lets me zoom in and out. Helps with wiring and stuff.”

 

Izuku nods,


“How far from the Red Light district do you live?”

 

Mei shrugs,


“About a two-hour walk.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Would you be okay with moving in with us? We can find somewhere to set up a new lab for you and we can help bring over whatever you want from your current one.”

 

Mei finally looks up,

 

“Seriously?”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Yeah, why not? I’m gonna get us a more steady flow of money soon and it’ll make it easier for us to bring back materials for you.”

 

Mei nods excitedly,

 

“Yeah, alright! I wanna help find the place, though. Make sure it’s good.”

Izuku nods,

 

“Of course.”

 

They spend the rest of the walk discussing the logistics of the lab. Where it will be, what it will be made of, how big it will be. Izuku is scribbling all of it down in a notebook he grabbed from his duffel bag. Denki and Fumikage are more than happy to pitch in, each giving their own ideas. Mei abandons the project in her hands in favour of the conversation. 

 

When they get back to the apartment Mei follows them inside, plopping herself down in a corner of the living room as she fidgets with a small piece of metal in her hands. Shouto sits down a few feet away from her, back against the wall. He drags a trash can and his carving tools over with him. The others don’t seem very phased by her appearance. At Izuku’s direction, Dark Shadow drops the tarps off in the bathtub and Denki grabs some of the cleaning supplies from under the kitchen sink. The two start washing the tarps in the bathroom, Ochako and Eijirou both following to help out. 

 

Izuku heads into the spare room with his notes to start thinking of places for Mei’s labs that fit her conditions. 

 

Mei ends up staying the night. Her project joins Shouto’s in a drawer in the kitchen and she grabs a grey sleeping bag from the hall closet. They lay it out at the end of the row, closest to the kitchen, so she ends up lying beside Fumikage, which also means she’s near the nightlight. She explains that it's not a problem, as she used to fall asleep in her bright lab all the time. The statement concerns Izuku a little, but he doesn’t say anything and simply settles into his sleeping bag in the middle of the row. 





In the morning, Mei follows them down to the basement. Mostly so she can talk to and measure Aoyama for something to help with his quirk. They go down early to set up Denki’s area, so they avoid a morning encounter with Mr.Sukēto. It takes them a few minutes to set up, and they find that there are still a few small puddles of water on one of the tarps. Ochako becomes concerned,

 

“Isn’t water conductive?”

 

Izuku makes a so-so motion with his hand,

 

“That’s just salt water. Fresh water, like what runs from the taps through our filters, isn’t a problem.”

 

Ochako nods,


“Oh, okay.”

 

Denki steps onto the tarps, looking to Izuku for direction. 


“What do I start with?”

He asks. Izuku pulls out his notebook, showing off a few of the pages. 

 

“We should start with bringing down the amount you can send out at once. You said your parents had you shooting off your max every time, right?”

 

Denki nods. Izuku nods back,

 

“Then we want to bring that down. Two-thousand-seven-hundred volts is enough to kill, or at least severely injure. Plus, we don’t want you to be a one-hit-wonder.”

 

Denki nods,

 

“Right. So gaining control over how much I send out.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Yup! To start, I’ll guide you through I sort of meditative exercise. It should help you get more in tune with your quirk.”

 

Denki nods, settling into a cross-legged position in the middle of the tarps. The others all spread out across the basement, setting up their own exercises. A few of them start on their physical training while others work with their quirks. Aoyama and Mei claim one of the corners abandoned by its usual occupant while they use one of the areas designated for physical training. 

 

Mei has Aoyama stand in a T-pose while she measures. The boy looks a little uncomfortable, but he moves when she tells him to and doesn’t complain. Izuku guides Denki through meditation on the tarps. Occasionally, sparks will light off the boy’s fingertips.

 

When they're done in the basement, they head back up to the apartment. Mei is scribbling in a notebook Izuku had given her as they walk, Aoyama watching over her shoulder. Denki has a big smile on his face. The most he had let off was a few sparks, but it was still progress. One or two had been on purpose .

 

Mr.Sukēto is sitting at his desk when they get back up the stairs. He waves them out to the lobby as they pass. When he sees Mei, he raises a brow.

“Is she here to stay?”

He asks. Izuku nods,

 

“Yes, sir.”

“Well, then, I’ll be up later to discuss your rent increase.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Yes, sir.”

 

The others nod along, too, before turning away to continue going back up the stairs.

 

“Can he really raise our rent?”

 

Denki asks, running up beside Izuku. The other boy nods,

 

“It’s not like we have an official lease. This is an apartment in the Red Light district, after all. Nothing about it is quite legal. He’s renting to kids.”

Denki nods,

 

“I guess so. Can we afford it though?”

“To a certain threshold.”

 

Denki hums. When they get back up to their apartment they all grab some water from the kitchen and sit down on their sleeping bags. They don’t talk, each working on their own thing. Most of them are writing in their workbooks. Izuku has his notebook balanced on his lap, and Shouto has the woodcarving he’s currently working on, this one in the shape of a tanuki. Mei is focused on her notes. She has a sheet of blueprint paper on the ground in front of her on the ground and a pencil tucked behind her ear, that she grabs every once in a while to transfer her notes. 

 

They spend the rest of the evening like this, working on their own tasks. Tooru is particularly engaged in her workbook as she works on a science page. They only take a break to make and eat their dinner. After said meal, they spend about another hour on their work until they head to bed. Mei ends up staying up later than all of them. She’s still working away when the others are long asleep, the only light that of the nightlight plugged into the wall. Dark Shadow watches over her shoulder as she works, occasionally grabbing her a new pencil when she needs it.

Notes:

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 53: Finding A Suitable Spot For A Lab

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

When Izuku wakes up in the morning, it’s to find Mei asleep on her sleeping bag, blueprints and short, nub-like pencil strewn around her. He rubs his eyes, looking around at the others, also still asleep before getting up himself. 

 

He starts on breakfast for everyone, simple toast and a pot of coffee. Everyone else wakes up slowly, trekking into the kitchen to grab their breakfast. Mei is the last to wake up. When she does, everyone else is already sitting at the table with their workbooks. She doesn’t seem to care that her toast has a different texture since it had been sitting out for a while, or that the coffee was lukewarm at best. Once she’s down eating she settles back on the ground with her blueprints, looking over what she had down and making small adjustments where they were needed.

 

Izuku sits down next to her, looking over her shoulder at the blueprints. They were for a belt, which Izuku assumed was for Aoyama. It wasn’t as thick as Izuku had thought it would have to be. After a few minutes, she sets her pencil down and rolls up the blueprints.

 

“Alright, I’m ready to go hunting for a new lab.”

 

She says, standing. Izuku nods. He grabs her a duffel bag from the linen closet the same metal gray as her sleeping bag. She tucks the blueprints into the bag, zipping it up carefully around them to make sure the paper doesn’t get caught in the zipper. Izuku hands Hitoshi a stack of a few thousand yen. 

 

“If he comes by, don’t accept an increase of more than ten-thousand yen.”

 

Hitoshi nods, 

 

“You got it.”

 

Izuku slings his duffel bag over his head and across his chest. He leads Mei out of the apartment, closing the door behind them. She bounces alongside him as they make their way down the stairs and out of the building. She fidgets with something in her hands as they walk, twisting screws with a small screwdriver. Her eyes zoom in and out as she works. Despite this, she’s still able to keep up with Izuku, stopping when he stops, and turning when he turns. After about a half-hour of walking they find themselves across the street from a lot of warehouses. 

 

They all looked abandoned and run down. The chain-link fence surrounding the lot is pock-marked with holes, rust, and missing pieces. There’s a sign attached to what likely used to be a locked gate, though the chain holding it together now sits broken on the sidewalk. The sign looks like it used to say “Danger, Demolition site”, though most of the letters are hidden under rust. 

 

“What do you think of this place?”

 

Izuku asks, turning to look at Mei. The girl looks up from her project, her eyes still zooming in and out as she looks across the street at the lot. 


“It’ll need some fixing, but I can do that no problem. There are a lot of places for storage and testing grounds, too. It’s perfect!”

 

She grins as she looks over at Izuku. Izuku smiles back,

 

“Great! I can leave you here to explore if you want.”

 

Mei nods, already crossing the street. She steps over the chain on the ground, easily pushing the gate open to give her enough space to get inside. Izuku hums to himself as he turns around and started heading back the way they had come. He doesn’t head back to the apartment, however. Instead, he goes to the edge of the Red Light district, just before Musutafu. One of the buildings lining the edge is a slightly run-down internet cafe. The person running the front counter is asleep at the desk. Izuku slips past them slowly, trying not to wake them up. He picks a computer at the back of the room and settles in.

 

He starts by trying to find Mei’s address. It isn’t hard, Izuku had been practicing getting into basic government files before he had run away. He was a little rusty, and it took him a while, but he was eventually able to find it. It was pretty far away, way too far to walk. It wasn’t much of a surprise, though. Izuku had discovered that Mei’s parents were well-renowned business representatives. They mainly dealt with support engineer companies, though whether or not that was one of the reasons Mei wanted to run one Izuku didn’t know. 

 

Their backyard was available to him through some satellite images posted on the internet. The shed in the backyard was large and looked to be fortified. Izuku assumed that it must be Mei’s lab. However, the lock on the door would mean he wouldn’t be able to stop by and pick up her stuff himself.

 

He closes the tabs and opens a new one. He spends the next couple of hours looking at news articles regarding illegal businesses. When he feels satisfied with his research he logs off the computer. The receptionist is awake when he gets back to the front corner, but he just smiles and waves as he leaves. They look a little confused but don’t move to stop him.

 

Izuku heads back to the warehouse lot to find Mei. When he gets there, she’s just stepping back through the gate, wrapping it in a better-looking chain than the one on the ground and locking the gate with a shiny lock. 

 

“Hey, Mei!”

 

He calls across the street. The girl looks over at him, beaming, as he runs across the road. 

 

“It’s perfect! There are warehouses everywhere, scrap metal, old weapons, construction tools, even a few cranes and bulldozers!”

 

Izuku tilts his head, occasionally nodding or humming as she rambles on about everything she had seen on the lot as they walk. The sun is low in the sky when they finally reach the building. Mr.Sukēto isn’t at his desk when they enter, so they’re free to make their way up to the apartment without dealing with his looks and comments.

 

When they open the door everyone is gathered in a circle in the center of the room. A piece of paper decorated to look like a Ouija board lies in the center of the circle. They all have their hands on a cardboard planchette, which moves sluggishly across the paper.

 

“What the fuck?”

 

Izuku asks, startling rhe others. The door clicks shut behind him.

 

“We are communicating with the dead.”

 

Fumikage states, making direct eye contact with Izuku. He doesn’t blink. 

 

“Right…”

 

Izuku says, entering the room. 

 

“Well, we found somewhere for Mei to set up her lab.”

 

Ochako nods,


“That’s good. Are we going to pick up any materials from her house?”

 

Mei nods,

 

“I can’t just leave my babies behind!”

 

Hitoshi chokes on air as everyone stares at Mei in astonishment.


“What?”

 

Izuku asks. Mei tilts her head,

“Y’know, my babies, my inventions!”

 

Everyone sighs in relief at once,


“Right, right. We can go down tomorrow.”

 

Izuku says, settling down in a gap in the circle. 

 

“Wait, doesn’t Mina come over tomorrow?”

 

Ochako asks. Izuku nods,


“We’ll just have to see if we can make some sort of arrangement with her dad.”

 

Ochako hums as Fumikage gathers up his homemade Ouija board set up. Mei settles at the table, starting on a new set of blueprints. 

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
Last night my family ordered sushi for dinner for Mother's Day. There was a lot more than we thought there would be so, of course, the leftovers went into the fridge and I had some for breakfast.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 54: Why Are Alleys Popular Hiding Spots?

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku is startled awake by a thud, a squeal, and someone swearing quietly to themselves. He jolts upward, looking in the direction of the sound. Hitoshi stands in the slim space between Shouto’s and his own sleeping bag, crouching as he tries to regain his balance.

 

“Are you okay?”

 

He whispers, looking over at the other boy. Shouto is sitting up behind him, eyes still a little wide. A few of the others are starting to sit up, as well, startled by the noise. Hitoshi nods, 

 

“Yeah, sorry. I was coming back from the bathroom and I tripped over Shouto.”

 

Izuku nods, looking down the line of sleeping bags. Everyone else is up by now, rubbing their eyes and looking down at Hitoshi. 

 

“We might need a bigger space soon.”

 

Izuku says, stretching his arms above his head. Hitoshi nods as he lowers back into his sleeping bag.

 

“Where will we go?”

 

Asks Tooru, yawning.

 

Mei looks up momentarily from the blueprint she had already set herself up with, despite having just woken about a minute ago.

 

“The warehouse lot has a lot of space. We can divide it in half. I'll do my testing as far as I can from where we live and the fence.”

 

“That should actually work,”

 

Izuku says, looking at the blueprint Mei is working on. She hums, still sketching something out. 

 

“Won’t we have to fix it up? And do something for heating?”

 

Tooru asks. Izuku nods,


“We’ll need a little more money first.”

 

“How’re we going to get money? We aren’t old enough to work.”

 

Izuku looks over,

 

“Legally, yes. Illegally, no.”

 

“So what can we do?”

 

Ochako asks, leaning in with curiosity. 


“We can perform some odd jobs in the underground, I can start selling my analysis…”

 

He stops there, though it’s obvious to everyone else that there’s more he wants to say. 

 

“And?”

 

Denki asks. Izuku smiles,

 

“We could become vigilantes and take some compensation from the villain’s wallets. It’ll take some more training, of course, but I think we’ll be able to do it.”

 

The others are silent for a moment as they think. However, grins quickly spread across their faces as they nod. Izuku grins back,

 

“Great. Now everyone go back to sleep. That includes you, Mei.”

 

The girl groans, but she complies, tucking her blueprint away and burrowing back into her sleeping bag. Everyone else follows suit. Eventually, everyone is once again asleep, the sounds of snores and shuffles filling the silence.

 

--------

 

Izuku yawns as he wakes, stretching his arms above his head. Mei is already awake and seated at the table, her blueprints laid out in front of her. The garbage can has been moved so it sits next to her chair, now with a thick layer of pencil shavings at the top. 

 

“Good morning.”

 

He greets. She hums, not looking up,


“Good morning.”

 

Izuku climbs out of his sleeping bag. He grabs a change of clothes from his duffel bag, slipping into the bathroom to change. When he emerges, he heads to the kitchen, starting a pot of coffee.

 

The others wake up slowly. A few of the others change, either in the bathroom or the spare room. Hitoshi is the last to wake up. Izuku has a full pot of coffee waiting for him when he finally climbs out of his sleeping bag. The boy doesn’t even care to take out a mug, simply chugging some of the coffee from the pot. Izuku hands him a plate of toast and he heads to the table. He sits as far from Mei as possible, so as not to get anything on her work. He eats his toast slowly, but the coffee is gone within a few minutes.

 

“What are we doing today?”

 

Yuuga asks. He’s leaning against one of the kitchen counters, a bowl of cereal in his hands. 

 

“More physical training. I want to get the first group out by the end of the month.”

 

“First group?”

 

Yuuga has a slight tilt to his head as he raises a spoon of cereal to his mouth. Izuku nods,

 

“I want to split everyone into groups, or teams since I don’t think having all of us out at once would be a good idea. I’m gonna work on the groups and schedule before and after training today.”

 

Yuuga nods. He drinks the last of the milk from his bowl and rinses it in the sink, leaving it in the basin.

 

“When are we heading down today?”

 

He asks. Izuku hums,

 

“In a few hours. I want to give everyone some time to wake up and get some work done.”

 

Yuuga nods,


Excuse-moi.

 

He says, slipping past Izuku in the living room. He grabs his workbook off the shelf, settling down on his sleeping bag. Izuku follows suit, grabbing his notebook out of his duffel bag.

 

--------

 

Mina is walking through the Red Light district, decked out in her school uniform. She was trying to tamp down her proud smile. She had tricked her dad into thinking he had dropped her off at school and had tricked her school into thinking that her mom had called her out sick. Now, she was free to join the others in their training for the day. 

 

She slows down when she hears sniffling coming from one of the alleys ahead of her. She steps carefully, trying not to make any noise. When she reaches the mouth of the alley she leans her head inside. She doesn’t see anything. She takes a step forward into the alley. Suddenly, the noise stops. Growing ever more concerned, Mina continues to creep forward. She looks around the alley, looking for whoever had been crying. She’s just about to look between the last dumpster and the wall at the end of the alley when a boy who looks to be her age jumps up, a broken bottle held in front of him for a weapon. 

 

Mina steps back, raising her hands in a gesture of peace. The boy has stark black hair, one puffy red eye, one black eye, and other bruises and scrapes littering the skin Mina can see. His clothes are dirty and there’s blood on his shoes.

 

“What do you want?”

 

He asks. His voice is shaky.

 

“I just wanted to make sure you were okay.”

 

She says, trying to keep her voice sure. His eyes narrow.

 

“Liar.”

 

Mina shakes her head slowly.

 

“Why would I lie about that?”

 

His eyebrows furrow.

 

“I don’t know.”

 

The arm holding the broken bottle lowers a little. 

 

“I can help you if you want.”

 

Mina says. The suspicion immediately comes back to the boy’s features and he raises the bottle back up.

 

“Why?”

 

“What?”

 

“Why do you want to help me?”

 

Mina shrugs,

 

“Because you look like you need help.”

 

This obviously isn’t a good enough answer for the boy, as he glares at her.

 

“Plus,”

 

Mina tacks on, trying to make it seem natural.

 

“Someone helped me a while ago, I feel like I owe it to him to pay it forward.”

 

The suspicion in his expression doesn’t let up,

 

“That can’t be the only reason.”

 

He says. Mina takes a moment to think. On one hand, if she asks him to help them take over the government he might freak out and attack her. On the other hand, she’s pretty sure he’s been screwed over by the HPSC in some way in the past based on his appearance. 

 

“I’m part of a group of other kids our age. We’re training to take over the government in the coming years. I can get you a place to live, food, water, all of that. In exchange, you help us with our goal.”

 

His eyes widen in surprise. He lowers the bottle halfway.

 

“What do you want it to look like?”

He asks. Mina smiles,

 

“We want to fix, or at least start fixing, quirk discrimination. We want to make sure that those who work as heroes aren’t able to abuse their power. We want to help those in poor living conditions, too. Oftentimes villains are just people trying to survive, y’know?”

 

The last one is what really seems to get the boy’s attention. He stiffens up a bit at first, but then he relaxes, though he doesn’t drop the bottle.

 

“Fine. I’m Hanta.”

 

Mina smiles,


“Nice to meet you! I’m Mina.”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I went to my aunt's last night for a fire and fireworks. They live in a new neighbourhood where a lot of other kids live, which is nice because they have two sons. There aren't many fences up yet, so the kids ran back and forth between yards with different play structures until the fireworks started.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 55: Welcome To The Group

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

Mina and Hanta walk side-by-side down the street. When they reach the doors of the apartment building, Mina holds one of them open for the boy. Mr.Sukēto is sitting at his desk, his feet propped up on the tabletop. 


“Another kid?”

He asks. Mina smiles,


“Yes, sir.”

 

Mr.Sukēto sighs.


“I already raised the rent, so fine.”

 

Mina nods, smiling,


“Thank you, sir.”

 

She turns to Hanta, waving for him to follow her to the stairs. She skips down the hall to the apartment door, knocking a few times before stepping back to stand beside Hanta. Izuku opens the door, smiling when he sees Mina.


“Hey! Who’s this?”

 

He asks, glancing at Hanta. Mina grins,

 

“This is Hanta! I found him in an alley.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Welcome, Hanta.”

 

He steps out of the way of the door, letting the others come in as he heads to the linen closet. He comes back with the med kit and a sleeping bag. He hands the white sleeping bag to Hanta, gesturing for him to find a place to roll it out. Izuku sets the med kit down next to the boy,

 

“I’ll do it myself.”

 

He says. Izuku nods, sitting down on his own bag a few feet away. Hanta starts dressing the scrapes and bruises littering his skin. When he’s done, Izuku turns to face him.

 

“Did Mina tell you about our goal?”

 

He asks. 

 

“You mean the whole government take-over thing?”

 

He asks. Izuku nods,


“Then yeah.”

 

Izuku smiles,

 

“Good. We’re heading down to the basement soon for training if you want to come. I’m working on teams for patrols if that’s something you want to participate in.”

 

“Patrols?”

 

Mina asks, looking over. Izuku nods and Dark Shadow hovers over, grinnnig.

“We’re gonna be vigilantes! Izuku says it’ll help raise public favour.”

 

Mina smiles,


“Think I can join in? My parents go to bed early most nights, so it should be pretty easy for me to sneak away.”

 

Izuku nods, pulling out a notebook from god knows where. 

 

“I can do that, yeah.”

 

Hanta leans to the side to look at whatever Izuku is writing. 


“I’ll join you for training, sure.”

 

Izuku hums. 


“Is there anything else I should know?”

 

Hanta asks.

 

“About the group or something?”

 

Izuku tilts his head as he thinks. Before he can answer, Denki beats him to it. 

 

“Sometimes Eraserhead stops by and watches us from the rooftops. He’s tried to follow us out of the apartment a few times. So far we’re pretty sure he’s not looking to hurt us but we’ll see.”

 

Hanta blinks,

“I think I’ve heard that name before. Is he a hero?”

Izuku nods,

 

“He’s an underground hero. He’s ranked number one in the unofficial underground hero rankings.”

 

Hanta leans back on his hands.

 

“Any idea why he’s watching you?”

 

“We’re pretty sure he’s just concerned about the fact that there are so many of us without adult supervision.”

 

“There aren’t any adults involved?”

Hanta asks. Izuku makes a so-so motion.


“I mean, sometimes we get help moving furniture into the apartment, but other than that adults haven’t been involved.”

 

Hanta nods. They settle into silence as Izuku scribbles away in his notebook. Mina collects the med kit and puts it away in the linen closet. When Izuku is done writing, he tucks his notebook away and stands, waving for everyone to do the same.


“We can head down to the basement, now.”

 

Some of them cheer, others groan, but they all line up at the door. Izuku leads them down the hall to the stairs. Hanta is the last in line, so he closes the door behind them. When they reach the entrance to the basement Izuku turns on the lights. They flicker for a moment before turning on. The stairs creak as they make their way down. They split off into their respective areas. Hanta stays near Izuku, not knowing where to go. 

 

“Can you tell me a bit about your quirk? I can come up with some training for it then.”

 

Hanta nods slowly. He holds up one of his elbows.

 

“My elbows act as tape dispensers. The tape is pretty strong, I can hang from it no problem.”

 

Izuku nods. He’s already jotting down in his notebook.

“That’s so cool! You’d be great at ambush moves and diffusing situations with minimal casualties.”

 

Hanta listens intently as Izuku rambles on about his quirk. Eventually, Izuku takes a deep breath, turning his notebook so Hanta can properly read some of his notes.


“We can set you up in the corner, there. I want to start on your physical training since your quirk is where I want it to be right now.”

 

Hanta nods, and Izuku leads him down to the small rack of weights they’d managed to collect. 

 

Izuku spends the time in the basement with Hanta, talking him through some exercises and taking part in a few of his own. Mei also stays by the weight rack, absently lifting with one arm at a time while she uses the other to scribble on blueprints set in front of her.


After a few hours, they line up at the bottom of the stairs. When they get back up to the apartment Izuku hands out cups of water, which are chugged quickly. 

 

“Welcome to the group, Hanta.”

 

Hitoshi says as he puts his cup down on the counter. Hanta nods, 

 

“Happy to be here.”

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I went to a book sale my library held over the weekend and I bought three hardcover books for six dollars, which is an amazing deal for Canada. Normally that would cost around one hundred dollars because Canada likes to charge as much as they can for books.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 56: Handmade Suits And The First Night Of Vigilantism

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

The next few weeks are spent training in the basement, with their quirks and various weapons, fixing some of the warehouses that are in better condition, and gathering whatever materials they can for Mei so she can build suits and weapons. Tsu and Mina come and go as they can. Tsu comes the least often, but she still manages to keep up with the rest of them in terms of her strength and quirk progress. 

 

Finally, it comes to the night they’d all been waiting for, the night the first group is scheduled to do their first patrol. The first group consists of Izuku, Shouto, Tooru, and Hitoshi. Mei presents them with their finished suits about an hour before they leave. All of the suits are relatively the same when it comes to appearance. Pure black, with pouches attached to the belt. The only differences are the sheathes and their masks. Each of them had picked different weapons and different places for the sheathes to sit. 

 

The masks will be what set them apart and make them individually recognizable to the public. Though helmets may be a better word. They were each the same shape, similar to a motorcycle helmet, but they each had different coloured accents along the seams and surrounding the visor. 

 

Izuku’s are green, of course, Shouto’s are a soft pink, Tooru’s are silver and shiny and blend into the helmet in the right lighting. Finally, Hitoshi’s are a deep purple, just a little darker than his hair. He had also asked for a small cat head to be hidden in the corner of the mask, something Mei had done happily. 

 

They each take turns changing in either the bathroom or the extra room. When they emerge, Mei squeals, looking them over and adjusting some of the pouches and sheathes. 

 

“Does everything fit right?”

 

She asks, fluttering around them. They all nod, admiring themselves in their reflections in the others’ visors. 

 

“They fit perfectly!”

 

Izuku praises. Mei smiles, nodding to herself. Her eyes zoom in and out as she looks them over.

 

“Good. And the weapons work properly?”

 

Izuku nods. He reaches down, grabbing something off his belt. He flicks his wrist, flipping a switch in the process, and three throwing knives emerge from the cylinder they had been part of. He grabs one knife from the group, testing it in his grip. The other two stay firmly together. 

 

Hitoshi takes his whip off his belt, flicking it open. He isn’t very proficient with it yet, having only been training with it for a few weeks. Though he was good enough to be able to perform a few basic moves that would help them in fights, Izuku wasn’t letting him aim lower than the ground until he had mastered it. He was also training with a proto-type of Eraserhead’s capture weapon Mei was working on, which was slowing him down a bit. 

 

Tooru shows off her serrated dagger. She presses a button and the blade becomes tipped with a dull green liquid. A drop falls onto the floor.

 

Finally, Shouto removes one of the guns sitting on his belt from its sheath. Extra darts are kept in the different pouches around his belt, each colour coded. There are sedatives, paralytics, and one that was kept separate from the others, with a different texture at the clasp to ensure Shouto knew which one it was at a touch.


Of course, they all also have simple staffs, but the weapons they hold now are the ones they chose to train in and plan on making their signatures. 

 

“I think we’re ready. Hopefully, there won’t be too much going on tonight…”

 

Izuku says, putting the knives back together and reattaching them to his belt. Hitoshi leans over to look at him, 

 

“Don’t jinx it! Now we’re gonna stumble upon a massive drug ring backed by the entirety of the villain underground and have to take it down all on our own.”

 

Izuku rolls his eyes,


“No, we’re not. That won’t happen until our second week at least.”

 

Hitoshi scoffs, stepping back into his place in their small line. 

 

“You’ll see.”

 

He mutters. Mei hums before darting away, grabbing a walkie-talkie from the bag by her sleeping bag.

“Just gotta make sure the masks are working properly before ya go. You remember which buttons do which, right?”

 

They all nod. Izuku raises a hand to the side of his head, where three buttons run along the side of his mask. They’re each a different texture. The first is smooth and glossy, the second is bumpy, like braille, and the third is fuzzy, which feels odd beneath his glove. 

 

“The smooth one is for muting or unmuting our masks.”

 

He says. Tooru nods animatedly, 


“For if we want to keep our thoughts for ourselves instead of letting the villains hear.”

 

“Which is mostly for Izuku.”

 

Hitoshi tacks on. Izuku glares, though it’s not like the other boy can see it. His muttering habit, which he had worked so hard to curb, was starting to come back, no matter how much he wished it wouldn’t. 

 

“The bumpy one lets us talk to one another. It twists a bit for if we want to omit someone from the call, and will only pick up on masks that are on or the walkie-talkie you’re holding.”

Shouto says, touching said button as he talks. Mei nods, gesturing for Hitoshi to continue with the last one.

“And the fuzzy one sends out an emergency signal to all of the masks and the devices you have running on the same channel.”

 

Mei nods as she fiddles with some of the settings of the walkie-talkie she holds.

 

“Oh, and there’s another emergency alert button on our belts.”

 

Izuku adds. Mei hums,

“Now, one last test. Izuku, can you try calling the walkie please?”

 

Izuku nods, pressing the bumpy button. A selection screen appears in the corner of his visor. He turns the button, which also works as a knob, bypassing the “everyone” “Masks” and individual choices until he reaches the one for the walkie-talkie. The screen doesn’t have the best quality, since they had found most of the components in the trash, but it worked. A little red light replaced the selection screen and his voice started filtering through the walkie-talkie instead of his mask.


Mei adjusts the device a bit so his voice comes through a little clearer. 

 

“Good. Alright, if my babies break bring home the pieces so I can fix it.”

 

The four nod, heading for a window they had opened earlier. The ledge drops off onto a fire escape platform below. Izuku drops first, landing with a dull thud. The others follow behind him. Hitoshi barely touches the ledge when he jumps through, subsequently, he lands with the most noise.


“We’ll see you in the morning!”

 

Tooru calls, waving up at the window. Yuuga waves back as he closes the window behind them. When it clicks into place, he looks up behind them. He blinks and points up at one of the surrounding rooftops. Izuku already knows from the boy’s reaction what he’ll find when he turns around, but he does so anyway. Sure enough, Eraserhead crouches on one of the nearby rooftops.


“I guess we’re going to have a tail tonight.”

 

Hitoshi comments, stretching his hands above his head. Izuku hums,

 

“Will, maybe that means we’ll be a little safer. Ready to go?”

 

He asks. The others nod and they take off up the fire escape. Izuku runs ahead of the others, jumping from rooftop to rooftop. A few of them struggle a bit more with getting across than the others, namely Tooru, who stumbles and missteps every so often. Shouto sticks close by her, sending up small spires and slabs of ice to correct her before she falls. 

 

Just as the moon fully takes over from the sun, Izuku stumbles upon their first crime of the night. Two buff-looking men surround a smaller, lankier man lying at their feet. He cowers beneath them, looking up at them in fear. Izuku presses two of his buttons, waiting for the red light to appear in the corner of his visor before he speaks.


“Hitoshi, try to get one of the buff men under your control. Shouto, put an ice wall up in front of the victim, Tooru get your knife ready.”

 

The other three nod, doing as they're told. One of the men is reeling his arm back for a punch when Izuku jumps down, landing on his back.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I went to a picnic on Saturday, which was a lot of fun. When the others left, the birthday girl and I talked about some of the stories she was writing. On Sunday, I had my birthday party at an arcade place we rented out. I invited all of my friends and we had a lot of fun while some of the younger kids in my family ran around. Two of my cousins found out that other people who had been there before us didn't know the games were free once you paid and they found about four dollars by scrounging around in the different machines coin-return slots.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 57: The Second Group

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

The man yelps as Izuku digs his nails into his shoulders. A wall of ice appears in front of them, startling the second man just as he’s moving to help his friend. 

 

The man Izuku had attached himself to grabs hold of Izuku’s wrists, crushing them in his grip. Izuku gasps in pain. He rears his head back, slamming it into the back of the man’s head. The man lets him go as he stumbles forward. Izuku drops to the ground, watching as the man collapses to the ground. He looks behind him to see the second villain under Hitoshi’s control, and Shouto comforting the victim. Izuku takes two zip ties out of his pocket, binding the man’s ankles and wrists. Hitoshi carefully does the same, not wanting to startle the man out of his control. 

 

Shouto is still talking to the victim, who looks considerably calmer. Shouto offers to escort the victim back to his house, but he rejects him nervously.

 

“No, no. I’m homeless, kid. That’s part of the reason those guys were attacking me. They said I was sleeping in their territory.”

 

Izuku huffs, thankful that the man can’t hear him. Shouto nods,


“Alright. I’ve already contacted the police to collect the villains. I suggest leaving now to avoid them.”

 

The man nods, waving to them as he jogs away,

 

“Thank you!”

 

The three boys wave back, waiting for a moment before climbing back onto the rooftops and continuing on their way.

 

--------

 

The night goes well, overall. They each receive a few injuries, but that was to be expected. All three of them had seen Eraserhead a few times, but the man hadn’t interfered. 

 

When they get back to the apartment, everyone is asleep and the only light is that of the nightlight in the wall. The three creep inside silently, carefully sliding the window closed behind them. They take turns changing in the bathroom since the door of the extra room had recently developed a squeaky hinge.

 

Once they’re all changed into their pyjamas they climb into their sleeping bags, tucking themselves in. Beams of moonlight stream in through gaps in the blinds, mixing with the light from the nightlight. 





Izuku yawns as he wakes, stretching his arms above his head. The sun has yet to rise, but he can tell from the waning light that it will soon. He pulls himself up, stepping carefully over a few of the others on his way to the kitchen. He nearly trips over one of Mei’s screwdrivers, which she had left lying on the ground, but he manages to catch himself. 

 

He starts a pot of coffee and grabs some eggs from the fridge, cracking as many as well fit into a large pan. Over the course of about ten minutes, he has a large pile of eggs on a big plate on the counter. 

 

Sero rises first out of the others. He saunters into the kitchen, smiling at Izuku as he enters. He pours himself a cup of coffee and puts a portion of the eggs on a paper plate. He sets his plate on the counter and pulls himself up onto the counter, swinging his legs as he eats. 

 

“Tsu is part of tonight's group, right?”

 

He asks. Izuku nods, portioning out his own eggs. 

 

“Yeah, along with Eijirou, Mina, and Fumikage.”

 

Sero nods,

 

“Are you sure Fumi will be okay?”

 

He asks as Shouto enters the kitchen. Izuku hands the boy a plate and a mug of coffee before turning back to Sero.

 

“I think so. He’s been doing really well in training. Plus, their patrol route shouldn’t involve too many broken streetlights.”

 

Sero hums, shovelling eggs into his mouth. 

 

The others start filtering into the kitchen, grabbing their own plates and coffee before spreading out around the apartment. A few of them settle at the table, while others sit on their sleeping bags, and a few join Sero on the counter. Izuku is one of the ones who climbs onto the counter. He uses the vantage point to more easily refill the coffee pot, allowing Hitoshi to have three mugs before most of the others are done their first. 

 

Once everyone is done eating and all of their paper plates are in the trash they take turns changing out of their pyjamas. When they’re all ready, they each grab their duffel bags and line up at the front door. Yuuga, who ends up at the back of the line, turns off the lights and locks the door behind them. 

 

It’s too early for Mr.Sukēto to be at his desk, so they’re free to do as they please without being judged. They make their way down the street, heading for the warehouse lot. They each have some tools and materials that they had managed to scrounge up before in their duffel bags, and a few of them have thick gloves in case they have to return to Dagobah Beach. 

 

When they reach the lot they walk between the warehouses until they reach one close to the back of the lot. It’s the least run down of the buildings, likely because the construction workers hadn’t managed to go so far back before the project was shut down. 

 

There are a few places where it’s obvious a hole was patched or new screws were put in, but there were also areas where their patches blended in. 

 

“What’re we working on today?”

 

Mina asks, setting her bag down in one of the few patches of floor not covered in dust. Izuku looks up,

 

“The roof. The walls should be sturdy enough for us to climb on, plus Sero and Shouto’s quirks should help.”

 

The two mentioned boys look at each other and give each other a small nod. 

 

“We should focus on sturdiness, for now, instead of places of possible leaks.”

 

The others nod and set to work immediately. Fumikage grabs tools and materials in their claws and lifts Fumikage up to the roof. Shouto creates a few ice staircases and platforms, Sero pulls himself up to one of the few rafters intact enough to hold his weight. Ochako floats herself up, and Denki wanders off to find the battery they had attached to the lights they had installed. They were temporary, especially since they were only functional when Denki powered them, but they shed much-needed light in the shadowed crevices.

 

Mei paces the ground and the ice platforms, watching what they do with her quirk, catching small details and pointing out things they need to do. She calls these out using a megaphone, which she had built a few weeks prior. 

 

--------

 

They spend their morning hours working on the warehouse. By the time they pack up to head back to the apartment, the roof is nearly stable enough for them to trust it not to cave in without being held up by Shouto’s ice and Sero’s tape. 

 

When they get back to the apartment, they each find something to occupy themselves with. Shouto continues his carving of a red panda in the corner, Mina, Fumikage, and Denki gather at the table with their workbooks, and the others either settle in for naps or group up to start cooking in the kitchen. 

 

Tsu arrives around a half-hour later when fresh food is on the table and everyone is chatting back and forth. Izuku hands her a plate and guides her to the table, pulling out a chair for her before returning to his spot. She fits right in. Mina pulls her into their conversation, happy to see her again. The apartment becomes loud with conversations, laughter, and forks hitting paper plates.

 

Once everyone is done eating, the plates are thrown out and the forks are thrown in the sink to be washed later. Tsu, Fumikage, Eijirou, and Mina grab their suits from Mei and take turns changing in the bathroom and the spare room. 


Tsu’s details are a pale green-yellow, similar to a frog picture she had shown them a few weeks ago, Fumikage’s are black, which really just means that he doesn’t have any at all, Eijirou’s are crimson, giving a bit of a bloody look, and Mina’s are hot pink, enough so that the colour is easily differentiated from Shouto’s. 

 

“Ready?”

 

Izuku asks, catching the walkie-talkie Mei throws him as she lays out blueprints on the table. The four nod, heading for the window they had left cracked open.

 

“We’ll see you in the morning, then.”

 

Yuuga says, waving as they leave. They wave back, landing on the fire escape platform. Yuuga closes the window, watching for a moment as they run up the metal steps to the rooftop. 

 

“So, mon amis, who’s doing the dishes tonight?”

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I finished a massive culminating project in Geography and immediately got assigned another one in Food and Nutrition. We have to make our own cookbooks with personalized themes and extra pages (like ones on healthy eating and such). Our saving grace is that we don't have to print them out or put them in binders like previous years apparently did. We're also moving on to henna in Hairstyling Aesthetics, which is nice.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 58: Bloody Bandages

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Fumikage and Dark Shadow lead the group across the rooftops. Dark Shadow stays close to the group since they stick to the more well-lit paths. They had been running for around ten minutes and had yet to spot anything crime-wise. They had, however, spotted Eraserhead a few times. Izuku had told them that the man hadn’t interfered with his group, but that they should still be careful. He could be trying to have them arrested, after all. 

 

Fumikage’s attention is caught by a flash of light in the alley they’re jumping over. He jumps down onto a ledge a few feet below, waving for the others to do the same. They land on surrounding ledges, looking down at a drug deal happening in the alley below them. A man with large metal spikes spanning across his back stands across from another man. He doesn’t seem to have any defining mutations, at least not from where they can see. 

 

“Looks like a regular drug deal.”

 

Mina says. She’s leaning forward a little more than the others, watching the men below. Dark Shadow hovers by her just in case. 

 

“Ready?”

 

Tsu asks, crouching lower in preparation to jump. The others voice their confirmations and, with that, they jump off their perches. 

 

Mina shoots acid between the men, forcing them to back away from each other. Tsu lands on the back of the man without the spikes, sticking herself to him as he tries to rip her from her perch. Dark Shadow darts in front of the spiked man, smiling as they claw at his face while Fumikage sweeps at his feet. Eijirou swipes at the feet of the man Tsu had attached herself to, knocking him on his back. Tsu doesn’t quite get out of the way in time. She yelps as she’s crushed beneath the weight of the man. 

 

Eijirou gasps, moving to help her. He’s not strong enough to lift a full-grown man, however, and really just ends up struggling on the ground beside Tsu. Dark Shadow moves to help them, but that leaves Fumikage open to the spiked man, who slashes at him with a sharp arm. Fumikage leaps back just in time. His suit gets scratched, though it doesn’t tear. 

 

Mina, in a bit of a panic, shoots acid at the spiked man, not caring much for the Ph levels. It splatters on some of the spikes on the one man’s back, corroding them and burning through the fabric of his shirt. The man screams, scrambling backward as he claws at his back. The other man jumps up, pushing Eijirou aside as he tries to run for the mouth of the alley. Dark Shadow reaches out, grabbing hold of the back of the man’s hoodie. 

 

The man stumbles back, falling on top of the spiked man, who had rolled into his path. He screams as he’s minorly impaled in the back before rolling off of the spikes. He hits his head on the concrete, knocking himself unconscious. Mina rushes to him, grabbing bandages out of her belt. 

 

Eijirou offers a hand to Tsu, who takes it and pulls herself up carefully. 

 

“You okay?”

 

He asks, leaning over to take a look at her back. She nods, waving him off,

 

“I’m fine. Just some bruising, I think.”

 

Eijirou nods, heading up to join Mina and Fumikage by the spiked man. They tie him up, ignoring his outcries and applying cream to the minor burns on his back. Once both of the men are tied up, the four take a step back to admire their work. 

 

“Did anyone call the cops yet?”

 

Eijirou asks, leaning over the men to make sure the zip-ties are tight enough, but also not too tight. The others shake their heads and Tsu raises a hand to her helmet. 

 

“I’ll do that now.”

 

The others nod, backing away a bit and starting to make their way back to the rooftops while she calls in the drug deal.

 

Tsu says nothing more than the location of the villains and what they know of the one’s quirk before she hangs up the call and moves to follow the others up the fire escape. Before she can get very far, however, when she sees someone move in an alcove down the street. The space isn’t big enough to be called an alley, but it’s between two buildings, neither of which are lit up by lights in the apartments. 

 

The other three poke their heads over the edge of the roof, looking down at the girl with one leg lifted over the first step.

 

A red light comes on in the corner of Tsu’s screen and Mina’s voice fills her ears,

 

“Are ya coming?”

 

She asks, a slight tilt of her head visible from where Tsu stands.

 

“In a sec. I think I see someone in the alcove over there.”

 

She points to where she had seen the movement, only to be gratified by a brief flash of white that reminds her of the bandages on her belt.


“Want one of us to come down with you?”

 

Eijirou asks, his focus on the alcove. Tsu shakes her head,

 

“No, no. Just stay nearby.”

 

The other three nod and the red light blinks away. Tsu jumps over the two men easily, keeping her ears peeled for incoming sirens. As she creeps toward the alley, she makes sure to move her hands to somewhere where they’ll be visible. 

 

When she looks into the alcove, she sees a boy maybe her age, multiple arms connecting into two at his sides. There are bandages covering his mouth and neck, a few spots stained red or pink. Tsu raises a hand to the side of her mask, switching off the mute that had automatically turned itself on during the call. 

 

“Hello?”

 

She asks, drawing the attention of the boy. He looks up at her, fear mixed with curiosity showing in his eyes. 

 

“Do you want some help?”

 

She asks, gesturing to the bandages. The boy curls in on himself. Tsu crouches down at the mouth of the alcove, sticking to one side to leave room for him to walk past her if he so chooses. She raises her hands slowly up to her helmet, careful to broadcast her movements. She removes her helmet carefully, setting it down on the ground beside her. The boy unfurls, glancing between her and the helmet. 

 

“I can bring you somewhere safe, with food and a more-or-less comfortable place to sleep. Not a shelter, I promise.”

 

She tacks on the last bit when she sees the boy once again starting to pull away. He looks to be taking a deep breath before standing, looking down at her. She rises, too, picking up her helmet. The two stand at eye level for a moment. The boy looks her over, looking for something. He seems to find it as he nods, walking up to her side. Tsu smiles,

 

“Perfect.”

 

She pulls her helmet back on, adjusting it minutely before waving for teh boy to follow her. He does so, keeping an eye on their surroundings, though he doesn’t often look up. Once they’re in a nearby alley with access to a fire escape Tsu waves up at the rooftops. The other three peek over the edge of the roof, startling the other boy.


“Did you obtain another member of our team?”

 

Fumikage calls from the roof. Dark Shadow sits on his shoulder, watching from the shadows. 

 

Tsu shrugs,

 

“Maybe. Right now he just needs some help.”

 

The other three nod. 


“I’ll join you for the trip back.”

 

Eijirou offers. Tsu shakes her head,

 

“It’s fine. We’re not that far from the apartment, I’ll be fine. Keep going, I’ll catch up.”

 

The other three nod,


“Make sure to tell Izuku you're coming with a new friend!”

 

Mina calls as they run across to the next roof. Tsu nods, waving as the other three jump away. She turns back to the new boy, who still has an expression of surprise on his face.


“Sorry about that.”

 

She says, leading him back out of the alley, 

 

“I don’t live in the apartment, in case you were wondering. My parents and siblings still need me at home. Two of the others do,  though, along with…”

 

She pauses for a moment as she does some counting in her head,

 

“Nine others. I think there are eleven living there total, since Mina and I come and go. They’re in the process of moving into a bigger space, though, so you shouldn’t be in the apartment for too long.”

 

The boy nods along, listening intently as they walk. 

 

“Just give me a sec to call in the fact that I’m bringing you in.”

 

The boy nods, averting his gaze from her as she raises a hand to the buttons on the side of her helmet.


“Tsu calling in.”

 

She says. Not even a moment passes before she hears the crackling of the walkie-talkie being turned on.

“This is Izuku. What’s up?”

 

“I’m bringing in a possible new recruit. Bandages cover the lower half of his face and his neck. Some stains on the bandages make it look like he has some possibly severe mouth injuries.”

 

Izuku hums,

 

“Got it. We’ll have medical supplies and a sleeping bag waiting when you arrive. ETA?”

 

Tsu tilts her head,


“Five, maybe ten minutes.”


Tsu can hear the sound of pen hitting paper,

 

“Alright.”

 

Izuku says, 

 

“See you then.”

 

With that, the call is cut off. Tsu turns off the mute on her helmet and looks at the boy still walking by her side,

 

“They’ll have medical supplies and a sleeping bag waiting for you when you get there. Food, as well.”

 

The boy nods,

 

“Thank you.”

 

He says, though saying the words seems to cause him pain. New stains of blood bloom across his bandages,

 

“No need to thank me. If you want to, you can think of it as me repaying a favour. Hitoshi saved me, and now I’m saving you. Hitoshi is the one with the purple troll hair, just so you know. He’ll probably be asleep on his sleeping  bag.”

 

The boy nods and they continue their short walk in silence. Tsu leads him up the fire escape to the window their team had used to leave earlier in the night. Yuuga is already waiting for them on the other side. He lifts the window, stepping aside to let Tsu inside and offering a hand to the new boy. He takes it, carefully climbing inside over the windowsill. As promised, Izuku has a med kit in hand and a new sleeping bag lies at the end of the line closest to the hallway.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
This week is Spirit Week for my school and tomorrow is formal day. Which means that I get to finally wear one of the many different formal dresses in my collection that I have yet to find an event for. I also finished one of my big assignments today, which means that I can focus more on the one for Geography. I have to design an entire eco-friendly city, including eco-friendly buildings, stores, energy supplies, ways to get rid of waste, and much more. We'll also be receiving a "curve ball" every day, just to keep us coming to school this week since next week we don't have to show up unless we're failing a class and have to recover a credit.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 59: Maybe This Could Be Profitable

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

“What’s your name?”

 

Izuku asks as soon as he lays eyes on the new boy.

 

“Um, Shouji.”

 

He replies, wincing slightly. Izuku nods,

 

“Sorry, you don’t have to talk if you don’t want to. I’m Izuku.  I can treat your wounds in the bathroom if you’d prefer.”

 

Shouji nods and follows Izuku down the hall, glancing back at Tsu before the door closes. Tsu stands there a moment longer before turning back to the window. 

 

“I should catch back up with the others. I’ll see you again in the morning.”

 

Those awake, which is all of them, wave as she slips through the window. Yuuga once again closes the window behind her, suppressing a yawn as he turns back around. 

 

“Would someone please éteindre les lumières?

 

--------

 

Shouji shifts as Izuku unwraps his bandages. He twists his eyes shut in preparation for the inevitable gasps and insults when Izuku sees his face. When Izuku doesn’t say anything, and instead starts disinfecting his wounds, Shouji blinks his eyes open. 


“Aren’t you going to say anything?”

 

He tries to move his mouth as little as possible as he talks, which warps his words a bit. Izuku still seems to understand, however, as he tilts his head slightly, pink cotton ball held in his hand, hovering above Shouji’s face.

 

“About what? If you mean your wounds, then whoever did this is a monster. If you mean your face, then I don’t care.”

 

Shouji blinks,

“What?”

 

Izuku shrugs,

 

“I don’t care. Why should what you look like define anything about what I think of you.”

 

Shouji goes silent as Izuku throws away his third cotton ball and grabs a roll of bandages from the med kit. Izuku continues his work in silence. Once he’s done, he snips off the bandages' connection to the rest of the roll with scissors. He tapes down the end with a piece of scotch tape and stands to inspect his work.

“I think you’re good to go. Do you want some water?”

 

Shouji shakes his head and Izuku nods,

 

“Alright. I’ll show you which sleeping bag is yours. We’ll be moving into a warehouse soon, so the tight spacing won’t last too much longer.”

 

Shouji nods and follows Izuku back into the living room. They stop at the hall closet so Izuku can put the medkit away. Izuku gestures to the empty sleeping bag closest to the hall,

 

“That one is yours. You can pick out a duffel bag in the morning. That one,”

 

He gestures to the only other empty sleeping bag,


“Is mine, if you need anything.”

 

Shouji nods. Izuku nods back and takes a few more steps before settling into his sleeping bag. For a moment, the only sound is rustling until that, too, settles. Shouji lies in silence, staring up at the ceiling until his eyelids grow heavy and start to droop. He turns around in his sleeping bag, facing away from the dim light of the nightlight as he drifts off to sleep.

 

--------

 

Tsu catches up to the rest of her group just as they drop in on a mugging. She hangs back for a moment as they quickly take care of the villain, clearly having already come up with a plan. She shoots out her tongue to trip up the villain as he tries to run away, earning a quick thumbs up from Fumikage as Dark Shadow wraps around the villain. 

 

The takedown is fast from there. Tsu supplies a zip-tie from her pouch for the villain while Mina consoles the victim. They offer to walk the victim home and, when she takes them up on the offer, flank her on her way home. She doesn’t talk much other than to supply directions. When they reach her house, she smiles down at them, digging around in her purse before pulling out a 5000 yen note and handing it to Eijirou. 

 

“Oh, no, we can’t accept this!”

 

Eijirou says, trying to hand the bill back to her. She shakes her head, wrapping his fingers around the bill,

 

“I insist. You were a massive help, and I would have lost way more if you hadn’t stepped in. Really.”

 

It’s clear she won’t take no for an answer, so the four bow in thanks. She chuckles, waving them off,

 

“Thank you again, ma’am.”

 

Fumikage says, bowing once again. She waves him off,

 

“Really, it’s fine. Now go, I’m sure there are more people who could use your help.”

 

They nod, running back the way they had come to return to their patrol route. 

 

“So, think anyone else will pay us?”

 

Mina asks,


“I mean, it would be pretty useful if we could make a bit of money from this as well as helping the plan along, right?”

 

She says, looking at the others to gauge their reactions. Eijirou shrugs,


“It would be neat, but we can’t bet on making any more than what might help with some minor repairs on the warehouse, if that. We’re really just trying to earn public favour.”

 

Mina nods and they continue on in silence, aligning with their patrol route and speeding up, trying to make up for some of the time they had lost walking the woman home. 

 

--------

 

Tsu waves at Yuuga as they run up the fire escape to the window. The boy waves back, a mug of coffee in his hand as he pushes the window open. It takes him a moment to open the window with one hand. Tsu hops through first, offering her hand to the others as they make their way to the windowsill. They each have a few bruises, scrapes, and cuts. The worst of their injuries is a deep cut Mina had received on her hand from a villain’s knife. 

 

Izuku already has the medkit out on the table. Mina’s wound is tended to first. She receives stitches, which are wrapped in bandages to protect them. The others more-or-less tend to their wounds themselves, since they’re rather minor. 

 

Once they’re all bandaged and changed out of their suits Tsu, Eijirou, Fumikage, and Mina settle into their sleeping bags to get the sleep they had missed out on the night before. The others gather their things and get ready to head out to the warehouses. Izuku grabs a duffel bag from the hall closet for Shouji. It’s a blue-grey colour. 

 

“Do you want to help us with some construction work? You’re free to stay here and continue to rest if you want to.”

 

Izuku says. Shouji stands, throwing his duffel bag across his body. Izuku nods,

 

“Helping with construction it is.”

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I am officially done with school! Normally I would be going in this week but it's dedicated to credit recovery, meaning you only have to go in if you're failing a class and in danger of losing a credit. This means I'll have more time to write, since it's summer break, and my fics not currently on schedules should hopefully update more frequently.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 60: Welcome To The Team

Chapter Text

 

Shouji carries a stack of wood over to Yuuga and Sero. The two thank him. Yuuga helps Sero rig his tape so that the wood can be lifted up to the group in the rafters. Hitoshi waves down when they get it, and the sound of hammering fills the room. Izuku oversees the work, helping where he can. Mostly, though, he makes sure they stay on task and tends to any wounds they receive.

 

When it’s time to eat lunch, they gather in the center of the warehouse. Izuku hands out food he had packed from the apartment kitchen. They gather in a circle, talking and, in some cases (read, Hitoshi) napping. Mei tinkers with something in her lap while she eats. Somehow, despite multitasking, she finishes her food before the others.

 

“I wanna work on my lab-house. That okay?”

 

She asks, looking over at Izuku. He looks up, swallowing his bite of sandwich. 

 

“Sure. Want any help?”

 

Mei shakes her head,

 

“No, my babies will be enough help.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Alright. I’ll come get you when we leave.”

 

Mei nods. She stands, stretching briefly before gathering her things and heading out the door. The others take their time finishing their food before getting back to work. Hitoshi sleeps a little longer, set up in the corner with most of their bags. When he finally gets up, he grabs a sheet of metal from the pile near him and sets to work helping to reinforce the walls. 

 

--------

 

Izuku smiles as he looks around at the now-finished warehouse. The walls were a little patchy, covered in different types of metal and the roof was much the same but it was sturdy. The walls wouldn’t collapse unless faced with heavy pressure, there were no longer any leaks in the roof, and the floor was a nice hardwood.

 

“Great job, everyone!”

 

Izuku praises, turning to look at the group gathered behind him. Both Mina and Tsu were there, having joined the group a couple of hours after they started. 

 

“We’ll start putting in the appliances tomorrow, and we can start moving in once everything is ready and working.”

 

Hitoshi raises his hand, though he doesn’t wait to be called on before talking, 

 

“Should we really be installing that stuff ourselves?”

 

He asks. Izuku smiles,


“Of course not! That’s why I have a surprise in store. Now,”

 

He claps, grabbing the attention of those whose eyes had started to wander.

 

“Let’s get back to the apartment. Shouto, would you mind leading the group back? I have to go grab Mei.”

 

The aforementioned boy nods. The group parts to let him take his spot at the front. They each grab their duffel bags from the pile, configuring themselves into a straight line. Izuku watches them go for a moment before grabbing his own bag. He double-checks to make sure they took everything before leaving the warehouse. He picks up an old padlock off the ground where it had been left, fitting it over the handles of the large front doors. He pulls on it twice to make sure it’s secure before heading down the slightly overgrown path to the warehouse Mei had claimed for her lab. 

 

He hums to himself as he walks down the path. As he gets closer, his eyes widen. Mei had gone off before to work on the warehouse she had picked out, but he hadn’t really seen the progress until then. The walls, at first, looked rather normal but by the way, they glinted in the fading light, he can tell they were heavily reinforced. The rooftop is covered in what look like solar panels, though where Mei got them from he doesn’t know. 

 

Izuku stops in front of the doors. He doesn’t get a chance to knock before the doors are sliding open, revealing a grinning Mei on the other side.

 

“Whadaya think?”

 

She asks, holding out her arms at her side. Izuku blinks as a matching grin spreads across his face.

 

“It’s amazing! Where’d you get all this stuff?”

 

He asks, looking around at all of the different materials and tools littering the large room. Mei shrugs,


“Places. A little stealing here and there.”

 

Izuku chuckles,


“Alright, so long as it wasn’t from anyone on our nice list.”

 

Mei nods,


“Nope!”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Good. Ready to go?”

 

She nods, grabbing her duffel bag from beside one of the work tables by the door. She hops along beside Izuku out of the warehouse, pausing to close the door. A series of clicks and small bangs sound as the doors slide together. Mei waits until the noises stop to rejoin Izuku, following him down the path the others had walked a few minutes ago. 

 

Izuku and Mei walk quietly back to the apartment. Mei has a small device in her hands. Her pupils dilate and constrict as she fiddles with it. Izuku leaves her to her work, happy to just be able to sort through his thoughts. 

 

Mr.Sukēto isn’t at his desk when they walk in, meaning they’re free to go up the staircase without being stared at and judged. 

 

When they reach the apartment door, Izuku holds it open for Mei, allowing her to keep walking unimpeded. She settles at the table, laying some of her tools out in front of her as she continues to work. Izuku locks the door, putting his duffel bag down in the corner where most of the others had thrown their bags, too. 

 

Most of the others are tucked into their sleeping bags, though Shoji still sits, awake on top of his. 

 

“Want some help changing your bandages?”

 

Izuku asks, keeping his voice low. Shouji nods, standing to follow Izuku down the hall to the bathroom. 

 

--------

 

Izuku yawns as he wakes up the next morning. The sun is streaming in on his face, though that’s not what had woken him. Banging sounds come from the kitchen. Izuku sits up, slowly rising from his sleeping bag. He creeps into the kitchen, peering in on Shouji cracking eggs into a pan. Toast pops from the toaster, which he grabs and throws onto a plate using one of his many arms without looking up.

 

Izuku chooses not to interrupt, leaving the boy to his cooking. He turns back to the sea of sleeping bags, watching as the others start to wake up, too. He stops them from intruding on the kitchen, instead occupying them with their workbooks or other activities. Shouto, of course, sits down in a corner with his carving, happy to continue growing his collection.

 

They don’t have to wait long for Shouji to be done. After a few minutes, he steps out of the kitchen, waving for them to stand. He hands each of them a plate. They thank him in abundance. They each take their share. Shouji takes his portion last, joining them at the table as they eat.

 

Tsu and Mina leave soon after they finish eating. Sero offers to escort Tsu back home since Mina is being picked up. Tsu agrees, and the three leave the apartment, waving goodbye to the others. 

 

Izuku settles at the table, his notebook in front of him. He turns to Shouji, who was sitting across from him, a serious expression on his face.


“Okay. Did Tsu tell you anything about the biggest reason our group formed?”

 

He asks. Shouji shakes his head, a confused look in his eyes. Izuku nods, flipping through his notebook. 

 

“Alright, so-”

 

Dark Shadow appears between them, interrupting Izuku. 

 

“Oooh, ooh, can I do it?”

 

They ask. Izuku smiles,

 

“Yeah, sure. Just try not to scare him too much, okay?”

 

Dark Shadow nods enthusiastically and Izuku stands, leaving his book behind in case Dark Shadow wants to use it. He wanders off to Shouto’s corner, sitting down next to the boy as he carves and watching as the polar bear comes to shape. 

 

“Okay, okay.”


Dark Shadow says excitedly, happy to finally be able to give the welcoming speech.

 

“So, it started out as just Izuku. He ran away from home ‘cause he realized the corruption of the current system and wanted to be able to do something about it. And probably other things. He found Hitoshi first, and the group sorta grew from there. Now we’re working toward taking over the government to prevent quirk discrimination, which the HPSC encourages, and ensure heroes can’t abuse their power.”

 

Dark Shadow finishes his speech, a large grin on his face. 

 

“So, think you wanna stay?”

 

Shouji nods slowly. 

 

“You’re sure the HPSC encourages quirk discrimination?”

 

Dark Shadow nods,


“Yeah. It keeps the supply of villains constant.”

 

Shouji hums,


“Alright, I’ll join you.”

 

Dark Shadow’s grin gets wider as they wrap themselves around Shouji.

 

“Yeah! New team member!”

 

Chapter 61: Nothing We Could Do

Chapter Text

Izuku walks in front of Yuuga, Hanta, and Denki. They follow him down the sidewalk, their duffel bags occasionally banging against their sides. 

 

“Where are we going again?”

 

Denki asks, looking around them. He doesn’t recognize the street and buildings are starting to become more dilapidated the farther they go. 

 

Izuku turns around to face them, which means he has to walk backwards,

 

“We’re going to meet with the man who’s hopefully going to get the electricity and water running in our warehouse lot.”

 

Yuuga tilts his head,

 

“Oh? Would we not have to pay him? I did not think we had such funds.”

 

Izuku shakes his head,

 

“We don’t! But he owes me a favour or two.”

 

Hanta huffs,

 

“How does a grown-ass man, who I’m assuming is an underground broker, owe you favours? I’d think you’d be the one who owes him.”

 

Izuku grins. It’s sharp and predatory, sending shivers down the spines of the other boys. 

 

“I did a few tasks for him after his goons fell through. I also saved his life once, so…”

 

Denki chokes on air,

 

“What?!”

 

Izuku shrugs,


“I stitched him up after he was stabbed during a deal. He would've died if I wasn’t there, so now he owes me big time.”

 

Yuuga shakes his head,

 

“I often wonder how long you have been part of the villain underground, but then I remember I do not want to know.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“That’s a good choice.”

 

He spins back around and they continue their walk in silence.

 

--------

 

After about another half-hour of walking they reach a building that looks like it’s in slightly better condition than the rest. Izuku walks up to the doors and raises his hand. He knocks curtly. After a moment, a man with short gray hair wearing a gaudy purple suit opens the door.

 

“Izuku? What’re you doing here?”

 

Izuku smiles sweetly,


“I’m here to talk about getting some utilities turned on on a warehouse plot I’m trying to move my team onto.”

 

The man nods and steps aside to let them in.


“Alright, come on in.”

 

Yuuga, Denki, and Hanta stay close to Izuku as they enter the building. The man closes the door behind them and gestures for them to sit down on one of the couches available in the room.


“Don’t bother taking off your shoes. I don’t have any slippers. I don’t think those would be safe in here anyway.”

 

The four boys do as they’re asked and settle next to each other on the largest couch. The man settles on the armchair across from them, crossing his legs. 

 

“Do you know which company built the lot?”

 

Izuku shakes his head,

 

“No. But I know which one was hired to tear it down and the address.”

 

The man nods,

“Alright, and you want all of them hooked up?”

 

Izuku nods,


“Please.”

 

The man’s grin becomes sharper,

 

“This will be your big favour. You okay with cashing it in for a few utilities?”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Yes.”

 

“Good. Then write down that information for me and I’ll get to work.”

 

Izuku starts digging through his duffel bag. He pulls out his notebook and a  pen. He jots something down, ripes out a piece of paper, and hands it to the man.

 

“Thank you.”

 

Izuku says. He gets to his feet and bows before waving for the other two to stand.

 

“Hold on.”

 

The man says, holding up a hand. 

 

“You never introduced me to your friends.”

 

Izuku sighs,

 

“Right. Giran, meet Yuuga, Hanta, and Denki.”

 

The three boys bow shallowly, looking anywhere but at Giran. Giran smiles,

 

“A pleasure to meet you. I hope to do business again in the future.”

 

He directs the last sentence at Izuku. The boy nods and waves for his friends to follow. Giran goes in the other direction, deeper into the house. 

 

“He was kinda creepy.”

 

Denki remarks. Izuku shrugs,

 

“I guess, but he’ll be able to get us what we asked for.”

 

“How?”

 

Hanta asks, 

 

“Don’t brokers normally deal in weapons, information, and drugs?”

 

Izuku nods,


“Yeah. But Giran is one of the top brokers. He deals with the most dangerous villains and regular civilians, so he has access to more commodities.”

 

Yuuga hums, 

 

“Now what do we do?”

 

He asks. Izuku turns around, once again walking backwards.

 

“Now we get ready for tonight's patrol and get some paint. I want to start painting the rooms of the warehouse. Everyone will be able to pick a colour for their room, but there are only twelve so a few people will have to room together.”

 

Yuuga brightens at the prospect of being able to pick the colour of his room's walls.

 

“Oh, I’ll also have to find some appliances. We might be able to get some from Dagobah like the fridge, but I don’t know how many we’ll find that are trustworthy…”

 

Denki raises his hand,

 

“We could find the ones in the best condition and have Mei fix them up.”

Izuku nods,

 

“Maybe. But, we’ll have to make sure she doesn’t make them into weapons or something.”

 

The other three nod. They spend the rest of the walk back to the apartment brainstorming ways to obtain working appliances and other things they’ll need for the warehouse.

 

--------

 

The next few weeks are spent training, acquiring appliances, and watching the workers Giran has installing and replacing the necessary piping and such for their water and electricity. 

 

They make it through their first shift cycle as well as a little into their next by the time their electricity and water are turned on. Mina, Tsu, Eijirou, and Fumikage were getting ready for their second shift.

 

“What’s our route tonight?”

 

Mina asks, leaning over the map Izuku had been drawing paths on.

 

“This one.”

 

Izuku says, pointing at the red path. The route runs close to Mina’s house. The four heading out that night crowd around the map, committing the route to memory.

 

“I think we’re ready to go.”

 

Mina says, tugging her helmet on over her head. The other three do the same. They climb out of the window and onto the fire escape. As has become routine, Yuuga shuts the window behind them, waving to them as they leave.

 

--------

 

They stop a few muggings on their route. Nothing major, though they all receive a few scrapes and bruises. Mina’s pretty sure she’ll have a large bruise on her ribs within a day or so. 

 

“We’re nearing your house now, right?”

Eijirou asks, looking back at her as they run down the street. The buildings were starting to get farther apart, so they couldn’t use the rooftops for travel. Mina nods, a small smile under her mask, 

 

“I was lucky to be able to sneak out tonight. Both of my parents have had long shifts these past few days and went to bed super early.”

 

Dark Shadow appears in front of her,

 

“Oooh. Hope they don’t see you.”

 

Mina nods,

 

“I don’t think they’d let me go back if they found out I’m a vigilante.”

 

They continue running in silence, a slight tension in the air. 

 

About a block away from Mina’s house they spot the same dealer they had dealt with during their first shift in an alley, dealing with a woman they’d never seen before. 

 

“Is this really the place for a drug dealer?”

 

Eijirou asks,

 

“That’s why it’s a good spot.”

 

Tsu replies,

 

“Because you wouldn’t expect a deal to be made in an upper-middle-class neighbourhood.”

 

Eijirou nods,

 

“That makes sense, I guess. Ready to head in?”

 

The others nod. They charge the deal, quirks at the ready. Mina separates them with a shot of acid, Dark Shadow wraps around the dealer, squeezing him and making him drop the small plastic bag containing a white powder. The woman tries to run, but Eijirou jumps in front of her. He kicks her legs out from under her. This backfires on him when he grabs him for balance, taking him down with her. She tosses him aside and he crashes into the wall of the alley. Tsu wraps her tongue around the woman’s lower calves, tripping her again as she tries to stand. 

 

The woman takes out a knife and attempts to slash at the girl’s tongue. Before she can Mina runs at her. She grabs hold of the knife, slicing her palm. She melts the knife in her grip. Her acid also touches the woman’s skin, causing her to scream. Mina digs a zip tie out of her utility belt, binding the woman’s wrists. Suddenly, Fumikage yelps. The villain Dark Shadow had been holding runs out of the alley and down the street. 

 

Tsu, Fumikage, and Eijirou run after him. Mina lags back for a moment to bind the woman’s ankles with a zip tie before following after them. 

 

The villain runs down the block and past house after house, until he reaches Mina’s house, likely drawn by the faint light on in the upstairs bathroom, which her parents kept on throughout the night. He breaks through the door, using his spiked arms to tear it apart. Mina overtakes the others, running into her house. She follows the man up the stairs. He throws open doors, dodging the acid Mina throws. Eventually, he opens the door to her parent’s room. He runs to their bed, grabbing hold of her father, who slept closest to the door. 

 

Her parents jolt awake, though her father can’t move much for fear of cutting himself on the spikes of his captor. 

 

“Stop!”

 

The villain calls. The other three grind to a halt in the doorway behind Mina. Mina’s mother looks at them wide-eyed, glancing between the kids and the man holding her husband hostage.

 

“Don’t move, or I slice his throat.”

 

“Okay, okay.”

 

Tsu attempts to deescalate,

 

“Just let him go.”

 

The villain shakes his head, 

 

“Not until you swear to let me go. The boss won’t bail me out again, and I’m not going to prison.”

 

Tsu nods slowly,

 

“Alright.”

 

The villain’s shoulders droop a little, but he still doesn’t let Mina’s dad go. 

 

“Back up.”

 

The four comply, backing out into the hallway. The villain follows, his hostage still in his grip. He starts backing toward the stairs, keeping his eyes on the kids. Mina has to hold back tears. Acid starts to build on her hands against her will as her quirk replies to her high levels of stress. The villain takes notice. His eyes zero in on her hands and he presses his spikes closer to her dad’s throat. He gasps as blood starts to bead against his skin.

 

“I-I can’t.”

 

Mina has to force herself to speak,

 

“It’s a stress reaction.”

 

The villain scowls,

 

“Liar. You’re trying to attack me.”

 

Mina shakes her head,

 

“Please. It’s a stress reaction.”

 

Eijirou nods behind her. This turns out to be a mistake, as the villain notices the way the few visible pieces of skin visible through the cuts in his costume are hardened.


“You’re gearing up to attack me!”

The villain says. Mina’s dad is staring down at her. Mina silently prays that he hadn’t recognized her voice, but she knows that’s foolish.


“Mina…?”

 

He whispers. The villain looks down at him,

 

“You know this brat.”

 

Her dad nods as much as he can,

 

“She’s my daughter.”

 

Tears start to run down Mina’s cheeks as she recognizes the glint in the villain’s eyes.

 

“Well then, maybe I should kill you. Teach her a lesson about meddling in other people’s business.”

 

Mina hears the beeping of a phone being dialled coming from the bedroom. 

 

“Put the phone down!”

The villain bellows, stomping back toward the bedroom. Mina’s mom yelps and she hears the sound of something, likely the phone, falling to the ground. 

 

“That’s it.”

 

The villain says, 

 

“Clearly, none of you care for this man’s life.”

 

Dark Shadow darts forward, foolishly attempting to free Mina’s dad. They’re too late, however. The villain slits his throat before the sentient quirk reaches him. The man falls to the ground. Blood pools around him, soaking the hardwood and creeping toward the children. Mina sobs, falling to her knees by her father. He looks up at her, concern in his eyes. Only a moment later his eyes roll into the back of his head. Mina can faintly hear the villain say something, accompanied by her mother’s screaming. 

 

The screams cut off abruptly. Mina looks up to see her mother bleeding out on the bed, the villain looming over her.

 

Dark Shadow once again wraps themselves around the villain. They chomp down on his throat. Blood bursts around their teeth. The villain claws at the quirk’s face. He grows weaker quickly as Dark Shadow clamps down. The villain eventually goes limp. Dark Shadow lets go and the villain falls to the ground alongside the corpse of Mina’s father. 

 

Eijirou crouches at Mina’s side. He wraps an arm around her shoulders, hugging her close.

 

“We have to go.”

 

He whispers,

 

“The police will be here soon. We should go back to the apartment.”

 

Mina whimpers, leaning into his side,

 

“I failed them.”

 

She gasps. Eijirou shakes his head,

 

“No, don’t say that. There wasn’t anything you could have done.”

 

Mina’s fists clench around the fabric of her pants.

“I should have moved sooner.”

 

Eijirou shakes his head again,


“We were just trying to follow his instructions. If you had moved, he would have killed your dad faster..”

 

Mina shakes as she sobs. Her crying comes harsher, to the point that she can’t get out any words. Eijirou helps her up, despite the fact that she keeps reaching for the corpses of her parents.

 

“Come on.”

 

Eijirou urges. 

 

“I’m sure a neighbour called the cops, and we don’t want to be caught here.”

 

Mina continues to cry as they creep down the stairs and out of the house. 

Chapter 62: Moving Out

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

Mina and Eijirou stumble into the apartment. The others are all asleep, except for Izuku, who looks up from where he’s sitting at the table. 

 

“What happened?”

 

He asks, hopping out of his chair and running over. Tears are still streaming down Mina’s face. 

 

“They’re dead.”

 

She sobs, falling into Izuku’s arms. Izuku looks between Mina and the rest of her patrol group behind her. Dark Shadow closes the apartment door. There are spots of blood on their teeth, which only adds to Izuku’s confusion.

 

“We chased a villain into her house and…”

 

Eijirou trails off, taking a deep breath.

 

“He killed her parents.”

 

Mina sobs harder. At this point, others are starting to wake up. Those who had caught the tail end of Eijirou’s explanation whisper it to those who had missed it. Izuku nods slowly, 

 

“Is anyone injured?”

 

The others shake their heads,

 

“Just a few bruises from other fights.”

 

Izuku sighs, 

 

“Alright.”

 

He leads Mina back to her sleeping bag. Some avert their eyes as she burrows into her sleeping bag, while others watch. Tooru settles next to Mina, rubbing her back as Izuku stands to talk to Eijirou, Fumikage, and Tsu. 


“Did the villain escape?”

 

He asks, keeping his voice hushed. The other three shake their heads. Dark Shadow looks proud of themselves at the mention of the villain. 

 

“I killed him.”

 

The shadow clarified, showing off the blood still splattering their teeth. Fumikage, Tsu, and Eijirou all nod in agreement. 

 

“The villain was one we arrested on our first patrol. He didn’t know it was Mina’s house at first, but when her father said she was…”

 

“He wanted revenge.”

 

Fumikage finishes Eijirou’s sentence when he trails off. Izuku takes a deep breath as he nods. 

 

“I’ll make sure patrol paths don’t run past any of our houses anymore. We should look into which drug ring he’s a part of, if any. We have to determine whether or not they’ll come after us.”

 

Tsu takes a sharp intake of breath. 

 

“You mean they might come after our families?”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“It’s possible if he was part of a group. It really depends on his position within them and how much responsibility they think they have to get revenge.”

 

Tsu shakes her head, 

 

“I want to stay here, then. At least for a while. I don’t want to put my family in danger.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“I’ll grab you a sleeping bag.”

 

Izuku grabs a sleeping bag from the hall closet while Tsu slips into the bathroom to change into the clothes she had arrived in earlier that evening. The two boys take turns changing once she’s done. Mina doesn’t change. She cries herself to sleep in her vigilante uniform, still stained by her parents’ blood. 

 

None of them get much sleep for the rest of the night. Izuku thinks he sees Eraserhead on nearby rooftops throughout the night before finally falling asleep, but he pays the man no mind. He had other things to worry about, mainly, how they were going to help Mina with her grief.

 

--------

 

The next morning, Izuku makes the decision to contact the men who had helped them move their furniture into the apartment to help them install the appliances in the warehouse. He wanted to move them into the warehouse as soon as possible. Shouji and Sero both agree to go with him while the others stay behind. Mina finally changes out of her vigilante uniform just before they leave, but she doesn’t eat any of the breakfast offered to her.

 

“How long have you known these guys?”

 

Hanta asks. Izuku shrugs,

 

“A few years now. They were some of the first people I met when I started engaging in the criminal world.”

 

Hanta nods. Mezou keeps quiet, occasionally adjusting his mask. He had started wearing masks that went over the bottom half of his face and his neck. Izuku and the others had said that he didn’t have to wear it, but he had said that he didn’t want to cause unnecessary conflict in public.

 

They continue their walk in silence. When they reach the gym where the men spend most of their afternoons, Izuku turns the knob and pushes the door open. Immediately, the men look up. There are a few there not associated with Izuku, but the three that did immediately abandoned the machines they were occupying and rushed over.

 

“Little man!”

 

One of them calls. Izuku smiles,

 

“Hey, guys!”

 

He replies. He fist-bumps them before introducing them to the two that had come with him. 

 

“These are my friends, Sero and Shouji.”

 

The three men greet the boys before turning back to Izuku. 

 

“You’ve been growing quite the little group, haven’t you?”

 

One of them asks. Izuku nods,

 

“Yeah. A little too big. We’re moving into a warehouse because we don’t have enough room in the apartment anymore. We were wondering if you’d be willing to help us install some appliances we fixed up and move the table.”

 

The three men are quick to nod in agreement,

 

“We’d be happy to help, Little Man, any time.”

 

Izuku smiles,

 

“Thanks.”

 

The three boys lead the men back to the warehouse lot. They had been storing the appliances in a nearby warehouse to make sure the installation wouldn’t be more work than it needed to be. 

 

The men are quick to get to work. Fumikage arrives at one point, offering to help alongside Dark Shadow, but the men wave him off. 

 

“We’re fine!” 

 

They assure. Fumikage shrugs and heads back to the apartment. The others come down to watch occasionally, though never more than one or two at a time. None of them want to leave Mina alone. She was still refusing to eat, and they had only just managed to convince her to drink some water earlier that afternoon. 

 

When the men finish installing the appliances, including a fridge, stove, microwave, and air conditioning unit, they head on their way. Other necessities, like toilets, bathtubs, and shower heads had been installed by Giran’s men. 

 

Izuku offers the three men some bottles of water for the road, which they accept gratefully. They wave as they leave, going back home. Izuku heads back to the apartment once he could no longer see the men. 

 

When he opens the door, it’s to find everyone scattered about, doing their own things, though still occasionally looking over at Mina, who was tucked into her sleeping bag.


“The warehouse is done.”

 

Izuku says, drawing attention to himself, 

 

“At least, in terms of appliance installation and such. We can start moving in now if you’re up to it.”

 

The others cheer, nodding as they start to put things away and gather what they could carry. They each take their duffel bags and sleeping bags. Those who have room in their duffel bags accept other things to carry, such as workbooks, towels, medical supplies, cleaning supplies, and the like. The coffee maker and dishes are packed into boxes, which Dark Shadow is happy to carry. 

 

It takes some coaxing to get Mina to start packing, too. The most extra she’s asked to carry is her workbook and a shampoo bottle. She leans against one of the walls while the others rush around, watching quietly. 

 

Once they’re done packing, they realize that a second trip will have to be made. Though it doesn’t bother them, as had been expected. Izuku leads the long line of kids down the stairs and into the lobby of the apartment where, for the first time in a while, Mr.Sukēto was sitting at his desk.

 

“Where do you think you’re going?”

 

He asks, looking down at them. Izuku approaches the desk, their lease held in hand.

 

“Well, sir, I think you’ll find that our lease expired recently.”

 

He hands the paper to the man, 

 

“And, while we thank you for allowing us to stay here this past year or so, we don’t want to renew. We’ve found a bigger place to live that will better accommodate our numbers.”

Izuku explains, watching the man’s expression carefully. MrSukēto nods,

 

“Okay. But you’re not getting your deposit back. You broke my blinds and went over your lease with how many brats you had living with you.”

 

He glares at the long line of kids behind Izuku, all watching the conversation with mild interest. Izuku nods,

 

“Completely understandable.”

Izuku says. With that, he turns away from the man and waves for the others to rejoin him. They do, and the group heads down to the warehouse lot, boxes and overstuffed duffel bags in hand.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
On Wednesday I have my second volunteer shift with the library. It's a "messy science" event, though I don't entirely know what that entails. Something I'm a little more excited about is visiting my grandma on Friday. She recently adopted a Maine-coon kitten and I've been wanting to meet it for the past couple of weeks.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 63: Friends On Benches

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Tsu hadn’t returned home in just over a month. Missing posters had been put up, and her face had been plastered over the news for at least a week. However, she had been pronounced dead after two or three weeks. The death of Mina’s parents had been reported three days after the incident, which meant that Mina wasn’t allowed to leave the apartment for the time. 

 

Her face had been on the screens, too, as people wondered why her body had never been found. She was labelled a runaway, and eventually, people stopped actively looking for her, just like they had done with Shouto and Tsu. 

 

“You know,”

 

Hitoshi says, looking up from the last few pages of his workbook. 

 

“The police aren’t that good at looking for missing children.”

 

The others look up from their tasks, 

 

“They’re really not. I mean, we’ve even passed directly in front of groups of cops before and they barely gave us a second glance.”

 

Denki says. He has a book in his hands, written in English. Mina was sitting beside him, peering over his shoulder as he attempted to teach her to read the language. 

 

“Speaking of, wasn’t Shouto pronounced missing nearly a year ago? Whatever became of that? Was he pronounced dead?”

 

Izuku, Shouto, and Fumikage exchange glances. 

 

“Actually, we don’t know,”

Izuku says, setting down the notebook he had been writing in. 

 

“We never saw anything declaring him dead. Though, I guess I did notice that the heroes looking for him trickled away over time.”

 

Shouto looks over from his corner, a wooden robin in his hand. 

 

“I would like to know if I’m dead. It would be interesting to see what my family put on my shrine. My eldest brother, Touya, has one in his old room, though I was never allowed to look at it.”

 

Izuku looks over at him, his head tilted slightly,

 

“I don’t think you ever told us about your brother.”

 

Shouto hums,

 

“Oh. Well, he was the firstborn. His quirk hurt him, though, his body couldn’t handle it. He hated me when I was born. Apparently, he tried to kill me, because father favoured me over him. I don’t blame him, though. According to my siblings, Endeavor used to be kind, but his obsession with besting All Might overtook him.”

 

The others can only blink.

 

“That was…a lot.”

 

Hanta says. Shouto shrugs and goes back to carving his robin. 

 

“So, is anyone else legally dead?”

 

Mei asks. She has a metal ball in her hands that she’s tinkering with. 

 

Izuku shrugs,


“I might be. Honestly depends on whether or not anyone cared to report my disappearance. My parents sure didn’t.”

 

“Oh! I might be!”

Denki says, holding his hand up in the air,

 

“I don’t think it would be televised, though, my parents are heroes and I don’t think they’d risk their reputation by saying they let their kid die in an alley after forcing him to overuse his quirk. On second thought, maybe I’m not…”

 

He trails off from there, clearly deep in thought as to whether or not his parents would allow him to be pronounced dead. 

 

“I am.”

 

Aoyama says. He has a needle and thread clutched in one hand and a shirt he was repairing in the other. 


“They believe I burned to death along with my parents.”

 

“We should have an obituary as well.”

 

Fumikage states. He’s floating above the others with the help of Dark Shadow. 

 

“Our mother and father would do that, at least, if only to avoid needing to feign care about our whereabouts.”

 

“Do you have a death certificate?”

 

Denki asks Hitoshi. The other boy shrugs,

 

“Probably. Though, it would just be for legalities. You can’t move around a foster kid you don’t have and I don’t think they’d want to waste the resources really looking for me.”

 

Ochako nods,

 

“The same probably happened to me. I mean, I sort of just disappeared off the crime scene.”

 

“Why are we talking about this?”

 

Mezou asks. Mei shrugs,


“I thought it was an interesting topic. Especially considering we could use it against them later. I mean, it’s not like you had a bunch of tech or anything to hide. You all kind of just ran away and stayed inside for a few days. It would be especially damning in terms of Shouto’s case.”

 

All attention turns to her.

 

“That’s a great plan, actually.”

 

Izuku says, grabbing his notebook off the ground. He heads up the stairs to his room and comes back down a moment later with a different book. He settles back into a criss-cross position on the ground with the others. He starts scribbling away as the others return to their tasks.

 

--------

 

Mezou walks down the street, arms at his sides and a black mask, which Aoyama had sewn sequins onto to create constellations, secure on his face. 

 

The other boy had been decorating masks, shirts, and whatever else he could get his hands on since he had managed to bring home a sewing kit a few weeks ago. Everyone else was happy to let him do so. Especially since most of their clothes were starting to look tattered and worn and the patterns made them feel new. 

 

The street is lined with stores, all selling different things. A few have sale signs in their windows, which Mezou duly takes a mental note of. It was what he was out there for, after all. They had been taking turns heading into the better districts, looking for sales they could take advantage of during their shopping trips. Which was becoming more important now that they were starting to run out of money. 

 

Mezou ignored the few odd looks he was getting from the others on the sidewalk. He comes to the end of the street, ready to head back to the warehouse lot, when he hears something a few stores down. He turns one of his hands into an ear, attempting to get a better idea as to who, or what was making the noise. 

 

He follows it down the street to a bench out of the way of the rest of the street. A purple-haired girl sits on it, her hands pressed against her ears. Her breathing looks, and sounds, laboured. Mezou looks around for a moment, trying to spot a parent. When he doesn’t see anyone, he hops up next to her. She startles, looking over at him. 

 

“Hi.”

 

He greets. She takes a breath,

 

“Hi. Um…I’m Kyouka.”

 

Mezou nods,

 

“I’m Mezou. Are you alright?”

 

Kyouka shrugs, curling in on herself. Her hands are still pressed against her ears, but now Mezou can make out what looks like earphone jacks dangling from her lobes. 


“Does your quirk enhance your hearing?”

 

He asks. She nods,

 

“Yeah, sorry. I know I must look crazy right now but it’s just so loud .”

Mezou nods. He digs around in his duffel bag and pulls out a pair of headphones Mei had made for him. They helped block out sound, making crowds more bearable when he was sent out for tasks like today. He hands them to her and she takes them slowly. She slips them on and her shoulders slump in relief once they're secure.

 

“Thank you.”

 

She says, smiling at him. Mezou nods,

 

“Of course. If you’d like, you can keep them. I’m sure Mei can make me another pair.”

 

Kyouka shakes her head,

 

“No, no. I couldn’t do that.”

 

She starts taking them off but Mezou holds up a hand to stop her. 

 

“It’s fine, really. She said she was working on a new model, anyway. Whatever that means.”

 

Kyouka nods,


“Does she work for a headphone company?”

 

Mezou shakes his head,

 

“No, she just likes to invent stuff. She also makes robots and weapons.”

 

Kyouka blinks,


“Oh. I…didn’t expect that. Is she a support engineer?”

 

Mezou shrugs,

 

“She says she wanted to be, but then she met Izuku and, like the rest of us, joined him instead.”

 

Kyouka tilts her head,

 

“Like a club? Does Izuku want to start his own engineering company?”

 

Mezou shrugs,


“That’s not quite it, but close, I guess.”

 

Kyuoka narrows her eyes,


“Well what is it, then?”

 

Mezou hums, 

 

“Our goal is to make the world better, starting with Japan.”

 

Kyouka leans back, 

 

“That sounds nice, I guess.”

 

Mezou nods,


“It is.”

 

Kyouka looks over,

 

“Can I meet them? I think that sounds like a group I’d be interested in.”

 

Mezou shrugs,

 

“Sure. But the houses are about an hour’s walk from here.”

 

Kyouka hops off the bench.

 

“That’s fine. My parents don’t expect me home for another four.”

 

Mezou jumps down next to her,

 

“Alright. Follow me, then.”



Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
Guess who cried for about an hour last night over her cat! It's me. It was me. We've had him since I was two and he went missing recently. He's an outdoor cat and has been since he got out one day as a kitten. It was fine, aside from the occasional carcass on our porch or vomit because none of our neighbours could grasp the fact he's allergic to chicken. My parents never got him chipped despite my pleas and he was stolen about a year ago, which was also when my mom said that she would be fine with letting the woman keep him if it wasn't for the fact that I love him. He used to sleep in my bed at night. I would read to him and brush him out. I was the only one allowed to bathe him without being scratched. He liked being read to, and I used to learn by reading to him. He got on well enough with the dogs and other animals we had over the years, at least until about a year ago when we got our newest dog. He's a chihuahua pug mix and, of course, has a bit of a small dog complex. He developed separation anxiety for my mother, meaning he would whine all night if he wasn't in her bed. However, this led to him running around and trying to play with the rabbit, which was an issue because the rabbit doesn't like that kind of energy. To avoid him having a heart attack, the rabbit was moved into my room but then the issues came with the chihuahua eating hay and rabbit poop so, as he got better with being separated from my mom, we blocked off the upstairs with a gate, which kept him from getting upstairs. This also stopped the cat which, mixed with the fact I got a loft bed, meant that he couldn't sleep with me anymore. Then the chihuahua redirected his energy at the cat and our older dog. The cat stopped coming inside when it became clear the dog wasn't going to stop trying to play with him despite trying to prevent the behaviour. For a few months, I'd only see the cat on my way to school, either rolling in driveways or sleeping on the neighbours' porch to avoid the puppy. About a week ago, I stopped seeing him at all. I've tried to talk to my parents before about paying for a trainer to help stop the behaviour as he's also reactive, but they refuse. They say that if I care so much I should train him myself, despite the fact that I'm in my first year of high school and have next to no knowledge on training dogs. Not to say I haven't tried, I've spent a lot of money on training equipment but I just don't have the time on top of my own hobbies, chores, and taking care of the rabbit and dogs. I think it's also important to say that neither I nor my brother ever asked for a second dog. He was just sprung on us one day. My mother only bought him because she wanted something that would love her unconditionally, cuddle with her, and really just love only her. She tried that with the rabbit, but he hates being picked up, though he still likes to be pet. I know that if the chihuahua eventually stops giving her that kind of attention, since she works now and he has already gotten over the separation anxiety, she'll buy another animal and I'll have to take care of it. I already feed and take out the dogs, pay for enrichment for the rabbit, and clean up after him. I'm the only one who wanted to chip the cat so we wouldn't lose him and now we have. Sometimes, it feels as if I'm the only one who really cares for these animals, and now the one that I've had a bond with the longest is gone.

Chapter 64: We’ll Accept Your Help, But We’re Not Happy About It

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Mezou and Kyouka spend most of the walk to the warehouse lot in silence. She eventually takes off the headphones and the last half of their walk is taken up by small talk. When they reach the lot and Mezou unlocks the padlock Mei had created Kyouka starts to look a little nervous. Mezou can’t blame her, they are in the Red Light District, after all. 


“I brought a guest.”

 

Mezou announces when they walk into the warehouse they currently all sleep in. Though, Mei had been spending quite a few nights in her lab and they often had to drag her back to sleep. 

 

The others appear at the top of the stairs or from around the doorways of the few rooms on the ground floor. Sero is an odd one out, however, as he drops down from the ceiling using his tape. 

 

“This is Kyouka.”

 

Mezou introduces, gesturing to the girl at his side. She tries to hold herself straight, forcing a confident expression on her face. The others wave in greeting, introducing themselves one by one. Izuku goes last, smiling comfortingly with his notebook tucked under his arm. 

 

“It’s wonderful to meet you. Will you be joining us or are you just here to visit?”

 

He asks, a slight tilt to his head,


“You don’t have to decide now, of course.”

 

He tacks on. Kyouka nods slowly,

 

“I’m just here to visit today.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“We’ll leave you be, then. Come one everyone, you have training to do!”

 

He turns for his last sentence, addressing the crowd of kids behind him. They groan, but arrange themselves into a single-file line anyway. Mei isn’t among them, likely in her lab. Mezou goes to join them, but Izuku waves him off. 

 

“No, no. You can stay here, with Kyouka.”

 

Mezou nods,

 

“Thank you, Izuku.”

 

Izuku nods as he leads the line behind him out of the warehouse and down the path. They head further back in the lot to one of two warehouses they had converted for training. 

 

Kyouka watches them through one of the windows by the doors until they disappear down the path. 

 

“Is there anything you’d like to do?”

 

Mezou asks once she turns away from the window. 

 

Kyouka shakes her head, 

 

“I think I’d just like to relax, for a bit.”

 

Mezou nods,

 

“I’ll lead you up to my room, then. Hitoshi helped me drag up some bean-bag chairs.”

 

--------

 

As they make their way to the Physical Training Warehouse Izuku can’t shake the feeling they’re being watched. The hairs on the back of his neck stand on end and he walks quickly toward the warehouse. Once everyone is inside, he padlocks the door shut using a chain and lock stored in a box next to the door.

“What’s going on?”

 

Ochako asks, an expression of worry on her face mirroring that of the others. 

 

“I felt like someone was watching us. Best case scenario it’s Eraserhead. Worst case, it’s someone from the group that man was part of.”

 

“But it’s been months since the incident. Ribbit.”

 

Tsu comments. Izuku nods,

 

“I know, but we should prepare for the worst and hope for the best.”

 

The others nod as they start rushing around the entry of the warehouse. All of the warehouses that they were currently using were stocked with emergency supplies. Boards to cover windows, padlocks for the doors, and a few knives for each of them. They cover the windows and chain the back door. They then gather in a circle in the center of the room, each armed and ready. 

 

“How long do we wait like this?”

 

Yuuga asks. Izuku shrugs,


“About twenty minutes, then three of us will head outside to check.”

 

“Which three?”

Hitoshi asks.

 

“Will, I’ll be one of them.”

 

Izuku answers.

“Any other volunteers?”

 

It’s silent for a moment until Shouto raises his hand,

“I’ll go.”

 

“We volunteer as well.”

 

Fumikage says, Dark Shadow at his shoulder. Izuku nods,

“Good. Now we just have to wait.”

 

Izuku counts to twelve-hundred seconds before he breaks away from the circle. Shouto and Fumikage follow behind him, Shouto on his left and Fumikage on his right. Izuku unlocks the padlock and eases open the door just enough for the three of them to slip out individually. 

 

For a moment it seems like whoever had been watching them had left. That hope is quickly hampered by Eraserhead dropping down in front of them. Izuku knocks on the door, signalling for the others re-lock it.

 

“Sir.”

 

Izuku greets. Fumikage and Shouto retake their spots at his sides. Eraserhead raises a brow when he spots the knives in their hands.

 

“I’m not here to hurt you.”

 

Eraserhead placates. Izuku’s sure it was meant to make them feel more comfortable, but it has the opposite effect. Frost spreads on Shouto’s right arm while Dark Shadow puffs up above them, attempting to look intimidating. 

 

Eraserhead raises his hands, 

 

“I’m not armed.”

 

Izuku looks pointedly at the scarf around the man’s neck. 

 

“Liar. What do you want?”

 

Eraserhead sighs,

 

“I want to know why a group of kids is living on their own on a warehouse lot and running around at night fighting villains.”

 

Izuku shakes his head,


“That doesn’t concern you.”

 

Eraserhead raises a brow,

 

“Really? Because it seems to me like if I don’t get a sufficient answer I can just report this to the Commission and have you all taken into custody.”

 

Izuku scowls,

 

“You could do that even if you don’t get an answer. You could have done it months ago when you first started watching us in the apartment.”

 

Eraserhead nods,


“I could have.”

 

“But you didn’t. Why?”

 

“Because I want answers.”

 

Izuku continues to glare,


“Fine. I’m out here because my parents are abusive alcoholics and I wouldn’t survive in the foster system. The others are here for much the same reason.”

 

Eraserhead hums,


“Really? Why is Todoroki Shouto here, then.”

 

Izuku looks back in horror, realizing that, while Shouto’s hair was still black, his scar was on full display. They hadn’t covered it that day since they hadn’t been planning to leave the lot. 

 

Shouto glares,

 

“I’m here for the same reason as Izuku. Endeavor is incredibly abusive, and Izuku offered me an out.”

 

Eraserhead blinks, 

 

“I see. All of you are from abusive homes, then?”

 

That wasn’t completely true, Izuku knew. Some of them had lost their parents, and others were simply dedicated to their cause. Eraserhead didn’t need to know that, though. He had offered as good a cover as they could hope for.

 

Izuku nods,


“That’s right. Is that so bad? It’s not like any of us are starving. We’re fully capable of taking care of ourselves.”

Eraserhead nods,


“I can see that. It still doesn’t explain why you’re all running around as vigilantes.”

 

Izuku smiles,

“Well, we can’t apply to any hero courses without an address, can we?”

 

Eraserhead nods,

 

“No, you can’t. Still, it’s not good for you to be living alone without any adults.”

 

Fumikage tilts his head,


“Why is that, sir? As Izuku stated, we’ve been feeding ourselves, we have shelter, running water, working electricity, and ample training room.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Exactly. Why would we need the help of adults if we’re already okay on our own?”

 

“What if you get hurt?”

 

Eraserhead asks. 

 

Izuku shrugs,


“Many of us know enough about first-aid to deal with the majority of the injuries we suffer. If someone is injured beyond what we can handle we can always go to an underground clinic.”


Eraserhead blinks,

 

“How do you know about those?”

“I’ve been involved in the underground community since I was five, sir.”

 

Eraserhead sighs,

 

“I see. Still, I’d like to help you. How about this, if you line up your patrols with mine, I’ll bring you food and any other supplies you need.”

 

Izuku tilts his head,


“Why should we agree to that? How do we know you won’t betray us?”

 

“Because I don’t want to put you in harm's way. I promise, I only want to help.”

 

Izuku sighs.


“I’ll have to talk about it with the others first. Come back tomorrow night. Alone .”

 

Eraserhead nods. He lowers his hands and walks away, leaving the plot behind. 

 

Izuku turns to the two boys behind him,

 

“Was that really the best idea?”

 

Shouto asks,

 

“He could report us to the other heroes and we don’t have anywhere else to go.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“I know. But maybe we can work this in our favour. It would be nice to have someone on the inside, after all.”

Notes:

obligatory author diary entry!
So my cat showed up at the front door just over a week after he went missing. He came inside for the first time in ages, ate some of his food, had some water, and left again. I had just accepted the fact that he was most likely dead somewhere when my mom woke me up to tell me he had come inside. We still don't know where he went during the time he was gone. The only scenario we can rule out is him starting a cat family since he's fixed.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 65: Important Discussions

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Mezou and Kyouka join the group when they return to the residential warehouse. They immediately recognize the tense air and Mezou walks up to Izuku,

 

“What’s wrong?”

 

He asks. Izuku sighs,


“Eraserhead finally confronted us. To stop him from reporting us to the authorities I had to promise to talk to everyone about lining up patrols with his and allowing him to bring us food and other supplies.”

 

“Wait, wait.”

 

Denki exclaims, 

 

“Why?”

 

Izuku shrugs,

 

“He says he wants to make sure we’re safe, but I don’t know if I trust him that much. It’s not like we have to eat any of the food he brings us, but he might be useful for obtaining clothes and other necessities.”

 

“Yeah, but if we start patrolling with him then wouldn’t that just give him more opportunities to arrest us? He could pick us off easily one by one.”

 

Ochako states. Izuku nods,

 

“That’s why I wanted to discuss this as a group before I agreed to anything. There’s a lot of risk here, and I want to make sure everyone is on board first.”

 

Tooru hums, 


“How is he going to know what our answer is?”

 

She asks, her hands flickering in and out of existence to pull more attention to herself. 


Izuku winces,


“He’s coming back tomorrow night.”

 

“So we have a day to think about whether we want to risk jeopardizing everything we’ve done so far, as well as all of our future plans, for a bit of extra help from a hero and the chance of being able to use him to insider information.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Yes. It would give us an in within the Hero Commission.”

 

Hitoshi sighs, 


“Okay. Say we accept this hero’s deal and he doesn’t end up reporting us to the authorities. What if the commission realizes what we’re doing before we’re ready to take them down? You did say it would take a few years, after all. We’ll all be killed.”

 

Izuku nods,

“We well. But it could also mean that we’ll be ready to take them down sooner than planned. We could use him to recruit more heroes, which would help bring the public onto our side, as well. Everything could move faster. Plus, it would be nice not to have to take so many trips for clothes and food.”

 

Mezou tilts his head,


“How much faster?”

 

Izuku’s fingers twitch as he seemingly makes a few calculations in his head. 

 

“Well, I had been planning on putting the full plan into motion when we’re fifteen, that way the Commission would be toppled by the time we were eighteen but if we can get insider information faster, as well as more public favour and power in general…I think we would instead be able to start at thirteen and have it all done by sixteen.”

 

Mezou nods,


“That sounds like a good time loss to me. Anyone else?”

 

The others nod slowly,


“It’s not like there’s much most of us have to lose, anyway. He still knows where we are, and at least a little of what we do. He could report us at any time and we’d be in the same spot even if we hadn’t gotten a few days worth of food out of him.”

 

Fumikage nods,

 

“The illusion of choice.”

 

“So it doesn’t really matter if we say yes or no.”

 

Mei states. 

 

Izuku shakes his head,


“I wouldn’t say that. It might be the case, yes, or our agreeing could mean that we gain an advantage, and some free food and clothes.”

 

The others nod,

 

“Sounds good to me, then.”

 

Ochako says, 

 

“Either we die, or we gain an upper hand. All depending on what this hero, Eraserhead, I think you said, decides for us.”

 

Yuuga huffs, 


“I don’t much enjoy leaving my fate in the hands of a man I barely know, but it seems we don’t have much choice.”

 

He says. 

 

“So we’re agreeing to his terms, then?”

 

Izuku asks, scanning the room one last time. Everyone nods and Izuku nods back,


“Good. I’ll tell him tomorrow night, then.”

 

Kyouka, who had so far just been watching their exchange in a mix of interest and shock, finally speaks up,


“I’m sorry, you’re trying to take over the government?!”

 

Izuku looks over at her, his eyes widened. He, along with everyone else, it seemed, had forgotten she was there.”

 

“Yeah, sorry, we didn’t bring you into the loop yet, did we? We’re currently in training to eventually take over the government since they encourage quirk discrimination and the separation of the different classes so that there’s a constant flow of villains for their heroes to fight. They also allow teenagers to become child soldiers and make deals with high-ranking villain groups to create flashy fights for high-ranking heroes.”

 

“They also cover up crimes heroes commit.”

 

Shouto chimes in,

“Such as abusing their families, taking advantage of civilians on the streets, or murder. Heroes commit a lot of murder.”

 

The others nod along at the last fact. Kyouka stares,

 

“Wow, okay. Do you just dump all of that information on everyone you meet?”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Yeah, pretty much. It’s worked to gain us recruits so far.”

 

The others nod along once again.


“Yes, all of us have been recruited in part through such methods.”

 

Fumikage explains. 

 

“And also in part because we don’t have anywhere else to go.”

 

Hitoshi adds.

Kyouka hums,

 

“Ah, okay. Will, I mean, that sounds like a great plan and all, but how do you know all of this stuff?”

 

Izuku smiles,

 

“I’ve been involved in the villain underground since I was four. You learn things through experience, word of mouth, and observation.”

 

Kyouka nods slowly,

 

“But how do you know the people you’ve talked to weren’t lying? I’m sure villains are mad at the heroes and will say whatever to justify their actions.”

 

Izuku nods,


“That’s a valid point, but I raise you the fact that heroes’ crimes and rates are public information, even if they’re so hard to find and only ever kept deep on government sites. Anyway, many heroes have very high villain death rates. Endeavor, for example, kills around sixty-point-zero-two percent of the villains he encounters each year. Including first-time offenders and petty criminals, such as literal bread thieves.”

 

Kyouka shakes her head,

 

“Well, if that’s the case how come I haven’t heard about it?”

 

She asks.

 

“Because as I said, the information is strictly kept to sanctioned government sites, under so many different tabs and filters it can sometimes take a couple of hours to reach. Any mentions posted on online forums are deleted near immediately and any news articles covering such deaths are deleted and the companies always face mass-firings or bankruptcy afterwards.”

 

“That seems like a lot of effort to go through.”

 

Kyouka states.

 

Izuku shrugs,

“Maybe, or maybe not. I mean, it’s not too hard to set up an algorithm that deletes posts with keywords or themes. Plus. if you were in charge of a government with so much power that you got to dictate the laws around and control the world’s most influential people, wouldn’t you do whatever it takes to protect that power? The Hero Commission runs Japan.”

 

Kyouka nods, a slightly awed expression on her face,

 

“You’re…right. How can I help? Without moving in.”

 

She tacks on the last part quickly. Izuku smiles,

 

“Welcome to the team, Kyouka. How do you feel about vigilantism?”

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I'm going to see the across the spider verse tonight with my parents. I've seen it before, but that was through piracy. I have another volunteer shift on Wednesday at the library, helping kids make bubbles and then another on the fifteenth helping with escape rooms.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 66: Forest Friend

Chapter Text

Leaves and twigs crunch beneath Shouto’s feet as he walks through the forest surrounding the park. He had come out alone, wanting to get some time to himself. The tree canopy thickens above him, blocking out most of the sunlight. He’s about to turn around and start heading back the way he’d come when he hears someone muttering around the corner.

 

He leans against a large tree and peers into a small clearing. A boy about his age with a head shaped a little like a rock sits in the center of the grass, a squirrel on his shoulder. There’s a ring of birds surrounding him. They hop around, pecking seeds off the ground around them. A new bird flies down from the tree tops above, chirping as it hops around. 

 

The other boy tilts his head, listening as the bird talks. After a moment, the boy looks up, making direct eye contact with Shouto. His eyes widen and he freezes. The animals seem to glare at Shouto as he steps out from behind the tree. 


“Um…hi.”

 

He says.

 

“I’m Shouto.”

 

The other boy blinks,

 

“Oh, right. I’m Kouji. It’s nice to meet you.”

 

His voice is quiet and Shouto can practically hear his rapidly increasing heart rate. 

 

“I’m sorry for scaring you.”

 

Shouto apologizes, 

 

“I was merely out for a walk and heard you talking to the animals.”

 

Kouji ducks his head, reaching up one of his hands to pet the squirrel still sitting on his shoulder. 

 

“I’m sorry if I bothered you.”

 

He says. 

 

Shouto shakes his head,


“No, you weren’t a bother.”

 

Shouto doesn’t know what to do. He had stumbled across a random boy in the forest talking to the animals and now he had made the other boy uncomfortable. He reaches into his pocket and pulls out the wooden figure he had finished earlier on his walk. It depicted a squirrel with a nut in hand. It was a little harsh, but it was also his first attempt at getting an animal to hold something.

 

He holds the figure out. Kouji looks up and takes it hesitantly. He turns it over in his hands, 

 

“Did you make this?”

 

He asks.

 

Shouto nods.

 

Kouji “oohs.” as he shows the small statue off to the surrounding animals. They gather around it, chirping and pawing at it. 

 

“You can keep it if you like.”

 

Shouto says. Kouji’s attention turns back to him,

 

“Are you sure? This probably took a lot of time-”

 

Shouto shakes his head, cutting him off,

 

“I have many others, and I’m starting to run out of room to store them. Please, take it.”

 

Kouji nods slowly,

 

“Thank you.”

 

Shouto smiles,


“Of course.”

 

They sit in silence for a moment before Shouto catches a glimpse of the sun through the canopy above,

 

“I have to leave now. Perhaps I will see you again?”

 

Kouji nods. Shouto nods back as he stands, making his way back through the trees. 

 

--------

 

Shouto walks back into the warehouse with a small smile on his face. His expression turns to one of confusion, however, when he sees a makeshift wrestling ring in the center of the main room. Mezou and Denki are grappling in the center while the others cheer them on. There are two small piles of yen in opposite corners and Eijirou has a whistle around his neck. 

 

“My bet is on Mezou.”

 

He states as the door closes behind him. He pulls a thousand-yen bill out of his pocket and hands it to Mina, who stands by the pile of yen in Mezou’s half of the room. The silence that had fallen upon his entrance lifts as Mina adds his bet to the pile. Denki and Mezou start attacking each other again and the cheers erupt at full volume. 



Izuku gathers them all in the main hall a few days later. Their first few patrols alongside Eraserhead had gone well. He had given them food and cutlery, something they were starting to sorely need. However, they were starting to run out of funds. They had to pay a utility bill, though it was cheaper than you might usually expect, and they had to buy clothes and workbooks now that most of them were completed. 

 

“I’ve called for a meeting because we need to figure out how we’re going to obtain more money.”

 

Hanta raises his hand,

 

“Don’t we have a credit card?”

He asks. Izuku nods,

 

“We do, but we can’t risk spending more than what we have been. Groceries are becoming more expensive since our numbers keep growing. Now that we don’t have to pay rent, it’s best to put that money toward food.”

 

“So how are we going to get more money, then?”

 

Tooru asks. Izuku winces,

“My idea is pretty illegal.”

 

Hitoshi shrugs,


“So is our goal. What’s your idea?”

 

Izuku smiles,

“We’ll start off just selling my analysis and we can branch out into other services as our name grows.”

 

“Like what?”

 

Denki asks. Izuku shrugs,


“Maybe robbery? I mean, we could charge people to steal for them.”

 

“Wouldn’t that just put us more at risk of being arrested?”

 

Mina asks. Izuku nods,

 

“Yes, but we don’t have to steal until later when we’ve been training for a while. We don’t have to do it at all if we don’t want to.”

 

Shouto shrugs,


“I mean, selling your analysis sounds like a good idea. We could make some good money off it. I think I might start trying to sell my figures as well.”

 

Izuku tiilts his head,

 

“Are you sure?”

 

Shouto nods,

“I’ve been thinking of setting up a booth at the market. The legal one, in Musutafu. My collection is beginning to grow too big to sustain.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Okay. Any objections?”

 

No one speaks up. 

 

“It’s settled, then.”

 

Izuku says, 

 

“I’ll get in touch with Giran tonight.”

 

“But I thought it was your turn to patrol tonight?”

 

Mina says. Izuku blinks and grabs his notebook from where it’s sitting beside him. He flips through a  few pages before stopping, reading something, and nodding.


“Right. I forgot about that. Giran will have to wait until tomorrow.”

 

It’s silent for a minute until,

 

“What now?”

 

Mezou asks, 

 

“Wrestling?”

 

Hanta suggests. Mei shakes her head,


“No, we did that a few days ago.”

 

“So?”

 

Hitoshi asks,

“It’s been a few days, it’s not like we’ve done it since then. I think it would still be exciting. Plus, not everyone participated last time.”

 

Mei hums,

 

“You’re right. I’m okay with it, then.”

 

The others nod in agreement and they quickly rise from the circle they’d been sitting in. They grab sheets and mats from a storage closet and arrange them in the center of the room Yuuga and Eijirou step up to the ring and Yen immediately starts passing hands.

Chapter 67: Sugar Crash

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Shouto sits in the clearing in the forest beside Kouji. Birds, squirrels, and even a few skunks surround them. Shouto is a little wary about the skunks, but he does his best to ignore them. He and Kouji sit in comfortable silence. Shouto has his carving materials in hand. A small pile of woodshavings sits beside him. 

 

Kouji had told him earlier that the shavings could be used as compost and materials for the birds’ nests.

 

Shouto enjoys sitting with Kouji. He had been joining the other boy in the clearing most days over the last few weeks. He normally didn’t get home until late when he did, so he didn’t join him on the days he was scheduled to patrol. 

 

Ochako, Yuuga, and Mezou were scheduled to go out tonight. 

 

Shouto holds his figure up to the light poking through the leaves. He already had the general shape and was now working on the details. He wanted this one to feature a bird sitting in a nest. The individual sticks in the nest were going to take him the longest. 

 

“It looks nice so far.”

 

Kouji comments, looking over at the figure. Shouto smiles,


“Thank you.”

 

Something he had learned about Kouji was that the boy was quite shy. He didn’t speak much, usually opting for sign language. Shouto, along with the others, were attempting to learn the language though they were all far from fluent. Kouda sometimes gave him mini-lessons while they were sitting in the clearing.

 

Shouto looks through the trees, catching sight of the waning sun through the leaves.

 

“I should get going now. I enjoyed spending the afternoon with you.”

 

Kouji smiles and nods in agreement. Some of the animals rub against Shouto’s legs and hop around his feet. He crouches down, petting them gently goodbye. Once they’re satisfied, they instead surround Kouji. Shouto waves as he weaves his way back through the trees. 

 

--------

 

Shouto walks through the apartment door, his duffel bag across his chest. The others are gathered in the center of the room. Izuku stands in front of a whiteboard, something Shouto knows they hadn’t owned when he left. Math equations are written on the board and the others all have their hands raised. 

 

Before Izuku can call on any of them he spots Shouto coming through the door. 

 

“Shouto! How’s Kouji doing?”

 

Shouto smiles as he closes the door behind him. 

 

“He’s doing well. What are you doing?”

Izuku shrugs,

 

“We all completed our workbooks so I got a whiteboard and wrote some equations. Wanna try and solve them?”

 

Shouto nods as he sets his bag down by the door,

 

“Sure.”

 

He crosses his legs as he joins them on the floor. 

 


 

Mezou and Shouto walk alongside each other down the street. Denki and Hitoshi are a few steps ahead of them, chatting animatedly about a show they had both been enjoying lately. Denki pulls along the wagon Mei had given them. She had fixed it up after finding it discarded in Dagobah’s trash piles and given it to them to make carrying their groceries home easier.


When they reach the park, Shouto breaks away from the group. He waves to them as he makes his way down the short hill to the play structures. He walks past them into the forest. Mezou, Hitoshi, and Denki watch him until he’s out of sight. 


“You have the list right, Hitoshi?”

 

Mezou asks as they continue on their way down the street. Hitoshi nods and pulls a folded piece of paper out of the front pocket of his duffel bag. Mezou nods,


“Good.”

 

Mezou walks a step behind the other two as they continue their conversation. They attempt to include him in it a few times, but he doesn’t know much about the show and he’s more interested in making sure they aren’t being followed, by Eraserhead or anyone else. 

 

The hero had mostly left them alone in the daylight now that they aligned their patrols with his, but he still popped up now and again. Mezou didn’t really know how he felt about that, but there wasn’t much he could do. 

 

They reach the grocery store quickly and without Mezou noticing anyone. The wagon is tied outside the store and they split the list and head in different directions, each pushing a cart. 

 

--------

 

They meet back at the register after just over a half hour. They pile all their stuff into one cart, trying to make sure nothing is being squished. Hitoshi takes the two leftover carts back to the cart corral while Denki and Mezou wait in line. 

 

Hitoshi comes back just as they start placing their items on the conveyor belt.

 

The cashier doesn’t question them this time, much to their relief. Their items are bagged, Endeavor’s credit card is scanned, and the bags are carried out to the wagon. Denki takes hold of the handle, pulling slowly at first to get the wagon going before picking up his usual pace. 

 

Mezou has ears and eyes on the ends of his limbs, grabbing stares and mutters from others on the street. 


They’re walking down a more secluded sidewalk, near a few gyms and cafes, when Mezou picks up a sound coming from behind one of the gyms.

 

“Stop.”

 

He says, drawing Hitoshi and Denki’s attention. They come to a stop and Hitoshi steps back to allow Denki to turn the wagon around. Mezou steps into a thin alley between the gym and the building beside it. Denki stays out by the wagon while Hitoshi follows behind Mezou. 

 

They step into a larger opening behind the building. There’s another behind it, walling them in, but that’s not something Mezou is overly focused on. 

 

What he does care about, is the boy about his age leaning against the opposite wall of the building to the left. He has more prominent muscles than most boy’s their age. His hair is short, brown, and spiked away from his face, though it looks like there’s some dirt caked into the spikes. 

 

The boy is sleeping. When Mezou looks closer he spots a small pile of crumpled empty sugar packets next to his hand. Mezou crouches next to him, gesturing for Hitoshi to stay further back. Mezou gently nudges the boy’s arm. When he doesn’t get a response, he shakes him gently. The boy huffs and blinks his eyes open. When he sees Mezou he jumps, 

 

“Who are you?”

 

He asks. Mezou smiles, even though it can’t be seen behind his mask. 

 

“I’m Mezou and this is my friend Hitoshi.”

 

He introduces, gesturing behind him.


“Denki is waiting on the sidewalk with our groceries. Who are you?”

 

The boy stares at him for a moment before answering.

 

“I’m Rikidou. How did you find me? Normally I go unnoticed back here until I wake up.”

 

Mezou creates an ear on the end of one of his arms, 

 

“I have enhanced hearing and can make multiple ears and eyes on the end of my limbs.”

 

Rikidou nods, looking at the extra ear in awe.


“May I ask why you’re back here?”

 

Mezou says. Rikidou nods slowly.

 

“Some of my classmates wanted me to use my quirk. They think it’s funny, and like challenging me to break stuff. They don’t care about the side effects beyond bringing me down this street and letting me crash behind the gym.”

 

“Why not go home?”

 

Mezou asks gently. Rikidou looks away as he shrugs.

 

“My parents fight a lot.”

 

Mezou nods,


“You could come back with us if you’d like. We can give you a safe place to sleep and I’m sure Yuuga and Fumikage will have started on dinner by the time we get back.”

 

Rikidou tilts his head,

 

“You all live together?”

 

Mezou nods,


“There are fifteen of us, though Mei will likely have her meal brought back to her lab.”


Rikidou blinks,

“There’s that many of you living in one place?”

 

He asks. Hitoshi and Mezou both nod. Rikidou shrugs as he gets to his feet.


“Alright, then. My parents probably won’t notice that I’m gone anyway.”

 

Mezou nods as he stands. Hitoshi leads the way back to the sidewalk. Denki smiles when he sees them and waves to Rikidou,


“Hi! I’m Denki.”

 

Rikidou nods as he comes to stand next to Denki,


“I’m Rikidou.”

 

They walk together back to the apartment. Mezou and Rikidou walk behind Denki and Hitoshi. The sun is starting to sink low in the sky when they reach the park. Shouto is stepping out of the trees when they arrive. When he spots them, he waves, focussing more on Rikidou than the others, 

 

“Hello, I’m Shouto.”

 

Rikidou nods and introduces himself in turn. Shouto walks between the two groups as they make their way back to the warehouse.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I went out on my boat with my parents and a friend yesterday. We went tubing but I could only manage maybe twenty minutes before I threw up in my mouth. She went back on without me and got thrown off, which she wanted to do. We had a small pizza picnic on the boat and went swimming for a bit before heading back to land.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 68: Money Problems

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Mezou opens the doors to the warehouse, followed quickly by Shouto. The two hold the doors open for Denki, who is still pulling the wagon, Hitoshi, and Rikidou. 

 

The others look up from their English lesson as the five enter. They all stand and rush for the wagon, pulling open the bags and grabbing items to put away. They smile and wave to Rikidou as they do so. 

 

Mezou and Shouto ease the doors closed quietly and take what’s left from the bags. Everything is put into its proper spot in the kitchen or bathroom, depending on the item. The groceries are all away within a few minutes.


Rikidou watches in mild awe as they move. Once everything is put away, Yuuga and Fumikage stay in the kitchen, grabbing ingredients off the shelves and flipping through a cookbook they had put together themselves. It was really just a bunch of pieces of paper stapled together, but it worked. There were recipes they had both memorized as well as recipes they had jotted down from cookbooks at the store.

 

While they work, everyone else re-gathers on the floor. They sit criss-cross in front of Izuku and the whiteboard. Even Mei is sitting, though she has some small device in one hand and a screwdriver in the other. Mezou, Shouto, Hitoshi, and Denki join them on the floor. Mezou pats the spot next to him as he looks back at Rikidou. After a moment of hesitation, the other boy joins them on the floor. 

 

“Hi, I’m Izuku!”

Izuku says, looking over at Rikidou.

 

Rikidou smiles anxiously,

 

“Um, hi. I’m Rikidou.”

 

Everyone else goes around introducing themselves. Yuuga and Fumikage call their own greetings from the kitchen once the others are done.


“Did any of them explain what we’re doing here?”

 

Izuku asks, gesturing to Mezou, Hitoshi, Denki, and Shouto. Rikidou shakes his head, a confused expression on his face.

 

“No. I kinda just assumed that you guys had all escaped from the foster system, or something.”

 

Izuku shrugs,


“I mean, some of us did. But that’s not why we’re a group.”

 

Izuku launches into his speech about their plans to take over the government, accompanied by interjections or added details from the others where they feel it’s necessary. By the end, Rikidou looks bewildered.


“You’re all my age, right?”

He asks, looking at each of them in turn. Izuku nods,


“If that age is ten, then yes.”

 

Rikidou nods,

 

“Right. Okay. And if I agree to help you, you’ll give me shelter, food, and a place in the new government where I’ll be able to ensure no one else is bullied into using their quirk for others' amusement?”

 

Izuku nods,


“Yeah, if that’s what you want.”


Rikidou nods back, 

 

“Then I’d like to join your team.”


He says. Izuku grins,

“Wonderful! Welcome, Rikidou. I’ll rework the patrol schedule to include you and get Giran to commission a costume.”

 

Hitoshi raises a hand,

 

“I thought you already used your favour from him?”

 

Izuku shrugs,

 

“I’ve been saving up some funds from selling my analysis.”

 

Ochako tilts her head,

 

“You already started selling it?”

 

Izuku’s eyes narrow into what they had all come to call his Thinking Face™. 

 

“I could have sworn I told you…”

 

 He mutters. That’s all any of them are really able to make out before his mumbles become too quiet for them to make out. Mezou only catches a word or two, even with more ears than normal. Eventually, Izuku hums and looks back up at them. 

 

“Sorry about that. I could have sworn I already told you all I’d started selling it. Though I do normally leave pretty late. Anyway, the point is I have some funds saved away, so the suit won’t be a problem. I’ll just have to add Rikidou to one of our teams of three. Denki, Mei, are you two okay with taking on Rikidou?”

 

The two nod. Izuku smiles as he nods back,


“Good. Now that that’s settled, does anyone know the difference between its and it’s?”



Shouto is leaning against a large tree next to Kouji. A flock of birds hops around at their feet, pecking at seeds littering the grass. Kouji had been unusually tense since Shouto had arrived, though Shouto didn’t think it was because of his arrival. The other boy looked like he was deep in thought, so Shouto kept to himself. He had a bird figure in his left hand and a small blade in his right. He was working on the details in the wings, though his work was slowed by the constant stream of birds wanting to look at it.

 

Eventually, the light in the clearing starts to wane as the sun sinks closer to the horizon. Shouto is about to leave when he looks over at Kouji. Finally taking in the sheer amount of anguish on the other’s face, Shouto turns to face him.

 

“Are you okay?”

 

He asks. Kouji looks up as if realizing Shouto was there for the first time. 

 

“Sorry, I’m fine. It’s just…”

 

Shouto sits in silence, waiting for Kouji to go on. If he wanted to tell him what he wrong, he would, but if not Shouto wasn’t going to push.

 

“My parents have been struggling with money lately.”

 

Kouji whispers, his eyes on the ground. The surrounding birds hop over to him, rubbing against his hands and legs. 

 

“They’re trying to hide it from me, but I don’t know what to do.”

 

Shouto nods,

 

“I’m sorry that you’re struggling. If you need any help, I can do what I can. Otherwise, I can just sit and listen.”

 

Kouji shakes his head,


“There isn’t anything you can do.”

 

They fall back into silence. The birds continue trying to cheer Kouji up, and he finally reaches down to scratch their heads. 

 

Shouto stands. He makes sure his bag is secure across his chest and leaves the now-finished bird figure by Kouji’s feet,

 

“My offer will continue to stand, should you need it.”

 

Shouto says as he steps back into the trees. 

 

“Thanks…”

 

He hears Kouji mutter as he walks away. 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I went out for lunch with my grandma yesterday and picked up some snacks at Walmart. I may have purchased too much chocolate, but it's not like that's a problem.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 69: Moving In And Bringing Your Animal Friends

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Shouto makes his way through the forest, his steps silent against the fallen leaves on the ground. The season was finally turning. Leaves were changing and falling to the earth, meaning they were all trying harder than they had been before to keep their steps quiet. Especially during patrols. 

 

Shouto looks up at a bird sitting on one of the low branches of the tree a few steps ahead of him. It chirps as it watches him. After a moment, it flutters down, nipping at his heels. Shouto walks forward and the bird hops along beside him, occasionally pecking him when he stops or to get him to move faster. Worry blooms in his chest as he picks up his pace, forcing the bird to fly in order to keep up. 

 

When Shouto finally breaches the tree line and stumbles into the clearing, he spots Kouji leaning against his usual tree. His eyes are puffy and red as if he had been crying. He has a stuffed backpack at his side and a crowd of animals surrounding him, trying to cheer him up. 

 

Kouji looks up at Shouto as he enters the clearing. He wipes his eyes with the backs of his hands and some of the animals back up, allowing Shouto to kneel down in front of the other boy.

 

“What’s wrong?”

 

He asks. Kouji sniffles as he hugs his bag to his chest. He raises his hands once his bag is secure to sign, 


“The bank seized our house. They wanted CPS to take me but I remembered what you’d said about some of your friends, so I came here instead.”

 

Shouto nods slowly, 

 

“Would you like to come back to the base with me?”

 

Kouji nods,

 

“Please.”

 

Shouto stands and holds out his hand. Kouji pulls his bag over one shoulder and takes Shouto’s hand, pulling himself up. 

 

Kouji clutches his hand as they walk through the forest. The animals that had been attempting to cheer Kouji up followed behind him. More join them along the way until a swarm of different creatures is following them down the street. They get a few odd glances, but luckily no one approaches them about it. Quirks could be odd, after all. 

 

They arrive back at the base after just over an hour of walking. They could have gotten there a little sooner but the long walk tired some of the animals, as well as Kouji, so they slowed down around the halfway point. 

 

Kouji looks wary as they make their way through the lot. The creatures have spread out, exploring the plot of land. They may have been looking out for traps, vantage points, or both. 

 

Shouto pushes the door to the main warehouse open. He smiles reassuringly at Kouji as the others look up. He can feel Kouji tense at his side. The others smile and greet Kouji quietly before going back to whatever they had been doing before the two arrived. Izuku is the only one to stand. He carefully picks his way through the gathered kids until he’s standing a few feet in front of Kouji. 

 

“Hi, I’m Izuku. You’re Kouji, right?”

Kouji nods apprehensively.

“We don’t have any empty rooms right now, but Shouto is the only one in his if you’re okay with sharing with him?”

 

Kouji nods. Izuku smiles, 

 

“He can show you up, then. We’ll be starting on dinner soon, do you have any allergies or dietary restrictions?”

 

I’m vegetarian.”

 

He signs. Izuku nods, 


“Okay. I’ll leave Shouto to show you around.”

 

With that, Izuku steps back, returning to his small array of notebooks laid out on the table in the corner.

 

Shouto gently guides Kouji around the others and to the stairs. His room is near the centre of the hall, so they walk past a few of the other creatively decorated doors on the way. Tooru and Mina’s door was painted in bright colours, a few stickers of My Melody characters pop against the background. Fumikage and Hitoshi’s door is dark, a red pentagram in the centre with cat stickers surrounding it. The last door before Shouto’s was Yuuga and Mezou’s. It was rather shiny, a few drawings of different book characters breaking up the glitter.

 

Shouto’s door is relatively normal. The only unique thing about it is the wooden figure of a polar bear in place of a doorknob. It turns easily and the door opens to reveal a simply decorated room. There’s a futon in the corner, a desk against the left wall, and shelves lining the few empty walls lined with books, knives, and figures. There’s a wardrobe against the back wall, but its patterns don’t match the shelves or the desk. In fact, each of the shelves was different. 

 

“Someone will probably be up soon with a futon for you. Please, feel free to unpack.”

 

Kouji nods and steps into the room. He sets his bag down in the center of the floor and starts unpacking his things. Not even a minute later, Rikidou knocks on the door frame. He has a rolled-up futon in his hands. Shouto takes it from him, nodding his thanks. 

 

“Izuku wanted me to ask you to come down to the kitchen. The oven is being finicky and they need a fire.”

 

Shouto nods, 

 

“I’ll be right down.”

 

Rikidou smiles,

 

“Thanks, take your time.”

 

Rikidou turns on his heel, heading back down the hall. Shouto heads back into his room, setting the futon down a few feet from his own. 

 

“I have to go start a fire for dinner, will you be okay on your own for a bit?”

 

He asks. Kouji nods. He has a small stack of shirts in his hand. Shouto nods in return and steps out into the hall. He heads down the stairs quickly, making his way to the kitchen. They already have the backup fire-powered stove set up in the center of the kitchen, out of the way of anything that could catch. 


Shouto crouches next to the stove and summons a small flame to his palm. The kindling ignites quickly. 

 

Merci.

 

Yuuga says as Shouto rises to his feet.


“You’re welcome.”

 

Shouto replies. He leaves the kitchen, stepping around Fumikage on his way out. When he gets back up to his room Kouji is already finished unpacking and is sitting on his futon, book in hand. 

 

“They shouldn’t be more than another hour.”

 

Shouto says as he pulls the door closed behind him. Kouji nods but doesn’t look up from his book. Shouto grabs a trash can from his wardrobe and grabs some of his knives from the shelves. There’s an incomplete figure next to them. He settles on his futon, carving out the small details of the wolf's eyes. 



Dinner that night is filled with conversation, though Kouji sticks to sign. Kyouka is over, since it’s her night to patrol, and she enjoys talking to Kouji about his taste in music and some of the stuff the birds enjoy listening to. 

 

Kouji has a smile on his face as he settles onto his futon that night. 

 

“What do you think of everyone?”

 

Shouto asks as he slides into his futon. Kouji raises his hands above the covers so he can sign. 

 

They’re nice.

 

Shouto nods,

 

“I’m glad you think so.”

 

With that, Shouto turns off the lamp on his desk. He turns so his back is to the wall as the room becomes bathed in darkness. He knew he wouldn’t hear those on the schedule that night leave, though he stays awake trying to anyway. 

 

Kouji falls asleep first. Shouto listens to his soft breaths as he falls asleep himself.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
The first day of school is tomorrow and I'm not looking forward to it. I went to the mall yesterday and picked up a couple of shirts and a pin for my friend's birthday, which is also tomorrow. The shirts are a size bigger than I thought she might be to make sure they fit, but I didn't realize in the store that the difference between medium and large is much bigger than in other stores so I'm hoping they aren't too big.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 70: Gone

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Kyouka smiles as her dad shows her how to play a new song on her guitar. It involved a lot of the notes she had been struggling with, so it would be good practice. Her mom walks in just as she’s finishing her first play-through.

“You’re doing great, dear. Keep practicing. Now, what do you two want for dinner?”

 

“Salmon?”

 

Kyouka suggests. Her dad nods,

“That sounds good. I think I picked some up at the store yesterday.”

 

He says, looking up at his wife. She nods,

“I think I saw it in the fridge. Salmon and rice it is, then.”

 

Kyouka smiles as her mom leaves the room. She can hear her footsteps making their way into the kitchen as the door closes. The noise cuts off abruptly as the door clicks into place.


“All right, what do you say we run through the song a couple more times before we start setting the table?”

 

Kyouka nods and flips her music sheet back to the first page. She rearranges her fingers and starts the song again. 

 

--------

 

Kyouka slides off her chair and grabs her dishes once her feet touch the floor. She scrapes any crumbs into the trash before rinsing her plate and leaving it on the counter.

 

“Can you do the dishes tonight, Kyouka?”

 

Her mom asks. Kyouka nods,

“Are you and Dad going out somewhere tonight?”

 

She nods,


“We’re going out with friends for a few drinks. You’ll be okay on your own?”

 

Kyouka nods,

 

“I’ll be fine. Have fun.”

 

Her parents smile,


“Thank you, Kyouka.”

 

Kyouka smiles as she starts to fill one side of the sink, leaving the other open for her parents to rinse her dishes before she washes them. 

 

Kyouka hums to herself as she scrubs the last plate, rinsing it off and placing it into the drying rack. The clock on the oven reads “8:00”. Kyouka makes sure everything is clean before walking down the hall to her room. 

 

She pulls the door to her room open, letting it hang open as she kneels down next to her bed. She pulls out the duffel bag she had been gifted by The Group, as she had been calling them. 

 

Mezou had told her the last time she’d seen him that someone new had joined The Group, and she was looking forward to meeting him. 

 

The duffel bag is packed with snacks, an extra set of clothes, a knife from her kitchen wrapped in a towel, and a few speakers. She’s already dressed mostly in black, so all she needs is a beanie from her closet. She tucks her earjacks into the beanie, hiding them from sight. She throws her bag across her body and checks herself over in her mirror to make sure she doesn’t look recognizable. Happy with her disguise, she leaves the room, pulling the door securely shut behind her. 

 

Her key hangs on the key hooks by the door and she grabs it, tucking it into her pocket before pulling on her shoes. Her boots are metal-toed. It had taken her a long time to convince her parents to buy them for her, making them her favourite pair of shoes. It also made them the perfect pair to wear while on her way to the warehouses and for her patrol. 

 

She ties the laces tight, double knotting them before leaving her house. She locks the door behind her, shoving her key securely into her pocket.

 

The walk to the warehouses is just under an hour when she walks fast, but it’s also eerie. The streetlights provide bright circles of light. The areas they don’t hit, however, look darker than shadows normally do. Anything could pop out at her from within. 

 

She’s about twenty minutes into the walk when Mezou appears down the street. She startles, not recognizing him at first. When he waves to her, turning to face her, she slumps in relief.

 

“Hey, Mezou.”

 

“Hi, Kyouka.”

 

He steps up beside her, walking alongside her. She feels safer with him at her side. He’s been walking the path to the warehouses longer than her, after all.

 

They walk in silence. When they reach the warehouse lot, the gate is locked. For a moment, Kyouka panics. But then Mezou pulls out a key, unlocking the padlock. The gate eases open, allowing them access to the lot. 

 

“Izuku has your suit waiting for you in the main room.”

 

Kyouka nods,

 

“Alright, thank you.”

 

When they reach the main warehouse Mezou holds the door open for her. She bows shallowly in thanks before stepping into the room. As promised, her suit is folded and waiting for her beside Denki. Said boy already has most of his suit on, minus the helmet and gloves. Mei and Rikidou, whom she had only met once on her last patrol. 


A new boy sits in the corner with Hitoshi and Shouto, leaning over a map. A bird perches on the new boy’s shoulder, also looking over the map. When Kyouka walks in they all look up. The bird nudges the boy’s cheek. He smiles shyly and raises his hands to start signing. Kyouka only knows finger-spelling, so she doesn’t recognize the words he signs before his name.

 

“K-o-u-j-i.”

 

Kyouka nods and signs her own name back. The boy’s smile becomes a little happier as he turns back to the map. 


“Are you ready for your patrol?”

 

Izuku asks, appearing at the bottom of the stairs. He has a notebook tucked under his arm and his t-shirt reads “Suit”. Kyouka raises a brow as she picks up her folded suit and helmet.

“Really?”

 

Izuku smiles as he shrugs,

 

“It’s funny. Anyway, your route will be a little different tonight. I went out to visit one of the camps and Nakashima told me that they heard some villain planning a hunt in the middle of your route.”

 

Kyouka tilts her head in confusion,


“A hunt?”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“There are a few villain groups who actively hunt down the quirkless and those with mutant quirks. The heroes have been notified, but it’s more fifty-fifty as to whether they show up. I don’t want to risk any of you getting hurt, which could happen either way.”

Kyouka shutters. A small nagging feeling blooms at the back of her mind, but she pushes it away. 

 

“Alright. I’ll come down to look at the new route after I change.”

 

Izuku nods and Kyouka steps past him onto the stairs. There’s a small bathroom on the top floor. She pulls the door open and locks it behind her. She takes her boots off and changes quickly. 

 

It takes her about two minutes total to get ready. She pushes her visor up and heads back down the stairs to the main room. Denki, Mei, and Rikidou are all ready and waiting for her when she reaches the bottom of the stairs. They have the map on the table and they’re leaning over it, tracing the new path with their fingers. Kyouka joins them, memorizing the street signs and other marked landmarks.


After a few minutes, they decide they have the new path memorized and roll the map up, tucking it away on a nearby shelf. They make sure their suits are neat and that they have everything they need before they set off. 

 

“Break a leg, mes amis.

 

Yuuga says. The four nod and thank him as they leave.

 

--------

 

Kyouka returns to the warehouse with severe bruising to her chest and arms. Her visor is scratched, slightly impeding her vision. She fumbles with the door to the main warehouse for a moment before finally managing to push it open. Izuku is the only one on the main floor. He’s sitting at the table, his notebook open in front of him and a radio on in the corner. 

 

When they step through the doors he turns the radio off, interrupting the newscaster’s sentence. It sounds important, but at the moment Kyouka doesn’t really care. She’s in pain, and she just wants to go home and lie down.

“How’d it go?”

 

Izuku asks. He has a med kit in hand. Kyouka hadn’t noticed it before. It must have been in his lap or something. 

 

“As well as it could have.”

Mei replies. She’s the first to take off her helmet and the others quickly follow. Mei takes the med kit, dressing her wounds before passing it along. When it’s Kyouka’s turn, Mei helps wrap and disinfect the bruises on her back. 


Kyouka heads upstairs to change after her injuries are taken care of. The others had gone up to bed, wishing her goodnight as they went. Izuku stayed behind, stating that he’d be waiting for her when she was done. She was half-thankful to have someone walking back home with her but her other half thought she should be able to walk on her own at that point. 

 

She walks down the stairs carefully, not wanting to aggravate any of her bruises. Izuku smiles when he sees her. He holds the door open, allowing her to exit first before falling into step beside her. 

 

The walk back to her apartment feels longer than the walk to the warehouse, though that might just be because she’s tired and bruised. 

 

When they finally reach her house, Izuku bids her goodbye. She returns the words as she unlocks her door and slips inside her house. She toes off her shoes, shoves her feet into the waiting slippers, and thankfully notes that her parents' shoes have yet to show as she heads down the hall. 

 

The TV is still on in the living room, something she had done on purpose. The neighbours were rather used to her being left alone for a few hours, sometimes all night, in the evening, so she wanted to make sure they thought she was still home. 

 

Normally, she’d ignore whatever the screen displayed and click it off before going to bed. This time, however, she pauses as she reaches for the remote. 

 

An unfortunate event took place earlier this evening. A villain group known to target both those who are quirkless and those with mutation quirks hit a restaurant and bar block. The Heroic Pint was hit the worst, with seven severely injured and four dead. The identities of the deceased have been released to us in the hopes of finding family or friends. I will list the names now. Takahashi Rumi, Satou Emi, Jirou Mika, and Jirou Kyotoku. Authorities ask that anyone who recognizes these names reaches out as soon as possible.

 

Kyouka tunes out the rest of the woman’s words. Belatedly, she realizes that social services will be coming for her soon. 

 

She doesn’t bother grabbing her bag again. She doesn’t even close the door. She runs down the steps of her porch to the street. Her steps are loud thwacks of slippers instead of the usual thud of her boots. 

 

She catches Izuku as he’s about to step around a corner. He turns to face her when she’s still a few feet away and opens his arms to envelop her in a hug. 


“Do you want to talk about what happened?”

 

He asks, his voice soft. Kyouka sniffs as tears start to fall.

“They’re gone.”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
Today was picture day and I wore a new pair of ghost earrings I got at Spirit Halloween the other day. They are very cute and were more than worth the $6 I paid for them. I also bought a 20-inch posable spider that I named Frank. In other news, my cat came inside this morning and ended up spending the entire day inside the house, proven by the fact that he was still here when I got home. He hasn't done this in over a month, so I was very happy to see him. In other other news, I'll be participating in Whumptober this year so you'll be able to expect daily painful uploads during the month of October.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 71: Specialization

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Kyouka doesn’t remember the walk back to the warehouse. She barely remembers Mina coming up to her, and guiding her up to her room. Tooru is already inside, leaning against the wall. The room is brightly coloured, though it’s lit only by lamps. Mina directs her to a bean bag in the corner, gently pushing her down onto the plush surface. She curls up into the chair, burrowing down as far as she can get. Tooru settles a blanket over her. Kyouka tugs it up to cover her chin, crying into the fabric. Mina rests a hand on her back as she sobs. 



Kyouka doesn’t leave the room for two days. The others bring food to her, though she barely eats it, and try to comfort her throughout the day. She stews in her own thoughts throughout these two days.

 

Her parents were dead and some kind of notification or something must have been given regarding her disappearance. She knew from Shinsou that she didn’t want to end up in foster care, so her only option was to stay with The Group. The Group was planning on taking over the government, fixing the issues they saw and ultimately trying to make Japan better. She knew, deep down, that most of it was at least a little childish, that doing absolutely everything they wanted to was impossible. But they would at least be able to stop the group and those like it that had taken her parents. 

 

On the third day, Kyouka makes a decision. She gets out of the bean bag, taking a moment to regain her balance before leaving the room. When she reaches the bottom of the stairs everyone else looks up at her. Mina smiles and walks over.


“Kyouka!”

 

She cheers, stopping at the bottom of the stairs. Kyouka smiles back, coming to a stop next to the other girl.

 

“I want to be more involved.”

 

She states, staring over at Izuku. He’s sitting at the table, a few of his notebooks in front of him.

“I want to specialize in the hunter groups. I want to tear them apart and watch their members rot.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Of course. I have some notes on a few of them already, if you want to read them. And we can focus your training more on stealth and information gathering. Once you’ve recent sufficient skill, in maybe a year? You can go on some solo or partner missions.”

 

Kyouka nods,


“Thank you.”

 

Izuku nods back as he hops down from his chair. 

 

“Of course. Follow me.”

 

Izuku leads Kyouka back up the stairs and back down the hall. There are nine rooms on the right side and seven on the left, meaning that while there were enough rooms for them all to have their own, a few had still chosen to bunk with one or two others. Both because they knew that there would inevitably be more members and because they had grown used to sleeping next to someone in the apartment. 

 

Izuku is one of the only ones with his own room. It’s at the end of the hall on the left. His is one of the bigger rooms, giving him room for the sheer amount of bookcases and shelves on his wall. He has a desk in the corner near a small window. An old laptop sits on top, connected to a mouse. 

 

Izuku walks over to one of the shelves closest to the desk. The shelf is lined with notebooks, like many of the others. Though there were lots of other books, too. Kyouka spots a few law, biology, and government textbooks as well as a few non-fiction and fiction books. All organized on their own respective shelves.

 

Izuku hands her two notebooks, each one tabbed.

“They’re organized based on group in alphabetical order. I don’t know which group in particular it was that killed your parents, but we can find that out together. I can get us into the CCTV. When you’re ready.”

 

Kyouka nods, staring down at the books in her hand. 

 

“Thank you, Izuku. I don’t think I’ll ever be able to repay you for this.”

A small smile tugs at Izuku’s lips. 

 

“Of course. The room to the right of mine is unclaimed, though there’s a desk, chair, and lamp set up inside.”

 

Kyouka nods again. She leaves the room and slips into the one Izuku had described. There’s a wooden desk accompanied by a roller chair in the corner, a standing lamp opposite it. There’s also a shelf against the wall that Izuku must have forgotten about. She settles at the desk, flicking on the lamp before taking a moment to adjust her chair and flipping open the first notebook. 

 

--------

 

Izuku and Hitoshi are attempting to teach Kyouka how to walk quietly in the training warehouse. They were starting out using sneakers so she’d be able to get the movement down before she learns in her boots.

 

“Move slowly.”

 

Izuku instructs. 

 

“Once you’re able to do that well you can speed up.”

 

Kyouka nods as she gently sets her foot down. She smiles when she doesn’t make any noise for a few steps. Shinsou and Izuku both smile back. They’re about to continue when Kaminari appears at the door,

 

“Hey guys! Yuuga and Fumi finished with dinner.”

 

Izuku, Hitoshi, and Kyouka all nod and make their way out of the warehouse. 


“How’s the training going?”

 

Kaminari asks as they walk back to the main warehouse.

“Well, I think.”

 

Kyouka says as she fiddles with one of her earjacks. Izuku nods in agreement,

 

“It is. You’re doing great.”

 

Kyouka smiles as they approach the warehouse. Everyone else is already waiting at the table. There are plates and bowls waiting for them already as Yuuga and Fumi cart out the completed dinner. They grab their dishes and form a line at the cart, taking their portions before returning to their spots at the table.

 

They talk about their coming plans as well as a few of the more mundane aspects of living in the warehouses. 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
My cat came inside again yesterday and spent the day in the basement so he could lie on dirty sheets and stay away from the dog. I spent some time down there with him before he left. I ran some errands with my parents and got my rabbit a hay cake with bits of carrot on top. He liked the carrot pieces but then he started throwing the mini-hay bale around and making a mess all over the floor.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 72: A New Friend At The Park (At Least It’s Not Another Alley)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Denki’s bag bounces against his side as he walks down the street. Behind him, the wagon containing his grocery bags bounces as it hits cracks in the sidewalk. Denki had been sent out for groceries on his own since they’d only needed top-ups and snacks. 

He hums as he walks, trying to entertain himself for the long walk ahead of him. He was starting to wish at least one more person had come with him as he knew he was going to get bored. 

He’s walking past the park, which is normally deserted at this time of day when he spots a girl sitting on one of the benches. She looks tired and has her arm clutched to her chest as if it’s injured. Denki turns toward the park, taking the cement path down to the play structures. He approaches the girl slowly, taking in her appearance as he does so. 

Her black hair is pulled back into a ponytail. Her eyes are a matching colour, though what really catches Denki’s attention are the bruises peeking out at the edges of her clothes. 

“Hi.”

Denki greets, smiling and waving as he approaches. The girl looks up. She tentatively returns the smile and waves, tugging her sleeve down as she does so.

“I’m Denki.”

He says. The girl nods,

“I’m Momo.”

She returns. Denki grins,

“Nice to meet you! Can I ask why you’re here alone?”

He says. The girl hesitates for a moment before shrugging,

“I merely needed some time to myself. May I ask why you have a wagon full of groceries?”

Denki shrugs,

“I volunteered to go shopping but I’m starting to regret not asking someone else to come with me. It’s a long walk back and I’m already bored.”

He pouts and the girl chuckles,

“I see. May I offer my assistance?”

Denki smiles,

“Sure!”

Momo hops down from the bench. He ponytail bounces as she walks beside him back up the cement path to the sidewalk. They talk about an array of different topics, mainly things they enjoy, for the first half-hour or so of the walk. 

“Can I ask you a question? You don’t have to answer if your don’t want to.”

Denki says. Momo looks like she’s taking a moment to think before nodding,

“Alright.”

“How’d you get those bruises? Sorry-”

Momo raises a hand, cutting him off before he can continue. 

“No need to apologize. They’re merely from training. My parents are very insistent that I become a hero and are trying to prepare me however they can. I just didn’t do as well in yesterday’s lesson as I normally do.”

Denki nods. Bruises from their own training sessions, especially sparring, were common. 

“We have a lot of med-kits at home for the same reason, if you want to dress them.”

Momo glances at him,

“Are you certain?”

Denki nods, 

“Of course. Izuku is pretty used to helping kids we met, like, an hour ago, anyway. It’s part of the reason we have so many.”

Momo blinks,

“Bringing home random children is common?”

Denki nods,

“Yeah, it’s kinda how we all came together in the first place. There are, hold on.”

Denki takes a moment to count on his fingers before looking back up, 

“Sixteen of us so far and I’m pretty sure there will be more.”

“Wow, Izuku is okay with taking care of all of you?”

Denki nods,

“Yeah, of course. He was the first, after all. Then he found Hitoshi, then Shouto, then Tokoyami. I forget the order from there, though.”

Denki says as he shrugs. Momo nods,

“I see. So Izuku takes you all in because he was once a hurt child himself?”

Denki nods,

“I guess so, yeah.”

Their conversation moves on to what life is like in the warehouses, their training, and how they keep themselves occupied. Momo starts to look nervous as they enter the red light district but Denki does his best to reassure her. However, he realizes he may not have described the warehouse lot properly when Momo looks at him, shocked, as he unlocks the gate.

“Why are we stopping here?’

She asks as Denki pushes the gate open.

“This is where we live?”

Denki says, a questioning lilt at the end as he grows confused.

“Did I not say that? Sorry, yeah, we live on the warehouse lot. We have electricity and running water and everything, if that’s what you’re concerned about. They’re actually pretty useful, since we have more than enough rooms for us all to have our own, even in just the first warehouse. Though, a few still chose to room with each other, like I said earlier.”

Denki rambles as he steps onto the lot. He holds the gate open for Momo, who hesitates before stepping through. She sticks to his side as they walk down the path to the residential warehouse near the center of the lot. Denki pushes the door open and it’s quickly grabbed by Hitoshi, who holds it open for both of them. The others crowd the wagon, grabbing bags and carrying them off to the kitchen to put the groceries away. Izuku doesn’t join the crowd. He walks up to them, smiling kindly at Momo as Shouto grabs the wagon to put it away. 

“Hi, I’m Izuku.”

He greets, bowing quickly. Momo blinks at him in surprise,

“You’re Izuku?”

He nods, glancing at Denki as he does so. 

“I promise I said all good things.”

Denki says, raising his hands in surrender. Izuku huffs,

“I know, Denks.”

Momo nods slowly,

“Sorry, I guess I just expected you to be… older.”

Izuku shrugs,

“Depending on how exactly Denki worded it, that’s to be expected.”

Momo nods,

“I’m Momo. It’s nice to meet you.”

She bows back, though a little delayed. 

“It’s nice to meet you, too.”

Izuku says. Seeing his opportunity, Denki interrupts,

“I’m going to go grab the med-kit. I’ll be right back.”

Denki walks away and around a corner to the closet containing most of their collection. Izuku turns a worried look to Momo, looking her over for injuries as he does so.

“Are you okay?”

He asks. Momo clears her throat before answering,

“Just a few bruises from training yesterday. My parents are very insistent that I become a hero. I just didn’t do as well as normal.”

Izuku nods. He isn’t going to say anything, but that’s when both Denki and Shouto come back into the room.

“My father was the same.”

Shouto says. Momo nods,

“I see. Did something happen to him to get you here?”

Shouto shakes his head,

“No, unfortunately, he’s still alive. He was incredibly abusive, so I left him.”

Momo blinks,

“Ah, I see. My apologies for asking.”

Shouto shrugs,

“There’s nothing to apologize for. I offered the information, after all.”

Before either of them can say anything else Denki presents Momo with the med kit.

“Here ya go. There’s a bathroom over there if you’d rather do it in private.”

He says. Momo nods, taking the kit generally before she walks toward the bathroom. 

“So, how’d you meet her?”

Izuku asks once the door is closed. 

“She was sitting alone at the park and offered to walk with me when I said I was bored.”

Izuku snorts,

“Why didn’t you ask someone else to go with you?”


Denki sticks his tongue out at Izuku before answering,

“I thought it would be fine. I was wrong.”

Izuku shakes his head in exasperation before walking away. 

“We’ll just have to keep it in mind for next time, then.”

Denki rolls his eyes at Izuku’s back but the other boy turns around with a playful glare,

“Really?”

Denki throws his hands up,

“How’d you even know?!”

Izuku grins, waving his hands in front of his face in an arching motion.

“I’m magic.”

Denki groans as Izuku continues to walk away. 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I went to my library's comi-con on Saturday and bought myself a little crochet mouse that lives in a mushroom house. I have also decided that I must learn how to crochet so I can make such things for myself as so many cute designs on Etsy are patterns instead of people selling the actual object. I'm also experiencing minor cold symptoms which I'm desperately hoping don't become a full-blown cold because I don't think I can afford to miss a day of school.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 73: Conversations Over Tea (And Schedules)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Momo emerges from the bathroom a few minutes later. Izuku had returned with a tray of tea, one mug for himself, one for Denki, one for Momo, and another three for the others who had asked. Momo thanks him and takes her mug. She takes a sip and smiles with a slight tilt to her head,


“How’d you know how I like it?”

 

Izuku shrugs,


“I’m good at reading people. Also, anyone who steeps for less than five minutes is a monster and mint is usually a safe choice.”

 

Momo snorts before ducking her face back into her mug.

 

“True.” 

 

“So,”


Izuku starts, 

 

“What do you plan to be when you’re older?”

 

He asks, directing the question to Momo. She shrugs,

“My parents want me to be a hero. It would help boost our standing as a family and would allow them to further their connections. But…”

 

Izuku stays silent, giving her a minute to think after she trails off,


“I don’t think it’s really what I want to do. I’ve been able to see some of the…well, I guess corruption is the best word, within the system.”

 

Izuku tilts his head slightly, 

 

“Like what?”

 

“The ranking system’s only purpose is popularity and causes a lot of aggression among the heroes. I’ve also been able to witness the commission covering up a variety of different crimes heroes have committed since my parents have close relations with the commission.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“We’ve noticed the same. In fact, we’re working to fix it.”

 

Momo blinks,

 

“Really?”

 

“We’ve come together through various ways the system has failed us and want to ensure it doesn’t happen to anyone else. Or, more realistically, happens to less people. Currently, we’re working on building a good reputation, increasing our numbers, gathering information, and planning out how we’re going to do it.”

 

Momo nods,


“I suppose that’s plausible. Though I’m wondering how you plan to do such things as a group of kids?”

 

Izuku leans forward, obviously excited to talk about his plan,

 

“That’s what’s so exciting! Right now, your quirks are all still growing and evolving. As are the rest of your muscles, of course. It’s easier to train and create new moves with your quirks, as well as easier to take up different routines and lifestyles to improve said quirks. It’s also easier to gather information because, well, most people don’t pay attention to kids.”

 

Momo nods to show she’s still listening,

 

“I have a question, if you don’t mind?”

 

Izuku nods to encourage her to continue,

“You said ‘Your quirks’. Do you not have a quirk?”

 

Izuku nods, though his posture becomes tense and his shoulders pull up toward his neck,

 

“I don’t. I’m quirkless.”

 

Momo simply nods,


“Alright. Go on.”

 

Izuku takes a deep breath before continuing, 

 

“Right now, we’re finding information on the crimes the commission has covered up and different groups whose mission is hunting down and killing those with mutant quirks and those who are quirkless.”

 

Momo tilts her head,

 

“While I support both, those seem like rather different goals. Would it not be best to focus on one at a time?”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Normally, yes. But one of us lost their parents to such a group, so two of our numbers are now researching them.”

Momo nods,


“I see. That makes sense, then…is there anything I can do to help?”

 

Izuku smiles,

 

“What’s your schedule like?”



Yoayorozu joins Ochako, Yuuga, and Mezou’s group within the week. She starts training her quirk with them, too. Izuku gives her a special diet while she’s with them. 




“I was wondering why you always feed me so much while I’m here?”

 

Momo asks as she takes a bowl of miso soup from Denki. He shrugs,


“I thought Izuku would have gone over that with you?”

 

Momo nods,


“He likely did, but I must confess I may not have been paying attention. My parents have recently been pushing for me to memorize the molecular construction of more objects so I’ve been going over them in my head a lot.”

 

Denki hums,


“Oh. Well, then, you’d better ask him. He doesn’t let us read each other’s analysis unless we give express permission.”

 

Momo nods,

 

“I see. I’ll be sure to do that before I leave, then.”

 

Denki nods,


“I’ll see you later. I gotta work on some of my close-combat moves.”

 

He says as he runs out the door of the main warehouse. Momo nods goodbye, unable to wave due to holding the bowl. She hums as she sits down on one of the couches and eats the meal she’d been given. 

 

Izuku comes down the stairs a few minutes later, just as she’s standing to return her dishes to the kitchen. 

 

“Ah, Izuku! I have a question for you.”

 

Izuku switches course to walk toward her instead of walking toward the front doors. 

 

“What’s up?”

 

He asks. 


“I was wondering why you keep giving me so much food while I’m here.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Of course. You told me your quirk requires fat lipids, so I’m trying to make sure you have enough for your quirk.”

 

Momo nods,

 

“I understand the concern, but I assure you my parents have me on the required diet.”

 

Izuku tilts his head,


“Does it include the extra training or vigilante work you’ve been doing? Or is it, and I really don’t mean to be offensive or anything, a diet made to accommodate your quirk’s needs, or is it purely to keep a specific figure?”

 

Momo blinks and her brows furrow as she stares down at her dishes. Izuku doesn’t say anything else as he walks out the front doors, leaving Momo to her thoughts. 



A few days later, Momo returns with a printed-out schedule in hand. She hands it to Izuku, who is waiting for her by the front gates of the warehouse plot. Izuku flips through it, reading quickly before handing it back to her with a nod,

 

“We can follow this. But your training here will be a little more toned down.”


Momo nods,

 

“Of course. I merely brought it along so you would know when I’m free.”

 

“The current schedule should fit this fine, but we can go over it together just in case.”

 

Momo gives a short bow before following him onto the plot and down the path to the main warehouse. 



Izuku and Momo stoop over the desk in Izuku’s room, the current patrol schedule laid out in front of them.

 

“This should work.”

 

Momo says as she re-reads the schedule. Izuku nods as he refolds the schedule and tucks it away.


“I’m glad.”

 

Momo stands awkwardly in front of the desk as Izuku puts the papers back into their rightful spot. When he rises, he smiles reassuringly at her,


“You look like you want to say something. What’s up?”

 

She takes a deep breath before forcing herself to make eye contact and speak,

 

“My parents have been getting more harsh with my training, as I’m sure you could tell by the schedule. I was wondering…since you supposedly helped shouto get away from Endeavor if you could do the same for me. If it gets worse, I mean. It’s fine for now.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Of course. Though I don’t know how difficult it would be for you. Your parents aren’t heroes, so they have a little less sway, but they also have a lot of money…”

 

Izuku trails off. His muttering becomes so unintelligible that Momo can’t make out what he’s saying, so she just shuffles out of the room, careful not to disturb his train of thought.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I'm currently trying to complete Whumptober, which has become a little more work than I expected, which is why this update is a little later today. In other news, I'm currently working on a crochet jellyfish.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/9pzprSnuNx

Chapter 74: Information, Please :D

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku hums to himself as he sits at his desk. He has the map and patrol schedules out in front of him. Momo would be going for her fifth patrol that night, so he was changing their route to make it a little more difficult. He had heard reports of an increased number of muggings in the area. Nothing too bad, but he’d had her group on a sparse route so far and was looking to bump them up. 

 

He finishes drawing out the route and nods to himself. He caps his marker and tucks it back into the pencil cup at the corner of his desk. He slides the schedule back into one of the drawers of his desk and rolls up the map, tucking it under his arm as he stands. 

 

He exits his room, closing his door behind him before making his way down the hall to the top of the stairs. He purposefully makes his footsteps audible as he walks down to the main room. The others look up at him as he comes down. Ochako, Yuuga, Mezou, and Momo are already dressed in their uniforms, minus the helmets, which are clutched at their sides. 

 

“I have a new route for you.”

 

Izuku says as he sets the map down on one of the tables. The four gather around him, looking over the route. Izuku leaves them to memorize it and walks over to one of the couches. Mina sits on one of the cushions, Tsu on the floor between her legs as Mina braids her hair.

 

“Have either of you seen Kyouka?”

 

He asks.

 

“No.”

 

Tsu replies while Mina shakes her head,

 

“She might be in our room.”

 

Tooru offers from her place on one of the other couches, a book in hand.

 

“Either there or the training warehouse. She’s neem spending a lot of time in both.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Thanks. If you see her, tell her I’m looking for her.”

 

“Will do!”

 

Mina calls as Izuku walks up the stairs. He knocks on the door of Tooru and Kyouka’s shared room. When no one answers, he announces his presence and slowly pushes the door open. The room is empty. Of people, at least. There are a lot of stuffed animals and a few instruments pushed against the wall. Izuku sighs as he leaves. He runs back down the stairs and to the main doors. The night’s patrol group is making their way out at the same time. Izuku waves to them as he leaves, heading down the path to the training warehouse. 

 

Izuku ends up finding Kyouka in the basement of the warehouse. She has her steel-toed boots on and is practicing walking silently, though to little avail.

 

“Want some help?”

 

Izuku asks as he walks down the stairs to the basement. She startles at the sound of his voice but gathers herself quickly.


“Please.”

 

She says, glaring down at her boots. Izuku nods as he walks up to her. He shows her how to adjust her weight with each step so she doesn’t make any noise, even with the metal addition to her boots. 



Izuku hums to himself as he walks down the street. His duffel bag bounces at his side, a few of the items inside banging against each other and creating muffled noises. The sun beams down at his back, making him glad he’d dressed for the warm weather. 

 

He rounds a corner and stops in front of a decrepit building. The building is short, contrasting the tall buildings surrounding it. Most of the windows are boarded up and grime covers the steps leading up to the front door. Izuku walks up to the porch. He doesn’t bother to knock, simply looking up at the small dot of a camera hidden in the wood grain before opening the door and stepping inside.

 

The room, at first, is what you’d expect from any old abandoned building. Broken furniture, holes chewed into the walls, and dust covering every surface. Izuku walks through the main room, doing his best not to breathe too deeply in case of mold, and turns a corner you wouldn’t be able to see unless you were right in front of it. 

 

The hall is cleaner, though still dirty. Izuku slips into a seemingly random room and makes his way to the back of it. He pries open the trap door hidden under a layer of grim, revealing a pristine set of stairs underneath lit by dim fluorescents. 

 

Izuku walks down the steps, easing the door closed once he’s far enough down. The room at the bottom of the stairs is the complete opposite of those above. It’s completely clean, the furniture intact and comfortable looking.

 

Giran stands from the couch he’s sitting on. He smiles as Izuku enters,

 

“Izuku! It’s wonderful to see you again, especially so soon. What brings you here?”

 

Izuku doesn’t smile as he settles on the chair across from Giran. He sets his bag down on the coffee table between them and pulls out a few notebooks and files.

 

“I want you to get me whatever information you can on the adults of the Yaoyorozu family. One that rich can’t be without crime, whether that be tax evasion or something else. In exchange, I’ll give you the information you’ve been asking around for, as well as my analysis on some heroes that have been making…names for themselves.”

 

Giran shakes his head with a smirk as he picks up one of the files,


“You really think information like that can be traded for anything except a serious amount of-”

 

He cuts himself off as he becomes enthralled by the writing in the file. He puts it down and picks up the next, then the next, and the next. When he’s done he looks up at Izuku in surprise,

 

“How’d you get all this?”

 

Izuku shrugs,

 

“I have my ways. Though, if that’s not enough, I believe the remaining favour I have from saving your life should be enough.”

 

Giran sighs as he looks over the files on the table,


“Fine. But this is the last time I’m giving you something for anything except yen. You’d better be ready to pay next time.”

 

Izuku nods as he hops down from the chair and picks up his bag, which is now significantly lighter.


“I’ll be honest, I didn’t completely expect to be granted anything this time. Thanks, by the way.”


He says as he dips into a bow. He turns away, leaving Giran behind as he heads back to the staircase. At the last moment, he turns back around,

 

“By the way, how’d you get permission to stay in Bear’s hideout for the weekend? I thought he hated your guts.”

 

Giran shrugs, 

 

“None of your business, kid.”

 

Izuku smiles as he starts his trek back to the surface,

 

“Meh, I’ll find out some other day.”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I had to unravel the shirt I was working on because I majorly fucked it up at some point without noticing and was no longer able to fix it. I am now putting off restarting. In happier news, my cat has been spending way more time inside and I have a chair in my room for him so it's nice to be able to spend time with him again.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/67DB9WfMKM

Chapter 75: Tax Evasion, As It Turns Out, Is A Crime (As Are Other Things)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku smiles to himself as he looks over the files Giran had delivered to him. Copies of files belonging to the Yaoyorozus. Immense amounts of tax evasion, betting on illegal fighting rings, and illegal weapons purchases, which were later sold with artfully done false documentation so they could be sold for more among more legitimate circles.

 

No rich family was without their crimes, and the Yaoyorozus were as close to the line as you could get before becoming classified as a crime family. He tucks the files under his arm and heads down the stairs, through the common area and out to the gate. He stands just within the threshold, waiting for Momo to arrive an hour and a half before her patrol route, as she had done consistently since she started working with them. 



She arrives just on time, smiling when she spots Izuku waiting for her. He opens the gate for her, keeping pace at her side as they walk toward the warehouse. 

 

“May I ask what those files are for?”

 

Momo asks. Izuku smiles, 

 

“Remember how you asked me to gather information on your parents in case you needed to get away?”


Momo nods, realization blooming on her face.

 

“Might I know what their crimes are? I must admit, the topic is of great interest to me. Even if the information ends up going unused.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Of course. One of their more prominent crimes is tax evasion, though that’s mostly expected for people as rich as them, they still owe the government a lot . They’ve also been placing large bets within illegal fighting rings and purchasing illegal weapons for cheap before faking certificates for them and selling them within more legitimate circles.”

 

Momo’s eyes are wide now, though her steps don’t falter.


“I see…I expected the tax evasion, I know it’s commonplace among my parents’ friends, but the rest…the rest is a bit of a shock.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“I’ll keep the files under the floorboards in my room. If you ever need them, all you have to do is ask, okay?”

 

Momo nods as they come up to the doors of the warehouse,

 

“Thank you, Izuku.”

 

Izuku smiles as he opens the door to the warehouse for her,


“You’re welcome, Momo.”

 

--------

 

Momo gasps as she stumbles into the warehouse, two months after her conversation with Izuku. She’s bleeding from a shallow wound in her stomach, as well as a few cuts covering her upper arms. They wouldn’t be enough to kill her, in fact, the blood was already slowed enough that there was no chance of her bleeding out. However, the wounds could still become infected.

 

Izuku, Shouto, and Mezou all rush toward her. The others gathered in the living room (Denki, Tooru, Fumikage, and Tsu) rush off and come back with different supplies. Denki returns with a medkit, Tooru with a change of clothes, Fumikage with a blanket, and Tsu with tea. Izuku leads Momo to the couch while Shouto helps pick out what they’ll need from the medkit and Mezou cuts away the fabric blocking the wound. Shouto starts disinfecting the wounds on her arms while Tsu focuses on the larger one on her abdomen.

 

It doesn’t take them long to have all her wounds treated. Mina, who had come down the stairs with everyone else when they heard the commotion, guides Momo to the bathroom with the change of clothes. Mina emerges almost immediately and they all wait in the living room, snacks and drinks starting to circulate. When Momo emerges, now dressed in a pink t-shirt and white shorts, they usher her onto the couch. The blanket is thrown over her and she’s handed a cup of tea. Izuku stands at the front of the crowd, giving her a pointed look. After a moment, Momo nods. Izuku nods back and walks over to the stairs.

 

Everyone else takes seats around the room, some on the chairs, some on the floor, and a few in other’s laps.

 

“Do you wanna talk about what happened?”

 

Kyouka asks. Momo takes a deep breath. She stares into her tea for a moment before turning her attention to the room.


“My parents came to the conclusion that I should start learning how to dodge armed villains. They started with real knives instead of the usual props. The reason they gave was that it would be more realistic and prepare me for my future patrols. I did much better than I expected, though. They had two individuals against me, and I spent nearly an hour dodging.”

 

Izuku whistles as he comes down the stairs, the files tucked under his arm.

 

“Well, then, it seems like your extra time here is paying off.”

 

He leans over the back of the couch, the files now in his hand and hanging next to Momo’s face,


“So, would you prefer your own room or sharing?”

 

Momo gives him a shy smile,


“Would a single room be too much trouble? I’m used to sleeping alone.”

 

Izuku nods as he steps back,

 

“Of course. We have the spares. Mina can show them to you when you’re ready. I’m going to go spread this,”

 

He waves the files in the air,


“Within the right circles. Speaking of leaving, someone else can go on patrol in your place. Or they can go on their own, up to them.”

 

He says, shrugging as he walks toward the doors.


“I’ll be back later tonight.”

 

With that, he slips out the door.

 

--------

 

It doesn’t take more than a week for the news of the Yaoyorozus' many crimes, as well as their now “missing” daughter, to hit the headlines. It’s all anyone talks about and leads to Momo being confined to the warehouse plot, though that doesn’t seem to bother her. A few search parties are sent out for her, but she isn’t found and, within three weeks of her parents’ arrest, she’s assumed dead and the case is closed.

 

It’s not like she was old enough to inherit the money, after all. Nor were most of the funds even eligible to be passed on to the rest of the family. The government had to be reimbursed, fines had to be paid, and illegally acquired money had to be “gotten rid of”. Code, Izuku knows, for more money given to the government’s funds.




Momo smiles in greeting as Iuzku and the rest of his patrol group return to the warehouse.


“How’d it go?”

 

She asks.

 

“Good.”

 

They all reply in unison. Momo hums,

 

“So, no new members yet?”

 

Izuku laughs as he sets his helmet down on the coffee table,

 

“Not yet but, judging by how often newbies are acquired, it shouldn’t be much longer.”

 

Mei hums as she walks into the room from the kitchen. She has some device in her hands that she’s fiddling with,


“I have a few suits ready and waiting to be altered.”

 

She states as she walks across the room and into one of the rooms used mostly for storage since they weren’t quite big enough for bedrooms and none of them had yet to need an office outside of their own rooms. Though, Izuku was considering giving one to Kyouka. 

 

The door to the room closes behind Mei. They wait a couple of minutes, but she doesn’t come out.

 

“Huh.”

 

Hitoshi says, voicing their thoughts. Izuku shrugs and heads up to the staircase, his helmet now tucked back under his arm.


“Try not to sleep down here, Momo. The couch can’t be good for your back.”

 

Momo shrugs as she brings a cup up to her lips. 

 

“We’ll see.”

 

Izuku chuckles as he heads up the stairs, Hitoshi, Shouto, and Tooru walking up behind him.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
Sorry this chapter is a few hours late. My weekend was super busy with volunteering and going to the pumpkin patch with my cousins. We're starting hot tools in Hairstyling and I'm not looking forward to it. I burned myself 100% of the time I used the curling iron doing wrap curls, and now I have to do them again. In more exciting news, I'm going to a sleepover at my friend's house after school on Thursday (Friday is a PA day). We're bringing our bags to school and walking to her house with them since she's about a 10-minute walk from the school.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/ZyXkcXsT7e

Chapter 76: Monkey Boy

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Tooru hums to herself quietly as she runs down the street. Izuku is running ahead of her, Shouto at his side. Hitoshi is a few paces behind Tooru, though he hasn’t lost them yet. She pauses in her humming when she hears something below them. She slows to a stop and stoops to peer over the edge of the building. Hitoshi stops beside her, doing the same. Izuku and Shouto seem to realize that they weren’t being followed after going down a building or so and come running back.

 

“What’s wrong?”

 

Izuku asks, keeping his voice low. Tooru squints as she looks into the alley, taking a moment before she answers.

 

“I thought I heard something…”

 

She trails off as a rustling comes from below. The four exchange looks before Hitoshi gently pushes her toward the edge,

“Why me?!”

 

She whisper-yells. She looks to Izuku and Shouto, hoping one of them will protest, but they both just nod,


“You’re the one who heard them.”

 

Hitoshi says. 

 

“Plus, it would be good for you to get some experience with the newbies. Maybe even give The Speech?”

 

Izuku adds. Tooru sighs. She adjusts her stance and jumps down to the ledge below. She lands on the balls of her feet and leans back, regaining her balance. She jumps down into the alley below from there and starts looking for anything human-shaped.

 

It takes her a minute, but she eventually finds a boy around their age huddled behind a dumpster. He has what looks like a tail wrapped around himself and his head is resting on his arms.

 

“Hello?”

 

Tooru whispers, though a little louder than she had been on the roof. The boy moves and his eyes blink open. He jumps when his eyes land on her, hitting his head against the dumpster. The metal clangs, causing both of them to wince. Tooru stills, listening for anyone that might be responding to the sound, hoping for easy money. When no one emerges from the shadows, Tooru shifts onto her heels and holds out her hand,


“I’m Tooru! Sorry about scaring you.”

 

The boy blinks at her before tentatively gripping her hand,

 

“Um, I’m Mashirao. It’s fine, I probably shouldn’t be sleeping back here anyway.”

 

Tooru shrugs,


“I probably shouldn’t be looking for people in dark alleys on my own .”

 

She says the last few words a little louder than strictly necessary. She can practically see Hitoshi rolling his eyes.


“Um, are you talking to someone else?”

 

Mashirao asks, looking around nervously. Specifically at the only exit Tooru is currently blocking.

 

“Oh, sorry!”

 

She says, jumping back.


“I didn’t mean to be in the way. And, yes. There are three boys on the roof, up there.”

 

She points up at their silhouettes, barely visible in the dim moonlight.

 

“They sent me down because I’m the only one who hasn’t talked to a new kid yet. If you want to be, that is.”

 

Mashirao blinks,


“New kid?”

 

Tooru nods,


“We’re part of a group of kids trying to take down the government. Not yet, of course.”

 

She tacks on upon seeing the bewildered expression on his face.


“But we’ve all experienced different problems with the current system and we want to change it. For the better, we hope. Right now we’re growing our numbers and changing the plan around to include everyone new. We’re also trying to gain a good reputation among civilians with our whole vigilante thing. It’s been going well so far, I think.”


Mashirao shakes his head and Tooru pauses. 

 

“Sorry, just. How big is this group?”

 

Tooru whispers to herself as she ticks off her fingers,

 

“Nineteen, including me.”

 

Mashirao stares at her,


“How?”

 

Tooru shrugs,

 

“The government is fucked and we’re all victims of it in different ways, I guess.”

 

“Where do you all live?”

 

“A big warehouse plot. We use one as the main residential building, a second one is our gym, and a third is Mei’s lab. There are way more, some more usable than others. We haven’t needed to use any others yet, though.”

 

Mashirao nods,

 

“So, you’re the vigilante groups I’ve heard people complaining about?”

 

Tooru shrugs again,

 

“Probably.”

 

Mashirao nods,


“Right. Who’s in charge?”


“Izuku. He’s in charge of the plan and our schedules and stuff. And he’s the one who started the group. We all get a say, though, and he takes all of our opinions into account before he decides on something. We’ve had votes a few times, too. It’s a lot of fun. The last time Izuku went on an errand, we set up a ouija board in the middle of the living room and tried to perform a seance. I don’t think we successfully summoned anything, though the shadows have seemed a little darker lately…”

 

She trails off, now thoroughly trying to figure out if they actually summoned a demon a week ago. Mashirao pulls her out of her thoughts with another question.

 

“What exactly do you want the government to look like?”

 

“Oh! Well, we want to get rid of the ranking system, period. The official one, at least. There isn’t any way to stop people from making their own. It causes heroes to focus more on publicity than actually saving people. We also want to put stricter rules in place to prevent heroes from abusing their power. We want to instate programs and laws to aid in stopping quirk discrimination, of course. Kyouka is going to be in charge of abolition hunting groups specifically and Hitoshi wants to specialize in improving the current foster system, I think. There’s more, like building more homeless shelters and stuff, but we’re still working out the specifics. It turns out politics are complicated and it takes time to learn about them.”

 

Mashirao nods,

 

“Okay. So I’d be provided shelter and food in exchange for helping you overthrow the government?”

 

Tooru nods,

“Yeah, basically. You can choose if you want to help with the general stuff or specialize if you want. I’m thinking about specializing in more involved quirk training for kids and further education for doctors that diagnose kids’ quirks.”

 

Mashirao nods, though his head is slightly tilted,


“Can I ask why?”

 

Tooru nods,


“Sure. I was told my quirk was a mutation so I didn’t try to train with it much. It makes me invisible, so I just thought I’d be invisible forever. But Izuku showed me that that’s not right. I can actually control the way light fluctuates around and through me. It was just stuck at making me invisible by default.”

 

Mashirao nods,

 

“Last question. How old is Izuku?”

 

“Ten.”

 

Tooru answers. Mashirao looks a little shocked, but he schools his expression quickly. He was getting better at that, Tooru realizes. He had looked perpetually surprised at the start of their conversation. 

 

“I’d like to join you, then.”

 

Tooru nods as she stands. She holds out her hand, helping Mashirao get to his feet.

 

“Great! Welcome to the team.”

 

She drops his hand to turn toward the others, who are still leaning over the edge of the roof,


“We have a new team member!”

 

She calls up. The other three whoop and jump down. They introduce themselves to Mashirao in turn and take a moment to talk to him before giving Tooru the job of taking him back to the warehouse.


“Do you mind if I ask why you were sleeping behind a dumpster?”

 

Tooru asks as she walks beside Mashirao. He’s silent for long enough that Tooru is about to apologize, but before she can he opens his mouth,

“I’m homeless. My parents were killed or ran off, or something. I don’t know. I just woke up one day and they were gone. They didn’t come back, but maybe that was a given.”

 

Tooru shakes her head sympathetically,


“I’m sorry.”

Mashirao shakes his head,

 

“You don’t have to apologize. I didn’t have to answer the question, and it’s not your fault.”

 

Tooru hums. The rest of the walk passes in silence. When they reach the gate to the plot, Tooru unlocks the padlock. She pushes the gates open, allowing Mashirao to walk through first. As they near the main warehouse, she grabs his attention,

“Just so you know, most of the others are probably still awake, and they’ll probably be at least a medium amount of excited about a new member.”

 

Mashirao looks at her in confusion, 


“What’s a ‘medium amount’ of excited?”

 

Tooru shrugs,

 

“You’ll see.”

 

She doesn’t give Mashirao time to ask anything else. She throws the doors to the warehouse open and, of course, there are twelve people in the common area. They all jump up from their respective chairs almost as soon as the doors open,


“New member!”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
Someone bear-maced the school on Wednesday. They started in the tech hall, which is at the back of the school, and sprayed a couple of students. They screamed, obviously, drawing out a teacher, who was also sprayed. He then ran into the great hall, now being chased by administrators. I was lucky enough to see the chance through Library windows as my class was receiving a presentation on how to give presentations. He then bear-maced the people chasing him. The school went into a hold and secure as they waited on authorities. Unfortunately, the bear mace started travelling literally everywhere through the vents. Everyone started coughing and a few people's eyes started to water. We were evacuated into the cafeteria, which was the least affected. When we were let out for lunch I went upstairs to get my food but was locked out of the school while making my way back down. They locked most of the doors, trapping a majority of students outside. I watched people carpool home and get picked up while I waited for my grandma to come get me. In more positive news, I deep-cleaned my room on Thursday so now it's not extremely dusty and my desk is much more roomy.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/tXJkpffNGx

Chapter 77: Engine Boy

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Mashirao smiles as he sits in a circle with the rest of the group. Minus Izuku, Kyouka, and Mei. They were in Mei’s lab working out a program that would give them access to Japan’s CCTV and other security cameras 24/7. 

 

In the center of the circle lies a oujia board, which they had been using in an attempt to banish or communicate with the spirit they had seemingly summoned last time. They hadn’t had much luck in banishing it, but it had said it wouldn’t hurt them so and, for now, they trust it. 

 

“Alright, what now?”

Mina asks as she leans back on her hands. Denki raises his hand and starts waving it,

 

“Ooh! Can we make dinner? I’m starving and we have to leave soon.”

 

Momo glances up at the clock hanging on the wall,

 

“Yes. that sounds reasonable. There’s only an hour and a half before tonight’s group has to leave.”

 

They all get up at once. Fumikage, Rikidou, and Yuuga head to the kitchen while everyone else works on tidying away the various blankets and pillows they had set up. The group scheduled to patrol head to their rooms to retrieve their suits, and Shouto takes the oujia board outside to burn. 

 

Izuku and Kyouka round the corner to the back of the main warehouse, drawn by the pillar of smoke billowing into the night sky. Luckily, the smoke isn’t very visible in the night sky, and the light from the fire isn’t travelling very far. 


“What are you burning?”

 

Kyouka asks. Shouto shrugs,

 

“The oujia board. We couldn’t banish the spirit, but Fumikage says we should burn it so no more come through.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Alright. Just make sure you put it out properly when you’re done.”

 

Shouto nods,

 

“I will.”

 

Izuku smiles and gestures for Kyouka to follow him back into the warehouse. When they enter, the dining table is set and dinner is being laid out in the center. They had made a fish and vegetable soup. A basket of bread buns sits next to the pot. Izuku helps serve everyone before he settles into his chair. Shouto and Hitoshi sit on either side of him, while the chair across from his stands empty. They don’t waste any time before they start eating, wanting to get through the meal before the night’s vigilante group has to leave.



Hanta hums to himself as he walks down the park path. He was cutting through the park to get to the stores. It was a good short-cut, and offered a few nice trees to look at. Hanta stops humming when he sees a boy, his age, sitting on a bench. He thinks for a second and, after reassuring himself that everyone else his age should be in school, he steps toward the other boy.


“Hi! I’m Hanta. Wanna talk about what’s bothering you?”

 

The other boy, who has dark blue hair and exhaust pipes sticking out of his legs, looks up at the sound of Hanta’s voice. 

 

“Oh! Hello. I am Iida Tenya. I appreciate your concern, but I’m perfectly fine.”

 

Hanta nods,


“Right. You’re Ingenium’s brother, right?”

At the mention of his brother, Tenya seems to both brighten and shrink in on himself.

 

“I am! I’m going to take over the name when I become a hero. Just like everyone else in my family.”

 

Hanta tilts his head,


“Do you want to be a hero?”

 

Tenya blinks,

“Pardon…?”

 

“Do you want to be a hero, or is that just what you’ve been told by everyone else.”

 

“I…”

 

Tenya shakes his head,

 

“It doesn’t matter. I want what is best for the family and what’s best for the family is that I become a hero.”

 

Hanta nods. He can see the tension in Tenya’s shoulders, and the unease in his eyes. He shrugs,

 

“Alright. Why aren’t you in school?”

 

Tenya huffs,

 

“You know, it’s very rude to ask this many invasive questions. Plus, should you not be in school as well?”

 

Hanta half-shrugs,


“I do school-work at home.”

 

Tenya nods,

“I am homeschooled as well. Though, I must say, I haven’t seen you in any of the group mother and father have taken me to.”

 

Hanta shakes his head,


“You wouldn’t have. I work through workbooks with the others in the warehouse. None of us are part of any official online schools or anything. When we can’t answer a question, we go to one of the camps to get help from the adults.”

 

Tenya blinks,


“Others? Warehouse? I’m sorry, but I don’t understand.”

 

Hanta grins,


“I live in a warehouse with a few other kids. We’re all technically homeless. We have more than enough funds to get by, and we have running water and stuff. We even used to be in an apartment, but we ran out of space with how many new recruits that were being brought in. I was one of the last to move in before we moved, actually.”

 

“Why are you all in a warehouse?”

 

“Because we don’t have anywhere else to go. Hitoshi was in a foster home, but he had such a bad experience that none of us trust we won’t experience the same thing.”

 

Tenya still looks like he barely believes a word Hanta is saying, but Hanta isn’t really paying attention to him anymore. 

 

“Sorry, but I have to get going. I’m on a supplies run. We’ve run out of pencil lead. I can keep answering questions if you walk with me, though.”

 

Tenya hesitates before hopping off the bench and falling into step beside Hanta.

“So, what else do you want to know?”

 

--------

 

Tenya walks beside Hanta in silence. He’s been quiet since Hanta answered his last question almost an hour ago. They were now working their way through the park and were nearly back at the bench. 

 

“May I join you?”

 

Hanta jumps at the sound of Tenya’s voice.


“Clarify?”

 

He asks. 

 

“I wish to join your group. I have seen some of the unfortunates of the hero industry through my parents and brother and I don’t believe it’s something I want to be a part of.”

 

Hanta nods, a smile on his face,


“Welcome to the team! Will you be a Live-in or a Shift?”

 

Tenya blinks,

“Pardon?”

 

“Do you want to stay in the warehouse or only come in for shifts and meetings?”

 

“I believe I’d like to be a…Shift, you called it?”

 

Hanta nods,

 

“I’ll escort you back home after you’ve met everyone, then. I hope you’re okay with walking.”

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
Sorry I didn't update last week, I was super busy with school work and preparing for Halloween. I had a test Thursday-Friday that I had to make study notes for, which ended up taking me a week as I turned 25 pages of notes into a 14 page long spark-note doc. Halloween was fun, though! I went out with my friends, though I'm pretty sure one of them got a concussion on someone's garage door at the beginning of the night. She fell off the stairs leading to someone's porch and we thought her head and missed the door, but it turns out the loud thwomp we heard had, indeed, been her head hitting the door.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/AZtNrRKqMn

Chapter 78: Eraserhead Was As Much A Teen As Anyone

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Hanta holds the door to the warehouse open for Tenya. He bows and extends his arm, showing off the building as if it were a rich man’s mansion. Tenya looks nervous as he steps inside. Eleven of the others are gathered in the living room. They look up from what they had been doing and smile when they see the two boys. 

 

The door clicks shut behind Hanta as he steps inside.

“Where are the others?”

 

Hanta asks as he sets down the bags of supplies. Fumikage and Dark Shadow carry the bags away. Yuuga shrugs,


“I believe a few of our friends are in their rooms. Izuku took Denki to the training warehouse, to practice his close combat.”

 

“I’ll go get them. Will you tell the ones upstairs that we have a new member to greet?”

 

Mina says as she hops off the couch. Mezou, whom she had addressed the second half of her sentence, nods as he stands. He starts heading up the stairs while Mina steps around Hanta and out the doors.

 

“Remind me again how many of you there are?”

Tenya asks while Hanta leads him to one of the many couches.


“Twenty, if we’re including you. Izuku thinks we’ll probably get another recruit or two, especially since Eraserhead likes to follow us while we’re on patrol.”

 

Tenya blinks,


“Eraserhead?”

 

Hanta nods,

“Do you know about him? I didn’t until I joined the group-”

 

Tenya cuts him off with a nod,


“My brother was friends with him in high school. They drifted apart late in their second year, but I have a few memories of them spending time together in my home.”

 

Hanta smiles a slight tilt to his head.

“Really? Anything good?”

 

Tenya shrugs,

 

“Depends on what you mean by ‘Good’.”

 

Hanta’s smile turns slightly mischievous as Mina and Shouji both reenter the living room with the others they had gone to retrieve.


“Funny.”

 

“What’s funny?”

 

Mina asks as she closes the door.


“Tenya says his brother knew Eraser in high school and they used to hang out at his house.”

 

Those who had just arrived grin and bounce over. Everyone huddles around Tenya, waiting only semi-patiently for him to start talking. 

 

‘Ah, well, there was the time he came over with Midnight, Present Mic, and another boy. They were supposed to be studying, and they did, for a bit, but after a while Tensei offered to cook. Normally, Mom or one of the chefs cooks for us, but our parents were out and the chef was on break. He somehow burnt the water and set off the smoke alarm. Present Mic thought there was an actual fire and grabbed our fire extinguisher. Tensei tried to get him to put it down but he activated it and started spraying. All five of them somehow ended up covered in the foam.”

 

Mina tilts her head,

 

“All five? But wasn’t Present Mic holding it? How’d he get it on himself?”

 

Tenya shrugs,


“He sprayed me, too, but by that point, it was mostly empty. We all ended up with mild burns, but they were all first-degree.”

 

Izuku hums, 

 

“What did your parents think when you got home?”

 

Tenya shrugs, 

 

“They were upset since Tensei had ruined a pot and we were all hurt, but they were mostly concerned. Or indifferent. Eraser and the others had managed to clean it up before they got home and we were all bandaged so there wasn’t much for them to do. They didn’t have to take any time away from their work to clean or help us, so they didn’t care.”

 

“Tell another!”

 

Denki says. Tenya hums

 

“There was the time they went out to the store and brought me along since they didn’t want to leave me home alone. Eraser and Present Mic sat in the cart. I walked alongside Tensei and the other boy. Everything was fine until Tensei found a long aisle without anyone in it. He didn’t warn any of us and started running down the aisle. Eraser tried to jump out but Tensei was going too fast. He ended up tripping over his own feet. His face slammed into the handle of the cart right before it tipped. Eraser’s foot got stuck in the cart and ended up sprained and all three of them had a broken nose. The other boy was laughing hysterically, so he wasn’t able to help them.”

 

They spend the afternoon listening to Tenya’s many stories of Eraser’s friend group. After around an hour, maybe a little more, Hanta offers to walk Tenya back to his house. 

 

“If you’re willing.”

 

Tenya replies as he gets to his feet. Hanta nods,

 

“Of course.”

 

Just as the two reach the front doors, Izuku steps in front of Tenya, holding out a piece of paper.

 

“Here. I’ve worked you into the schedule. Does this work for you?”

 

Tenya takes the paper and looks it over. After a moment, he nods,

 

“It does. Thank you.”

 

Izuku nods in return, a wide smile on his face.

 

“Thank you, for being willing to help us.”

 

Tenya hums. His attention is drawn away when Hanta pushes open one of the doors.


“Ready?”

 

Tenya nods. However, instead of following Hanta out, he turns to face the others. He dips into a bow, his arms rigid at his sides,

 

“Thank you for your hospitality. I look forward to working with you all.”

 

“We look forward to working with you!”

 

They chorus back. Tenya stands and turns back toward Hanta. The two slip out of the warehouse. Hanta eases the door shut. It clicks into place and immediately the room becomes filled with everyone’s murmurs. 




On Tenya’s first night of patrol, he shows up a half hour early dressed in all black. He stands by the gate, not quite sure how to get inside when Izuku suddenly appears at the fence.

 

“You’re early.”

 

He says as he reaches through one of the holes in the wire. He grabs hold of the padlock and spins the numbers until they’re in the right order and tugs. The lock releases and the gate swings open, forcing Izuku to step back. Tenya steps through and Izuku hands him the lock. 

 

“Memorize the code and put the lock back on. Make sure you scramble it before you leave.”

 

Tenya nods. Izuku turns away and starts walking up the path. Tenya looks down at the lock in his hands. He reads through the numbers a couple of times, mouths them to himself, and does so again with his eyes closed. He double-checks that he’s right and slips his hands through the wire. The closure clicks into place and scrambles the numbers.

 

He jogs down the path to the warehouse, running through the path Hanta had led him down. When he reaches the warehouse he thinks is right he stops a couple of feet in front of the door. He squares his shoulders and straightens his back before raising a hand to knock. His knuckles don’t even make contact with the door, however, before it’s open and Izuku is once again standing in front of him, this time with a blue duffel bag already filled held in his hand. He holds the bag out to Tenya with a smile on his face,

 

“Welcome to the team, Tenya! Here’s your suit.”

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
Sorry I haven't updated in a while. I had a lot of massive projects all due within the same week at school, my parents kept taking us out over the weekend, and I was sick for a week. I had to present in my History class which means I felt like I was in the middle of a volcano and about to throw up the entire time. My script was supposed to take me seven minutes to read (over the five-minute minimum) but only ended up taking me four. I went to the Eaton center with my parents a Saturday ago and got some stuff from Hot Topic. Yesterday we went up to visit my Mom's friend who recently moved so they'd have more space. They have about 5 acres of land, though their house still has about the same number of bedrooms, which they aren't totally happy about since they have five kids and the mom is currently pregnant with their sixth. In more positive news, one of my teachers is paying me to crochet gloves for her daughters.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/cRThDCqsXN

Chapter 79: We Know Things :)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku runs alongside Shouto along the rooftops. Tooru and Hitoshi follow a few paces behind them. Eraserhead is somewhere at their side. 

 

“So, Eraser, were you ever going to tell us about the time you crashed a cart in a grocery store?” 

 

Hitoshi calls out. 

 

“Or the second time?”

 

Tooru adds. On the rooftop beside them, they can just barely hear Easerhead stumble. He picks himself up and starts running again, catching up to them easily.

 

“How do you know about that?”

 

He asks. 

 

“We have our sources!”

 

Izuku answers, smiling along with the others, though it’s not visible under their helmets. Eraserhead is probably about to reply, but before he does someone screams below. Tooru and Hitoshi speed up, coming to keep pace with Izuku and Shouto. They jump across two buildings before dropping down onto terraces lining the side of the building’s wall. 

 

On the sidewalk, a man holds a knife to a young woman’s throat as she digs through her purse, likely searching for her wallet. The man is obviously getting impatient as he scowls and presses the knife closer to her skin. 

 

Izuku waves a hand and Tooru nods. She takes a deep breath as she alters the light around her, making her suit invisible along with the rest of her. She creeps forward as Eraserhead drops down beside them. Izuku holds out an arm to stop the man from moving. He tries to protest, but before he can get very far Tooru grabs hold of the man’s arm and pulls him back while simultaneously twisting his wrist, forcing him to drop the knife. The man yelps as he’s shoved back. The knife clatters to the ground and Shouto darts forward. He grabs hold of the weapon and shoves it into one of his own empty sheathes. Tooru grabs a zip tie from her pockets and starts wrestling with the man, trying to pin his hands behind his back, her suit now visible.

 

Izuku and Hitoshi run out together, Izuku toward the victim and Hitoshi toward the villain.

 

“Hey, what do you think you’re doing?”

 

Hitoshi asks. The man twists his head in Hitoshi’s direction,

 

“I-”

 

Is all he manages to get out before his eyes go blank and he stops fighting against Tooru. She nods her thanks as she pins the villain’s hands behind his back. 

 

“Are you alright?”

 

Izuku asks the woman, his voice low and calming. She nods slowly,

 

“Yes, I’m fine he didn’t hurt me.”

 

Izuku nods, 

 

“Would you like us to walk you home?”

 

The woman shakes her head, a small smile tugging at her lips. 

 

“No, no. I’ll be fine. Thank you.”

 

She takes a deep breath before turning and heading up the street. Izuku watches her go for a moment before turning back to the group. Shouto already has the knife in a brown paper bag, helpfully labbelled “weapon: small knife”. He sets it down next to the man, who’s now sitting with his back against the wall. His ankles are now bound along with his hands and his eyes are still white and vacant. 

 

“Ready?”

 

Izuku asks. The other three nod and Hitoshi levels a kick to the man’s side. He jolts as his eyes return to their previous deep green. He starts yelling at them to come back, but they ignore him, already halfway up the terraces they had used to get down. Eraserhead follows them, glancing back at the villain before he hauls himself back onto the rooftop and takes off beside the kids. 

 

“Were we fast enough for you, Eraser?”

 

Shouto asks as the man comes up to run alongside them. He huffs,

 

“Almost. Could have been better.”

 

Izuku rolls his eyes despite knowing the man can’t see it,

 

“That’s what you always say.” 

 

“And I’ll keep saying it. There are four of you, you should be able to take villains down faster.”

 

Izuku shrugs and they continue on in silence.

 

--------

 

Izuku, Shouto, Hitoshi, and Tooru come to a stop by the gate, Eraserhead behind them. 

 

“You still haven’t told me how you know about the shopping cart incidents.”

 

He says. Shouto shrugs,

 

“I believe you were already told we have our sources.”

 

“Yes, but who ?”

 

The four stay silent. After a moment Eraserhead sighs,

 

“Fine. I’ll see the other group tomorrow. Maybe I can get something out of them…”

 

“You won’t.”

 

The four say in unison. Eraser nods,

 

“Right.”

 

Izuku grabs hold of the gate’s padlock. He puts in the code and pulls, releasing the gate. He holds the gate open for the other three, slipping inside behind them. He reaches his hand through the hole in the wire and slips it back into place. He takes a moment to scramble it before pulling his arm back.


“See you in a week!”

 

Izuku calls, waving over his shoulder as he follows the other three down the path. Eraser waves back, though half-heartedly. He watches them until they disappear behind one of the warehouses. He stretches his arms above his head as he turns back the way they had come. 



Tenya shows up thirty minutes early for his shift, as always, for his third night out. He opens the gate and slips inside. The path through the lot is lit by dim streetlights, some of which are crooked or otherwise broken. The only one left unlit looks as if it’s about to topple. Tenya speeds up when he gets to it, only going back to his usual speed once the light is a few feet behind him.

 

When he reaches the front doors of the main warehouse he knocks twice before stepping back. A moment later, Izuku opens the door, a smile on his face. He steps to the side, allowing Tenya to enter. The door clicks shut behind them. The rest of the group, all of whom are gathered in the living room, look up when Tenya enters.

 

“Hey, Tenya! How was your week off?”

Hanta asks. He’s lying upside-down on one of the couches, his feet dangling over the back. 

 

“Just fine, thank you. How was yours?”

 

Hanta smiles,


“Good! Your costume is over there.”

 

He nods toward one of the corner tables, where Tenya’s case is stacked with the four others of those in his group.

 

“We’re leaving a minute or so late tonight. Eraserhead wants to meet us at the gate and he’s always a little late.”

 

Kyouka says. Tenya huffs,

 

“A rather unrespectable trait for a hero to have.”

 

Kyouka shrugs,

 

“He brings us food every time, so we’re okay with it. Izuku will be walking up with us to collect it.”

 

Tenya nods and grabs his case.


“Very well. I’ll get changed.”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
Sorry this chapter is late. my teachers keep jumping from one project to the next with smaller assignments on top of that. I've also been crocheting a lot of Christmas gifts for family and friends. In similar news, one of my teachers paid me $50 for the gloves I made for her kids today ($10 for two skeins of yarn, $10 an hour). I'm taking a half day tomorrow to go to the arcade with my family and cousins, which basically just means I'll be watching 3-6-year-olds my entire afternoon. I can't really afford to take it since we'll be going over a few things in my second block classes tomorrow, but if one of my friends is confident enough to go on a fucking week-long cruise I think I'll be fine.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/cRThDCqsXN

Chapter 80: Planning To Fake A Death

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Tenya walks with Denki, Mei, Rikidou, Kyouka, and Izuku up to the front gates of the lot. Izuku walks ahead with the wagon at his side. He opens the gate and the six of them stand by it, waiting for Eraserhead to show. Five minutes past the agreed-upon time the man parks in front of the gate. He climbs out and opens the trunk, revealing ten grocery bags filled with food and other supplies. Izuku steps forward with the wagon and starts loading it with the bags. At the same time, Tenya steps toward Eraserhead,

 

“You’re late! I’d have expected a professional hero to show on time, if not early.”

 

Eraser hums, 

 

“Sorry. Got held up in traffic.”


“You should know that lying is dishonourable, especially so obviously. It’s early evening and we’re in the Red Light district. There isn’t any traffic at this time.”

 

Eraser shrugs and stops replying as Tenya continues to admonish him. Izuku steps between them once all of the grocery bags are in the wagon. 

 

“Thank you, Eraserhead. We appreciate the supplies. Leave him be,

 

He tells Tenya

 

“He’s always a little late. I think he’s trying to keep us occupied as long as possible so we spend less time on patrol. Next time, you can start a little early. I’m sure he’ll show up on time if he knows it means he’ll be able to catch up sooner.”

 

Eraser stares at him in minor disbelief but Tenya just nods,

 

“Alright, if that is the solution you propose.”

 

Izuku nods. He starts walking back to the warehouse. He looks over his shoulder to wave as he leaves. The others wave back, smiles hidden under their helmets. When Izuku turns around they do, too, facing Eraserhead.

 

“Are you ready to go?”

 

--------

 

The group of five return later that night, flanked by Eraserhead. 

 

“Thank you for your aid tonight.”

 

Tenya says, dipping into a bow in front of Eraserhead. The man dips into a shallow bow himself after a moment. Denki taps Tenya on the shoulder once he rises. 

 

“Ready to get back? Izuku is probably waiting for a report, with food, and I’m super hungry.”

 

Tenya nods,


“Right.”

 

The five of them wave to Eraserhead before four of them hop the fence. Tenya stays on the other side, opting to open the gate instead. 

 

“The gate is right here, no point in jumping…”

 

He mutters under his breath as he slips inside. By the time he had replaced the lock the rest of his group was already far ahead, to the point he had to jog to catch up. 



Izuku sits alone in his room at his desk, three of his notebooks open and arranged in front of him, a fourth positioned off to the side so he can more easily write in it. He’s just finishing one of his many backup plans when someone knocks tidily on his door.

 

“Come in, Tenya!”

 

His door opens to reveal the aforementioned boy on the other side. 

 

“How did you know it was me?”

 

He asks as he pushes the door shut behind him. Izuku shrugs,

 

“The way you knock. What’s wrong?”

 

He asks upon seeing the worried and slightly panicked expression on his face. 

 

“It’s my family. I overheard my parents discussing a meeting they’re having with a Hero Commission representative soon. They want to enroll me in a special training program. A day one. I remembered what you said, about the rumours of one that killed multiple kids. I know this one isn’t exactly the same…”

 

He trails off there. Izuku nods,

 

“Thank you for coming to me. Are you okay with faking your death?”

 

Tenya blinks, 

 

“What?”

 

“The Hero Commission won’t be okay with you just disappearing, and we don’t want them to suspect that someone knows they’re trying to reinstate, even partially, their old program. Faking your death would be best since it would mean they can’t get the public or any heroes involved in the search for you if they have one. The hope is that they’d just write you off and move on.”

 

Tenya nods slowly, 

 

“Alright. But how would we accomplish this?”

 

“A combination of quirks. There’s a man with a cloning quirk somewhere within our district and a woman with the ability to create lifeless clones in Kamino. The man with a marble compression quirk would probably be useful, too. I already have a plan somewhere for how to pull this off…I think it’s in my back-up back-up plan notebook. How long do you have here before you have to start heading back?”

“Approximately an hour. My parents brought my brother along to an unrelated meeting.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Good. Would you mind grabbing me that notebook? We should start planning right away.”


Tenya nods. He grabs the book Izuku was pointing to and hands it to him. Izuku closes and stacks the books currently taking up space on his desk, shoving them into the corner so he can lay the new one between himself and Tenya. He grabs a few pieces of paper from a stack in his desk drawer and opens the book to one of the middle pages. 

 

“Does being hit by a car sound okay to you?”

 

Tenya hums as he looks over the book,

“I suppose it’s the most realistic.”

 

Izuku nods,


“Do you want to be involved at all? We can just send in your clone.”

 

Tenya shakes his head,

 

“I would rather not participate. However, if you cannot get the man with the cloning quirk to aid us, I’m willing to do what’s necessary.”

 

Izuku nods as he jots something down,

 

“Right, we’ll need a few backup plans. Involving you would make it a little more complicated, but we can work that out…”

 

Izuku goes silent as he starts writing furiously, glancing between the notebook and his paper. Occasionally, he asks Tenya a question or shows him how the plan is developing, but mostly the other boy just sits in silence, watching Izuku curiously.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
My teachers have assigned a bunch of new, large projects that have to be fully or partially completed before the Winter Break. Half of them (2) have to do with my identity/culture. My Hairstyling teacher wants us to delve back into our family line and explore the hairstyling/aesthetics aspects of our culture and my Media Arts teacher wants us to create a collage of sorts for our country of origin, whether that be Canada or, again, another from deeper in our family history. Because of the Hairstyling one, I've found out that I'm 1/4th Ukrainian from my grandfather on my mother's side. In other news, I'm planning on crocheting myself a long furby. I've already 3D printed a face plate and am working on the spine. I also left school early on Friday to go to the Arcade with my cousins and got a Glamrock Freddy plush from the prize corner.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/cRThDCqsXN

Chapter 81: Step 1, Obtaining A Fake Tenya

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku and Tenya walk side by side down the street. They both have duffel bags at their sides, though Tenya’s is a little bulkier than Izuku’s. Izuku carries their plans and other files, while Tenya has their lunch, emergency funds, and changes of clothes for both of them. 

 

Tenya looks nervous as they walk. He’s constantly looking over his shoulder and clutches the bag close to his side. Izuku gently pries his hand off the bag, 


“Stop looking so nervous, you’re going to make us a target. Muggers target those who look like they have valuables to protect more than they target those who look like they belong. You have to walk confidently, eyes focused on where you want to go and back straight.”

 

Tenya hums and forces his hand to drop away from the bag. He copies Izuku, looking where he’s looking. Izuku has to remind Tenya not to look over his shoulder a few times, but for the most part, the rest of their trip passes by without issue. 

 

Izuku stops in front of an older building that, at first glance, matches those surrounding it. When Tenya looks closer, however, he can tell that it’s just a little more well-maintained. The windows aren’t as grimy, the walls don’t have any cracks or holes, and the door looks only five years old at most as opposed to the ones of the buildings next door, which look as if they’ve been there for over a decade. 

 

“I almost forgot,”

 

Izuku says, pausing a few meters from the house,

 

“He’ll contradict himself sometimes. Usually, he wants you to listen to the first thing he says.”

 

Tenya doesn’t have any time to process the words before Izuku starts walking again. 

 

Izuku leads him up the stairs to the porch. He knocks on the door and steps back next to Tenya. After a moment, the door opens a crack, prevented from opening all the way by a door chain. The man behind the door is wearing a grey and black mask. Pieces of white fabric cover the eyeholes, so how he can see Tenya doesn’t know. 

 

Izuku smiles,

 

“Hi, Bubaigawara!”

 

He greets. The man relaxes a bit when he recognizes Izuku and disappears for a moment. Tenya hears a small scratching sound before the door swings open fully. 

 

“Izuku. Who’s your friend? Never mind , I don’t care!

 

Tenya pauses for a moment but ultimately decides to listen to the man’s first sentence like Izuku had said,

 

“Iida Tenya, sir.”

 

“We were hoping we could talk to you inside.”


Izuku adds. Bubaigawara nods and steps to the side. Izuku walks in first, Tenya close behind. Bubaigawara closes the door behind them and slides the chain lock back in place. The living room is dingy but clean. The furniture is rundown and sunbleached, and there are stacks of magazines and newspapers on the coffee table. Bubaigawara directs Izuku and Tenya toward the couch and takes the armchair for himself. 

 

“What can I help you with? Don’t tell me, it’s not like I’m going to help you anyway .”

 

“Would you be able to make a clone of Tenya? We need to fake his death.”

 

Bubaigawara tilts his head,


“It’ll melt if it takes too much damage.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“I know someone else who can make a fake body and a way to switch the two. I just need something living to walk in front of a car.”

 

Bubaigawara nods,


“I can do that, then. Oh, please. Why would I help a kid ?”

 

He leans forward and pulls open a drawer Tenya hadn’t noticed on the other side of the coffee table. Bubaigawara pulls out a long bundle of measuring tape, like the ones Tenya had seen Tailors use on his mom. 

 

“I’ll just need a few measurements first. No, I can make the clone without them.

 

Tenya stands,

 

“Of course.”

 

Bubaigawara directs him to hold his arms out and he starts wrapping the tape around him. When he calls out a measurement, Izuku writes it down in his notebook. When they’re done, Izuku tears out the page and hands it over.

 

“Thank you so much, Bubaigawara. How much do I owe you?”

 

Bubaigawara shrugs,

 

“You said you can transport it yourself, right?”

 

He asks as he puts the measuring tape away, Izuku nods,

 

“If I stop by in a few days can you make it then? Storing it now would get confusing.”

 

Bubaigawara nods,

 

“Yeah! I’ll try to memorize the measurements. Let’s say you owe me 217,100. Just take it now, memorizing them will be so much work .”

 

Izuku nods. He unzips the duffel bag at his side and hands over the money in large stacks. Tenya stares as Bubaigawara simply takes it, quickly counting it before slipping it into one of the drawers of his coffee table. 

 

“Pleasure doing business with you, kid. You’re the worst customer I’ve ever had.

 

Izuku smiles as he hops off the couch. Tenya hops down with him and dips into a low bow,


“Thank you very much for your help, Mr.Bubaigawara, it means a lot to me.”

 

Bubaigawara waves his hands in an attempt to placate him,

 

“Happy to help! Stop coming to me with your problems.

 

“I’ll see you again in a few days.”

 

Izuku says as Tenya rises. Bubaigawara nods and steps in front of Izuku as he starts walking toward the door. He undoes both the chain and regular locks before pulling it open for them.

 

“Bye!”

 

He says as the two boys step back out onto the porch. The two of them wave, Tenya a little more rigid than Izuku. They only stop when the door closes. Izuku turns toward the steps and jumps down onto the sidewalk. Tenya walks down the stairs normally.

 

“We must meet with the others you mentioned now, right?”

 

Tenya asks as they walk. Izuku nods, 

 

“Yeah. I have a copy of your measurements though, if you want to head back to the warehouse.”

 

Tenya shakes his head,


“I’d like to meet the people who will be helping me. I should be able to thank them properly.”

 

Izuku nods, 

 

“Well, then, I hope you’re ready to walk for a few hours.”

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I finihsed writing and printing my study notes for my history test on Wednesday. The booklet ended up being 24 pages long and my staples were only just long enough to reach the other side. I also have presentations in both History and Careers coming up, but at least I only have two weeks left until my week off before second semester.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/ahpTPpnGJn

Chapter 82: Commissioning A Decoy

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku and Tenya spend about an hour and a half walking. They’re both starting to get tired, though both are trying to hide it from the other. Neither of them is looking forward to the walk back to the warehouse.

 

“Alright, we’re here.”

Izuku says, stopping in front of a nice-looking house. They’re in a better part of the city now. It’s still rundown and crime-filled, but none of the houses are boarded up and the sidewalk isn’t covered in as much glass and debris. 

 

When they reach the door Izuku knocks politely. The door swings open almost immediately. The woman on the other side is dressed in casual clothes and looks relatively plain. 

 

“Izuku! Nice to see you. Who’s your friend?”

 

She asks, leaning against the door frame. 

 

“This is Tenya. We want you to make a decoy of him, please. We already have his measurements.”

 

He introduces. The woman shrugs,

 

“Sure. You already know my rates, when do you need it by?”

“Three days.”

 

The woman nods,

 

“Yeah, okay. Come on in and I’ll get the rest of what I need.”

 

She opens the door fully, stepping out of the way so the two boys can enter. The living room is incredibly clean, and though the furniture looks worn there are no holes or missing pieces. Izuku takes off his shoes and sets them to the side, slipping into one of the many waiting pairs of slippers. Tenya does the same and they follow the woman through the living room and into a side hallway. 

 

She opens the door at the very end of the hall, revealing a room furnished only with an armchair with an attached table, a chair and desk with a set of drawers, and a shelf split in half. One half holds labelled vials filled with blood, though some are emptier than others. The other half is all empty vials, their labels blank. 

 

“Get in the chair.”

 

The woman says, gesturing to Tenya. He glances at Izuku, and when he nods he makes his way to the chair. He clambers on and sets his arm down on the table, guessing at what it’s for. The woman nods as she pulls on a pair of disposable gloves. She grabs an empty vial from the shelf and a packaged needle, alcohol wipe, tourniquet, and bandaid from various drawers of the desk. She sets all of the items on top of the desk and sits down in the chair, wheeling over to Tenya.

 

She takes his arm in her hand and ties the tourniquet around his upper arm. She tears the packaging, leaving it on the desk as she makes sure there’s no air inside. She then attaches the vial to the other end of the syringe. Tenya looks away as she inserts the needle into his vein. She draws his blood slowly, up to the thirty-millimetre mark. She withdraws the needle and opens a different drawer, pulling out a bandaid. She applies it to the beading point on his arm and removes the vial from the end of the needle. 

 

She removes her gloves and grabs a pen from one of the drawers. She writes Tenya’s name on the vial and turns to face him,

 

“You don’t happen to know your blood type, do you?”

 

She asks. Tenya nods,

 

“I do, actually. I’m type A.”

 

The woman nods and writes the information below his name. 

 

“Good. Do you have the rest of his information?”

 

She asks, turning to Izuku. He nods and hands over the pages holding Tenya’s measurements. The woman nods and puts them on the desk next to the vial. 

 

“Great. We’re done here. I’ll have the decoy ready in three days.”

 

Tenya hops off the chair and dips into a bow,

 

“Thank you very much for your help.”

 

He says. The woman’s eyes widen slightly and she glances between the boys a couple of times before nodding, 

 

“Right. You’re welcome…? I’ll see you in three days.”

 

Izuku nods and waves for Tenya to follow him. They make their way back through the house and out onto the street. 

 

Izuku says,

 

“The final person is a while away, and if we were to go there now we wouldn’t make it back until after dark.”

 

Tenya nods,

 

“Understandable.”

 

“We can set you up in one of the remaining empty rooms for tonight.”

 

Izuku says as he heads down the stairs. Tenya nods as he follows after him,

 

“She mentioned that you already know how much she charges. May I ask what else you’ve purchased from her?”

 

Izuku shrugs,

 

“I’ve just had to purchase a few decoys in the past, though usually I’m just the middle man. Y’know, buying decoys for people so they don’t want to interact with her themselves. It made me a bit of money for food and stuff.”

 

Tenya nods,

 

“I see. You seem to have many connections in the…villain…community.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Yeah. I spent most of my time wandering down here than I did at home before I finally moved out.”

 

Tenya hums and they fall into silence. As they walk, Tenya does his best to distract himself with his thoughts as they walk, though it only half works. By the time they reach their final destination, he’s starting to get tired, and hoping the meeting won’t last as long as the others. 

 

Izuku climbs up the stairs to the porch, knocks politely on the door, and steps back. Tenya doesn’t have time to inspect any of the building’s features before the door swings open. Izuku smiles up at the man standing in the doorframe. 

 

“I’d like to have your help three days from now if you’re not busy?”

 

Izuku says. The man nods, grabs a notepad from a table by the door, and writes down the date. Izuku unzips his bag and pulls out a wad of bills, 

 

“Here’s the first half.”

 

The man takes the money and tucks it away in one of his pockets. Tenya bows, 

 

“Thank you for your help.”

 

He says. The man returns the gesture with a shallow bow of his own and closes the door. Izuku turns and hops down the stairs, Tenya close on his heels. 

 

“Don’t feel too bad that he didn’t talk to you.”

 

Izuku says, 

 

“He doesn’t really talk to anyone. I don’t know why.”

 

Tenya nods,

 

“I don’t mind. I don’t mean to sound rude when I say I preferred it. I wish to return to the warehouse as quickly as possible.”

 

Izuku chuckles,

 

“Yeah, I understand. I wanna get back, too. It’s going to be dark soon and every time I’m gone for too long the others end up doing…something. I think they summoned a demon, once, but Fumikage managed to banish it. I hope. Sometimes the shadows still look a little too alive..”

 

“Ah.”

 

Tenya says,

 

“Well, then, I hope they’re all asleep when we get back.”

 

Tenya finds that it feels like it’s taking longer to return to the warehouses than perhaps it should. The streets are dark and the moon is high in the sky by the time they finally reach the warehouse. Tenya’s legs feel numb, and he practically has to drag himself to one of the couches in the center of the main room. Izuku flops onto one of the others, his bag hitting the ground with a thud. 

 

“Will we have to do that again?”

 

Tenya asks. Izuku shakes his head,


“I don’t think so. I can pick up the copy a day or two before we pick up the clone and actually go through with it.”

 

Tenya nods,

 

“Good.”

 

Their conversation ends there as they both fall asleep, the sound of creaking metal accompanying their soft snores. 

 

--------

 

Izuku wakes to the sound of someone coming down the stairs. He grumbles and rubs his eyes as he sits up, making eye contact with Kaminari as he makes his way down the metal stairs.

 

“Good morning.”

 

Izuku says as he swings his legs over the couch.

 

“Good morning!”


Kaminari replies, jumping over the last two steps. He walks toward the kitchen and stops in the doorway, turning his head to look back at Izuku,

 

“Do you want me to make you anything?”

 

“Just some toast and coffee is fine.”

 

Kaminari nods,

 

“You got it! I’ll prep some stuff for everyone else, too.”

 

The last part is muttered to himself as he continues into the kitchen. Izuku stretches and stands, listening as the doors lining the upper floor open and the seventeen others start trickling down the stairs to the main floor. Hitoshi and Fumikage both head straight to the kitchen, emerging soon after with mugs of coffee in hand. Hitoshi has two, and hands one to Izuku,

 

“Thank you.”

 

Izuku says. He blows on the liquid before taking a sip,

 

“Kaminari says he’s making toast for everyone.”

 

Hitoshi says as he sits down on the couch next to Izuku. Everyone else nods and spreads out on the other couches. Momo is the only one to enter and stay in the kitchen, as had become normal for her. Soon, the smell of steeping tea joins that of burnt crumbs from the oven. It only takes another minute for Kaminari to poke his head back into the living room,

 

“The toast is ready!”

 

He says, stepping out with his own plate of buttered toast and a mug of tea. Everyone, including Tenya, stands as one and forms a single-file line into the kitchen. There are three stacks of plates on the counter, four baking sheets of toast on the stove, and various jams set out along with peanut butter and regular butter. They each go through and make their toast to their liking, grabbing either a mug of coffee or tea as they leave. 

 

“So, did you get done what you needed to?”

Mashirao asks as he sits down on an armchair across from Izuku. Izuku nods,

 

“We did. Did you do anything you’re not supposed to?’’

 

He asks, his eyes roving over each of them in turn. They all shake their heads,

 

“No.”

 

They all mutter. When Izuku’s eyes finally land on Yaoyorozu she breaks,

 

“We held a fighting ring in the training warehouse and painted the walls.”

 

“Oh.”

 

Izuku says, taking a sip of his coffee,

 

“That’s not as bad as I expected.”



Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
Sorry this chapter is so late, I've been super busy with school and I'm always super tired at the end of the day. In other news, we went to my grandmother's yesterday and played a bit with her cats. One is a maine-coon and I think the other one is, too, but I'm not totally sure. We also went out for dinner a lot this weekend, so that was nice.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/NVyJvdWxgF

Chapter 83: Getting Tenya Hit By A Car

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

Izuku hums to himself as he makes his way down the street, the wagon rolling behind him and the quiet man a few steps behind him. Inside the bright, plastic bin lies a vaguely human-shaped mass, covered by an old tattered blanket. He takes a turn leading him away from the warehouse and toward Bubaigawara’s. The wagon his a bump and the wagon jossles, allowing a pale arm to fall out from under the blanket and hang over the edge. 

 

Izuku glances around him to make sure no one is watching before he grabs hold of the arm, shoving it back under the blanket. He tucks the blanket in at the edges, making sure it’s secure before he keeps walking. 

 

As he approaches Bubaigawara’s he slows his pace, mindful of the many potholes and cracks in the sidewalk. When he reaches the house he parks the wagon next to the stairs,

 

“Can you stay here, with the wagon, please?”

 

He asks the man at his side. He nods and Izuku nods back before making his way up the porch to the door. He knocks politely and steps back as he waits for Bubaigawara to open the door. 

 

“Hi, Izuku!”

 

The man says as he pulls the door open. Izuku smiles,

 

“Hi! Do you have the clone ready?”

 

Bubaigawara nods and opens the door all the way as he steps back inside. 

 

“Yup! Just wait right there. Of course not, why don’t you just leave.

 

Izuku nods and smiles. He sways side-to-side as the door closes partially and Bubaigawara slips away into the house. He comes back a few minutes later, leading a copy of Tenya by his wrist. 

 

“Here you go.”

 

The man says, presenting the clone. Izuku nods,

 

“Thank you, Bubaigawara.”

 

He says as he digs through his bag. He pulls out a wad of yen and hands it over. Bubaigawara flips through the money and nods to himself.

 

“Thank you. I’ll see you later. Jesus, just leave already. I hope I never have to deal with you again.”

 

“Of course! Thank you for the clone, I know it was a little short notice.”

 

He says. He smiles at the clone and jerks his head, gesturing for it to follow him as he makes his way down the stairs. The clone, dressed in dirty jeans and an old shirt, follows him slowly. Izuku grabs hold of the wagon handle and smiles at the man standing by it as the three start walking down the street, the wagon rattling along behind them.

 

“May I ask what’s inside the wagon?”

 

The clone Tenya asks, glancing curiously at the lumpy blanket. Izuku nods, 

 

“It’s another clone of Tenya, like you. Except this one isn’t alive, or as close to alive as you are. Although at the same time, it’s a much more exact copy. Whereas you are made of clay, and therefore are an approximation, with no DNA or pulse or really any internal organs at all. The copy in the wagon has blood and organs, and DNA that exactly matches Tenya’s. It is both dead and in a state not unlike sleep. Though it’ll start the beginnings of rigour-mortis in a few hours, which will hopefully give us enough time to have you hit by the car and replaced by the other clone, so Tenya is declared dead and therefore no longer at risk of being abused by the Commission.”

 

Izuku says. The walking clone nods, though its curious expression has morphed into one more nervous. Thankfully, it doesn’t show any inclination to run off. The man sticks closer to it, guarding it without Izuku needing to ask. After a moment, Izuku stops, drawing the attention of the other two,

 

“I almost forgot!”

 

He says, digging around under the blanket until he comes up with a phone. It looks pretty expensive, and Izuku hands it to the clone.

 

“Here. It’s just a cheap copy, of course. I don’t think it even actually turns on, but I still want you to be looking down at it when you cross the street. It’ll give a reason as to why you didn’t notice whatever vehicle hits you.”

 

The clone takes the device, tucking it into a pocket on its jeans. 

 

“Thank you.”

 

It says. They continue to walk in silence, garnering a few glances from passersby, but nothing more than that. Izuku looks back at the wagon every once in a while, making sure no limbs had fallen out of the blanket.

 

They stop next to a busy street. Cars zoom past, honking at both each other and pedestrians who get a little too close for comfort. Izuku leans over to whisper in the clone’s ear.

 

“Some kind of large transport vehicle should be passing by soon since most stores get their shipments of new stock today. When you see it, walk out in front of it, but act natural.”

 

The clone nods. The man touches its arm and reaches his hand under the blanket to do the same to the clone inside the wagon. They continue walking down the street, though Izuku presses ahead of the others in order to put some distance between them, so it won’t be obvious they were a group. Fortunately, they don’t have to wait long for their opportunity to arise. Within about a minute of their arrival by the road, a large semi turns the corner. Izuku glances back to see the clone nod as it starts walking across the street. Its head is down as it looks at the phone in its hand. 

 

Izuku keeps walking, stuttering in his step a little when the weight in the wagon disappears. He turns to look back only when people start screaming, plastering a fearful expression onto his face when he sees the broken and bloody clone lying in the middle of the road. Cars squeal to a stop in front of the body and Izuku can see that many of the surrounding civilians are already on their phones. Izuku backs away slowly, picking up speed the farther he gets from the scene until he’s one step away from running. He forces a panicked expression onto his face until he thinks he’s far enough away, at which point he calms down, slowing to a jog and taking deep breaths. 

 

He keeps walking, taking the long way back to the warehouse lot. The image of the clone’s warped appearance kept flashing in his mind. He knew it wasn’t the real Tenya, of course. He was with everyone else, waiting for Izuku’s return, but still, the image was unnerving. The limbs bent out of place, blood pooling behind his head…

 

Subconsciously, Izuku speeds up again. He trims about twenty minutes off the return trip to the lot, arriving as the sun dips below the mid-point of the sky. He stops in front of the gate and stoops to pick up a rock lying against the chainlink fence. He slams the rock against the side of the padlock, ignoring its clatter as he pushes the gate open. He has to give the wagon an extra tug to get it over the lock. He just barely remembers to close the gate, reaching his arm through the chainlink to put it back in place. In the back of his mind, he makes note of the fact that they’ll have to replace the gate and fence at some point. Their arms won’t be able to fit through the gaps forever. 

 

The wagon shakes as he wheels it down the gravel path. He breaks out into a run, the only sound that of the rattling wagon. He takes a sharp turn toward the main warehouse. He reaches out an arm, throwing one of the doors open as soon as he reaches it. Everyone else is staring at him in surprise but, for the moment, he ignores them. His eyes search the group for Tenya. He can feel his heart beating in his chest, becoming more insistent as the seconds tick by. Finally, he spots Tenya near the back of the group, leaning against the foot of the couch. Izuku lets out a breath. He leans the handle of the wagon back so it's sitting against the plastic bin. 

 

“How’d it go?’

 

Ochako asks, pausing with Tsu’s hair in her hands as she works on braiding it. 

 

“Tenya is now legally dead.”

 

Izuku says. Cheers erupt as everyone converges around Tenya. Ochako drops the braid, but Tsu doesn’t seem to mind. Izuku notes the bittersweet expression on Tenya’s face as he walks further into the room, joining in on the group hug.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I just got back from volunteering at the library. They had a blow-up planetarium visiting today and I was in charge of signing people up for time slots. I got to sit down the entire time, which was nice because period cramps are the fucking worst. In other news, I have a massive presentation to finish this week so it's ready for me to present in class on the 20th. I'm also going to the mall with friends on Friday :).

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/NVyJvdWxgF

Chapter 84: Going For A Walk

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

Izuku hums to himself as he works away in the kitchen. He has plates and cutlery laid out on one of the counters and pans of eggs on the stove. Each pan is seasoned differently, one mildly spicy, one with garlic and basil, one completely plain, and one with just salt and pepper. He has to be careful not to stand too close to the oven as he stirs each of them so he doesn’t burn himself on the door, since inside the oven are trays of toast. 

 

It takes about another minute for the eggs to cook and he turns off the burners. 

 

“Breakfast is ready!”

 

He calls as he slides a pair of oven mitts onto his hands and opens the oven door, ignoring the blast of hot air on his face as he takes out the pans. He sets them on cork rounds set on one of the counters so the hot metal doesn’t come in contact with the counter itself. As he removes the gloves, the others start filing into the kitchen. Hitoshi goes straight to the coffee maker, which had just finished brewing, while everyone else lines up at the cutlery counter. 

 

Izuku joins Hitoshi at the coffee machine and pours a mug for himself. Hitoshi nods to him in greeting before joining the line for food. Izuku follows him, smiling at the few stragglers who had just gotten downstairs.

 

“Thank you for preparing breakfast.”

 

Tenya says, dipping his head to Izuku as he walks past with a plate of food in hand. Izuku nods back,

 

“You’re welcome, Tenya.”

 

The line moves quickly. When he gets to the eggs, Izuku grabs what’s left of the spicy pan and spreads peanut butter on his toast before heading out to the living room. The TV is set to one of the early-morning cartoon channels and the couches are already full. Izuku sits on the floor, crisscrossing his legs so he can more comfortably set his plate on top of them. 

 

The others in the kitchen trickle out and join Izuku on the floor. He makes a mental note to look into getting more chairs before he takes a bite of his eggs. 

 

Izuku gets up from his spot on the floor and heads back into the kitchen. He puts his dirty dishes into the sink with the others and starts wiping down the counters. 


“Hey, Izuku?”

 

Kyouka says as she sets her plate into the sink.

 

“Yes?”

 

He replies, looking over at her as he wipes down the counter.

 

“Now that Tenya is presumed dead, what are we doing next?”

 

Izuku hums,

 

“Training and working on the plan, I suppose. We definitely aren’t strong enough to take on the commission yet, plus we’ve barely scratched the surface when it comes to gathering information on all the crimes they’ve committed.”

 

“So more preparation?”

 

Kyouka says. Izuku nods,

 

“Yeah, basically.”

 

Kyouka nods back,

 

“For how long?”

 

Izuku shrugs,


“A few years still. It’s not likely any of us are physically capable of taking on grown adults yet, plus we’re far from having all the information we need to go against the commission.”

 

Kyouka lets out a breath. 

 

“Right. I’m going out for a walk. Wanna come?”

 

Izuku nods as he throws the paper towel he had been using into the trash. He follows Kyoula out into the living room and up the stairs to the second floor. He goes to his room and grabs his duffel bag from where he had left it in his closet. He rifles through to make sure everything he needs is there, like the wad of yen he keeps on hand and his spare notebook. Once he’s happy, he pulls the bag over his head. It swings at his side as he steps out of his room, closing the door behind him. 

 

Kyouka steps out of her room at the same time, her own bag at her side. 

 

“Hey, where you guys going?”

 

Denki asks, poking his head out of his room. 

 

“Out for a walk. Wanna come with?”

 

Kyouka says. Denki shrugs,

 

“Nah. I’m gonna do some quirk practice today. Have fun though!”

 

He says, slipping back inside. Kyouka shrugs and makes her way back down teh steps, Izuku keeping pace behind her. Their footsteps crunch against the gravel path leading up to the gate. Izuku reaches through the chainlink fence and takes off the padlock. The gate swings open easily. Izuku stands aside to let Kyouka through first before stepping out himself, closing the gate behind him and putting the lock back in place. The sun heats their backs as they walk down the street, avoiding the holes scattered over the sidewalk. Izuku writes in his notebook as he walks, falling a few paces behind Kyouka. She has her headphones in and a small, old music player in her pocket. 

 

They walk until the sun is high in the sky. Izuku barely avoids slamming into Kyouka’s back when she stops in front of a crosswalk. He looks around, only just realizing what district they’d entered. He steps up beside her as they wait for the light to change, tucking his notebook back into his bag. 

 

“Are you okay?”

 

Kyouka asks, taking one of her headphones out so she can hear him. He shrugs, 

 

“I’m fine.”

 

She looks at him for a moment before shrugging and putting her headphones back in her ear. The light changes and they walk across, careful to stay together in the crowd of people going in the same direction.

 

“Wanna head to the park?”

Kyouka asks, her headphones hanging around her neck. Izuku nods,

 

“Sure.”

 

“Follow up, do you know where the park is?”

Izuku huffs a laugh, 


“Yeah, don’t worry.”

 

Kyouka nods and falls back, letting Izuku take the lead. He leads her through the streets to the park. After a few minutes, the tall trees and dirty playground equipment come into view. Kyouka falls back in line beside Izuku as they walk down the winding dirt path. They’re about to make it past the creaking equipment when someone calls out for Izuku. 

 

“Deku?!”

 

Izuku’s foot stops in the middle of a step, causing him to stumble into Kyouka. She catches him easily, steadying him. 


“Are you okay?”

 

She asks, keeping her voice low. Even still. Izuku isn’t paying attention to her. His attention is focused past her, on the blonde boy angrily stalking toward them. 

 

“Where the fuck have you been? Everyone thought you were dead. Mom dragged me to your loser ass funeral and everything.”

 

Izuku takes a step back, trying to create distance between himself and Bakugou.

 

“And who’s this fucker? Finally make a friend? Or is she just following you around out of pity?”


Izuku takes a breath. He glances at Kyouka and she nods, letting him know she won’t intervene. 

 

“If you must know, I’ve started living in the Red Light district and I have nineteen friends, including Kyouka. I’m pretty sure they aren’t friends with me out of pity. Any other questions?”

 

He has his head tilted at a slight angle, the perfect picture of innocence. Bakugou looks taken aback, but recovers quickly, 

 

“Will…why the fuck would you do that? Auntie Inko’s been worried sick. She cried when she told us you were missing, you know.”

 

Izuku sighs. His neck straightens and he positions himself so he can bolt if necessary. 

 

“Let’s get something straight here, Bakugou.”

 

The other boy looks like he’s holding back a flinch when Izuku says his family name.

 

“Neither Inko nor Hizashi are good parents. They were incredibly abusive and are raging alcoholics. I was forced to learn how to steal and pick-pocket just to keep our heads above water and they didn’t give a shit. They constantly beat me just for existing and didn’t care when I came home injured because of you and your cronies. If she cried, it was only to get some attention from the other people there. I’m sure she moved on immediately. The only disappointment she would have felt would have been from losing her personal cleaner. Understand?”

 

Bakugou is staring at him in disbelief. Izuku’s shoulders slump and his eyes drift to the benches lining the park. 

 

“Speaking of moms, where’s yours? Shouldn’t she be here with you?”

 

Bakugou’s incredulous expression morphs into one much more guarded. 

 

“The fuck do you think I am, a baby? I’m old enough to be at the park by myself. Plus, it’s not like either of them have the time to take me.”

 

Izuku nods,

 

“Sorry about that, then.”

 

“Why did you leave?”

 

Bakugou says, just as Izuku starts turning away to return to Kyouka’s side. He stops in his half-turn,

 

“Other than Inko and Hizashi, I mean.”

 

He expands. Izuku stays silent for another beat before turning to face Bakugou. 

 

“Because I couldn’t handle it anymore. Becoming a thief let me connect with others in a similar situation, and it taught me that the problem isn’t just a few parents who teach their children that those with weaker, or no, quirks are the problem. It’s the system as a whole. Who taught the parents to teach their kids? Who taught the shop owners to cut the pay of employees whose quirks are considered ‘undesirable’? Who decided a hero’s ability to wow a crowd should be valued more than their ability to save? 

 

“The Commission is one, I think. They perpetuate the issues to ensure a steady flow of villains for their heroes to fight. They’ve covered up the crimes of heroes who abuse their power, taking advantage of civilians or turning against their families. I left because I want to make a difference of some kind, and it became clear to me that that won’t be possible as a legal hero.”

 

Bakugou blinks. Izuku watches him for a moment, waiting for him to say something, anything. Finally, Bakugou speaks,


“How do you know all this?”

 

Izuku shrugs,


“Some of it is obvious, once you look. Like the fact that despite all their talk, nothing is really ever done about discrimination in schools or the workplace. You have to talk to other people to learn about some of the stuff heroes have done and never been prosecuted for, even if the victims talk about it. And their other crimes can be found if only you dig deep enough, whether in public archives or personal.”

 

Bakugou nods slowly. Izuku stands a few feet from the other boy, Half of him ready to cower from attack, the other half ready to run, and his brain hoping for a completely different outcome. Hoping that Bakugou would actually listen, that maybe he’d see what Izuku was trying to say. Not apologize, he’d never expect something so drastic. Even an acknowledgement of some kind would be enough. 

 

“The old hag found out about how I treated you.”

 

He says, his voice quiet.

 

“Ah. Is that why she’s not here?”

 

Bakugou nods,


“Yeah….I’m, uh. Sorry.”

 

Izuku blinks. For a moment, they stand in silence. Bakugou stares awkwardly at the concrete while Izuku thinks. 

 

“I forgive you.”

 

He says. Katsuki looks up. 

 

“What?”

 

“I forgive you.”

 

The two stare at each other for almost a minute before Izuku starts talking again,

 

“I don’t entirely blame you. Our teachers encouraged it, so it’s not like you had anyone trying to stop you.”

 

“But why?”

 

Katsuki asks. His brows furrow and small explosions pop in his hands. He clenches his fists and shoves them into his pockets. 

 

“Because they thought it was okay. Like I said, discrimination is encouraged in most places to create villains. Plus, I’m pretty sure some of our teachers didn’t really see me as human.”

 

Katsuki huffs, but accepts the answer. 

 

“If you don’t mind me asking, how bad are Mistuki and Masaru now?”

 

Katsuki shrugs and looks back down at the pavement. 

 

“They don’t really yell at me anymore, but they don’t talk either. And I’m in charge of cooking for myself.”

 

“You could come stay with us, if you want.”

 

Katsuki looks up abruptly, his eyes wide,


“Really? Why the fuck do you want me to?”

 

Izuku shrugs,

 

“I don’t know. I guess I just don’t want to risk Mitsuki and Masaru becoming anything like my parents. Plus, if you want to do anything about how kids are treated at school, this could be the way to do it.”

 

They fall into silence again and Izuku glances over at Kyouka, who seems to be getting increasingly uncomfortable every time the conversation stalls. 

 

“Alright. If you really want me to.”

 

Katsuki says, once again looking up at them. Izuku grins, 

 

“Great! Follow us, then.”




Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
Sorry this chapter is so late. School has been a lot and I'm always tired when I get home at the end of the day. In other news, I went for Easter dinner at my aunt's last night and I'm going to my friend's house for an egg hunt today.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/qf9sgFQn

Chapter 85: Hello :)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku and Kyouka walk side-by-side, Katsuki behind them. They don’t talk. Letting Katuski’s footsteps be the only sound. As they get closer to the Red Light District, Katsuki starts to get more nervous. He walks closer to them, and Izuku can see him constantly looking back and forth out of his peripherals. 

 

“It’s the middle of the day, so it’s unlikely we’ll be mugged. Plus, most of the people who live here know us now.”

 

This doesn’t seem to do much to calm Katuski, though, and an energy of anxiety falls over their group. As they start approaching the warehouse lot, Katsuki finally talks. 

 

“Where is it we’re going, exactly?”

 

“The warehouse lot, over there.”

 

Kyouka says, pointing to the row of warehouses behind the dilapidated chainlink fence. 

 

“Seriously?”

 

“Yeah, where else would we house twenty kids? We have a fully furnished kitchen, bathrooms, running water, and electricity, though.”

 

Kyouka expands. 

 

“How the fuck’d you get that stuff in a warehouse lot?”

 

Izuku shrugs,

 

“Giran owed me. Anyway, come here. I want to show you the combination for the lock.”

 

He pulls the padlock toward him, angling it so Katsuki can see what he’s doing. He turns the numbers slowly until all of them are in place before pulling on the lock. He then shoves it back in place, jumbling the 

 

“Now you try.”

 

He says, gesturing to the lock. Katsuki steps forward and takes the lock, sliding the numbers into place. He pulls and the lock opens. He slides it out of place and opens the gate. He smiles, clearly proud of himself, before schooling his expression and handing the lock back to Izuku. They walk through the gate and Izuku closes it behind them, replacing the lock before following the other two down the path. 

 

The gravel crunches beneath their feet as they make their way to the warehouse. They walk side-by-side, Katsuki in the middle. They pass Mei’s warehouse on the way up, and the metal glints in the sun in a way unlike the others.


“Why’s that one different?”

 

Katsuki asks. Izuku hums,

 

“That one’s Mei’s. She’s our support engineer. I think she’s rebuilt most of it so it’s stronger. The inside is a full lab, or, at least, as close as she can get. She leaves every so often to get supplies and stuff. We don’t really question her.”

 

Katsuki nods and they keep walking. When they reach the main warehouse, Izuku steps forward, pushing the doors open. Everyone else is gathered in the living room, packed onto the couches or splayed out on blankets. The TV is playing a movie that had recently released and bowls of popcorn and other snacks are scattered so they can be reached by as many people as possible. 

 

“Newbie!”

 

They chorus. The TV is paused and a few of them move and adjust so there’s room for Izuku, Kyouka, and Katsuki. 

 

“Welcome to the team, Katsuki.”

 

Izuku says, smiling reassuringly as he quickly squeezes Katsuki’s hand before toeing off his shoes. The door clicks shut behind them, blocking out the sounds of the building wind. 

 

“Shouldn’t you all be training?”

 

Kyouka asks as she hangs her duffel bag on the rack by the door.  Izuku does the same. Katsuki follows behind them, suddenly nervous.

 

“We were training, but then Fumi said that that new movie was out about to air so…”

 

Denki says, pulling his blanket tighter around him. Kyouka rolls her eyes as she toes off her shoes and slips into one of the pairs of slippers waiting by the door. Hers are embroidered with purple musical notes on the toe boxes. 

 

“That’s new.”

 

She says, looking at the stitching. Izuku’s are similarly altered, though his are decorated with small books. Katsuki slips on one of the remaining plain pairs as he follows the other two into the room. Momo smiles, 

 

“Yes, sorry if you don’t like it. I’ve started learning how to embroider. It’s rather calming.”

 

“She started teaching the rest of us while you were gone.”

 

Tsu says, pulling back the blanket to show off the lilypad designs on her own slippers. 

 

“I didn’t think we were gone for that long.”

 

Izuku says as he cuddles in next to Shouto, lifting part of the blanket over himself. Mina shrugs as she reaches for one of the bowls of popcorn. 

 

“We’re fast learners.”

 

She says before shoving a handful of popcorn into her mouth. Kyouka hums as she sits between Mashiroa and Tooru. Izuku pats the empty spot next to him on the edge of the couch and Katsuki cautiously makes his way over. He sits down next to Izuku and Izuku throws the end of the blanket over him. The movie is unpaused and Katsuki slowly starts to relax against the back of the couch. 

 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
I'm currently in the process of midterms in all of my classes, so I have even less time to write than normal. I've also been working on crocheting Mother's Day presents for some of the members of my family. I've finished a tapestry for both my mom and one of my grandma's, so now I only have about three more to make.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/34n7q9cVcD

Chapter 86: Gunshot

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku watches the street below him. The sky is dark and most of the streetlights are broken, so he has to squint to see much of anything. Hitoshi is at his side, Tooru and Shouto having gone ahead to one of the other buildings so they could see more of the surrounding alleys. Eraserhead is stationed on the rooftop across the road from them, only just visible in Izuku’s peripheral vision. 

 

He’s about to stand when he hears a loud bang from one of the alleys. Izuku feels Hitoshi jump as he stands, taking off in the direction of the sound. Hitoshi, Shouto, Tooru, and Shouto all do the same. They converge on the two buildings overlooking the space, the kids on one and Eraserhead on the other. Below, a young man dressed in dirty, torn clothes cowers beneath another man, this one burly and blood-stained. 

 

“Please, I don’t have anything-”

 

He’s cut off by Izuku jumping down and landing on the attacker’s back, wrapping his arms around his neck. The man yelps and reaches up to try to unhook the boy. While he’s distracted a stream of ice streams from the roof to the ground, growing up his legs until he’s covered in ice from the waist down. 

 

Izuku is forced to let go when the man’s knife knicks his arm, cutting him from his elbow to just above his wrist. The man starts hacking at the ice but doesn’t manage to get far before his arms are bound at his sides by Eraserhead’s capture scarf. The man jumps down from his building and looks pointedly at Shouto, who immediately starts melting the ice. It takes a few seconds for the ice to melt enough for Eraserhead to pull the villain from the pillar. 

 

“You can take it from here, right?”

 

Izuku asks, already ushering the others out onto the street, carefully avoiding a pile of glass by the entrance to the alley as he does so. Eraserhead sighs, 

 

“I suppose. Just don’t get too far ahead.”

 

Izuku nods and runs after the others, tugging at the sleeves of his costume as he does so.

 

They manage to get pretty far from the alley, leaving a small collection of muggers and one attempted murder in their wake. Each villain is left bound with zip-ties on the sidewalk, acting as a trail to the rooftop they eventually stop on. The sky was dark, pockmarked by lights from passing planes and satellites. They watch the lights blink in and out as they wait for Eraserhead to show up so they can start making their way back to the warehouse lot. A few minutes pass before Tooru finally points the man out as he runs down the sidewalk below,

 

“There he is!”

 

She says, leaning over the railing slightly. The other three do the same, watching as the man comes to a stop below. They wave, smiling behind their helmets as he glares up at them. 

 

“Hey, Eraser!”

 

Izuku calls, 

 

“What to you so long?”

 

Hitoshi tacks on.

 

Erashead’s glare becomes harsher, though they hadn’t thought that possible. 

 

“C’mon, we didn’t go that far.”

 

Izuku says as he backs away from the rail. The other three fall in line behind him as they make their way to the fire escape they had used to get up. He hops over the railing and onto the metal platform, landing as quietly as he can. The others follow suit and they take the stairs three at a time, coming out in one of the better alleys they’d been in that night. Eraser is standing just outside it,

 

“I told you not to go too far.”

 

“How were we to know what you considered too far?”

 

Shouto asks. Eraserhead pinches the bridge of his nose,

 

“Finishing the route. I consider finishing your route going too far.”

 

“Technically we haven’t finished it yet, though. We still have to get back.”

 

Tooru says as she skips out in front of them, making her way down the sidewalk. Eraserhead sighs but follows behind as they start walking back, rightly coming to the conclusion that he isn’t going to be winning the argument. 

 

Shouto overtakes Tooru and starts creating a trail of ice beneath them, forcing them to skate down the sidewalk. They propel themselves faster down the ice, clumsily weaving between each other. They move as though they had done this a hundred times before, which they had since one of their favourite pastimes lately had been having Shouto coat the floor of one of the warehouses in ice for them to skate on. It had been great balance training, not to mention cooling as summer starts to roll in and the days become hotter.

 

Hitoshi laughs as he stumbles in front of Izuku, nearly losing his footing but managing to regain it as he overtakes the other boy. Izuku laughs back and looks over his shoulder at Eraser, who’s moving slower than they are but seems to be balancing fine.

 

“Do you do this often?”

 

He calls ahead. Izuku turns so he’s facing him, 

 

“Yeah! It’s a great way to pass time, plus it’s good balance training.”

 

Eraser hums as Izuku turns back around, pushing himself a few extra times to catch up. They make it about halfway back this way before they’re interrupted by a scream further down the street. Shouto speeds up, giving them room to do the same behind him. Eraser jumps off the ice, running ahead. By the time they reach the source of the scream, they find Eraser standing between a man with a gun and a distressed woman,

 

“Get out of the way!”

The man calls, his words slurred in a way that Izuku recognizes. He sucks in a sharp breath, stumbling as the ice ends and his feet make contact with the pavement again. 

 

“I can’t do that.”

 

Eraser answers, his hands raised in front of his chest. 

 

“What are you doing?”

 

Hitoshi asks. His voice wavers with fear, but they have the desired effect. The man turns to face them, his gun lowering.


“Who-”

 

His sentence cuts off as his eyes roll into the back of his head. His muscles go limp and the gun drops, hitting the ground with such force that it goes off. The bang echoes off the surrounding buildings and Eraser screams as the bullet lodges in his lower leg. 

 

The four of them scream and Hitoshi loses his hold on the man as he stumbles back. Seeing him reach for the fallen weapon, Izuku draws one of his knives and throws it. The blade lands in his arm, causing the man to scream out in pain. Eraserhead wraps him in his capture weapon as the woman takes off, running around the corner and away from the scene. Tooru has the phone Mei had made for her in her hand, urging the operator on the other end to send an ambulance to their location as she tries to read the street sign a few feet away. 

 

Izuku and Shouto run over to Eraserhead, Shouto binding the man’s hands behind his back and Izuku coming to Eraserhead’s side,

 

“Tooru called for an ambulance. Do you need me to do anything?”

The man shakes his head as his capture scarf winds back around his neck, 

 

“No, I’m fine. Just have to text Yamada.”


Izuku nods, turning to face Tooru as she makes her way over,

 

“They said they’d be here in a few minutes.”

 

“Right. Will, we can’t be here when they are. Are you going to be okay?”

 

Izuku asks, turning to face Eraser, who has his phone in hand.

 

“I’ll be fine, go. I’ll be back for tomorrow.”

 

“But you just got shot in the leg.”

 

Shouto says, looking at the pool of blood slowly growing on the pavement. 

 

“And Recovery Girl can heal me in the morning. Now go.”

 

They nod, looking at each other before taking off down the street. They don’t go very far, though, instead, they find a building with a good fire escape and climb up, going back the way they’d come by rooftop. They watch from above as the sound of sirens gets closer, a cop car speeding ahead of the ambulance. They follow the vehicles back to the crime scene. They duck behind the short cement wall surrounding the roof of the building, watching as the paramedics run to tend to Eraser and the cops drag the man into the back of the car. One of them bags the gun, which was still lying on the road. They keep watching until the vehicles leave, sirens off, the only evidence left behind being Eraserhead’s blood drying to the pavement. 

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
My dad took me driving in a parking lot for the first time yesterday. I only hit the curb with one of the tires once, but it was fine because I was driving the truck. However, I did hit many imaginary cars. I'll be spending most of this week on the online learning portion of my driver's ed and on the 27th I'll be going for my first in-person class. In good news, school is done for me for the year and I went for a pool party/sleepover on Friday. It was very fun and I helped set up for the party my friend's mom was hosting later in the day in the morning.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/vAUARZHz8v

Chapter 87: Morning Routine

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Izuku lets out a breath as he climbs the steps of the warehouse to the second floor. Hitoshi, Shouto, and Tooru follow behind him. They file down the hall, slipping into their rooms. Izuku smiles at each of them as they enter their rooms. Once he’s alone in the hallway he quickens his pace the last few steps to his own room at the very end of the hall. He slips inside quietly, easing the door shut behind him. 

 

He pulls his helmet off and puts it on one of the shelves in his closet. He pulls off his costume and changes into shorts and a T-shirt before he climbs into bed, pulling the blanket up to his chin. Tears slowly run down his cheeks as he curls up, tucking his knees against his chest. He can’t help but feel that he could have done more to stop Erasserhead from getting shot. That thought is quickly drowned out by others, though. Like what if Eraser decided that what they were doing had become too dangerous and he reported them to the authorities? They’d be split up, many of them would be returned to abusive households while others would be shoved into foster homes, forgotten.

 

He doesn’t know when he falls asleep, but eventually, he’s waking to his alarm blaring in his ear. Izuku reaches over, hitting the stop button with his palm. He throws his covers back and throws his legs over the edge of the bed. He rubs his eyes as he stands and makes his way over to his closet, changing into a t-shirt and shorts. He quietly leaves his room, careful not to let his footsteps make any noise as he walks down the hall and to the stairs. 

 

He skips over the stairs known to creak and makes his way to the kitchen. He gets the stove preheating and starts the coffee machine so he can ensure breakfast is ready for everyone once they’re awake. Once the oven is done preheating he grabs a few cooking sheets from the cupboard they're stored in and covers them in pieces of bread. He loads them into the oven and sets a three-minute timer.

 

He hums to himself as he grabs the kettle and fills it with water from the sink. He turns on one of the oven burners and sets it on top. He grabs butter and jam from the fridge and peanut butter and honey from the cupboard, laying it all out on the counter. He finishes setting it all up, complete with utensils for each, when the oven goes off. He grabs an oven mitt from where it’s stored in one of the drawers by the oven and takes the pans out of the oven. He sets one of them on the stove pot and takes out eight cork circles, laying out four each for the remaining two pans so they wouldn’t be touching the counter. 

 

He grabs a pair of tongs from a drawer and a few stacks of plates from the cupboard. He puts the plates on the table as the kettle starts to boil. He takes it off the burner, cutting off the scream, and grabs it its own corkboard, placing it next to the coffee machine. Finally, some of the others start to come down the stairs, streaming into the kitchen. Izuku smiles at everyone as they enter. He prepares himself a mug of coffee and waits for everyone else to get their food first before he serves himself. 

 

They eat in silence. Izuku sits in a small circle with Shouto, Hitoshi, and Tooru. Everyone else keeps glancing at them.

 

“So, what happened last night?”

 

Rikidou asks. 

 

“Yeah, you all got home pretty late.”

 

Mezou adds. Izuku takes a breath and is about to speak, but Tooru beats him to it,

 

“Eraserhead got shot last night.”

 

She’s not given a chance to elaborate as everyone starts talking at once. Their seventeen-odd voices overlap and merge until no single word is discernable. Izuku waits a few seconds to see if they’ll calm down on their own, but when it becomes clear that’s not going to happen, he stands and sticks his fingers in his mouth, whistling shrilly. They stop talking immediately and all eyes land on him. 


“He’ll be fine, he was only hit in the leg.”

 

He says. The others exchange looks and mutters. 

 

“Do we have to do anything? Put our patrols on hold or something?”

 

Kyouka asks. Ochako, who’s sitting next to her, nods. Izuku shakes his head, 

 

“No, no. We’ll be fine. He’ll be out of commission for a night or two at most and we’re more than capable of doing that on our own. Now, if everyone’s done eating, we should get changed and go down to the training warehouse. It’s quirkless training day.”

 

Some of them cheer while others grumble, but everyone gets up and heads to their rooms to change. Izuku grabs the notebook he’d been tracking everyone’s progress in from its spot in the closet by the front doors. He waits by the doors, though he’s not kept waiting for very long. Maybe three minutes pass before everyone is once again gathered in front of him, this time in a single-file line. Izuku smiles and leads them all out the doors and down the path to the training warehouse. 



Izuku scribbles in his notebook at the coffee table, the lamp by the couch the only source of light. He’s the only one still awake, having told the others to go to bed rather than wait for the night’s group to return. His laptop is open on the table next to his notebook, the screen showing news articles for the day. The pages of his book are filled with notes on both the villain and the heroes involved. He’s about to try to find another article to practice with when the doors open and Tsu walks in, followed closely by Eijirou, Mina, Fumikage, and Mashirao. 

 

“Hey, how’d it go?”

 

Izuku asks, closing his laptop as he stands to greet them. Tsu shrugs,

 

“Fine.”

 

“No major injuries, but it felt kinda weird not being followed by Eraser.”

 

Mina says as she pulls her helmet off her head. Izuku nods. 

 

“Hopefully he’ll be back tomorrow night. You guys can head to bed, I’m going to stay up a little longer.”

 

“Are you sure?”

Eijirou asks, a slightly worried expression on his face. Izuku nods,

 

“I won’t be up too long. Just have a little more to do.”

 

The others nod and chorus off goodnights before heading up to bed. Izuku smiles, returns the goodnights and settles back onto the couch, opening his laptop. He closes out of the articles and instead opens one of his coding programs, this one set to teach him Java.



Izuku goes to bed nearly two hours later, happy with his progress. He takes the stairs up to the second floor quietly, avoiding the one that creaks. Once in his room, he changes quickly and flops into bed, falling asleep quickly.

Notes:

Obligatory author diary entry!
Sorry this has taken so long, I haven't had nearly as much time to write this summer as I thought I would. We've been visiting family more and I just haven't had much motivation. I've been writing more in the past couple of weeks, though, so here's hoping I get more done. In other news, I get the house to myself for the next few days as my parents are camping and my brother is staying with my grandma. I'm going to spend some time deep-cleaning since there's fur everywhere. I also plan on baking more, I've already made lemon cupcakes and I wanna make peanut butter cookies next.

We have a Discord server!
https://discord.gg/4YksFZWvFb

Notes:

We have a Discord!
https://discord.gg/86HVfk3Y